BRIDGING DOCUMENTS FOR THE ASHLAND YOUTH … · BRIDGING DOCUMENTS FOR THE ASHLAND YOUTH CENTER ... Technical Speciﬁ cations Sections 2 ... ASTM C 1240, proportioned in accordance

BRIDGING DOCUMENTS FOR THEASHLAND YOUTH CENTER16335 East 14th Street - Unincorporated Alameda County

Prepared for :General Services AdministrationTechnical Services County Alameda1401 Lakeside Drive, Suite 800Oakland, CA 94612

January 17, 2011

BRIDGING DOCUMENTS

VOLUME TWO: Technical Specifi cations Sections 2 through 33

Bridging Documents Performance Standards Ashland Youth Center County of Alameda RossDrulisCusenbery Architecture, inc. Volume 2 – Technical Specifications

January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 00, Table of Contents, Page: 1

SECTION 00 0110 ‐ TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Refer to Volume 4: Site and Building Drawings and Details, sheet A0.00 for all bid alternates including but not limited to Photovoltaic Power Systems, Light Boxes and LEED.

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets for Mechanical System Criteria, Fire Protection Systems, Plumbing Criteria and Electrical System Criteria.

Division 00 ‐‐ Procurement and Contracting Requirements

Refer to Volume 1 for Procurement and Contracting requirements

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 01 ‐‐ General Requirements

Refer to Volume 1 for Division 01 requirements

Division 02 ‐‐ Existing Conditions

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets and Volume 4: Site and Building Drawings and Details

Division 03 ‐‐ Concrete

03 1000 ‐ Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 2000 ‐ Concrete Reinforcing 03 3000 ‐ Cast‐in‐Place Concrete 03 3513 ‐ High‐Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing 03 3900 ‐ Concrete Curing

Division 04 ‐‐ Masonry

04 2000 ‐ Unit Masonry

Division 05 ‐‐ Metals

05 1200 ‐ Structural Steel Framing 05 1250 ‐ Architectural Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) 05 3100 ‐ Steel Decking 05 4000 ‐ Cold‐Formed Metal Framing 05 5000 ‐ Metal Fabrications 05 5100 ‐ Metal Stairs 05 5213 ‐ Pipe and Tube Railings 05 5515 ‐ Ladders 05 7300 ‐ Decorative Metal Railings

Division 06 ‐‐ Wood, Plastics, and Composites

06 1000 ‐ Rough Carpentry 06 2000 ‐ Finish Carpentry 06 4100 ‐ Architectural Wood Casework

Division 07 ‐‐ Thermal and Moisture Protection

07 1300 ‐ Sheet Waterproofing 07 1400 ‐ Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing

Volume 2: Division 00, Table of Contents Page: 2 January 17, 2011

07 2100 ‐ Thermal Insulation 07 4646 – Fiber Cement Siding 07 5050 ‐ Vegetated Roof Components 07 5400 ‐ Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 6100 ‐ Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6200 ‐ Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 7100 – Parapet Caps 07 7200 ‐ Roof Accessories 07 7613 ‐ Roof Deck Paver System 07 8400 ‐ Firestopping 07 9005 ‐ Joint Sealers

Division 08 ‐‐ Openings

08 1113 ‐ Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1416 ‐ Flush Wood Doors 08 3100 ‐ Access Doors and Panels 08 4213 ‐ Monumental Aluminum Framed Folding/Paired Panel System 08 4229 ‐ Automatic Entrances 08 4313 ‐ Aluminum‐Framed Storefronts 08 5113 ‐ Aluminum Windows 08 7100 ‐ Door Hardware 08 8000 ‐ Glazing 08 8300 ‐ Mirrors

Division 09 ‐‐ Finishes

09 2116 ‐ Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 2236.23 ‐ Metal Lath 09 2400 ‐ Portland Cement Plastering 09 3000 ‐ Tiling 09 5100 ‐ Acoustical Ceilings 09 6013 ‐ Water Vapor Emission Control System 09 6429 ‐ Wood Strip and Plank Flooring 09 6500 ‐ Resilient Flooring 09 6566 ‐ Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 6700 ‐ Fluid‐Applied Flooring 09 6813 ‐ Tile Carpeting 09 8311 ‐ Acoustical Wall Systems 09 9000 ‐ Painting and Coating 09 9600 ‐ High‐Performance Coatings

Division 10 ‐‐ Specialties

10 1400 ‐ Signage 10 2113.19 ‐ Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2213 ‐ Wire Mesh Partitions 10 2601 ‐ Wall and Corner Guards 10 2800 ‐ Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 4400 ‐ Fire Protection Specialties 10 7113 – Exterior Sun Control Devices

Division 11 ‐‐ Equipment

11 1813 ‐ Pistol Lockers 11 2429 ‐ Roof Fall Protection System


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 00, Table of Contents, Page: 3

Division 12 – Furnishings

12 2498 ‐ Motorized Roller Shades 12 3600 ‐ Countertops 12 4813 ‐ Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 12 9300 – Site Furnishings and Accessories 12 9313 ‐ Bicycle Racks

Division 13 ‐‐ Special Construction (NOT USED)

Division 14 ‐‐ Conveying Equipment

14 2100 ‐ Electric Traction Elevators

Divisions 15 to 20 ‐‐ (NOT USED)

Division 21 ‐‐ Fire Suppression

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets for Fire Suppression requirements.

Division 22 – Plumbing

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets for Plumbing requirements.

Division 23 ‐‐ Heating, Ventilating, and Air‐Conditioning (HVAC)

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets for Mechanical requirements.

Divisions 24 & 25 ‐‐ (NOT USED)

Division 26 ‐‐ Electrical

Refer to Volume 3: Design Criteria and Room Data Sheets for Electrical requirements.

26 3100 ‐ Photovoltaic Collectors

Division 27 ‐‐ Communications

27 00 00 ‐ Basic Communication Requirements 27 05 26 ‐ Communication Grounding and Bonding 27 05 28 ‐ Communication Pathways 27 11 00 ‐ Communications Equipment Rooms 27 13 13 ‐ Communication Backbone ISP Twisted Pair Cabling 27 13 23 ‐ Communication Backbone ISP Fiber Cabling 27 15 13 ‐ Communication Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling 27 15 33 ‐ Communication CATV Horizontal Cabling 27 20 00 ‐ Network Systems 27 21 33 ‐ Wireless System 27 31 00 ‐ Voice Communications Equipment 27 41 13 ‐ Architecturally Integrated Projection Screens 27 41 16 ‐ Integrated Audio‐Video Systems 27 4219 ‐ Public Information Systems 27 53 16 ‐ Infrared and Radio Frequency Tracking System

Division 28 ‐‐ Electronic Safety and Security

28 00 00 ‐ Basic Security Requirements 28 05 13 ‐ Security System Cabling 28 05 53 ‐ Security System Labeling 28 13 00 ‐ Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System 28 16 00 ‐ Intrusion Detection System 28 23 00 ‐ Video Surveillance System

Volume 2: Division 00, Table of Contents Page: 4 January 17, 2011

Divisions 29 & 30 ‐‐ (NOT USED)

Division 31 ‐‐ Earthwork

31 0513 ‐ Soils for Earthwork 31 1000 – Site Preparation

21 2213 ‐ Rough Grading 31 2300 ‐ Excavation & Fill 31 2316.13 ‐ Trenching 31 2323.16 ‐ Backfill

Division 32 ‐‐ Exterior Improvements

32 1123 ‐ Aggregate Base Courses 32 1216 ‐ Asphalt Paving 32 1313 ‐ Concrete Paving 32 1313.1 – Pervious Concrete Paving 32 1413 ‐ Precast Concrete Unit Paving 32 1700 ‐ Pavement Specialties 32 1713 ‐ Parking Bumpers 32 1716 ‐ Tactile Warning Surfaces 32 1816.13 ‐ Playground Protective Surfacing 32 3100 – Fences and Gates 32 8400 – Irrigation System 32 9300 – Landscape Planting 32 9310 – BFL Planting Maintenance

Division 33 ‐‐ Utilities

33 1116 ‐ Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 3000 ‐ Sanitary Sewerage Utilities 33 3100 ‐ Disinfection of Water Distribution 33 4913 ‐ Storm Drainage Manhole Frames & Covers

End of Section


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 01, General Requirements, Page: 1

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

REFER TO VOLUME 1 FOR PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 01 General Requirements, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

This page left blank


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 02, Existing Conditions Page: 1

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

DIVISION NOT USED.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 02 Existing Conditions, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 03, Concrete, Page: 1

DIVISION 03 ‐‐ CONCRETE

REFER TO VOLUME 3 NARRATIVES FOR STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 03 1000 ‐ CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Formwork for cast‐in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.

B. Openings for other work.

C. Form accessories.

D. Form stripping.

2.01 FORMWORK ‐ GENERAL

A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast‐in‐place concrete work.

B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.

C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.

D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

3.01 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117.

SECTION 03 2000 ‐ CONCRETE REINFORCING


A. Reinforcing steel for cast‐in‐place concrete.

B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Provide Design‐Builder with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.

C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed low‐alloy steel bars.

B. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A 704/A 704M, using ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 40 (280) steel bars or rods, unfinished.

C. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, unfinished.

D. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, deformed, Class A epoxy coated type.

E. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of

Volume 2: Division 03, Concrete Page: 2 January 17, 2011

reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1‐1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) ‐ Manual of Standard Practice.

SECTION 03 3000 ‐ CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE


A. Floors and slabs on grade.

B. Concrete foundation walls.

C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, and thrust blocks.

E. Underslab Vapor Retarder

F. Exposed Colored Concrete Floors


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

2.01 FORMWORK

A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 1000.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT


2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type V ‐ Sulfate Resistant Portland type.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.

D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N.

E. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.

F. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C 979.

G. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

H. Fiber Reinforcement for Slabs: Synthetic fiber shown to have long‐term resistance to deterioration when exposed to moisture and alkalis; 1/2 inch length.

I. Colored Exposed Concrete Floor Finish: Refer to Section 03 3513 High‐Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing.

2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS



A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi‐layer, fabric‐, cord‐, grid‐, or aluminum‐reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,

prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Refer to Section 00 3100 for available information on soils and subsurface conditions.

B. Non‐Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non‐metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

C. Curing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03 3900.

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Joint Filler: Non‐extruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.

B. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.

2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer.

C. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard, or as recommended by manufacturer for specific project conditions.

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

B. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.

3.02 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

C. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

D. Protect all concrete floors to have an exposed colored finish. Do not store any materials or equipment on the areas to receive a stained finish.

3.03 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.

3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING


B. Carefully finish exposed colored floor surfaces such that the color is applied uniformly and has no visible bucket or application marks.


3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION


SECTION 03 3513 ‐ HIGH‐TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING


A. Finishing slabs on grade and monolithic floor slabs.

B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener, sealer, and slip resistant coatings.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

2.01 COMPOUNDS ‐ HARDENERS AND SEALERS

A. Chemical Hardener: Magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate blend, dry powder type.

2.02 COATINGS

A. Polyaspartic Aliphatic Polyurea Coating: Fast‐curing, two‐component, chemical resistant, penetrating resin for waterproofing, sealing, coloring, and decoratively finishing concrete.

B. Color: Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors

3.01 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.

B. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or cementitious terrazzo with full bed setting system.

C. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting or resilient flooring.

D. Steel trowel surfaces that are scheduled to be exposed.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal.

F. Preparation for Polyaspartic Aliphatic Polyurea Coating System: 1. Verify that flaws in slab have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials acceptable

to coating system manufacturer. 2. Verify that slab surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,

laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents or other impediments to adhesion.

3. Verify that water vapor emission from the slab and relative humidity in the slab are within limits established by coating system manufacturer.

3.02 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT

A. Apply hardener to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Apply sealer to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Apply polyaspartic aliphatic polyurea coating system to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect adjacent non‐coated areas from drips, overflow and overspray; immediately remove excess material.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Measure flatness of slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

B. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.



2. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

C. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: 1. Under Glazed Tile on Setting Bed: Ff 35 SOV, 24 MLV and Fl 25 SOV, 17 MLV. 2. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: Ff 35 SOV, 24 MLV and Fl 25 SOV, 17 MLV.

D. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.

E. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re‐measure corrected areas by the same process.

SECTION 03 3900 ‐ CONCRETE CURING


A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 1 ‐ Clear or translucent, Class A.

B. Moisture‐Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171.

C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 4 mil thick, clear.

D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

3.01 EXECUTION ‐ HORIZONTAL SURFACES

A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R.

3.02 EXECUTION ‐ VERTICAL SURFACES

A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 04, Masonry, Page: 1

DIVISION 04 ‐‐ MASONRY


SECTION 04 2000 ‐ UNIT MASONRY

Exterior walls at play area and trash enclosure.


A. Concrete Block.

B. Mortar and Grout.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Accessories.


A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.

2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as

indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Load‐Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. 3. Non‐Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129.

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 2000; size as indicated on drawings; epoxy finish.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints.

2.05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Exterior, non‐loadbearing masonry: Type N.

B. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 04 Masonry Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 05, Metals, Page: 1

DIVISION 05 ‐‐ METALS


SECTION 05 1200 ‐ STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING


A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts.

B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.

C. Grouting under base plates.


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."

B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel.

C. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

D. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high‐strength, corrosion‐resistant structural steel.

E. Cold‐Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

F. Hot‐Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501, seamless or welded.

G. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black.

H. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.

I. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

J. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

K. High‐Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, galvanized.

L. High‐Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), with matching ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) nuts and ASTM F 436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel.

M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

N. Grout: Non‐shrink, non‐metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.

O. Shop and Touch‐Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Touch‐Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

Volume 2: Division 05, Metals Page: 2 January 17, 2011

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.

2.03 FINISH

A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete or high strength bolted.

3.01 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".

B. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.

SECTION 05 1250 ‐ ARCHITECTURAL EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL (AESS)

Exposed architectural steel fabrications with high build epoxy finishes. Requires superior fabrication and finishing to receive specified finishes.

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide architecturally exposed structural steel (AESS); requirements are in addition to requirements specified in Section 05 1200 ‐ Structural Steel, AESS shall comply with requirements of Section 05 1200. 1. Provide complete AESS work including fabrication, transportation, assembly, erection, and any

other endeavor required to provide complete AESS in conformance with Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute for Steel Construction (AISC): "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel."


A. Welds shall be judged by appearance as well as performance with welds smooth, uniform, and free of voids and irregularities inconsistent with concept of architecturally exposed structural steel.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: AESS to be new, free of defects which may impair strength, functioning, durability, and which may impair appearance of AESS and related work.

B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): 1. Plates and Rolled Shapes: ASTM A36. 2. Pipes: ASTM A53, Grade B. 3. Tubular Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Fasteners: 1. High‐Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A325. 2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A.

D. Welding Filler Metal: AWS, D11. 1. Shielded Metal Arc‐Welding: E70 XX. 2. Submerged Arc‐Welding: F7 XX‐EXXX‐X.

E. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish miscellaneous structural steel items and related components required to complete AESS in accordance with intent of Contract Documents requirements for AESS.

F. Prime Painting: Shop prime AESS. 1. Primer: Zinc‐rich urethane primer, Tnemec/90‐97 Themec‐Zinc; spray applied. 2. Finish: Finish coats are provided in Section 09 9600 ‐ High Performance Coatings.



2.02 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel Fabrication: Comply with AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings," latest edition.

3.01 ERECTION

A. General: Carefully plan erection of structural steel so no cutting and removal of material will be necessary; do not torch burn in field, except in areas to be fully concealed in Project and as approved by Design‐Builder.

SECTION 05 3100 ‐ STEEL DECKING


A. Roof deck.

B. Composite floor deck.

C. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.

D. Bearing plates and angles.

E. Stud shear connectors.


A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

2.01 STEEL DECK

A. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. 1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.

B. Roof Deck: Non‐composite type fluted steel sheet:

C. Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:


A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel, unfinished.

B. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.

2.03 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level.

B. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.

SECTION 05 4000 ‐ COLD‐FORMED METAL FRAMING


A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing.

B. Exterior wall sheathing.



A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics: 1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold‐formed steel framing members according to AISI

North American Specification for the Design of Cold‐Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads

for project conditions within required limits.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U‐shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage: 54 mil.

B. Framing Connectors: Factory‐made formed steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when

evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 54 mil gage 0.056 inch thickness.

2. Provide non‐movement connections for tie‐down to foundation, floor‐to‐floor tie‐down, roof‐to‐wall tie‐down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

2.03 WALL SHEATHING

A. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum; ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire‐resistant.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components.

2.05 FASTENERS

A. Self‐Drilling, Self‐Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements.

3.02 WALL SHEATHING

A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using self‐tapping screws.

SECTION 05 5000 ‐ METAL FABRICATIONS

Steel ladders, bollards, bumper posts, guardrails, and miscellaneous framing supports.


A. Shop fabricated steel items.




A. Design items and assemblies under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

2.01 MATERIALS ‐ STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold‐formed structural tubing.

C. Plates: ASTM A 283.

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A 653, Grade 33.

F. Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components.

H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

I. Shop and Touch‐Up Primer: SSPC‐Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.

D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish. Refer to 10 5515 Ladders for roof access ladder.

B. Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish.

C. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.

D. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish.

E. Sill Angles for Tempered Glass Railing Assemblies: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel angles with anchoring devices and sizes as indicated in shop drawings for railing assembly, drilled and tapped for fastener types, sizes, and spacing indicated, prime paint finish.

F. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.

G. Slotted Channel Framing: Fabricate channels and fittings from structural steel complying with the referenced standards; factory‐applied, rust‐inhibiting thermoset acrylic enamel finish.


SECTION 05 5100 ‐ METAL STAIRS


A. Stairs with concrete treads.

B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.

C. Handrails and guards.


A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.

2.01 METAL STAIRS ‐ GENERAL

A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent

requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code.

B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical. Coordinate

finish appearance with Design‐Builder. a. Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. b. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only. c. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. d. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest quality gloss

finish.

C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level.

D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.

2.02 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS

A. Wall‐Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Outside Diameter: 1‐1/4 inch, minimum, to 1‐1/2 inches, maximum.

SECTION 05 5213 ‐ PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS


A. Wall mounted handrails.

B. Stair railings and guardrails.

C. Free‐standing railings at steps.

2.01 RAILINGS ‐ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code.

B. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs at any point without



damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.

C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

D. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.

E. Provide slip‐on non‐weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T‐shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM

A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold‐formed structural tubing.

B. Welding Fittings: Factory‐ or shop‐welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drill

condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.

2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt

tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

SECTION 05 5515 – LADDERS


A. Aluminum access ladders.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications: Fasteners and installation requirements used to attach ladders to structure.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AA – Aluminum Association.

B. ASTM B 209 ‐ Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy Sheet and Plate.

C. ASTM B 221 ‐ Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

D. OSHA 1910.27 – Fixed Ladders.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal ladders similar to those indicated for this Project.

1. Record of successful in‐service performance. 2. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to fabricate ladders in

compliance with industry standards and local codes.

B. Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance.

C. Product Qualification: Product design shall comply with OSHA 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies.

1. Defects in materials and workmanship. 2. Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA standards as certified

by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

3. Within the warranty period, the manufacturer shall, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of defective ladder.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: O’Keeffe’s, Inc.; 325 Newhall St. San Francisco, CA 94124. ASD. Toll Free Tel: (888) 653‐3333. Tel: (415) 824‐4900. Fax: (415) 824‐5900. Email: [email protected]. Web: http://www.okeeffes.com

2.02 PRODUCT

A. Fixed Access Ladder: 1. Standard Duty Channel Rail.

a. Model 500 with integral safety post as manufactured by O’Keeffe’s Inc or Owner approved equal.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AA‐M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005‐H34 to comply with ASTM B209.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063‐T6 to comply with ASTM B221.

2.05 FABRICATION



A. Rungs: Not less than 1‐1/4 inches (32 mm) in section and 18–3/8 inches (467mm) long, formed from tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides.

1. Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound (454 kg) load without deformation or failure.

B. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wall thickness by 3 inches (76 mm) wide.

C. Construction: Construction shall be self‐locking stainless steel fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean, smooth and burr‐free surfaces.

D. Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off.

SECTION 05 7300 ‐ DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

Glass and metal railings at interior and cable railings.


A. Railing and guardrail assemblies.

2.01 RAILING SYSTEMS

A. Railings ‐ General: Factory‐ or shop‐fabricated in design indicated, to suit specific project conditions, and for proper connection to building structure, and in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. 1. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate railings and anchorages to resist the following loads without

failure, damage, or permanent set; loads do not need to be applied simultaneously. a. Lateral Force: 75 lb minimum, at any point, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 935. b. Distributed Load: 50 pounds per foot minimum, applied in any direction at the top of the

handrail, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 935. c. Concentrated Loads on Intermediate Rails: 50 pounds per square ft, minimum. d. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds minimum, applied in any direction at any point along the

handrail system, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 935. 2. Assembly: Join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts using slip‐

on non‐weld mechanical fittings, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 3. Joints: Tightly fitted and secured, machined smooth with hairline seams. 4. Field Connections: Provide sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. 5. Welded and Brazed Joints: Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline; use methods that

avoid discoloration and damage of finish; grind smooth, polish, and restore to required finish. a. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. b. Welded Joints:

1) Carbon Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1/D 1.1M. 2) Stainless Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.6.

c. Brass/Bronze Brazed Joints: 1) Perform torch brazing in accordance with AWS C3.4/3.4M. 2) Perform induction brazing in accordance with AWS C3.5/3.5M. 3) Perform resistance brazing in accordance with AWS C3.9/3.9M

B. Base Mount Railing System: Engineered, base supported railing system with structural glass.

C. Cable Railing System: 1. Description: Post and cable railing system. 2. Stainless Steel Tube: Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Cable: ASTM A 555/555M. 4. Fittings: Type 304 stainless steel, non‐swedge. 5. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 6. Finishes:

a. Exposed Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing: No. 4 satin finish. 7. Fabrication:


a. Corners: Mitered and welded; grind smooth to match adjacent finish. b. Exposed Joints: Butt tight and flush. c. Splices: Provide interior sleeves; fasteners allowed at splice connections.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel Components: 1. ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2. Stainless Steel Tubing: 16 gage (0.0625 inch), 1‐1/2 inch diameter. 3. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Satin.

B. Glass: Laminated safety glass; ASTM C 1172, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic Interlayer: Minimum 0.060 inch thick. 2. Impact Strength: Category II, tested in accordance with 16 CFR 1201.

End of Division


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 06, Wood Plastics & Composites, Page: 1

DIVISION 06 ‐‐ WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 1000 ‐ ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Sheathing.

B. Roofing nailers.

C. Fire retardant treated wood materials.

D. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.

E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS

A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

B. Moisture Content: S‐dry or MC19.

C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C‐D, Exposure I.

B. Wall Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M‐3 EXTERIOR GLUE.

C. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire‐resistant.

D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A‐D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 ‐ Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire‐Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and

pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898. a. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.

SECTION 06 2000 ‐ FINISH CARPENTRY

Chair rails and related pieces of architectural wood trim finish.


Volume 2: Division 06, Wood Plastics & Composites Page: 2 January 17, 2011

A. Finish carpentry items.

B. Hardware and attachment accessories.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.

B. Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated for Custom grade.

2.02 WOOD‐BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

SECTION 06 4100 ‐ ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Cabinet hardware.

C. Factory finishing.

D. Preparation for installing utilities.


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and familiar with the AWI/AWMAC QSI.

1.03 MOCK‐UP

A. Provide mock‐up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware, finishes, and plumbing accessories.

2.01 CABINETS


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 06, Wood Plastics & Composites, Page: 3

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.

2.02 WOOD‐BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B. Wood Species: Maple.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on‐site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500, Conversion Varnish, Transparent.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 06, Wood Plastics & Composites Page: 4 January 17, 2011


Bridging Documents Performance Standands Ashland Youth Center County of Alameda RossDrulisCusenbery Architecture, inc. Volume 2 – Technical Specifications

January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection, Page: 1

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 1300 ‐ SHEET WATERPROOFING


A. Sheet membrane waterproofing.

B. Cant strips and other accessories.

C. Drainage panels and Protection boards.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Design‐Builder shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner.

2.01 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. Sheet Waterproofing ‐ General: Laminated composite membrane, adhesive bonded.

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

D. Termination Bars: Aluminum; compatible with membrane and adhesives.

3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing.

B. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.

SECTION 07 1400 ‐ FLUID‐APPLIED WATERPROOFING

Applied under vegetated roof assembly and roofing paver system.


A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing.

B. Cant strips and other accessories.

C. Drainage panels.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Design‐Builder shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.

2.01 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot‐Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Use at vegetated roof system. 1. Cover with protection board.

2.02 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Hot‐Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing: Elasticized rubberized asphaltic compound, hot‐applied and quick setting.

Volume 2: Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection, Page: 2 January 17, 2011


A. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood testing.

B. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.

SECTION 07 2100 ‐ THERMAL INSULATION

Building insulation for walls, ceilings, and foundation perimeters, including installation accessories.


A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, and underside of floor slabs.

B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.

C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof.

2.01 APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board.

B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Expanded polystyrene board.

C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. Provide 8” high density batt insulation to achieve R‐30 value.

D. Insulation in Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.

E. Insulation in Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.

F. Insulation Above Lay‐In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.

G. Insulation at all metal roof decking: Foam Board on top of deck Minimum of 5.5” rigid insulation to achieve R‐33 value.

H. Insulation at metal finish floor decking and slab conditions: Provide Batt insulation to achieve a minimum of R‐19 value between floors. Utilize mechanical fasteners.

H. Insulation on all exterior wall framing: Provide minimum 1” foam board insulation to achieve R‐5. This foam board to break the thermal bridge at the metal studs. See above for stud framing insulation.

i. Insulation at “Light Box” feature: Provide min R‐30 batt insulation.

j. Insulation on access panels to exterior features including but not limited to the “light box”: Provide Min R‐30 Rigid board mechanically fastened to the access panel.

2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.03 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Where fiber board insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber board insulation may be used, at Design‐Builder's option.



B. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C 612. 1. Facing: None, unfaced.

C. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, ASTM C 612; top surface coated with 28 lb/square inch asphalt and Kraft paper. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM E 84.

D. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C 612; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.04 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at Design‐Builder's option.

B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C 665; friction fit. 1. Combustibility: Non‐combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for facing,

if any.

C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C 665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

SECTION 07 4646 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING


A. Work under this Section includes furnishing and installing fiber‐cement exterior and interior siding and accessories

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:

1. Wind Uplift: Wall system including supports shall meet requirements of UBC and UL for 90 Wind load.


A. Mock‐Up: Provide a mock‐up of complete panel system including furring, insulation, weather barrier and panels for approval by Architect.

1. Mock‐up shall be as shown on drawings. Constructed mock‐up shall have one vertical and one horizontal joint minimum with complete installation system and fastener layout. This mock up shall be coordinated with the other systems and trades for a complete exterior assembly.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Exterior and Interior Flat Panels:

1. Manufacturer: Western Specialty Fabrications, 630 E. Taylor Ave., Sunnyvale, CA 94085. 408‐294‐4606. [email protected] or Owner approved equal.

2. Panels: Eternet, Swiss Pearl “Reflex”


3. Size: 4‐feet x 10‐feet panels. Installed sizes per the drawings.

4. Texture: Manufacturer’s standard.

5. Color: To be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes.

6. Fasteners: Stainless steel in matching color by panel manufacturer.

B. Sealants:

1. Sealants shall comply with Section 07 9005 ‐ Joint Sealers.

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Pre‐drill all fastener connections as necessary to prevent damage to siding and panels.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Fiber‐Cement Board.

1. Install siding with 1/4" minimum vertical and horizontal gap between flat panels and at edges; verify with mock‐up and manufactures recommendations.

2. Joints shall align horizontally and vertically.

3. Panel fasteners shall be no closer than 2" from panel edges and no closer than 2" from corners.

SECTION 07 5050 ‐ VEGETATED ROOF COMPONENTS

Roof assembly at lower roof, accessible by occupants. Coordinate with roof paver system.


A. Vegetated roof components that occur above the waterproof membrane, including: 1. Pre‐planted, garden roof trays and accessories ("modular extensive"). 2. Vegetated roofing system with less than 6 inches of soil/growth medium ("extensive"). 3. Vegetated roofing system with 6 inches or more of soil/growth medium ("intensive"). 4. Related roof accessories. 5. Plants.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide twenty year manufacturer "full system" warranty.

2.01 VEGETATED ROOFING USING MODULAR ROOF TRAYS

A. Vegetated Roofing Assembly: Modular trays and protective layers installed over waterproofing or roofing membrane.

B. Trays: Pre‐planted, modular, polypropylene garden roof trays, with integral drainage/root barrier fabric and manufacturer's standard growth medium. 1. Plants: Drought‐resistant mix of grasses, perennials and groundcovers suitable to a non‐ or

minimally‐irrigated installation. 2. Size: Provide manufacturer's standard size trays as indicated on drawings. Single‐tray size not to

exceed 8 square feet.



2.02 VEGETATED ROOFING OVER WATERPROOFING

A. Vegetated Roofing Assembly: 6 inches or more of growth medium and protective layers installed over fluid‐applied waterproofing membrane. 1. Protection Layers (in Order from Bottom Up):

a. Protection board. b. Root barrier. c. Drain board.

2. The number and type of protective materials may be reduced provided equivalent protection and functionality is achieved and is approved by the manufacturer.

B. Protection Board: 0.090 inch minimum thickness, glass‐fiber, modified‐bitumen mat with SBS rubber and asphalt blend.

C. Root Barrier: 0.015 inch minimum thickness membrane made from two layers of polyethylene laminated to a reinforced multifilament grid.

D. Drain Board: 0.25 inch minimum thickness, 33,000 pounds per square foot minimum compressive strength, molded‐polystyrene board with woven filter fabric and a minimum flow capacity of 13 gallons per minute per square foot.

2.03 FIELD‐INSTALLED SOIL/GROWTH MEDIUM

A. Provide manufacturer's recommended growing media mix capable of supporting vigorous growth of the specified vegetation.

2.04 FIELD‐INSTALLED PLANTS

A. See Section 32 9300 for plants required.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Pavers: Precast concrete, 2 feet wide by 2 feet long by 2 inches, thick, 18 pounds per square foot minimum, and compressive strength of 6500 pounds per square inch minimum. Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

SECTION 07 5400 ‐ THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

Primary roofing system at upper roof.


A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane.

B. Insulation, flat and tapered.

C. Flashings.

D. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, and walkway pads.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation.

B. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.

2.01 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS

A. Membrane:


1. Material: Polyvinyl chloride copolymer alloy complying with ASTM D 4434. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.045 inch, minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Solar Reflectance: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3‐year, certified by Cool Roof Rating

Council. To be a “Cool Roof” being “Bright White”: SR:0.85/0.79 – TE 0.85/0.79 +/‐ 3%. 6. Thermal Emissivity: 0.80, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3‐year, certified by Cool Roof

Rating Council. To be a “Cool Roof” having a range of TE 0.85/0.79 +/‐ 3%. 7. Color: White.

2.02 INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded expanded polystyrene board with natural skin surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/2 in; fabricate of fewest layers possible.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for penetrations through membrane; same material as membrane.

B. Walkway Pads: Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer; size as indicated.

C. Flashing: galvanized metal and coated metal flashing as needed for complete and watertight installation.

SECTION 07 6100 ‐ SHEET METAL ROOFING

Parts of roof and various canopy assemblies.


A. Sheet metal roofing, associated flashings, and underlayment.

B. Counterflashings.

C. Gutters and downspouts.

D. Integral fascias.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise noted.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Defective work includes degradation of metal finish.

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Pre‐Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 24 gage core steel, shop pre‐coated with modified silicone coating; color as selected by the Owner from the manufacturers full range of standard and premium colors.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as roofing metal, with soft neoprene washers.

B. Underlayment: Rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, 40 mil total thickness, with strippable treated release paper.

2.03 FACTORY FINISHING



A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. Color as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors.

2.04 Underlayment

A. SAFF (Self Adhered Flexible Flashing): Provide W.R. Grace Vycor product for high temperature and low slow installations.

3.01 INSTALLATION – FOLDED SEAM ROOFING

A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.

3.02 INSTALLATION ‐ BUILT‐IN GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS


3.03 INSTALLATION ‐ FLASHINGS


B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.

SECTION 07 6200 ‐ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, parapet caps, gutters, and downspouts.

B. Self‐adhering sheet flashing at internal and external building corners, at perimeter of window openings and other wall openings, under copings, and other locations where shown on Drawings.

C. Miscellaneous flexible sheet flashings not provided under other Sections and indicated for maintaining weather and water resistance of building enclosure.

D. Flashing and counterflashing below all parapet caps.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal.

B. Pre‐Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre‐coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;

multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

C. Aluminum flashing to match the Store front system materials

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories: Galvanized or stainless steel fasteners, clips, brackets and similar accessories.

2.03 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION

A. Gutters: Profile custom sized and shaped.

B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.

C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years in


accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

D. Seal metal joints.

SECTION 07 7100 – PARAPET CAPS


A. Manufactured aluminum parapet caps and accessories.

2.01 MANUFACTURED PARAPET CAPS

A. Prefabricated Parapet Caps: Factory finished aluminum parapets caps.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Fasteners and accessories for a complete watertight installation.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.

b. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.

2.03 CORNERS AND JOINTS

A. Inside and Outside Corners: Factory‐assembled mitered and welded inside and outside corner pieces. Grind all exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent surfaces. Factory paint and finish assembled corners. Corners shall be square and true without visible deformation.

B. Parapet Cap Field Joints: 1. Location of Parapet Cap Joints: Submit a shop drawing of proposed parapet cap joints. Obtain the

Owner’s approval for the joint locations prior to fabrication or installation. 2. Field Joints: Field joints shall be butt joints with painted finish sub‐cap aluminum flashing and

sealant below each joint. Butt joints shall have a gap to allow for expansion and contraction of the parapet cap. Joints shall be watertight.

3. Fire Alarm Connection: Provide separate resettable electrical link release mechanism and connection point for fire alarm system.

2.04 COLOR AND FINISH

A. Color and Finish: Finish to match the window/storefront system finish (refer to section 084313 Aluminum Framed Storefronts). Factory finish parapet caps with a custom color, to be selected by the Owner, to match the Owner’s color/finish sample.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Parapet caps shall be installed straight and true without visible deformation or wavy construction. Caps shall not telegraph any underlying flashing or joints.

B. Patch and repair any damage to finished surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C. Clean and protect installed parapet caps.

SECTION 07 7200 ‐ ROOF ACCESSORIES


A. Manufactured curbs and equipment rails.

B. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.

C. Smoke Vents



2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS

A. Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies: Factory‐assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners, integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.

2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION

A. Roof Hatches: Factory‐assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck.

B. Smoke Vents: 1. Smoke Release Mechanism: Automatic opening on melting of replaceable UL‐listed fusible link at

165 deg F. 2. UL‐listed as automatically operated smoke and heat vent. 3. Fire Alarm Connection: Provide separate resettable electrical link release mechanism and

connection point for fire alarm system.

C. Frames/Curbs: One‐piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting.

D. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer.

SECTION 07 7613 ‐ ROOF DECK PAVER SYSTEM

Exterior assembly adjoining vegetated roof assembly, accessible by occupants.


A. Provide roof deck paver system consisting of precast concrete pavers over pedestals. 1. Coordinate paver system with waterproofing and protection board installation.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide system with Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Class A fire rated roof system, with UL approved wind resistance minimum Class 60 classification. 1. Provide materials conforming to code requirements for roof/ceiling fire resistive rating for

components and materials.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. System: Provide system capable of supporting not less than 100 pounds per square foot loads. 1. Pedestals: System capable of supporting specified loads and distributing over protection board

without damage to waterproofing membrane, and capable of providing level finish over sloped substrate.

2. Pavers: 24" by 24" precast concrete roof deck pavers; minimum 2" thick; nominal 7000 psi at 28 days. a. Colors: As selected by the Owner from manufacturer's full range of available colors; more

than one color required. Three color pattern to be approved by the Owner. b. Texture: Nonslip texture complying with state and federal requirements for access for

persons with disabilities.

B. Accessories: Provide pedestal leveling shims and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for complete, level installation of pavers.

SECTION 07 8400 ‐ FIRESTOPPING



A. Firestopping systems.

B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire‐resistance rated and smoke‐resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.


A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.

2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F

Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.

SECTION 07 9005 ‐ JOINT SEALERS


A. Sealants and joint backing.

B. Precompressed foam sealers.

1.02 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

2.01 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers ‐ General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water‐repellent; 1. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12‐1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non‐skinning.

D. Color: Visible sealants shall match the color of adjacent surfaces. Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and custom colors.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non‐staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non‐corrosive and non‐staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.



C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.

D. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

E. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 08, Openings, Page: 1

DIVISION 08 ‐ OPENINGS

SECTION 08 1113 ‐ HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Rated and non‐rated hollow metal door frames and slab doors including hardware preparation, weather‐stripping, and automatic opener integration. Coordinate with security systems. Coordinate requirements for acoustical doors.


A. Non‐fire‐rated steel doors and frames.

B. Steel frames for wood doors.

C. Fire‐rated steel doors and frames.

D. Thermally insulated steel doors.

E. Sound‐rated steel doors and frames.

F. Steel glazing frames.

G. Door contacts for security access control.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A250.8 ‐ SDI‐100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. BHMA A156.115 ‐ Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames.

C. UL 10C ‐ Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with CBC Chapter 11B and ADAAG. 2. Glazed Lights: Non‐removable stops on non‐secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on

drawings. 3. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place,

in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 4. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot‐dipped zinc‐iron alloy‐coated

(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound‐rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound‐rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

C. Coordinate installation of door contacts for security access control.

2.02 STEEL DOORS

A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot‐dipped zinc‐iron alloy‐coated (galvannealed) in accordance with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

B. Interior Doors, Non‐Fire‐Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.

C. Interior Doors, Fire‐Rated:

Volume 2: Division 08, Openings, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive

pressure").

D. Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Same construction as fire‐rated doors with indicated fire rating, plus: 1. Gasketing: No added gasketing or seals allowed. 2. Label: UL "S" label.

E. Interior Doors, Sound‐Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413,

tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 1408. 3. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame.

2.03 STEEL FRAMES

A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.

a. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames. c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level

1, 18 gage d. Frames for Sound‐Rated Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI

A250.8 for Level 1, 16 gage

B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot‐dipped zinc‐iron alloy‐coated (galvannealed) in accordance with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weather‐stripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non‐Fire‐Rated: Knock‐down type. 1. Terminated Stops: Provide at all interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inches above floor at

45 degree angle.

D. Interior Door Frames, Fire‐Rated: Knock‐down type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

E. Sound‐Rated Door Frames: Knock‐down type.

F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.


A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory‐installed. 1. In Fire‐Rated Doors: UL‐listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.

C. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

SECTION 08 1416 ‐ FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Rated and non‐rated wood slab doors including hardware preparation. Coordinate with security systems. Coordinate requirements for acoustical doors.


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non‐rated, and acoustical.




A. WDMA I.S.1‐A ‐ Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association.

2.01 DOORS AND PANELS

A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1‐A.

B. Interior Doors: 1‐3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. Paint grade birch veneer facings. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with International

Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures; with "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing.

2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through‐bolting.

B. Sound Retardant Doors: Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to achieve rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.

2.03 DOOR FACINGS

A. Wood Veneer Facing for Paint Finish: Species as specified above, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced; unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface‐mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING ‐ WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard. Paint finish color to be selected by the Owner.

SECTION 08 3100 ‐ ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS


A. Access door and frame units, fire‐rated and non‐fire‐rated, in wall locations.

2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in.

B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed.


2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS

A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.

SECTION 08 4213 ‐ MONUMENTAL ALUMINUM FRAMED FOLDING/PAIRED PANEL SYSTEM

Folding door assembly in dance room at exterior stage area.

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 Section Includes

A. Sliding/folding aluminum and glass door system, including aluminum frame, threshold, panels, sliding/folding and locking hardware, weather stripping, glass and glazing; designed to provide an opening glass wall, with sizes and configurations as shown on drawings and specified.

B. NanaWall® SL45, Monumental Aluminum Framed Folding/ Paired Panel System.


A. Performance Requirements: Provide from manufacturer that has independently tested typical units. Testing results to include air infiltration in accordance with ASTM E 283, water penetration in accordance with ASTM E 331/E 547, structural loading in accordance with ASTM E 330, and forced entry in accordance with AAMA 1303.5 and CAWM 300‐96.

B. Thermal Performance U value: Unit to be simulated in accordance with NFRC 100, shown in manufacturer's latest published data for the specified product.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.

2.01 SUPPLIER

A. Nana Wall Systems, Inc.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Use extruded aluminum frame and panel profiles, corner connectors and hinges, sliding and folding hardware, locking hardware and handles, glass and glazing and weather stripping as specified herein to make a folding glass wall. Factory pre‐assemble as is standard for manufacturer and ship with all components and installation instructions.

B. Sizes and Configurations: See drawings for selected custom dimensions within maximum frame sizes possible as indicated in manufacturer's literature. See drawings for selected number of panels and configuration.

C. Finish: Finish to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturers full range of colors and finishes.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide other side lites, transoms, corner posts, or single or double doors as per drawings provided.

SECTION 08 4229 ‐ AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

Located at every exterior entrance and exit doors, coordinate with security system.


A. Operators for doors provided in other sections.

B. Actuators and safety devices.

C. Maintenance.

1.02 WARRANTY



A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motor and compressor.

2.01 DOOR OPERATORS

A. Door Operators ‐ General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA A156.19, and UL 325, as applicable. 1. Select equipment to accommodate heavy pedestrian traffic and weight of doors. 2. Provide equipment capable of operating, holding open, and closing doors under positive and

negative wind pressures calculated in accordance with applicable code. 3. Provide operators that are fully adjustable for opening and closing speeds, checking speeds, and

hold‐open time. 4. Swinging Door Operators: Provide for manual open and close operation of door leaves in the

event of power failure. 5. Finish exposed components to match door and door hardware finish.

2.02 ACTUATORS

A. Proximity Detector Actuator: Microwave; distance of control sensitivity adjustable.

B. Push Plate Actuator: Standard wall mounted, surface mounted momentary contact type; satin stainless steel plate; 6 inches diameter; labeled PUSH.

3.01 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion, at no extra charge to Owner.

SECTION 08 4313 ‐ ALUMINUM‐FRAMED STOREFRONTS

Storefront system has doors, operable windows, and remote window operators. Sliding mall front door system installed along corridor in dance studio and game room.


A. Aluminum‐framed storefront, with vision glass.

B. Infill panels of glass.

C. Aluminum doors and frames.

D. Weather‐stripping.

E. Perimeter sealant.

F. Door contacts for security access control.

G. Glazed aluminum framed mall front type sliding doors.


A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.


2.01 STOREFRONT

A. Aluminum‐Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Unitized, shop assembly.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or

permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with

full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection

of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,

measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E 283. 4. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 at specified pressure

differential. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water

entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.

B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Coordinate installation of door contacts for security access control.

C. Operable Sash: Aluminum project‐out awning; finished to match storefront; turn handle latch.

D. Remote Powered Window Operators (Room 202 Lounge, east wall high windows): 1. Wintrol: M2100 Motorizing System. 2. Truth Hardware: Sentry II WLS Power Window System.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

B. Glass: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.04 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMED SLIDING MALL FRONT DOORS

A. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1010 Sliding Mall Front.

B. Materials 1. Extrusions: 6063.T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B 221 alloy G.S.10A‐T5). 2. Fasteners: Where exposed, aluminum, stainless steel or plated steel. 3. Perimeter anchors: Aluminum or steel, isolate steel from aluminum. 4. Glazing gaskets: Vinyl extrusions. 5. Track inserts: 22‐gage, roll formed stainless steel.

C. Hardware 1. Tandem ballbearing caster. 2. Adams Rite MS 1850‐A‐505 hookbolt lock. 3. Cylinders (interior and exterior).



4. Flush face pull.

D. Fabrication 1. Fixed and sliding panels: Nominal depth of 1½‐inches. Support weight of each panel on base tracks. 2. Equip sliding panels with two center pivoted spring loaded, tandem wheel assemblies, each

capable of supporting a moving weight of 275 pounds with two self‐contained, steel ball bearing rollers.

3. Sliding panels not removable when in a locked position

2.05 FINISHES

A. Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system. Finish to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturers full range of colors.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100.

B. Weather‐stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.

C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.

SECTION 08 5113 ‐ ALUMINUM WINDOWS

Integrated into storefront system with manual and motor operators.


A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating sash.

B. Factory glazing.

C. Operating hardware.

D. Insect screens.

2.01 WINDOWS

A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. All operable windows shall have integral aluminum framed insect screens

B. Performance Requirements: 1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 AW100.

C. Fixed & Outswinging Awning Type: 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 3. Glazing: Factory double glazed insulated units. Refer to 08 8000 Glazing. 4. Insect Screens: All operable windows shall have integral aluminum framed insect screens. Fasten

screens to windows with tamper resistant fasteners. Screen frame color shall match window frame color.

D. Finish: Finish to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturers full range of colors.

2.02 HARDWARE

A. Operator: Geared rotary handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.

B. Motor operated windows on the east wall of Room 202 Lounge. Refer to Section 08 4313 for remote operator system.

SECTION 08 7100 ‐ DOOR HARDWARE


Coordinate hardware with steel, wood, and aluminum doors. Coordinate security system requirements for doors.


A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors.

B. Hardware for fire‐rated doors.

C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.

D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.

E. Thresholds.

F. Weather‐stripping, seals and door gaskets.

G. Gate locks.

H. Coordination of security access system hardware on doors and frames with requirements of Division 28.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.

C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.

2.01 DOOR HARDWARE ‐ GENERAL

A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.

B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.

C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Accessibility Codes:

a. California Building Code Chapter 11B b. Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Guidelines (ADAAG)

3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Fire‐Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 5. Fire‐Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 6. All Hardware on Fire‐Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified

and indicated. 7. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables door assembly to

comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 8. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. 9. Hardware Material & Finish: Commercial grade stainless steel with a brushed satin finish.

2.02 OWNER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. Door Closers: LCN

B. Panic Hardware: Von Duprin

C. Locksets: Schlage Mortise Series

D. Hinges: Ives

E. Flush Bolts: Ives



F. Kick plates: Ives

G. Coordinators: Ives

H. Magnetic Hold‐open: LCN

I. Card Key Access: Refer to the security specifications.

J. Hospital Push‐Pull Door Latch : Sargent model 114/115 or equal)

2.03 KEY CONTROLS

A. Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of consecutively numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch.

B. Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock. 1. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity. 2. Key cabinet lock to building keying system.

C. Fire Department Lock Box: Heavy‐duty, surface mounted, solid stainless‐steel box with hinged door and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm.

2.04 HARDWARE SETS ( GROUPS) A. General

All doors are to have five knuckle ball bearing hinges unless otherwise noted.

B. SET 1A Ext Metal Door Classroom Lockset

Threshold, Rain Drip and Weather‐stripping C. Set 1B Ext Metal Door – Double Classroom Lockset

Threshold, Rain Drip and Weather‐stripping D. Set 2A Ext Alum Door ‐ Single

Panic HDW & Cylinder Door Pulls Continuous Hinge Closer Threshold, Rain Drip Provide Sign “ Door to remain Open During Business Hours”

E. Set 2B Ext. Alum. Door – Double Automatic Operator

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Push Plate and Security Card Key Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Continuous Hinge Threshold and Rain Drip

F. Set 2C Ext. Alum. Door – Double Manual Operated

Keyed dead bolt lock with cylinder. Door Pulls Continuous Hinges Threshold and Rain Drip


Provide Sign “ Door to remain Open During Business Hours” G. Set 2D Ext Alum Door – Single Audible Alarm Door

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Smoke Seals 2 Card Keys Audible Alarm Sign that states “ Warning an alarm will activate if opened”

H. Set 3A Ext Monumental Alum Folding Panel Door Lock set per manufacturer with mortise cylinder

Rain Drip Continuous Hinge per the door manufacturer

Custom Threshold and top track by manufacturer. I. Set 4A Ext Gate – Custom Steel Frame

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Card Key Reader

J. Set 4B Ext Gate – Custom Steel Frame ‐ Double

Long Throw Dead Bolt Heavy Duty Gate Hinges as required Cane Bolts and receivers. Door Pulls

K. Set 5A Int. Sliding Mall Front Doors

Lock set per manufacturer with mortise cylinder Custom Threshold and top track by manufacturer. Sound Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3

L. Set 6A Int. Alum Door

Panic HDW & Cylinder Continuous Hinge Closer

M. Set 6B Int. Alum Door ‐ Single

Keyed dead bolt lock with cylinder. Door Pulls Continuous Hinge Sound Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3 Closers at doors along corridors. Provide Sign “ Door to remain Open During Business Hours”



N. Set 6C Int. Alum Door – Single with Wide Styles

Office Mortise Lockset Door Pulls Hinges as Required Sound Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3

O. Set 6D Int. Alum Door – Single Card Key Access

Classroom Mortise Lockset Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Acoustic Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3 2 Card Keys

P. Set 7A Int. SCWD Door – Single

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Q. Set 7B Int. SCWD Door – Double

Storeroom Mortise Lockset Kick Plates Throw bolt top and bottom.

R. Set 7C Int. SCWD Door – Single

Classroom Mortise Lockset Sound Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3 Smoke seals where required to be fire rated. Closers at doors along corridors and those that are fire rated. Fire rated where required.

S. Set 7D Int. SCWD Door – Single Accommodation Restroom Door

Privacy Bathroom Mortise Lockset Closer Acoustic Seals Kick Plates Both Sides

T. Set 7E Int. SCWD Door – Dual Egress Audible Alarm Door

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. 2 Card Keys Audible Alarm Sign that states “ Warning an alarm will activate if opened”


U. Set 7F Int. SCWD Door – Single Audible Alarm Door Fire Rated

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Smoke Seals 2 Card Keys Audible Alarm Sign that states “ Warning an alarm will activate if opened”

V. Set 7G Int. SCWD Door – Service Panel Door

Half Dummy Lockset Handle Dead Bolt Lock

W. Set 7H Int. SCWD Door – Single Storeroom Door

Storeroom Mortise Lockset Kick Plates on both sides Smoke Seals Fire Rated with Closers (Where Required)

X. Set 7J Int. SCWD Door – Single Clinic Treatment and Service Room Doors

Hospital Push‐ Pull Door Latch (Sargent model 114/115 or equal) Sound Seals Kick Plates on both sides

Y. Set 7K Int. SCWD Door – Single door with card key over ride.

Panic HDW & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Card Key Reader Fire rated with Smoke Seals Kick plates both sides.

Z. Set 7L Int. SCWD Door – Single door with card key access

Storeroom & Mortise Cylinder Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Card Key Reader Fire rated with Smoke Seals Kick plates both sides.

A1. Set 8A Int. Steel Acoustic Door

Classroom Mortise Lockset Sound Seals and Door Bottom ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3



B1. Set 8B Int. Steel Acoustic Door – Single Card Key Access Classroom Mortise Lockset Closer Electric Strike, power supply, power controller, contacts. Acoustic Seals ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3 2 Card Keys Sound Seals and Door Bottom ‐ See acoustic criteria in Vol 3

C1. Set 9A Int. partial height Gate Two Double acting gate hinges/closers

Gate Latch C2. Set 9B Int. Full Height Gate At Wire Mesh Enclosure

Storeroom Mortise Lockset Custom Steel fabricated box housing for the lockset and frame modification. Ball Bearing Hinges

SECTION 08 8000 ‐ GLAZING


A. Glass.

B. Glazing compounds and accessories.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.

B. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units.

2.01 GLAZING TYPES

A. Type IG‐1 ‐ Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Clear Vision glazing Solarban – 70 double pane glazing or equal. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Total Thickness: 1 inch.

B. Type IG‐2 ‐ Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Heat Treated Opaque Spandrel glazing with surface applied insulation. (Included in base bid) 1. Application: Exterior glazing where indicated on exterior elevation sheets A2.01 and A2.02.

C. Type IG‐3‐ Sealed Insulating Glass Units with Safety Glazing: Clear Vision glazing Solarban – 70 double pane tempered glazing or equal. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.


b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to exterior doors. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.

2. Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard and inboard lites.

D. Type IG‐4 ‐ Laminated Glass: Provide two layers ¼” glass with 50% translucent laminating material between. 1. Application:

a. Interior glazing where indicated in Volume 3, Room Data Sheets. b. Exterior glazing where indicated on exterior elevation sheets A2.01 and A2.02.

F. Type S‐1 ‐ Laminated Safety Glazing: Clear Vision Glazing Solarban 70 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. At the corner mitered conditions on the exterior of the building. Note the glass is to be the thickness as required for windload requirements. Review exterior elevations for unique sizes required.

G. Type S‐2 ‐ Single Safety Glazing: Clear Vision Glazing, Solarban 70, Heat Treated (Non‐fire‐rated) 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Exterior Light Box applications where indicated on exterior elevation sheets A2.01 and A2.02. (Refer to Add Alt # 1 A0.00.)

H. Type S‐3 ‐ Single Safety Glazing: Clear Vision glazing (Non‐fire‐rated )

1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Interior glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Interior glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire‐rated walls and partitions.

I. Type S‐4 ‐ Single Safety Glazing: Clear Vision glazing, Fire‐rated 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Interior glazed lites in doors in fire rated doors and side lites

2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7.

2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated.

SECTION 08 8300 ‐ MIRRORS

Mirrors are wall mounted in dance studio.


A. Glass mirrors.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.

B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."



2.01 MATERIALS

A. Mirror Glass ‐ General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.

B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select); 1/4 mm minimum thick.

C. Tempered Mirror Glass: At locations where Mirror is within 18” of floor provide tempered glass Mirrors

3.01 INSTALLATION ‐ GENERAL

A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.

B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.

C. See plans where mirrors are to be from floor to ceiling.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 09, Finishes, Page: 1

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

SECTION 09 2116 ‐ GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Note that impact resistant wall board is to be installed in every corridor and passage way up to 48‐inches AFF. Coordinate acoustical assemblies with acoustical report in Volume 3.


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Metal channel ceiling framing.

D. Shaft wall system.

E. Acoustic insulation.

F. Cementitious backing board.

G. Gypsum wallboard.

H. Joint treatment and accessories.

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA‐216.

B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 50‐54 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests

conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.

C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid‐span deflection of

L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35‐39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests


D. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid‐span deflection of

L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45‐49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests


E. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non‐Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are

waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.

2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 5. Furring: Hat‐shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

Volume 2: Division 09, Finishes, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

6. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one leg only.

B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements.

C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti‐friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Deflection and Firestop Track:

a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire‐rating of the wall assembly.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper‐faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire‐Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no

tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

B. Impact‐Rated Wallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft‐body and hard‐body impact in accordance with ASTM C 1629. 1. Application: High‐traffic areas indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 3. Paper‐Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 4. Type: Fire‐resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.

C. Ceiling Board: Special sag‐resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Exterior Soffit Board: Exterior gypsum soffit board as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings and soffits in protected exterior areas, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut. 1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C 1396/C

1396M; water‐resistant faces. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.

B. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

C. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex‐based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

D. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

E. Exterior Soffit Vents: One piece, perforated, ASTM B 221 6063 T5 alloy aluminum, with edge suitable for direct application to gypsum board and manufactured especially for soffit application. Provide continuous vent.

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.



3.02 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi‐gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically

indicated. 3. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish. 4. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 5. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction. 6. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project.

B. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark‐free finish.

SECTION 09 2236.23 ‐ METAL LATH


A. Metal lath for Portland cement plaster.

B. Furring for metal lath.

2.01 LATH ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1:360 under lateral point load of 100 lbs. 2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1:240 deflection under dead loads and wind uplift.

2.02 LATH

A. Ribbed Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, galvanized; 3/8 inch thick. 1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C 841 for

framing spacing. 2. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq yd. 3. Backed with two layers of treated paper.

B. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch wide x 24 inch long; same finish as lath.

C. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness, maximum possible lengths. 1. Material: Formed sheet steel with rust inhibitive primer, expanded metal flanges. 2. Casing Beads: Square edges. 3. Corner Beads: Radiused corners. 4. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges. 5. Expansion Joints: Accordion profile with factory‐installed protective tape, 2 inch wide flanges. 6. Control Joints: Accordion profile with protective tape, 2 inch flanges.

3.01 INSTALLATION ‐ GENERAL

A. Install interior lath and furring in accordance with ASTM C 841.

3.02 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings.

B. Install control and expansion joints.

SECTION 09 2400 ‐ PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

Portland cement plaster to receive a painted finish, refer to Section 09 9000 Painting and Coating. This section provides base for installing ceramic tile, refer to Section09 3000 Tiling.



A. Portland cement plaster for installation over metal lath and solid surfaces.

B. Portland cement plaster for tile base.

1.02 MOCK‐UP

A. Construct mock‐up of exterior wall, illustrating surface finish.

2.01 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement, Aggregates, and Other Materials: In accordance with ASTM C 926.

B. Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Glass fibers, chopped to 1/2 inch nominal length, alkali resistant.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete surfaces.

D. Latex Admixture: Acrylic latex admixture to increase bonding and to reduce cracking.

2.02 METAL LATH

A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23.

B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23.

2.03 PLASTER MIXES

A. Tile Base: Two‐coat application mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C 926.

B. Over Metal Lath: Three‐coat application mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C 926.

SECTION 09 3000 – TILING

Exterior and interior ceramic tile.


A. Tile for exterior and interior floor applications.

B. Tile for exterior and interior wall applications.

C. Cementitious mortar bed as tile substrate, see Section 09 2400.

D. Ceramic trim.


A. Tile Council of North America Handbook, latest edition.

B. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 ‐ American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium).

1.04 MOCK‐UP

A. See Section 01 4000 ‐ Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock‐up.

B. Construct a tile mock‐up, incorporating all components specified for the mock‐up location. Reference the tile mock‐up location on the construction documents drawings. Mock‐up shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner prior to starting tile work. Corrections or revisions shall be made to the tile mock‐up as directed by the Owner as needed to obtain the Owner’s approval.

2.01 TILE

A. Exterior Porcelain Wall Tile ‐ Field: ANSI A137.1

1. Manufacturer: Crossville, Inc. www.crossvilleinc.com



2. Model: “Wood Impressions”

3. Exterior Wall Tile Field Colors:

Tile # 1: Field Tile, Crossville Inc., Model‐ “Wood Impressions”, Color‐ “Brazilian Cherry” (+/‐80% of the vertical wall tiled surface area)

Tile # 2: Field Tile, Crossville Inc., Model‐ “Wood Impressions”, Color‐ “Black Walnut” (+/‐ 14% of the vertical wall tiled surface area)

4. Finish: “Cross Sheen” graffiti resistant finish.

5. Sizes: 6”x6”, 6”x18”, 6”x36”

6. Pattern: Vertical random pattern as shown on the drawings. Coordinate with the Owner’s Public Art Program. Submit shop drawing for all elevations and surfaces of tile color pattern for Owner approval.

B. Exterior Ceramic Wall Tile ‐ Accent: ANSI A137.1

1. Manufacturers:

a. Daltile www.daltile.com

b. Fireclay Tile www.fireclaytile.com

c. Crossville Inc. www.crossvilleinc.com

2. Models: As noted below.

3. Exterior Wall Accent Tile Models and Colors:

Tile # 3: Accent Tile, Fireclay Tile, Model ‐“Vitrail Series”, Color‐ “Pink Rose” (+/‐ 0.5% of the vertical wall tiled surface area).

Tile # 4: Accent Tile, Daltile, Model ‐“Natural Hues”, Color‐ QH28s “Sweet Pea” (+/‐ 2.5% of the vertical wall tiled surface area).

Tile # 5: Accent Tile, Daltile, Model ‐“Natural Hues”, Color‐ QH30s “Kiwi” (+/‐ 2.5% of the vertical wall tiled surface area).

Tile #6: Accent Tile, Crossville Inc., Model ‐“UltiMetal”, Color‐ MTL01 “White” (6” x 12” +/‐ 0.5% of the vertical wall tiled surface area and 12” x 12” horizontal tiles at the entry soffit).

4. Finish: Per manufactruerers model standards.

5. Sizes: 6”x12”(Tiles #3, #4 & #5, partial #6), 12”x12”(Tile #6 at entry soffit only)

6. Pattern: Placement as shown on the drawings. Coordinate with the Owner’s Public Art Program. Submit shop drawing for all elevations and surfaces of tile color pattern for Owner approval.

C. Interior Glazed Wall Tile ‐ Field: ANSI A137.1

1. Manufacturer: Dal‐Tile, Inc. www.daltile.com

2. Model: “Natural Hues”

3. Interior Wall Tile Field Colors:

Tile #7 (+/‐ 80%). Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

4. Finish: Glazed Ceramic

5. Size: 2”x8”

6. Pattern: Vertical Random Pattern. Submit shop drawing of tile color pattern for Owner approval.


D. Interior Glazed Wall Tile ‐ Accent: ANSI A137.1



3. Interior Wall Tile Accent Colors:



4. Finish: Glazed Ceramic

5. Size: 2”x8”, 2”x2”

6. Pattern: Vertical Random Pattern. Submit shop drawing of tile color pattern for Owner approval.

E. Interior Glazed Floor Tile ‐ Field: ANSI A137.1



3. Interior Floor Tile Field Colors:


4. Finish: Non‐slip Glazed Ceramic

5. Size: 2”x2”

6. Pattern: Grid Pattern. Submit shop drawing of tile color pattern for Owner approval.

F. Interior Glazed Floor Tile ‐ Accent: ANSI A137.1



3. Interior Floor Tile Accent Colors:



4. Finish: Non‐slip Glazed Ceramic

5. Size: 2”x8”, 2”x2”

6. Pattern: Random Pattern. Submit shop drawing of tile color pattern for Owner approval.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Manufacturer: Same as for tile.

2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Mortar Bed Materials: See Section 09 2400; portland cement, sand, latex additive and water.

B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.



2.04 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Epoxy Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7.


A. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin‐set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.

B. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.

C. Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized finish.

D. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.

3.01 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Comply with TCNA Handbook requirements for specific installation methods types shown on drawings.

SECTION 09 5100 ‐ ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

B. Acoustical units.

C. Supplementary acoustical insulation above ceiling.

2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Acoustical Units ‐ General: ASTM E 1264, Class A.

B. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III. Color and finish to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturers full range of standard and premium options.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)

A. Suspension Systems ‐ General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate‐duty.

3.01 INSTALLATION ‐ SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M, ASTM E 580/E 580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.

SECTION 09 6013 ‐ WATER VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section includes retaining and paying for an independent Testing Laboratory to perform moisture vapor emission testing on new concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring and elastomeric liquid flooring.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Warranty failure of finish flooring system due to concrete water vapor emission to the installed system for a period of 10‐years from date of Substantial Completion. Include replacement of finish flooring material, and re‐application of adhesive and vapor emission control system.

2.01 MATERIALS


A. Concrete Moisture Mold Alkalinity Barrier Properties: 1. Moisture Vapor: Unlimited 30‐lbs., no upper limits 2. Alkalinity: Unlimited (14pH) control, no damage to barrier 3. Concrete Adhesion: Inner matrix chemical & mechanical bond 4. ASTM F1869 Post‐Installation Testing Results: 2.0 (±0.50) 5. ASTM D1308 Acid & Alkali Testing: Pass, no effect on material


A. Proprietary three‐component, low viscosity synthetic polymer barrier directly applied to prepared concrete surfaces for permanent inner matrix suppression of moisture mold alkalinity.

B. Formulated chemistry shall form a chemical and mechanical linkage/ barrier to concrete substrates, resistant to extreme thermal expansion, unlimited moisture vapor (30‐pounds) and alkalinity (pH 14) levels.

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Testing: 1. Perform pre‐installation testing of the concrete slab by a calcium chloride test prior to the

application of specified water vapor emission control system treatment. Testing shall be performed by a qualified testing personnel and Testing Laboratory.

B. If calcium chloride testing reveals water vapor emission levels greater than 3‐pound per 1,000‐sq. ft. for resilient or elastomeric liquid flooring, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 APPLICATION OF VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Unless more restrictive emission levels are required by finish flooring manufacturers, do not apply resilient or elastomeric liquid flooring until the vapor emission has been reduced to 3‐lbs. /1,000‐sq. ft. /24‐hrs. or less.

SECTION 09 6429 ‐ WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING

This installation is a dance and exercise floor.


A. Cushioned athletic type wood strip flooring, nailed.

B. Sleepers on cushion blocks.

C. Sheet vapor retarder.

D. Surface finishing.


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with MFMA (SPEC).

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wood Strip Flooring: 1. Species: White Hard Maple. 2. Actual Thickness: 25/32 inch. 3. Actual Width: 3 inches.

B. Sleepers and Shims: Softwood lumber, pressure treated for moisture protection.

C. Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene sheet, 8 mil thick; 2 inch wide tape for joint sealing.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Ventilating Base: Molded rubber, ventilating type, with adhesives and accessories, black.



B. Cushion Blocks: Resilient pads, rubber material, sealed air channels for resiliency; compressible to 1/16 inch under a 40 psi load with full and immediate recovery.

C. Floor Finish: Polyurethane, to achieve high gloss surface; type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

SECTION 09 6500 ‐ RESILIENT FLOORING


A. Resilient sheet flooring.

B. Resilient base.

C. Installation accessories.

2.01 SHEET FLOORING

A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern through wear layer thickness: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 2034, Type corresponding to type specified. 2. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium

colors.

B. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors.

2.02 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium

colors.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

SECTION 09 6566 ‐ RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

Installed in weight room.


A. Rubber sheet flooring, adhesively installed.

B. Accessories.

2.01 PREFORMED ATHLETIC FLOORING

A. Rubber Sheet Flooring: Rubber roll goods comprising rubber granules from recycled automobile tires and colored EPDM granules encapsulated in a zero‐mercury polyurethane binder, lengths to avoid transverse seams. 1. Thickness: Minimum 3/8 in. 2. Sheet Width: Minimum 48 inches. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 55, per ASTM D 2240. 4. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and

premium colors.


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Leveling Compound: Latex‐modified cement formulation as recommended by flooring manufacturer for substrate conditions.

B. Adhesive: Water‐resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer for project conditions.

SECTION 09 6700 ‐ FLUID‐APPLIED FLOORING

Installed at exterior decks.


A. Fluid‐applied flooring and base at exterior decks.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fluid‐Applied Flooring: Urethane, two component, thermosetting, colored with mineral filler, with aggregate embedded in base coat. 1. Base Coat: 1/8 inch thick; color as selected. 2. Aggregate: Small quartz chips, multiple colors as selected. 3. Top Coat: Urethane, two component, thermosetting; 1/16 inch thick; clear. 4. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and

premium colors.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

SECTION 09 6813 ‐ TILE CARPETING


A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Carpet Tile: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Tile Size: 18 x 18 inch, nominal. 2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648

or NFPA 253. 3. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D 2859 (the "pill test"). 4. Maximize recycled content to the extent possible. 5. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and

premium colors and patterns.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub‐Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.

B. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected.

C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.

SECTION 09 8311 ‐ ACOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEMS


A. Site fabricated fabric‐covered acoustical wall system.

B. Accessories as required for complete installation.




A. Mock‐Up: Provide a mock‐up for evaluation of application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Design‐Builder.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a 5‐year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide system comprising site‐installed stretched fabric over acoustical core and continuous perimeter and intermediate mounting extrusions applied directly to wall surface. 1. Prefabricated framed panels are not acceptable. 2. Fabric must be installed over acoustical substrate without adhesives, tapes, or fasteners. 3. System must be designed to permit removal and replacement of fabric from individual panels

without affecting adjacent panels.

B. Provide materials and systems made of recycled content, at least 90 percent post‐consumer or post‐industrial.

C. Verify that all adhesives and sealants employed in installation of acoustical wall systems are low‐emission types, with low VOC ratings.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Frame: Extruded polymer track system with serrated jaws of sufficient strength to hold fabric in place after repeated applications. 1. Profile: Square, 1 inch overall height. 2. Intermediate Joints: Butt joints square.

B. Acoustical Core: Fiberglass board, 6 pcf density, 1 inch thickness; minimum NRC of 0.80 per ASTM C 423, Type A mounting.

C. Color and Fabric: Color and fabric shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors and fabrics.

SECTION 09 9000 ‐ PAINTING AND COATING

Provide paint and coating systems complete with full preparation detail and a minimum of two finish coats over primer.


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings for both exterior and interior applications.

C. Materials for backpriming woodwork.

D. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory‐finished and unless otherwise indicated.

E. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory‐finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory‐

applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Ceramic and other tiles.


7. Glass. 8. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.02 MOCK‐UP

A. Provide panels, illustrating paint and special coating color, texture, and finish.

B. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS ‐ GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field‐catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly

dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one‐half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run.

5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

6. Paint colors to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors. Four (4) different interior paint colors plus black. Four (4) different exterior paint colors plus black.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D‐‐National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra‐sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.



B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

SECTION 09 9600 ‐ HIGH‐PERFORMANCE COATINGS

Coordinate with AESS.


A. High performance coatings.

B. Special preparation of surfaces.

1.02 MOCK‐UP

A. Provide mock‐up, illustrating coating, for each specified coating.

2.01 HIGH‐PERFORMANCE COATINGS

A. Provide coating systems that meet the following minimum performance criteria, unless more stringent criteria are specified:

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Coatings ‐ General: Provide complete multi‐coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. 1. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: As required by applicable regulations.

B. High‐Build Epoxy Coating: Two coats, water‐base epoxy, gloss finish.

C. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise specified.

D. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors.

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate preparation with requirements of Section 05 1250.

B. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.

C. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac.

D. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store.

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 10, Specialties, Page: 1

DIVISION 10 ‐‐ SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 1400 ‐ SIGNAGE

Complete disabled access signage, code required signage, and exterior metal letters. Additional exterior signage is specified in Division 33. Owner will be providing room identification signage under another contract.


A. Signage indicating room occupancy, fire extinguisher locations, stairway signage, room identification required by code.

B. Interior and exterior directional and informational signs required for life safety and accessibility.

C. Emergency evacuation route maps.

D. Toilet room signage.

E. Metal letters at exterior.


A. California Building Code, Chapter 11B.

B. ATBCB ADAAG ‐ Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and CBC Chapter 11B, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers to be

determined later, and Braille.

C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs:

D. Emergency Evacuation Maps:

E. Building Identification Signs: 1. Use individual metal letters. 2. Mount outside in location shown on drawings.

2.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS

A. Metal Letters: Solid cast 14” high stainless steel with brushed satin finish. 1. Mounting: Concealed screws.

SECTION 10 2113.19 ‐ PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Solid plastic toilet compartments.

B. Urinal screens.

2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor‐mounted headrail‐braced.

B. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with two panel brackets, and floor‐to‐ceiling vertical upright consisting of

Volume 2: Division 10, Specialties, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling.

C. Colors and Finishes: Color and finish shall be selected from the manufacturer’s full range by the Owner.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with polished finish, 3 in high, concealing floor fastenings.

B. Head Rails: Hollow chrome plated steel tube, 1 x 1‐5/8 inch size, with anti‐grip strips and cast socket wall brackets.

C. Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel.

D. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, polished stainless steel.

E. Hardware: Polished stainless steel:

SECTION 10 2213 ‐ WIRE MESH PARTITIONS


A. Chain link mesh system for walls.

B. Access door.


A. Design partition system to provide for movement of components without damage, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to design loads.

B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

2.02 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

A. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory‐fabricated modular assemblies of wall panels, doors, anchors, and accessories as required to provide a complete system and as indicated.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Framing Members: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold‐formed steel tubing, square and rectangular shaped.

B. Chain Link Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh galvanized steel with vinyl coating wire, interwoven, 6 gage thick, top selvage twisted tight, bottom selvage knuckle end closed; including tension bars, tension wire, and accessories.

C. Color: Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

SECTION 10 2601 ‐ WALL AND CORNER GUARDS


A. Corner guards.

B. Wall protection.

2.01 COMPONENTS

A. Corner Guard ‐ Surface Mounted: Extruded one‐piece unit, installed with screws. 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

B. Wall Protection: 1. Material: High impact vinyl, color as selected from manufacturer's full standard colors. 2. Mounting: Surface.



SECTION 10 2800 ‐ TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms.

B. Grab bars.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Accessories ‐ General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

B. Keys: Provide keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.

2.02 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.

D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

E. Color: Colors to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2.03 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome‐plated zinc alloy brackets, spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll.

B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel; seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors.

C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck‐mounted on vanity, with polyethylene container concealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish; chrome‐plated deck escutcheon.

D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.

E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface‐mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock.

F. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1‐1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1‐1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.

G. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface‐mounted, self‐closing door, locking bottom panel with full‐length stainless steel piano‐type hinge, removable receptacle.

H. Diaper Changing Station: Wall‐mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial toilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F 2285. 1. Style: Horizontal. 2. Material: Polyethylene. 3. Mounting: Surface.

2.04 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES


A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin‐finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin‐finished stainless steel flanges, for concealed mounting.

B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Cotton, machine washable, and mildew‐resistant. 2. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers. 3. Shower curtain hooks: Chrome‐plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap closure.

C. Folding Shower Seat: Wall‐mounted surface; welded tubular seat frame, structural support members, hinges and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel, L‐shaped, hand as indicated, seat. 1. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite one‐piece seat or seat slats, of color as selected.

2.05 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations

SECTION 10 4400 ‐ FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


A. Fire extinguishers.

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

C. Accessories.

2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers ‐ General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class: A:B:C.

C. Carbon Dioxide Type Fire Extinguishers: Aluminum tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class: B:C.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.

B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed and semi‐recessed type.

C. Color: Color to be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome‐plated.

SECTION 10 7113 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

Exterior sun shades for the south and west windows of Room 207 Youth Activity Room.


A. Exterior Motorized Commercial Rolling Sun Shade



1.02 WARRANTY

A. Provides manufacturer’s five (5) year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Beginning at date of substantial completion. Electrical components and motors shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years. Fabric warranty for a period of five (5) years.

2.01 MANUFACTURER:

A. Worldscreen Inc., 843 Echo Lake Rd., Watertown, CT. 06795 1‐800‐445‐4142 www.Worldscreeninc.com

2.02 PRODUCT

A. Motorized Exterior Sun Shades: 1. Electrically controlled, commercial grade, top quality exterior roller shades. Operation shall

include coordinated stop positions and group motorization with remote switching. Shades and motor shall have a weather proof housing, concealed wiring, heavy duty rolling mechanism and wire guides for the shade material. Provide tamper resistant fasteners.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Shade Fabric: Shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of vinyl coated fiberglass and/or vinyl coated polyester yarns woven into various configurations and colors. Woven yarn shall be interlocking and heat‐treated so that all materials are securely bonded. Shade fabric shall withstand fading, fire, mildew, soiling and wear and tear of outdoor use.

B. Flame‐retardant Fabrics: shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) test #701 and the California Administrative Code, Title 19, Public Safety, Subchapter 8, Article 4, Section 1237, paragraph (b) as amended in 1986 and as modified by the State Fire Marshall.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Motorized Operation

1. Motors: Shall be asynchronous capacitor start and run, single phase type operating on 120v‐60HZ. They shall have planetary type gears, solenoid activated disc brakes and built‐in limit switch units. Each motor must be thermally protected, tubular in shape and totally enclosed within the roller tube. Most motors shall also be UL recognized.

2. Motorized Roller Tube: Shall be of sufficient diameter to properly lift and roll the fabric while always being supported by the extruded aluminum polyethylene sheathed cassette cradle. All tubes shall be of extruded aluminum. All will have a grove to accept a T‐spline system for exact and firm mounting of the fabric.

3. Motorized and Idler Slider End Cap: Shall consist of a slide mechanism to easily allow the tube to raise and lower within the cassette system as it gathers material in either direction of the travel direction. This shall be an extruded self‐lubricating mechanism.

4. Mounting Bracket: Specifically designed brackets to accept the MicroCassette casing and smoothly snap into place at desired areas. The number of brackets needed is established by the width of the shade and the manufacturer’s written direction. The brackets shall be made of extruded aluminum.

5. Standard Weight/Hem Bar: A weight/hem bar for exterior application. Refer to 2.05, A below.


6. Cassette: Worldshade MicroCassette 4016. An extruded self‐ storing cassette measuring 3‐1/8” x 3‐1/8” made of .075 extruded aluminum and shall be painted with a high quality baked enamel finish. Color to match the window and storefront frame color.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Guide Wires: Shall be of cassette color matched vinyl coated galvanized steel with a threaded level adjustment ring to be able to easily tighten the wires once installed.

B. Light Short Exposed Weight/Hem Bar: 1 1/8”h x 1 1/4”w bar will be of extruded aluminum containing a spline groove at the top to receive and secure fabric. Ends caps will be used to cover the ends. All extrusions shall be painted with a high quality baked enamel finish. Color to match the window and storefront frame color.

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum tamper resistant fasteners.

2.06 COLORS AND FINISHES:

A. Aluminum extrusions are of 6063T5 alloy with a custom color factory finish to match window/storefront frame.

2.07 MOTORIZED CONTROL OPTIONS

A. Individual/Group Switching: Provide multiple and remote switching. B. Individual/Group Control Systems: For operating any number of motors from one or more switches. C. Switches: Key Switch. D. Other Accessories: Sun and wind sensors. E. System Integration: Integration to automation systems.

SECTION 10 7516 – EXTERIOR FLAGPOLES

Exterior aluminum flagpole mounted on a concrete base near the main public entry to the building.


A. Exterior aluminum flagpole, anchorage, mounting plates, fittings, fasteners and accessories.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Provides manufacturer’s five (5) year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. Beginning at date of substantial completion. .

2.01 MANUFACTURER:

A. L. Ph. Bollander and Sons, 1355 Evans Avenue, San Francisco, CA 94124 Tel: 800 434‐5611 http://bolanderflagpole.com/home.nxg 1355 Evans Avenue · San Fax: 415-648-0402v

2.02 PRODUCT

A. Aluminum Flagpole: 1. Construction General: Shop fabricated one piece tapered aluminum flagpole without using

fasteners, screw collars or calking.

2. Exposed Height: 35 feet



3. Aluminum Flagpole: Provide entasis tapered flagpole fabricated from extruded tubing.

4 Flagpole Color: Clear anodized aluminum.

B. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Provide foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete.

1. Provide a flashing collar at the base to match the material and finish of the flagpole

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Aluminum tubing shall comply with ASTM B 241/ (B 241M), Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16”. Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6.

2.04 FITTINGS

A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer’s standard flush seam ball, 0.063 –inch spun aluminum, finish to match the flagpole.

B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless steel cable halyard, and cone shaped concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush hinged access door secured with a keyed cylinder lock. Finish the truck assembly to match the flagpole.

C. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide four stainless steel swivel snap hooks per halyard. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum tamper resistant fasteners.

B. Flags: Provide one 5’ x 8’ United States of America flag and one 5’x 8’ California State flag.

C. Accessories: Accessories and fitting for a complete installation.

2.06 COLORS AND FINISHES:

A. Clear anodized aluminum finish.

2.07 CONCRETE FOUNDATION

A. Provide concrete, reinforcing and anchors. Refer to Division 03 Concrete.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 11, Equipment, Page: 1

DIVISION 11 ‐‐ EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 1813 ‐ PISTOL LOCKERS


A. Recessed wall mounted pistol lockers.

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: American Locker www.americanlocker.com.

B. Description: 4‐tier wall mount pistol locker. 1. Security type lock with stainless steel assembly.

a. Removable lock type. b. Two keys per compartment. c. Manufacturer's proprietary key locking system to protect against unauthorized duplications.

2. Size: 14 x 4 x 28 inches.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold rolled steel construction fully welded without bolts.

B. Sides and Back: 20 gauge.

C. Bottom, Top and Shelves: 20 gauge.

D. Door: 16 gauge.

E. Hinge: 20 gage riveted at the side with aluminum rivets.

2.03 FINISH

A. Baked enamel. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors.

SECTION 11 2429 ‐ ROOF FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM


A. Roof Anchors

B. Wall Anchors

C. Horizontal Cable Lifeline

1.02 REFERENCES

A. 29 CFR 1910.23 ‐ Occupational Health and Safety Standards for General Industry.

B. 29 CFR 1926.500 ‐ Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Subpart M‐Fall Protection.

C. ANSI Z359.1 ‐ Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components.

1.03 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance for fall protection system and components for a period of one year from Date of Substantial Completion with an option for extending maintenance service on an annual basis thereafter.

2.01 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Volume 2: Division 11, Equipment, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

A. Provide Fall Protection System in compliance with OSHA, ANSI, and applicable State and Federal regulatory requirements.

B. Anchor system shall provide independent fall arrest in addition to suspension line anchorages for descent location.

C. Design of fall arrest safety anchors, and equipment shall meet or exceed the following:

1. Fall Arrest Safety Anchors: design to a maximum fall arresting force of 1800 lbs when wearing a body harness with a safety factor of 2 without any permanent deformation; and to 5000 lbs against fracture or detachment.

2. Ensure design of primary support equipment is capable of sustaining without failure at least four times the maximum static working load applied or transmitted to the components.

2.02 ANCHORS

A. Roof Anchors

1. Capable of withstanding 5000 lbs. in any direction without fracture or detachment.

B. Wall Anchors

1. Capable of withstanding 5000 lbs. in any direction without fracture or detachment.

C. Horizontal Lifeline System:

1. Multi‐span horizontal lifeline system that provides uninterrupted pass through capabilities at any mid span points and continuous hands free operation.

2. Intermediate bracket supports are shock absorbing and designed to deform during a fall and absorb a portion of the load created during a fall.

3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Testing and certification shall be provided under supervision of the fall protection manufacturer or original installer.

B. Examine system components bi‐monthly. Clean, inspect and adjust and recertify the equipment and overall system.

D. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.

E. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision of the fall protection manufacturer or original installer.

3.02 OPERATOR TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of operator training after system has been installed and tested. Training is to be for the users of the system conducted at the installation site.

End of Division


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 12, Furnishings, Page: 1

DIVISION 12 ‐‐ FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12 2400 ‐ SHADES

1.01 Section Includes:

A. Motorized roller shade motor system.

B. Opaque Shade cloth.

C. Hardware.

D. Electric switching and controls.

E. Related accessories.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Designed, Developed and Fabricated System: Totally integrated unit which provides components (motor, shade cloth, electrical controls and override circuits) have been designed and tested as a compatible system and will be available as such in the future for either replacement or as add‐on requirements.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. ElectroShade Motor System: 1. Switches: Internal limit to allow exact setting of travel in both the raised and lowered positions.

Provide micro switch circuit braking at the end of the run and limit‐switch setting which cannot be disturbed by action of roller tube.

2. Brake: Solenoid activated disc‐brake mechanism which stops and holds in any position. The brake to automatically disengage when the motor is operating.

3. Motor: Asynchronous motor type with built‐in reversible capacitor start‐and‐run 4. Gear box: Provide 3 levels of satellite gears for load distribution (planetary gears) and machined to

close tolerance of tempered steel. The speed varies according to model from 10 rpm to 64 rpm.

B. Hardware and Accessories Required for a Total Integrated System: 1. Shade roller: Extruded aluminum tube, 6063‐ST6 alloy, 2.55 inches OD with internal keyway to

receive tubular motor. Provide tube with 2 extruded fabric‐mounting channels designed so that the shade cloth does not disengage from the tube.

2. End brackets: 1/8 inch thick sheet steel. Wall, jamb, or ceiling mounted as required and permanently installed.

3. Center support brackets: Supply to meet span or weight requirements. Ceiling or wall mounted as required.

4. Color and Finish: To be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes.

C. Shade Cloth: 1. Opaque, light proof, suitable for projections. 2. Performance: Fabric to hang flat, without buckling or distortion. Edge, when trimmed, to hang

straight without raveling. Unguided roller shade cloth to roll true and straight, without shifting sideways more than +/‐ 1/8 inch in either direction due to warp distortion or weave design.

3. Flame retardance: Fabric certified by an independent laboratory to pass the Small Scale Vertical Burn Requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), FAA, State of California.

4. Color and Fabric: To be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors and fabrics.

D. Controls: Operate each elevation or group of shade by a momentary throw switch located remotely. Use Motor Logic Controllers relays with priority circuits to control 3 or more motors.

Volume 2: Division 12, Furnishings, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

SECTION 12 3600 ‐ COUNTERTOPS


A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.

2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Cast‐in‐place Concrete Countertops: Concrete molded into homogenous, non‐porous slab; no surface coating and color consistent throughout thickness. 1. Flat Surface Thickness: 3 inch, nominal. 2. Surface Finish: Smooth, non‐glare. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; integrally molded. 4. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and

premium colors.

B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA‐2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or

polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non‐porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.

2. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors.

C. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A 666 Type 304 stainless steel sheet; 16 gage, 0.06 inch nominal sheet thickness. 1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in accordance with standards governing fabrication quality that are specified in Section 06 4100.

B. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

C. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece including nosing and back and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension are permitted. 1. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire bottom

surface.

SECTION 12 4813 ‐ ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES


A. Extruded aluminum entrance floor grilles.

B. Recessed mat frames.

2.01 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES AND GRATINGS

A. Entrance Floor Grilles: Recessed extruded aluminum grille assembly with nominal 1 inch wide tread strips running perpendicular to traffic flow, slots between treads, and perimeter frame forming sides of recess; grille hinged for access to recess. 1. Recess Depth: 1 inches. 2. Tread Surfaces: Alternating serrated anodized aluminum and nylon carpet. 3. Colors: To be selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standard selection. 4. Frame: Anodized aluminum for embedding in concrete; minimal exposed trim; stud or hook

concrete anchors.

B. Mounting: Top of non‐resilient members level with adjacent floor.


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 12, Furnishings, Page: 3

C. Structural Capacity: Capable of supporting a rolling load of 500 pounds without permanent deformation or noticeable deflection.

D. Vibration Resistant Fabrication: All members welded, riveted, or bolted; no snap or friction connections.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Construct recessed mat frames square, tight joints at corners, rigid. Coat surfaces with protective coating where in contact with cementitious materials.

B. Fabricate mats in single unit sizes; fabricate multiple mats where indicated.

SECTION 12 9300 – SITE FURNISHINGS AND ACCESSORIES

The intent of this section is to provide County approved site furnishings which may be used for inclusion in the Ashland Youth Center. The materials are provided in order to establish continuity within the multiple projects that create the Ashland/Edendale campus. If specific models are not appropriate to actual conditions then with Owner approval materials from the same series or alternates may be used with Owner approval. Some materials are not identified in the site plans but if needed to complete the project, information is made available within this specification.

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide and construct, repair, or install the site elements, complete in place, as shown and specified, including, but not limited to:

1. Fixed Bollards 2. Recycled Plastic Header 3. Trash & Recycle Receptacles 4. Dedication Boulder (existing at Holland Park for relocation) 5. Dedication Plaque (material to be provided by Alameda County) 6. Permeable Unit Paving 7. Cobble

1.02 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall provide COUNTY Representative with two (2) bound maintenance manuals identifying each piece of equipment on manufacturer’s recommended maintenance program including, but not limited to, daily, weekly, and monthly check lists.

B. Contractor to provide COUNTY Representative with minimum of One (1) gallon each type and color of paint used on apparatus with recommended surface preparation and application guidelines.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. At completion of project, Contractor shall provide COUNTY Representative with written guarantee from each manufacturer identifying the nature of warranty for each product component.

2.01 MANUFACTURED ITEMS

A. Bollards: 1. Fixed Bollard:

2. MFR: Fairweather or approved equal 3. Model: B‐2 Schedule 40, 36” high, 3” decorative collar at top and bottom 4. Fixed: Permanent embed 5. Color/Finish: Powder Coat Brown 6. Contact: All about Play/ Glen Wurster 916 923 2180

Volume 2: Division 12, Furnishings, Page: 4 January 17, 2011

B. Recycled Plastic Header: 1. MFR: Epic Plastics or approved equal 2. Product: “Bendaboard” 3. Color/Finish: Mendocino Redwood 4. Contact: Repcor 800.972.0911

C. Trash & Recycle Receptacles: MFR: Dumor Series 157 with locking side opening, flat lid top color bronze and surface mount. 1. Full Trash Model 157‐32‐FTO 2. Dual Trash/Recycle Model 157 ‐32‐ special order 3. Full Recycle Model 157‐32‐ RC “Recycle Only” 4. Available through Ross Recreation. Contact: Cheri 707 538 3800

D. Dedication Boulder: 1. Existing on site. Granite Boulder is ‘Academy Black’ with beveled polished top, sawcut

bottom and, natural bark sides. Contractor shall place existing boulder and install dedication plaque as directed by Alameda County.

E. Dedication Plaque: 1. Plaque shall be custom cast aluminum provided by Alameda County. Available from

Gemini letters or approved equal.

F. Permeable Concrete Pavers:

1. Pacific Interlock Paving‐ Hydro Flow Series: Color, style and pattern to be selected with approval by the Owner’s Representative from the manufacturers full line of colors, styles and patterns. Utilize 60mm or 80mm as appropriate for application.

2. Install in permeable sub base per manufacturer’s recommendations and with edging restraint of concrete, ez edge or owner approved alternate.

3. Provide Sub drainage as required and recommended by civil.

2.02 NON‐MANUFACTURED ITEMS

1. Cobbles in Bioswale and Surrounds of Drain Inlets: 4” size, set in pervious concrete.

SECTION 12 9313 ‐ BICYCLE RACKS


A. Bicycle racks.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on each bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame. 1. Style: Inverted horseshoe rack formed by one u‐shaped bend. 2. Capacity: 3 bicycles. 3. Mounting: In‐ground anchor. 4. Finish: Powder coat, maintenance‐free and weather‐resistant. 5. Color: To be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s full range of colors.

End of Division


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 13, Special Construction Page: 1

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION NOT USED.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 13, Special Construction, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 14, Conveying Equipment, Page: 1

DIVISION 14 ‐‐ CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 14 2100 ‐ ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Electric Traction Elevators.

B. Industry and government standards: 1. CBC Chapter 11B Accessibility 2. ADAAG ‐ Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 3. ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer warranty for a period of one year. The warranty period is to begin upon Substantial Completion of the Contract. Warranty covers defects in materials, fabrication, and installation. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance, misuse, or neglect does not constitute defective materials, fabrication, or installation.

1.03 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 Months after date of substantial completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer.

B. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service.

2.01 DESCRIPTION OF ELEVATOR

A. Elevator Equipment: KONE EcoSpace™ gearless traction elevator. (Two sizes, refer to plan) 1. Equipment Control: KCM831 2. Rated Capacity: 4000 lbs (1814 kg) Service shape 3. Rated Speed: 150 fpm 4. Main Power Supply: 240 Volts + 5%, three‐phase 5. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail 6. Control Space Location: Remote Closet 7. Cab and Door Finishes: Stainless steel ceiling, walls, doors and rails with brushed satin finish.

Stainless steel control panels and access doors with a brushed satin finish. Linoleum flooring, color and pattern shall be selected by Owner from the flooring manufacturer’s full range of standard and premium colors. Lighting shall be ceiling mounted fully recessed LED fixtures with a tamperproof lens.

2.02 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE

A. Controller: Provide microcomputer based control system to perform all of the functions.

B. Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system to develop high starting torque with low starting current.

C. Controller Location: Within 100'‐0" (30.48m) Controller(s) shall be located in a remote cabinet or room within 140''‐0" (42.6 m) wire feet of the elevator machine.

3.01 DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to substantial completion, instruct Owner's Representative on the proper function and required daily maintenance of elevators. Instruct personnel on emergency procedures.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 14, Conveying Equipment, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 21, Fire Suppression, Page: 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

REFER TO VOLUME 3, DESIGN CRITERIA AND ROOM DATA SHEEETS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 21, Fire Suppression, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 22, Plumbing, Page: 1

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

REFER TO VOLUME 3, DESIGN CRITERIA AND ROOM DATA SHEEETS FOR PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 22, Plumbing, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 23, Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Page: 1

DIVISION 23 ‐‐ HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR‐CONDITIONING (HVAC)

REFER TO VOLUME 3, DESIGN CRITERIA AND ROOM DATA SHEEETS FOR MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 23, Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 26, Electrical, Page: 1

DIVISION 26 ‐‐ ELECTRICAL

REFER TO VOLUME 3, DESIGN CRITERIA AND ROOM DATA SHEEETS FOR ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 26 3100 ‐ PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS (BID ALTERNATE)


A. Photovoltaic modules complete with frames, junction box and cables.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Photovoltaic Collectors: 1. Basis of Design: Solyndra 4770 Kato Road, Fremont, CA 877‐511‐8436. www.solyndra.com.

2.02 COLLECTOR SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Collectors are designed to power AC loads, with "net metering" on power grid connection but no battery storage.

2.03 COLLECTOR MODULES

A. Photovoltaic Collector Modules: Cylindrical CICS photovoltaic cells in frame, factory assembled; with junction box, cables for connection in series, and bypass diodes; complying with IEC 61730. 1. Entire assembly UL listed under UL 1703. 2. Rated for maximum system voltage of 600 V DC. 3. Frame: Anodized aluminum, natural satin finish; predrilled mounting holes. 4. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for capacity specified.

B. Poles, Stands, and Mounting Brackets: Mill finished aluminum; or hot‐dipped galvanized steel with minimum G90/Z180 coating.

End of Division

Volume 2: Division 26, Electrical, Page: 2 January 17, 2011



January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 27, Communications, Page: 1

DIVISION 27 ‐‐ COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27 0000 ‐ BASIC COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 27, and is intended to supplement, not supersede, the requirements specified in Division 01.

B. The requirements described herein include the following:

1. References

2. Definitions

3. System Description and Project Conditions

4. Submittals

5. Quality Assurance

6. Delivery, Storage, and Handling

7. Scheduling

8. Warranty

9. Product Substitutions

10. Project Management and Coordination Services

11. Permits and Inspections

12. Field Quality Control

13. Project Closeout and Record Documents

C. Related Items

1. General and Supplementary Conditions: General provisions of Contract and Division 01 apply to Division 27.

2. Consult other Divisions and Sections, determine the extent and character of related work, and coordinate Work of Division 27 with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable installation.

3. Section 27 05 26 – Communication Grounding and Bonding

4. Section 27 05 28 – Communication Building Pathways

5. Section 27 11 00 – Communication Rooms

6. Section 27 13 13 – Communication Backbone ISP Twisted Pair Cabling

7. Section 27 13 23 – Communication Backbone ISP Fiber Cabling

8. Section 27 15 13 – Communication Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling

9. Section 27 15 33 – Communication CATV Horizontal Cabling

10. Section 27 21 00 –Network Systems

11. Section 27 21 33 – Wireless Systems

12. Section 27 31 00 – Voice Communications Switching and Routing Equipment

Volume 2: Division 27, Communications, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

13. Section 27 41 13 – Architecturally Integrated Projection Screens

14. Section 27 41 16 – Integrated Audio–Video Equipment

15. Section 27 51 13 – Paging Systems

16. Section 27 53 16 – RFID System

17. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements

18. Section 28 05 13 – Security System Cabling

19. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling

20. Section 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System

21. Section 28 16 00 – Intrusion Detection System

22. Section 28 23 00 – Video Surveillance System

1.02 REFERENCES

A. General

1. Codes, standards, and industry manuals/guidelines listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Consider such codes and/or standards a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.

2. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

3. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid unless otherwise specifically stated.

B. Codes: Perform Work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 27 in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest edition of governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. United States Department of Labor (DOL) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations (Standards ‐ 29 CFR)

a. Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards”

b. Part 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”

2. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 “Telecommunication”, Chapter I “Federal Communications Commission (FCC)”:

a. Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits

b. Part 24, Personal Communications Services

c. Part 27, Miscellaneous Wireless Communications Services

d. Part 68, Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network

3. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

a. Title 8, “Industrial Relations”

1) Chapter 3.22, “California Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (CAL/OSHA)”

b. Title 24, Part 3, “Building Standards Code”

1) Part 2, Basic Building Regulations

2) Part 3, California Electrical Code (CEC)



4. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)

b. NFPA 75, “Protection of Information Technology Equipment”

c. NFPA 255, “Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”, 2006

d. NFPA 262, “Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air‐Handling Spaces”, 2007

5. Other national, state, and local binding building and fire codes

C. Standards: Perform Work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 27 in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards as applicable:

1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings, including but not limited to the following standards:

a. UL 444, “Communications Cables”

b. UL 497, “Protectors for Paired‐Conductor Communication Circuits”

c. UL 497A, “Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits”

d. UL 497B, “Protectors for Data Communications and Fire‐Alarm Circuits”

e. UL 497C, “Protectors for Coaxial Communications Circuits”

f. UL 1651, “Optical Fiber Cable”

g. UL1655, “Community‐Antenna Television Cables”

h. UL 1666, “Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical‐Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts “

i. UL 1690, “Data‐Processing Cable “

j. UL 1963, “Communications‐Circuit Accessories”

k. UL 2024A, “Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies”

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568 Series:

a. ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.0‐2009, “Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises”

b. ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.1‐2009, “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards ‐ Part 1 General Requirements”

c. ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.2‐2009, “Balanced Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components”

d. ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.3‐2008, “Optical Fiber Cabling Components”

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐B, “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard”

a. Part 1, “General Requirements“

b. Part 2, “Balanced Twisted‐Pair Cabling Components “, including the following addenda:

1) ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2‐1, “Transmission Performance Specifications For 4‐Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cable”

2) ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2‐10, “Transmission Performance Specifications for 4 Pair 100 Ohm Augmented Category 6 Cabling”

c. Part 3, “Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard “

4. ANSI/TIA‐569‐B, “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces”

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA‐598‐B, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding”

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA‐606‐A, “Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure”


7. ANSI/J‐STD‐607‐A, “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications”

8. ANSI/TIA‐1005, “Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises”

9. EIA testing standards

10. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): a. ANSI/ICEA S‐80‐576‐2002, “Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor

Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems”

b. ANSI/ICEA S‐83‐596‐1994, “Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable”

c. ANSI/ICEA S‐87‐640‐1999, “Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable”

d. ANSI/ICEA S‐90‐661‐2002, “Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems”

e. ICEA S‐102‐700‐2004, “ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements”

f. ICEA S‐104‐696‐2001, “Indoor‐Outdoor Optical Cable”

11. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) : a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

b. Customer‐Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

c. Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM)

d. Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM)

D. Make a copy of each document readily available during the course of construction for reference by field personnel.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. The Definitions of Division 01 shall apply to Division 27 sections.

B. In addition to those Definitions of Division 01, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “As directed”: As directed or instructed by the Owner, or their authorized representative

2. “Cabling”: A system comprised of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware [e.g., cables, termination apparatus, patch panels, blocks, connectors, outlets, labeling, etc]

3. “Connect”: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, crossconnect wire, etc. to complete an electronic or optical signal circuit

4. “Cord”: a length of cordage having connectors at each end. The term “Cord” is synonymous with the term “Jumper” and “Lead”

5. “Furnish”: To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories

6. “Identifier”: A unique code assigned to an element of the Telecommunications infrastructure that links it to its corresponding record

7. “Install”: To set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together and test before turning over to the Owner, parts, items, or equipment supplied by contractor or others. Make installation complete and ready for regular operation

8. “Owner/Owner’s Representative”: County of Alameda

9. “Pigtail”: a length of cordage having connectors at one end



10. “Provide”: To furnish, transport, install, erect, connect, test and turn over to the Owner, complete and ready for regular operation

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. In circumstances where the Specifications and Drawings conflict, the Drawings shall govern quantity and the Specifications shall govern quality.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit required submittals to the General Contractor in the quantities and formats as required under the general contract. In the absence of requirements, provide as described in the following with reference to quantity and format.

B. Failure to comply with requirements in part or whole shall constitute grounds for rejection.

C. Submittal Description: Product Data

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the product data submittal prior to materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity: Submit product data as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit four product data submittals.

3. Format:

a. Submit each product data on letter size (8.5” x 11”) paper.

b. Package product data using a 3‐ring binder, plastic cover, or similar.

c. Clearly label the cover and spine of each submittal with the following information (e.g., if in a 3‐ring binder, insert the submittal information in the transparent front cover and spine pockets):

1) Client Name

2) Project Name and Address

3) Project Submittal Number

4) Submittal Name (e.g., “Product Data Submittal for Telecommunications Equipment Rooms”)

5) Specification Section Number (e.g., “Section 271100”)

6) Date of Submittal. Format: Month Day, Year (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

7) Contractor Name

d. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning of the submittal that lists materials by article and paragraph number (e.g., “2.02 Equipment Racks”).

e. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the submittal.

4. Content:

a. Cover Letter: Include a cover letter stating that the submittal is in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Sign (and stamped, if applicable) cover letter and list items and data submitted.

b. Product Information: Include manufacturer's technical data, product literature, "catalog cuts", data sheets, specifications, and block wiring diagrams (if necessary) to clearly describe the product’s characteristics, physical and dimensional information, electrical performance data, materials used in fabrication, material color & finish, and other relevant information such as test data, typical usage examples, independent test agency information, and storage requirements. Clearly indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional accessories, which are included and those which are excluded. At a


minimum, include products listed in Division 27. Include relevant products that will be installed, which are not listed in the specifications.

c. Seismic Calculations: Include anchorage calculations for floor mounted fully loaded equipment racks/frames/cabinets such that it shall remain attached to the mounting surface after experiencing forces in conformance with CCR, Title 24, Table 23P, Part II and with Section 2312 "Earthquake Regulations" of the "Uniform Building Code" for Seismic Zone 4 Area, Importance Factor of 1.25. Specify proof loads for anchors. A Structural Engineer registered in the State of California shall prepare Structural Calculations, and shall wet stamp and sign them. Forward calculations to the Owner for review and approval.

d. Resubmittals: Provide a cover letter with the resubmittal that lists the action taken and revisions made to each product submittal in response to Submittal Review Comments. No review shall take place for any resubmittal packages that is not accompanied by this cover letter. Failure to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package.

D. Submittal Description: Shop Drawings

1. Prior to the start of work, submit shop drawings and obtain written approval from the <Owner><Engineer> for the shop drawings submittal.

2. Quantity and Media: Submit shop drawings as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit four full‐size sets of shop drawings on bond or “eco‐bond”.

3. Format:

a. Produce shop drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD‐compatible files.

b. Use the same sheet size as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

c. Use the project’s title block – same as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

d. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

e. Use identical symbols as those in the drawings.

f. Screen background information.

g. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

h. Label each sheet in the shop drawings set with the Specification Section Number (e.g., “271523”).

i. Scaling:

1) Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’‐0”

2) Scale enlarged room plans at 1/4”=1’‐0”

3) Scale wall elevations at 1”=1’‐0”

4) Scale rack elevations at 1”=1’‐0”

4. Content:

a. Submit shop drawings if the proposed installation differs from the Contract Documents or the design intent.

b. Cover Letter: Accompany each shop drawing submittal with a cover letter stating that the shop drawings have been thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and are in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Have the person who prepared the submittal sign (and stamped, if applicable) the cover letter and include a drawing index. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of submittal.

c. Drawing Information: Shop drawing submittals shall consist of floor plans, enlarged room plans, wall and rack elevations, installation details, and other aspects of the system that



differ from the Contract Documents or the design intent. Use the same scales as the Drawings (e.g., 1/4" = 1'‐0" for enlarged room plans).

d. Seismic Calculations: Include anchorage calculations for floor mounted fully loaded equipment racks/frames/cabinets such that it shall remain attached to the mounting surface after experiencing forces in conformance with CCR, Title 24, Table 23P, Part II and with Section 2312 "Earthquake Regulations" of the "Uniform Building Code" for Seismic Zone 4 Area, Importance Factor of 1.25. Specify proof loads for anchors. A Structural Engineer registered in the State of California shall prepare Structural Calculations, and shall wet stamp and sign them. Forward calculations to the City of San Leandro for review and approval.

e. Resubmittals: Accompany resubmittals with a cover letter that lists the revisions made to each drawing in response to Submittal Review Comments. Failure to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package without review.

E. Submittal Description: As‐Built Drawings

1. Quantity and Media: Submit as‐built drawings as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit one full‐size set of shop drawings on bond or “eco‐bond” and submit one set of electronic files on CD‐ROM.

2. Format:

a. Produce as‐built drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD‐compatible files.

b. Use the same sheet size as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

c. Use the project’s title block – same as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

d. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

e. Use symbols identical to the symbols shown on the Drawings.

f. Screen background information.

g. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

3. Content:

a. Submit as‐built drawings that fully represent actual installed conditions and that incorporate modifications made during the course of construction.

b. Floor Plans: Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’‐0”. Floor plans shall show:

1) Locations and identifiers of telecommunications devices.

2) Size, quantity, location, and routes of pathways (such as cable trays, cable basket, conduits, cable hangers, and other cable support devices).

c. Rooms Drawings: Applicable rooms: Data Center, Network Patching Facility, Server Room, PBX Equipment Room, Entrance facilities, MDF, BDFs, IDFs. Room drawings shall show:

1) Floor layouts – scaled at either 1/4”=1’‐0” or 1/2”=1’‐0”, showing dimensioned placement of equipment cabinets/frames, rack bays, etc.

2) Overhead layouts – scaled at either 1/4”=1’‐0” or 1/2”=1’‐0”, showing dimensioned placement of overhead cable support (e.g., cable tray, cable runway, basketway, conduit sleeves, etc.)

3) Rack elevations – scaled at 1”=1’‐0”, showing placement of termination apparatus and other equipment installed onto rack bays

4) Wall Elevations – scaled at 1”=1’‐0”, showing dimensioned placement of termination apparatus (e.g., termination/crossconnect blocks)

F. Submittal Description: Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals


1. Quantity: Submit quantity of O&M Manuals as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit four O&M Manuals.

2. Format:

a. Submit each O&M Manual in a white, 3‐ring binder with front cover and spine clear pockets for insertion of the project information.

b. Clearly label the cover of each O&M Manual with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Manual Name (e.g., “Operation and Maintenance Manual for Telecommunications Cabling System”)

4) Date of Submittal. Format: Month Day, Year (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

5) Contractor Name

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning that lists the contents.

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the manual.

3. Content:

a. Tabloid (17”x11”) prints of as‐built drawings, as described above

b. Manufacturer's original catalog information sheets for each component provided under applicable Section (typically, this is similar to the accepted product data submittal)

c. Warranty certificate from the manufacturer and the Contractor

d. Manufacturer’s instructions for system or component use

e. Instructions and requirements for maintenance and warranty issues

f. Contents shall include requirements and methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Five continuous years, minimum, design and manufacture of the materials and equipment specified herein.

2. Manufacturer(s) of products and equipment specified herein shall demonstrate that they have a quality assurance program in place to assure that the specifications are met. Include in the program, at a minimum, provisions for:

a. Incoming inspection of raw materials

b. In‐process inspection and final inspection of the cable product

c. Calibration procedures of test equipment to be used in the qualifications of the product

d. Recall procedures in the event that out of calibration equipment is identified.

3. Conform to government standards on quality assurance for applications within these specifications.

B. Contractor Qualifications

1. A current, active, and valid and C7 or C10 California State Contractors License

2. Five, minimum, continuous years experience

3. Five, minimum, completed projects similar to scope and cost

4. Evidence of technicians qualified for the work



5. IBEW / CWA union affiliation

C. Materials

1. Materials, support hardware, equipment, parts comprising units, etc., shall be new, unused, without defects and of current manufacturer, materials

2. Use specified products and applications, unless otherwise submitted and approved in writing.

D. Regulatory Requirements

1. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules of National Board of Fire Underwriters wherever such standards have been established and shall conform to the regulations of the State Fire Marshal, OSHA and the codes of the governing local municipalities. Work under Division 27 shall confirm to the most stringent of the applicable codes.

2. Provide the quality identified within these Specifications and Drawings when codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent. The Contract Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

E. Drawings

1. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings except where other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

2. Drawings for the Work within this Division are essentially diagrammatic within the constraints of the symbology applied.

3. The Drawings do not fully represent the entire installation for the Communications System. Drawings indicate the general route for the cables and the location of outlets. The Drawings might not expressly show every conduit, sleeve, hanger, etc., but a complete system is required.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery

1. Do not deliver products to the site until protected storage space is available.

2. Coordinate materials delivery with installation schedule to minimize storage time at jobsite.

3. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged packaging and containers with identification labels (name of the manufacturer, product name and number, type, grade, UL classification, etc.) intact.

4. Immediately replace equipment damaged during shipping at no cost to the Owner, so as not to impact the construction schedule.

B. Storage and Protection

1. Store materials in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature and humidity conditions (as recommended by manufacturer) and protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

2. Comply with manufacturer's storage requirements for each product. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies as described in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) as applicable.

3. Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

4. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

5. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation or temperature related damage.


C. Handling

1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Handle with care to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring.

2. Do not install damaged materials and equipment. Replace damaged equipment at no cost to the Owner.

1.08 SCHEDULING

A. Unless otherwise specified, the construction schedules of the Sections within Division 27 may be combined into a single, overall schedule.

B. Do not proceed without written approval from the Owner or Owner’s Representative for schedule of this Work.

1.09 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. Project Management and Coordination Services

1. Provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate this Work with other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility include, but are not limited to, the items listed in this section.

2. Review of Shop Drawings Prepared by Other Subcontractors:

a. Obtain copies of shop drawings for equipment provided by others that require telecommunication service connections or interface with Work.

b. Thoroughly review other trades’ shop drawings to confirm compliance with the service requirements contained in the Division 27 contract documents. Document discrepancies or deviations as follows:

1) Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy

2) Submit a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy

c. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

1) Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material

2) Date of the review

3) Name of the individual performing the review

4) Indication if follow‐up coordination is required

3. Should existing conditions prohibit construction progress as submitted and approved, coordinate the adjusted installed locations with the other contractors (AV, electrical, etc).

B. Concurrent Installation

1. The network will be installed concurrent with the work of Division 27. Coordinate your Work with the Owner’s/network integrator’s work. For example, coordinate scope and dates for rack and cabling (terminations) readiness to allow the network integrator to plan and schedule installation of the network equipment (for example, access switches).

C. Role of the Engineer

1. The Owner has retained the Engineer’s services through construction. During construction, the Engineer will work with and assist the Contractor as follows (in general:

a. Review product data and shop drawings submittals for general compliance with the contract drawings and specifications.

b. Provide interpretation and clarification of project contract documents

c. Reply to (and ‘process’) relevant Requests for Information (RFIs)



d. Review changes as they arise, and confirm that the proposed solutions maintain the intended functionality of the system.

e. Interpret field problems for Owner, and translate between Owner and Construction Team.

f. Review the testing procedures to confirm compliance with industry‐accepted practices.

g. Observe the work for general compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that the installation meets the design intent of the system, and report progress to the Owner,

D. Use Of CAD Files

1. Should the Contractor require the Engineer’s CAD files to produce shop drawings and/or as‐built drawings, the Engineer requires the Contractor sign a CAD files release agreement.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warrant products and labor provided will, under normal use and service, be free from defects and faulty workmanship for period of 1 year from the date of acceptance. During the warranty period the entire system shall be kept in operating condition at no additional material or labor costs to the Owner.

B. Render service within 24 hours of system failure notification. Note deviations or improvements to this service at the time of bid and obtain written acceptance from the Owner, or Owner’s Representative.

C. Manufacturers of the major system components shall maintain a replacement parts department and provide testing equipment when needed. Provide complete replacement parts within a 24‐hour period during the warranty period.

D. Conformance to certain government standards on quality assurance may be required for some applications outlined in these specifications.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Materials used shall present no environmental or toxicological hazards as defined by current industry standards and shall comply with OSHA and EPA standards, other applicable federal, state, and local laws.

B. Product numbers are subject to change by the manufacturer without notification. In the event a product number is invalid or conflicts with the written description, notify the General Contractor in writing prior to ordering the material and performing installation work.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Division 01 in the Request For Substitution.

B. Only one substitution allowed for each product specified.

C. Where products are noted as "or equal", a product of equivalent design, construction, and performance will be considered. Submit product data – catalog cuts, product information, and pertinent test data –required to substantiate that the product is in fact equivalent to that specified. The burden of proof that the substituted product is equivalent to the specified product rests with the Contractor. Whenever material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with an industry specification (ANSI, TIA, etc), UL rating, or other association standard, present an affidavit from the


manufacturer certifying that the product complies with the particular standard specification. When requested by the Engineer, submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

D. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are equivalent in quality, utility and appearance will be approved as substitutions to that specified when “or equal” follows the manufacturers' names or model number(s).

E. When the Engineer accepts a substitution in writing, it is with the understanding that the Contractor guarantees the substituted product, component, article, or material to be equivalent to the one specified and dimensioned to fit within the construction according to contract documents. Do not provide substituted material, processes, or equipment without written authorization from the Engineer. Assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

F. Approved substitutions shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the work, or from provisions of the specifications.

G. Pay expenses, without additional charge to the Owner, in connection with substitution materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of substitution on self, subcontractor's or other Contractor's work.

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION

3.01 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required for the work.

B. Furnish materials and execute workmanship for this work in conformance with applicable legal and code requirements.

C. Perform tests required herein, or as may be reasonably required to demonstrate conformance with the Specifications or with the requirements of legal authority having jurisdiction.

D. Arrange and pay for review/inspection from compliance officials responsible for enforcement of applicable codes and regulations to establish that the work is in compliance with requirements of reference codes indicated herein.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions, stated under other sections, are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Staffing: Provide a qualified foreman to supervise the crew performing the work and who is present at the job site at times work is being performed.

B. Construction Meetings: Participate in construction coordination meetings throughout the course of construction to review the progress and to resolve issues and conflicts. Prepare and distribute meeting agenda for telecommunication issues prior to, and meeting notes after meetings, in a format acceptable to the Owner. Publish meeting notes within 3 business days following the meeting.

C. Scheduling: Perform the work within the approved construction schedule. Keep the construction schedule current, based on the results of the construction meetings. At minimum, schedule shall



document critical due dates, tasks, and milestones. Submit revised schedules for approval within 3 business days whenever there are modifications.

D. Inspection: Inspect the work after installation. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities, or designated inspectors, of work completion released for inspection. Document completion and inspection as required.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Complete work in a neat, high‐quality manner, relative to common industry practices, and in accordance to NECA “Standard Of Installation”.

B. Complete work in conformance to applicable federal, state and local codes, and telephone standards.

C. Coordinate the entire installation throughout the construction team (general contractor and subcontractors).

D. Manufacturer's Instructions:

1. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

2. Maintain jobsite file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product delivered to jobsite packaged with an MSDS.

E. Adjusting:

1. Make changes and revisions to the system to optimize operation for final use.

2. Make changes to the system such that defects in workmanship are corrected and cables and the associated termination hardware pass the minimum test requirements.

F. Protection

1. Protect installed products and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

G. Repair/Restoration

1. Replace or repair work completed by others that you deface or destroy. Pay the full cost of this repair/replacement.

2. Repair defects prior to system acceptance.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Remove unused, excess, and left over products, debris, spills, or other excess materials. Remove installation equipment.

B. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean condition with no evidence of damage.

C. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

D. Legally dispose of debris.

E. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's, or Owner’s Representative’s, punch walk.

3.06 FINAL INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

A. Punch Walks and Punch Lists

1. Punching the Work of individual Sections of Division 27 may be combined.


2. Execute a punch walk with the Engineer and the Owner or Owner’s Representative to observe Work.

3. Develop a punch list for items needing correction. Issue this punch list to Engineer.

4. Correct the Work as noted on punch list.

5. Execute follow up punch walk with the Engineer and the Owner or Owner’s Representative to verify punch list items have been corrected.

B. System Acceptance

1. Complete corrections (punch list items) prior to submitting acceptance certificate.

2. On completion of the acceptance test, submit system acceptance certificate to the Owner or Owner’s Representative requesting their signature and return of the certificate. Issue copies of the signed certificate back to the Owner or Owner’s Representative with copy to the Engineer.

C. Training

1. After acceptance, schedule a time convenient with the Owner, or Owner's Representative, for instruction in the configuration, operation, and maintenance of the system.

2. Provide 2 hours, minimum, of on‐site training by a factory‐trained representative. Document dates and times of training, and submit a “sign in” sheet for individuals trained, as part of the close out documentation.

SECTION 27 0526 ‐ COMMUNICATION GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Communications Grounding Backbone and bonding of communications infrastructure and equipment to Communications Grounding Backbone.

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 00 00.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the References requirements of Section 27 00 00.

B. In particular or addition to the codes and standards listed in Section 27 00 00, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”, particularly the following Articles:

a. Article 250: Grounding

b. Article 770: Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways

c. Article 800: Communications Systems

d. Article 810: Radio and Television Equipment

e. Article 820: Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment

3. Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunication Industry Association:

a. ANSI‐J‐STD‐607‐A‐2002, “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications”



b. ANSI/TIA/EIA‐606‐A‐2002, “Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure”

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. IEEE 467, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems”

b. IEEE P1100, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems”

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions as described in Section 27 00 00 shall apply to this section.

B. In addition to those Definitions of Section 27 00 00, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “BCT”: Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

2. “CM” and “cmil”: Circular Millionths of an inch

3. “GE”: Grounding Equalizer Conductor

4. “MBRGB”: Main Building Reference Grounding Busbar

5. “TBB”: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone

6. “TBC”: Telecommunications Bonding Conductor

7. “TGB”: Telecommunication Grounding Busbar

8. "THHN”: Thermoplastic High Heat‐resistant Nylon‐coated

9. “TMGB”: Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar


A. Base Bid Work: The Work under this section includes furnishing materials, installation, and coordination through the General Contractor with other trades for a Communications Grounding Backbone and for bonding of telecommunications equipment and apparatus to the Communications Grounding Backbone.

B. Communications Grounding Backbone System: The Communications Grounding Backbone System contains grounding busbars, grounding conductors, bonding conductors, and connecting devices (including but not limited to pressure connectors, lugs, clamps, or exothermic welds). These components, upon completion of installation and testing, shall provide the means of a low impedance path to earth for unintentional and/or stray voltages or spurious signals present on telecommunications media and equipment. The Communications Grounding Backbone System will consist of the following aspects (refer to Drawings for additional information)

1. TMGB: Locate the TMGB in the MPOE with the following connections:

a. MBRGB, via BCT (refer to Drawings for wire size)

b. Each TBB

c. Ground bushings installed on each entrance conduit opening within the space, via TBC

d. Overhead cable support within the space, via TBC

e. Metallic pathways (conduits, surface raceway, etc.) within the space, via TBC

2. TBB: TBB(s) are the primary bonding conductor between the TMGB and other TGBs provided throughout a single building. The length of TBBs shall not exceed 500 feet. The TBB shall route


from the MDF through each of the IDFs bonding each of the TGBs to the TMGB. Maintain TBB continuity and do not break continuity in order to bond to a TGB.

3. GE: GE(s) are bonding conductors between TGBs (or other elements of the grounding backbone) on a common floor. The length of GEs shall not exceed 500 feet. One GE shall occur every three floors. Maintain GE continuity.

4. TGB: Locate the TGB in each IDF with the following connections:

a. TBB

b. Building steel, via TBC

c. Each entrance conduit into the space, via TBC and ground bushings

d. Overhead cable support within the space, via TBC

e. Metallic pathways (conduits, surface raceway, etc.) within the space, via TBC

C. Performance Criteria for the Grounding Backbone:

1. Resistance from any point of the communication grounding backbone system to the ground electrode and to earth shall not exceed 20 Ohms.

2. Field test resistance and document, both electronically and printed, measured values.

D. Bonding: Bonding consists of TBCs within telecommunications rooms from the TMGB and TGBs to the following components:

1. Rack bay

2. Overhead cable support and vertical cable support

3. Wall‐mounted termination equipment

4. Conduit ground bushings

5. Exit pathways

6. Bonding jumpers between basketway, cable runway, and cable tray joints & splices, and between basketway/cable runway/tray and equipment racks

E. Conductor Gauge Criteria:

1. Size BCT as the greater of either 2,000 cmil per linear foot up to 3/0 AWG or the largest TBB.

2. Size TBB, GE, and TBCs as 6 AWG minimum, then as 2,000 cmil per linear foot up to 3/0 AWG.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Submittal procedural, quantity, and format requirements of Section 27 00 00.

B. Submittal Requirements at Start of Construction:

1. Product Data Submittal

2. Shop Drawing Submittal(s), if the Contractor’s installation intent differs from the Contract Documents or the deign intent

C. Substitutions

1. Requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Section 27 00 00.



D. Submittal Requirements at Closeout: Submit to the Owner at the time of project closeout the following and before certificate of final payment is issued.

1. Test Report: Submit computer‐generated test records of measured resistance values for inclusion into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

2. As‐Built Drawings, consisting primarily of the Communications Grounding Backbone (not necessarily each bonded component or apparatus)


A. Comply with Quality Assurance requirements of Section 27 00 00.


A. Comply with Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 00 00.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation as a BCT, TBB, GE, and/or TBC.

B. Type: THHN (or THWN)

C. Conductor: 1/C, annealed copper, stranded

D. Gauge: Refer to System Description for conductor sizing criteria.

E. Insulation: thermoplastic/nylon or similar, green in color

F. Flame Resistance: Meet the flame resistance requirements of IEEE 383, CSA FT‐4 and UL VW‐1.

G. Print on the Insulation: insulation grade, conductor gauge, and applicable UL jacket listings.

1. Or equal

2.02 CONNECTOR – “PARALLEL” TAP

A. Application: H‐type thick wall compression tap, for making conductor–to–conductor (e.g., TBB‐to‐TBC) permanent connection (pigtailing, tapping, or splicing). Connectors shall be UL Listed.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Panduit

a. #HTCT2‐2‐1; “H‐type” compression tap, run = #6‐#2, tap = #2‐#6.

b. #HTCT250‐2‐1; “H‐type” compression tap, run = #2‐250MCM, tap = #6‐#2

2. Or equal

2.03 CONNECTOR – “C” TAP

A. Application: C‐type copper thick wall compression tap, for making conductor–to–conductor (e.g., TBB‐to‐TBC) permanent connection (pigtailing, tapping, or splicing). Connectors shall be UL Listed.


B. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. #CTAPF4‐12‐C; CTAP for #6 AWG run –to– #6 AWG tap

b. #CTAPF2‐12‐C; CTAP for #2 AWG run –to– #6 AWG tap

c. #CTAPF1/0‐12‐L; CTAP for 1/0 AWG run –to– #6 AWG tap

d. #CTAPF2/0‐12‐Q; CTAP for 2/0 AWG run –to– #6 AWG tap

e. #CTAPF3/0‐12‐Q; CTAP for 3/0 AWG run –to– #6 AWG tap

2. Or equal

2.04 GROUNDING BUSBAR

A. General: Busbar shall be UL listed.

B. Standards: Compliant to ANSI‐J‐607‐A

C. Material: Solid copper

D. Holes: Predrilled, compatible with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing and with ANSI‐J‐607‐A recommendations for 2‐hole lugs.

E. Mounting: Wall‐mounted with standoffs. Standoffs shall insulate busbar from the mounting substrate.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Chatsworth Products Inc

a. #40153‐012; busbar, 12”L x 4”W x ¼”T, TMGB hole pattern

2. Or equal

2.05 CONNECTION TO STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Application: Exothermic welds shall be used for cable‐to‐cable, cable‐to‐ground rod, and cable‐to‐structural steel.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Cadweld

a. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type of weld

2. Or equal

2.06 CONNECTOR – COMPRESSION LUG

A. Application: Conductor‐to‐busbar and/or –rack (or other flat surfaces) connection

B. Type: compression lug, standard or long barrel, two‐hole (1/4 inch diameter 5/8 inch on center)

C. Manufacturers:

1. Panduit

a. #LCC6‐14JAW‐L; for 6 AWG conductor

b. #LCC4‐14ADW‐L; for 4 AWG conductor

c. #LCC2‐14AW‐Q; for 2 AWG conductor

d. #LCC1‐14AW‐E; for 1 AWG conductor

e. #LCC1/0‐14AW‐X; for 1/0 AWG conductor



f. #LCC2/0‐14AW‐X; for 2/0 AWG conductor

2. Or equal

2.07 CONNECTOR – SPLIT‐BOLT, MECHANICAL TYPE

A. Application: Conductor‐to‐conductor (or other round component) connection

B. Type: split‐bolt mechanical connector, for #6 to #3 conductor

C. Material: high‐strength copper alloy

D. Manufacturers:

1. Panduit

a. #SBC3‐C

2. Or equal

2.08 GROUND BUSHING

A. Plated malleable iron body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat and lay‐in grounding lug.

B. Manufacturers:

1. OZ/Gedney BLG

2. Thomas & Betts #TIGB series

3. Or equal.

2.09 BONDING STRAPS

A. Basketway Bonding Straps

1. Application: makes multiple sections of basketway conductively continuous

2. Conductor: Flexible braided straps with factory terminated connectors.

3. Manufacturer:

a. Cooper B‐Line

1) #WB2GC; bonding clamp

b. Or equal

B. Cable Runway Bonding Straps

1. Application: makes multiple sections of cable tray conductively continuous


3. Manufacturers:

a. Chatsworth Products Inc

1) #12061‐001

b. Cooper B‐Line

1) #SB6691x7¾

c. OZ/Gedney

1) Type BJ

d. Thomas & Betts


1) #3840 series

e. Or equal

C. Cable Tray Bonding Straps

1. Application: makes multiple sections of cable runway conductively continuous


3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B‐Line

1) #99‐N1

b. Thomas & Betts

1) #FB95

c. Or equal.

2.10 LABELS

A. Labels for Busbars

1. Labels shall be machine‐printable (such as by a laser printer or hand‐held printer)

2. Printable Area: 2” x 0.5”, minimum.

3. Color: White.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #C200X100FJJ; laser/ink jet labels for busbars, white

b. Or equal

B. Labels for Conductors

1. Labels shall be machine‐printable (such as by a laser printer or hand‐held printer)

2. Labels shall be adhesive‐backed and have a self‐laminating feature.

3. Printable Area: 1 inch wide x 0.5 inch high, minimum

4. Color: White.

5. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #S100X150YAJ; laser/ink jet labels for wire diameters 0.16” (#6) ‐ 0.32” (#1/0), white

2) # S100X225YAJ; laser/ink jet labels for wire diameters 0.24” (#2) ‐ 0.48” (#3/0), white

b. Or equal


3.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with the Execution requirements of Section 27 00 00.

B. Work shall comply with the International Building Code, International Fire Code, National Electrical Code, UL 467, and ANSI‐J‐607‐A standards, as well as local codes that may specify additional grounding and/or bonding requirements. If discrepancies between codes and/or standards arise, codes shall prevail, and then the more stringent requirement shall prevail, and as directed by the AHJ.



C. Install components to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and as required per UL listing.

D. Identify grounding and bonding conductors and components according to local codes.

E. Terminations must be accessible for inspection and maintenance during the life of the system.

3.02 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Prior to the start of this section’s work, examine pathways and communications rooms for completeness, compatibility with the work of this section, and readiness for connections with the work of this section.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. BCT, TBB, and GE Conductors

1. Install BCT, TBB, and GE conductors in conduit and in a manner to protect them from physical damage.

2. When routing BCT, TBB, or GE conductors through metallic conduit 3 feet or longer, bond the conductor to the conduit at both ends using a #6 AWG bonding conductor as a pigtail, an irreversible connection (preferably exothermic weld) for the conductor‐to‐pigtail connection, and insulated ground bushings at the conduit ends.

3. Install the BCT, TBB, or GE conductor without splices.

a. In the event that a splice is necessary, notify the Engineer in writing. Do not proceed with splicing work until the Engineer has accepted in writing the installation of a splice.

b. Locate the splice in a telecommunications space and ensure accessibility.

c. Perform the splice using an exothermic weld and an irreversible compression‐type connector.

4. Where shown on the drawings, connect grounding conductors to structural steel using exothermic welds. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type of weld.

B. TMGB and TGB Busbars

1. Mount busbars as noted on Drawings and using insulating standoffs. If not noted on drawings, install busbars onto wall at 24 inches AFF located within 5 feet of backbone pathways or rack bay.

C. Panelboard Bonding

1. Where a panelboard is located in the same communications room as a TMGB/TGB and serves that room, provide TBC between busbar and that panelboard’s Alternating Current Equipment Ground (ACEG) bus (where equipped) or the enclosure.

D. Bonding

1. Provide TBC and appropriate grounding hardware between the nearest TMGB/TGB and the equipment racks / rack bay, overhead cable support, vertical cable support, telecommunication conduits, primary pathways that enter/exit the room (if applicable), and other metallic telecommunication infrastructure components. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

2. Minimum size: #6. If longer than 25 feet, size TBCs based on length using 2000 cmil per foot, up to 2/0 AWG.

3. Install TBCs in a manner that will protect them from physical and mechanical damage.


4. Routing:

a. Route TBCs in the shortest possible path, using right angles for turns and routed parallel to building lines. Route on outside edges of wall plywood. Do not cut across the middle of the plywood taking space away from other equipment or components.

b. Utilize a minimum 1‐foot bend radius.

5. Connection to TMGB/TGBs:

a. Thoroughly clean busbars prior to attaching connectors to the busbar.

b. Fasten connectors (e.g., lugs) to the busbar using matching size cadmium bronze bolt, flat washer Belleville washer, and nut. Torque hardware set.

6. Rack Bay Bonding

a. Refer to Drawings for detailed diagrammatic requirements for bonding the rack bay.

b. Bond equipment racks, frames, frame bays, cabinets, server racks, and other similar support systems located within the same room or space as the TMGB/TGB to the busbar.

c. Use approved connectors for TBC‐to‐rack, ‐frame, and ‐cabinet connections.

d. Rack bays may be bonded in series using either of the following configurations:

1) Series: Provide a TBC from the TGB to the rack closest to the busbar; then provide a TBC to the other racks in the rack bay in series using a common lug/connection per rack. The rack shall not be used as a ‘conductor’ in the series connection.

2) String: Provide one ‘main’ TBC from the TGB along the length of the rack bay, and provide a pigtail from the ‘main’ TBC per rack. Use an irreversible connection (such as “C” tap) for the ‘main’‐to‐pigtail connection.

7. Overhead and Vertical Cable Support Bonding

a. Bond overhead and vertical cable support located within the same room or space as the TMGB/TGB to the busbar.

b. Provide either UL listed connectors and splice plates or UL Listed bonding strap to bond sections of overhead cable support for ground continuity. This requirement applies to basketway within a single telecommunication room.

8. Termination Field Bonding

a. Refer to Drawings for detailed diagrammatic requirements for bonding the termination blocks.

b. Bond termination blocks to the TMGB/TGB within the same room or space. Termination blocks may be bonded in series, with the block closest to the TMGB/TGB bonded to the busbar.

9. Metallic Raceway Bonding

a. If TBC routes through conduit longer than 1 meter, bond metallic conduit to conductor at both ends.

b. Bond metallic raceways for telecommunications cabling (conduit, cable tray, cable runway, and other metallic telecommunication infrastructure components) located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB to the nearest telecommunication grounding busbar.

3.04 LABELING

A. General Requirements

1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by the Engineer before installation.

2. Permanently label TBCs. Affix label as close as practical to each end of the conductor.



B. Label Format

1. Provide permanent labels with machine‐generated text; hand written labels will not be accepted.

2. Labels on TBCs shall fully wrap around conductors with a self‐laminating feature to provide permanent marking.

C. Identifier Assignment

1. Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Assign identifiers according to current practice and as approved by the Engineer before installation.

3. BCT and TBB

a. First field: “BCT" or “TBB” (the conductor type).

b. Second field: a unique sequential number, for example, “01”.

c. Example: “TBB‐01”

4. GE

a. First field: “GE” (the conductor type).

b. Second field: floor number, for example, “06”.

c. Third field: a unique sequential number, for example, “01”.

d. Example: “GE‐06‐01”

5. Ground Busbars

a. First field: “TMGB” or “TGB” (the busbar type)

b. Second field: the room’s identity (TR identifier’s suffix) where the busbar is installed; for example, “3A2.1”.

c. Example: “TGB‐3A2.1”

6. TBC:

a. First field: “TBC” (the bonding conductor type).

b. Second field: The room identity where TBC exists; for example: “A1.1”.

c. Third field: A unique sequential number; for example: “01”, “02”, etc.

d. Fourth field: describe the device, equipment, component, or raceway being bonded.

e. Example: “TBC‐A1.1‐01 (RACK BAY)”

3.05 GROUNDING BACKBONE RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENT

A. Measure ground resistance from each ground busbar to earth; record measurement. Provide additional grounding electrodes, bonding, and other elements as required to comply with resistance limits specified in this Section.

B. Submit computer‐generated records of measured resistance values to Engineer for approval and for inclusion into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.


A. Punch the Work of this Section compliant to the requirements of Section 27 00 00. Punching the Work of this Section may be combined with punching the rooms.

B. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 00 00.


SECTION 27 0528 ‐ COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Telecommunications building pathways.

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections paragraph of Section 27 00 00.

2. Section 27 11 00 ‐ Communications Equipment Rooms

3. Section 27 15 33 ‐ Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling

4. Section 27 51 13 ‐ Public Address System

1.02 REFERENCES


B. In additional to those codes, standards, etc., list in 27 00 00, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. ASTM A 510 Specifications for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel

2. ASTM B 633 Specifications for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

3. ASTM A653 Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process

4. ASTM A591 Specifications for Electrodepositing Coatings of Zinc on steel wire or sheets

5. ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

6. NEMA VE 2‐2000 – Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

7. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)

8. Telcordia (formerly Bellcore) GR‐1275‐CORE Central Office Environment Installation/Removal Generic Requirements

9. FS WW‐C‐563 Electrical Metallic Tubing

10. FS WW‐C‐581 Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit

11. ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc‐Coated

12. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated

13. ANSI/NEMA OS‐1 Sheet‐Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports

14. UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit

15. UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

16. UL 360 Liquid‐Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

17. UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

18. UL 1773 Termination Boxes

19. UL 514B Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings

20. UL 635 Insulating Bushings

21. UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing ‐ Steel



1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. “Cable Hanger”: A metal, most often steel, or fabric cable support device often shaped (section view) similar to the letter J. The device is available in different sizes supporting different quantities of cables, and is also available with different attachment hardware to be supported by different methods (e.g., wire support, beam flange clip, etc.).

C. “Cable Tray”: A continuous, rigid, welded aluminum cable support and management system. Available in different sizes supporting different quantities of cables, and is also available with different attachment hardware to be supported by different methods


A. Base Bid Work

1. The work under this section shall include the planning and coordination with General Contractor (and other trades) of telecommunications system pathways, the furnishing of necessary materials, and the labor & associated services required to install telecommunications pathways.

2. The Telecommunications Pathways consist of the following subsystems:

3. Cable Hangers – overhead (within the ceiling space) from the primary pathways to the device locations.

4. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.

5. Miscellaneous conduit fittings and products.

6. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

7. Pull and junction boxes.

8. Poke‐Thru Devices and Assemblies

9. EZ‐PATH Sleeves

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Conform to Submittal requirements as described in Section 27 00 00.

B. Quantity: Furnish quantities of each submittal as noted in Section 27 00 00.

C. Submittal Requirements at Start of Construction:


2. Shop Drawings Submittal: Consisting of proposed changes to pathway route plans.

D. Submittal Requirements at Close Out:

1. As‐Built Drawings Submittal.

E. Substitutions



A. Comply with Quality Assurance requirements of section 27 00 00.


B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray and cable channel systems (Article 318, NEC).

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70B, “Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance” pertaining to cable tray series of specifications.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of section 27 00 00.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Warranty requirements of section 27 00 00.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 CABLE HANGERS

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation within ceiling space for the support of telecommunications cables.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Cooper B‐Line

a. #BCH21 (or variation per installation method)

b. #BCH32 (or variation per installation method)

2. Erico

a. #CAT12 (or variation per installation method)

b. #CAT21 (or variation per installation method)

c. #CAT32 (or variation per installation method)

3. Panduit #JMJH2‐X20

4. Or equal

2.02 DROP WIRE

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation within ceiling space into hard concrete floor for the support of telecommunications support devices such as cable hangers.

B. Listings: UL 2043, for use in air handling spaces

C. Drop wire shall be equipped with pre‐mounted ceiling clip, fastening pin, and pre‐tied wire. Pin shall be 7/8”. Wire shall be 12 gauge.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Hilti #CC27 X‐AL‐H22P8T 4 ft. PT (100); drop wire assembly, 4 foot wire







2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit: Shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded continuously along the longitudinal seam and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Conduit shall conform to ANSI C80.3 Specifications and shall meet UL requirements.

B. Set screw type couplings: Electroplated, steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed concrete tight. Use set screw type couplings with four setscrews each of conduit sizes over 2 inches. Use setscrews made of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

C. Set screw type connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron UL listed concrete tight with male hub and insulated plastic throat, 150 degree C temperature rated. Use same setscrews as for couplings.

D. Manufacturers

1. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

2. Metal conduit:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.

b. Triangle PWC, Inc.

c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

e. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.

f. Anaconda.

3. Fittings:

a. Appleton Electric Co.

b. OZ/Gedney

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

e. Crouse Hinds.

2.04 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)

A. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot‐dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

B. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings and elbows: Only materials of steel or malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

C. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C minimum.

D. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and steel "lay‐in" ground lug with compression screw.

E. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat rated 150 degrees C.

F. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.


2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strips, interlocking spirally wound, covered with extruded liquidtight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and conforming to UL 360. Provide conduit with a continuous copper‐bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions.

B. Fittings: Connector body and gland nut shall be of cadmium plated steel or cast malleable iron, with tapered, male, threaded hub; insulated throat and neoprene "O" ring gasket recessed into the face of the stop nut. The clamping gland shall be of molded nylon with an integral brass push‐in ferrule.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS

A. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.

B. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable iron locking collar.

C. Expansion fittings: Multi‐piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement (2" in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall be UL listed for wet or dry locations.

D. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi‐piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75‐inch deflection, expansion or contraction in any direction and allow 30‐degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion‐resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit shall comply with UL467 and UL514. Manufacturer shall be OZ/Gedney Type DX, Steel City Type EDF or equal.

E. Fire rated penetration seals:

1. UL building materials directory classified.

2. Conduit penetrations in fire rated separation shall be sealed with a UL classified fill, void or cavity material.

3. The fire rated sealant material shall be the product best suited for each type of penetration and may be a caulk, putty, composite sheet or wrap/strip.

F. Standard products not herein specified:

1. Provide listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein specified for approval prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.

2. Listing shall include Manufacturers name, part numbers and a written description of the item indicating type of material and construction.

3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material and construction to similar items herein specified.

2.07 DUCT PLUGS

A. Application: Suitable for installation within conduits at termination/end entering into underground maintenance holes/pullboxes and into buildings from underground/exterior, opening into a telecommunications space. Duct plugs shall provide a watertight (up to 20 psi) seal around innerducts and cables.



B. Duct plugs shall be sized per conduit trade/actual size, per innerduct trade/actual size, and per cable outside diameter – as required per instance.

C. Duct plugs shall be re‐enterable and re‐usable.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco (Jackmoon)

a. #JM‐BLA‐35D400U; blank plug, for 4” conduit (conduit ID 3.4”‐4.0”)

2. Or equal

2.08 OUTLET BOXES

A. Telecommunications outlet box:

1. Provide one‐piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type box of size and configuration indicated on the Drawings.

2. 5‐inch square by 2‐7/8 inch deep shall be minimum box size.

3. Listing: C ETL US

4. Manufacturer

a. RANDL Industries 1) TB‐55057 Telecommunications Bracket Outlet Box 2) TB‐55017 Telecommunications Outlet Box

B. Standard outlet box:

1. Provide galvanized, one‐piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type box of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings.

2. 4‐11/16 inch square by 2‐1/8 inch deep shall be minimum box size.

3. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

b. Thomas & Betts Corp.

c. Raco, Inc.

C. Cast metal outlet body:

1. Provide galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required.

2. Provide boxes with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and neoprene cover gaskets (where required).

3. Manufacturer

a. Appleton Electric Co.

b. Crouse‐Hinds.

2.09 CONCRETE FLOOR BOXES

A. Construction: Seam welded 14 gauge steel.

B. Floor Box Fire Rating:


1. Fire‐rated per Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Record E171211; the steel box are not required to be “fire rated”. When the box is installed within a concrete slab the box will assume the fire rating of the slab.

C. Manufacturer:

1. FSR Inc.

a. #FL‐500P, Floor Box, 6 in depth.

b. # FLGRD2 for slab thickness less than four inches.

c. # FL‐GRD4 for slab thickness more than four inches.

D. Listing: UL Listed ‐ Scrub Water Approved. (Carpet over poured concrete floors only)

E. Cover Finish: Coordinate with Architect.

F. Pour Pan: when used in on‐grade situation, use a pour pan. Use FSR part # FLGRD2 for slab thickness less than four inches. Use FSR part # FL‐GRD4 for slab thickness more than four inches.

2.10 COMBINATION POKE‐THRU DEVICES

A. Specifications for combination AV/Communication/Power poke‐thru devices.

B. Type: Assembly consists of an insert and an activation cover; Evolution 8AT as manufactured by Wiremold/Legrand.

C. Insert: The insert body shall have a polyester based backing enamel finished interior (ivory). Device shall have channels to provide complete separation of power and communication services. There shall be three compartments that allow for up to three duplex receptacles that can be wired as a standard receptacle or isolated ground and/or twelve communication ports and/or ten of Extron Electronics MAAP and/or two AAP devices.

D. Fire stop material: The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain fire rating of the unit and the floor slab.

E. The insert shall have retaining feature that will hold the poke‐thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners.

F. Activation Cover: The activation cover shall be manufactured of die‐cast aluminum alloy and have a black powdercoat finish. Verify finish with architect prior to procurement and installation.

G. Gaskets shall be used under the trim flange to maintain scrub water tightness.

H. Mounting Accessories: Device shall have three locations to mount communication connectors. Mounting brackets shall be provided to mount communication connectors.

I. Device shall also accept 3/4", 1‐1/4" or 2" trade size flexible and rigid conduits.

2.11 COMMUNICATION POKE‐THRU DEVICES

A. Specifications for combination poke‐thru devices.

B. Type: Assembly consists of an insert and an activation cover; RC9 series as manufactured by Wiremold/Legrand.

C. Insert: The insert body shall have a single channel for support of communication services.



D. Fire stop material: The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain fire rating of the unit and the floor slab.

E. The insert shall have retaining feature that will hold the poke‐thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners.

F. Activation Cover: The activation cover shall be manufactured of die‐cast aluminum alloy and have a black powdercoat finish. Verify finish with architect prior to procurement and installation.

G. Gaskets shall be used under the trim flange to maintain scrub water tightness.

H. Mounting Accessories: Device shall have rated pass through device assembly for support of cable distribution from poke‐thru device to furniture system or other structure where cable terminates.

I. Device shall accept 2" trade size flexible and rigid conduits.

2.12 EZ‐PATH SLEEVES

A. The device shall have an F Rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed.

B. Wiring devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100‐percent visual fill of cables.

C. Wire devices to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together.

D. Manufacturer: STI or equal

1. #EZD44; EZ‐Path MAX fire rated pathway device 4 pack

2. #EZDP44; EZ‐Path MAX fire rated pathway device with wall plates and gaskets

3. #EZP144W; One pair single wall plate pack

4. #EZP544W; Multi‐gang wall bracket for 1 to 5 pathways

5. #EZDP33FWS; Single device, full kit includes wall plates and labels

6. #EZD33FWS; EZ‐Path Series 33 fire rated pathway device

7. #EZP133W; One pair (2) single wall plates with wall labels

8. #EZP233W; One pair (2) double wall plates with wall labels

9. #EZP333W; One pair (2) triple wall plates with wall labels

10. #EZP433W, One pair (2) quad wall plates with wall labels.

11. #EZP133PC; One pair (2) positioning clamps.

12. #EZD22; EZ‐Path Mini fire rated pathway device with wall plates and gaskets


3.01 GENERAL


3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive overhead hanger/support system prior to the start of work within this section and to verify conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Notify the General


Contractor of conditions that would adversely affect the installation, or subsequent utilization, of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Tray

1. Install cable tray system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recognized industry practices, and ensure that the installed system complies with requirements of the NEC and applicable portions of NFPA 70B, NEMA VE‐2 “Cable Tray Installation Guidelines” and NECA’s “Standards of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installation practices. Install cable tray system using connectors, support components, and other accessories by the same manufacturer.

2. Provide supports for cable tray system at a maximum forty‐eight inch (48”) on center, per a given route. Supports shall be dual support hangers, trapeze hangers or wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall be supported by structurally approved anchoring system, and shall consist of 3/8” (maximum size) threaded rod with appropriate hardware (nuts, washers, etc.).

3. Provide materials necessary to properly support system from existing building construction per manufacturer’s instructions, and meeting or exceeding recognized industry practices, and as appropriate for this project. Provide special accessories as required to protect, support and install a cable basket system.

4. Interface with Other Work:

a. Field verify route prior to installation.

b. Coordinate the installation of the cable basket system with other trades. Trapeze supports and ‘hanger rods’ (“all‐thread”), for example, may be shared to lower overall construction cost.

c. Do not support from ductwork, piping, or other equipment hangers.

5. Installation clearances:

a. Install system a maximum distance from any motor for a distance of up to four (4) feet.

b. Install system a minimum of twelve inches (12”) from fluorescent light fixtures, or other EMI sources.

c. Coordinate with architect and general contractor for side and top access clearance requirements to cable basket (minimum 12” clearance).

d. Coordinate with architect and general contractor for installation heights and clearances between cable basket and building structures.

6. Splice system sections using UL classified connector bolt, supplied by the same manufacturer. Splicing assemblies shall be the bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.

7. Bends shall have a minimum of a 12” bend radius.

8. Provide radius shields at each bend/corner of “T” type intersections and cross intersections.

9. Provide blind ends where cable tray termination is exposed (i.e. not at a wall)

10. Ground system per NEC 70 Article 250. Provide approved connection bolt to join system sections such that the spine of the system is considered a bonding jumper. Properly bond system to approved ground, as per NEC Article 250. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers, and at other locations where system continuity is interrupted.

11. Test wire tray support systems to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. See NFPA 70B, Chapter 18, for testing and test methods.

B. Cable Hangers



1. Install hangers in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that the installed system complies with requirements of the NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA 70B and NECA’s “Standards of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

2. Provide dedicated supports at a maximum sixty inches (60”) of separation per a given route. Supports shall consist of #12 drop wire or one‐quarter inch threaded rod, depending on the cable hanger’s requirement. Suspend wire, or rod, using components appropriate for the structure – e.g., powder‐actuated clip fastener for drop wire, beam flange clip or angled flange clip for either wire or rod, or an embedded anchor for the threaded rod. Do not share support (wire/rod) with other trades. Do not support the hanger on ceiling grid support wires. Do not support the hanger from ductwork, piping, or other equipment hangers.

3. Provide supports for cable hangers at sixty inches (60”) separation, maximum, per a given route. Supports shall consist of #12 drop wire or ¼” threaded rod. Suspend wire or rod using components appropriate for the structure – e.g., powder‐actuated clip fastener for wire, beam flange clip or angled flange clip for either wire or rod, or an embedded anchor for the threaded rod.

4. Provide a cable hanger within 24 inches of any transition downward.

5. Installation clearances:

a. Install hangers between six inches (6”) and twelve inches (12”) above ceiling grid.

b. Install hangers a maximum distance from any motor for a distance of up to four (4) feet.

c. Install hangers a minimum of six inches (6”) from fluorescent light fixtures, or other EMI sources.

6. Provide dedicated support cable hangers. Do not share support (wire/rod) with other trades. Do not support the hanger on ceiling grid support wires. Do not support the hanger from ductwork, piping, or other equipment hangers.

7. Install hangers six inches (6”), minimum, from light fixtures or other EMI source. Install hangers between six inches (6”) and twelve inches (12”) above ceiling grid.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall be used concealed for interior low voltage cables where run above suspended ceilings, in stud walls, furred spaces and crawl spaces.

2. Preparation

a. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas and shall not unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipe, nor block access to mechanical or electrical equipment.

b. Where practical, install conduits in groups in parallel vertical or horizontal runs and at elevations that avoid unnecessary offsets.

c. All conduits shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of columns and beams.

d. Conduits shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot water, steam line or other heat producing source or three inches from such lines when crossing perpendicular to the runs.

e. Exposed conduit installation shall not encroach into the ceiling height headroom of walkways or doorways. Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and below steam piping.

f. In long runs of conduit, provide sufficient pull boxes inside buildings to facilitate pulling wires and cables, with spacing not to exceed 150 feet. Support pull boxes from structure independent of conduit supports. These pull boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.


g. Provide all reasonably inferred standard conduits fitting and products required to complete conduit installation to meet the intended application whether noted, indicated or specified in the Contract Documents or not.

3. Installation

a. Install conduit in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

b. Minimum Conduit Size: Unless otherwise noted herein or on Drawings, minimum conduit size shall be 1‐1/4".

c. Install conduits in complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.

d. Install conduit free from dented, bruises or deformations. Remove and replace any damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

e. Conduits shall be well protected and tightly covered during construction using metallic bushings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends.

f. Clean any conduit in which moisture or any foreign matter has collected before pulling in conductors. Paint all field‐threaded joints to prevent corrosion.

g. In all empty conduits or ducts, install a “True Tape” conduit measuring tape line to provide overall conduit length for determining length of cables/conductors for future use.

h. Conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout.

i. Metallic conduit shall not be in contact with other dissimilar metal pipes (i.e. plumbing).

j. Make bends with standard conduit bending hand tool or machines. The use of any item not specifically designed for the bending of electrical conduit is strictly prohibited.

k. A run of conduit between terminations at wire pulling points shall not contain more than the equivalent of two quarter bends (180 degrees, total).

4. Penetrations

a. Cutting of holes: 1) Cut holes through concrete, masonry block or brick floors and floors of

structure with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Structural Engineer as required by limited working space. Obtain the approval of the Structural Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections.

b. Sealing: 1) Non‐rated penetrations: Pack opening around conduits with non‐

flammable insulating material and seal with gypsum wallboard taping compound.

2) Fire stop: Where conduits, wireways and other electrical raceways pass through fire rated partitions, walls, smoke partitions or floor; install a UL classified fire stop material to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.

c. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight.

1) For roof penetrations furnish and install roof flashing, counter flashing and pitch‐pockets.

2) Provide membrane clamps and cable sealing fittings for any conduit that horizontally penetrates the waterproof membrane.

3) Conduits that horizontally penetrate a waterproof membrane shall fall away from and below the penetration on the exterior side a minimum of two times the conduit diameters.



5. Terminations and Joints

a. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location.

b. Raceways shall be joined using specified couplings or transition couplings where dissimilar raceway systems are joined.

c. Conduits shall be securely fastened to cabinets, boxes and gutters using two locknuts and an insulating bushing or specified insulated connectors. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

d. Conduit terminations exposed at weatherproof enclosures and cast outlet boxes shall be made watertight using specified connectors and hubs.

e. Raceway seal: Inject into wire filled raceways, pre‐formulated rigid 2 lbs. density polyurethane foam which expands a minimum 35 times its original bulk. Foam shall have the physical properties of water vapor transmission of 1.2 to 3.0 perms; water absorption less than 2% by volume, fungus and bacterial resistant. Foam shall permanent seal against water, moisture, insects and rodents. Install raceway sealing foam at the following points:

1) Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations to prevent passage of water vapor (such as refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air‐conditioned spaces, etc.).

2) Where conduits enter buildings from below grade.

6. Supports

a. Provide supports for raceways as specified in Section 16070: Electrical Hangers and Supports.

b. All raceways systems shall be secured to building structures using specified fasteners, clamps and hangers spaced according to the NEC.

c. Support single runs of conduit using one‐hole pipe straps. Where run horizontally on walls in damp or wet locations, install "clamp backs" to space conduit off the surface.

d. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported using "trapeze" hangers fabricated from specified construction channel, mounted to 3/8‐inch diameter, threaded steel rods secured to building structures. Fasten conduit to construction channel with standard one‐hole pipe clamps or the equivalent. Provide lateral seismic bracing for hangers.

e. Fasteners and supports in solid masonry and concrete: 1) Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the

concrete.

f. After concrete installation: 1) Steel expansion anchors not less than ¼ inch bolt size and not less than 1‐

1/8 inch embedment. 2) Power set fasteners not less than ¼ inch diameter with depth of

penetration not less than three inches. 3) Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to

concrete ceilings.

g. Hollow masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. Bolts supported only by masonry block are not acceptable.

h. Metal structures: Use stainless steel machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.

D. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS)


a. Shall be used in low voltage located indoors, in damp/wet locations in accordance with NEC and local Codes.

E. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit (LFMC)

1. Shall be used in wet or damp locations for connections. Minimum size shall be 1‐1/4".

F. Duct Plugs

a. Provide duct plugs at all conduit ends. Install plugs per manufacturer’s instructions or guidelines.

b. Provide bushings and gaskets in each used duct port.

G. Outlet Boxes

1. Preparation

a. Locate pullboxes and junction boxes in accessible locations.

b. Install outlet boxes at the locations and elevations indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements of construction conditions.

2. Installation

a. Install boxes in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

b. Locate boxes as indicated on Drawings and as required for wire pulling, equipment connections and Code compliance.

c. Install junction or pullboxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.

d. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close‐up plugs as required to seal openings.

e. Provide cast metal boxes with gasketed cast metal cover plates where boxes are exposed in damp or wet locations or located in hazardous areas.

f. Use conduit outlet bodies to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit direction only. Do not make splices in conduit outlet bodies.

g. Provide intumescent acoustic putty as required to meet fire and acoustic rating within walls.

3. Supports

a. Support boxes independently of conduit system.

b. Support boxes, mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings, directly from the structure above.

H. Poke‐Thrus

1. Coring

a. Core one hole per poke‐thru through the floor deck at locations shown on drawings.

2. Installation

a. Provide poke‐thru into finished core hole. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Provide all accessories and components as required for a complete installation.

b. Provide adapter plates and fittings to support cable pass through at rating to match penetration.

I. EZPATH Sleeves

1. Preparation

a. Locate sleeves in accessible locations.



b. Install sleeves at the locations indicated on the Drawings. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements of construction conditions.

2. Installation

a. Install sleeves in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.

b. Locate sleeves as indicated on Drawings and as required for wire pulling and Code compliance.

SECTION 27 1100 ‐ COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Buildout / fit‐up of communications equipment rooms.

B. Related Divisions and Sections


2. Review Seismic Calculation requirements, specifically in Section 27 00 00, Article 1.05.

3. Drawings, general provisions of the Agreement, and Division 01 apply to this Section.

4. Consult other Divisions, determine the extent and character of related work, and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. In additional to those codes, standards, etc., list in Section 27 00 00, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. ANSI/EIA‐310‐D‐1992 Racks, Panels And Associated Equipment

2. NFPA National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 255 ‐ Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. ASTM E 84‐05 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. American Wood‐Preservers' Association (AWPA) Standard C27 Plywood ‐ Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



1. “UPS”: Uninterruptible Power Supply – a system that provides conditioned power with batteries acting as a continuous power source for equipment during a utility power interruption

2. “MPOE”. Minimum Point of Entry, according to WAC 269‐46B800



A. General: Communications rooms shall fall into one of the following space titles:

1. Entrance Facility

2. Main Distribution Facility

B. Room Functions:

1. Entrance Facility will serve the following functions:

a. Act as minimum point of entry (MPOE) for telecommunications utility (e.g., AT&T)

b. House telecom utility’s termination field(s) and interface between telecom utility’s facilities and premises facilities

2. Main Distribution Facility (MDF) will serve the following functions:

a. Houses network equipment (i.e. core switch/router, processing eqmt/servers) and voice system equipment (i.e. PBX and voice mail server)

b. House interbuilding and intrabuilding twisted pair and fiber optic backbone cabling and main crossconnect field

c. Houses network equipment (i.e. access switches) serving the horizontal cabling

d. Houses horizontal termination field – for voice/data/CATV – outlets served from this room (refer to floor plans for area served)

C. Work Covered Under Other Sections

1. Plywood backboards

2. Bonding

3. Grounding busbars

4. Power and cooling

5. Conduit, device boxes, and sleeves

D. Base Bid Work

1. The Work under this section includes materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required for the buildout / fit‐up of telecommunications equipment rooms, and includes coordination through the General Contractor with other trades

2. In general, the Work includes the following:

a. Submittals

b. Plywood backboards

c. Rack bays (equipment racks, vertical management sections, anchoring)

d. Cable, wire and patch cord management

e. Overhead cable support (Basketway – refer to Drawings)

f. Cabinets

g. Seismic bracing

h. Identification tags and labeling

i. Record Documents

j. Warranty



E. Coordination Requirements

1. Electrical: Coordinate layout with electrical contractor to ensure proper placement of lighting, sequencing of power service to rack bay, and other issues related to electrical trade.

2. Owner: Coordinate room‐ready requirements and schedule with Owner (to allow Owner to plan and execute installation of OFOI telecommunications/network equipment).

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittal requirements of Section 27 00 00.




2. Shop Drawings Submittal: Consisting of any proposed changes to room plans.

3. Sample Submittal: Submit sample of equipment rack label.

4. Seismic Calculations: Rack anchorage into concrete flooring with overall rack bracing, based on maximum rated load capacity.

5. Schedule Submittal: Submit proposed schedule of work (this schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for Division 27.


1. As‐Built Drawings Submittal

E. Substitutions






1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET HARDWOOD / PLYWOOD (AS BACKBOARD)

A. A HP Grade A Type II (graded in accordance with AWI Premium)

B. Materials shall comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.

C. The backboard must be 8’ x 4’ virgin plywood sheets, free from defects, and be fire rated.


D. Fire‐Retardant Treatment Processes: Plywood shall be chemically treated and pressure impregnated, capable of providing a maximum flame spread classification of 26‐75 and a smoke density no greater than 450, in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.02 FASTENERS, FOR PLYWOOD

A. Bolts:

1. Bolts shall be steel and shall comply with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6).

2. Hex nuts and flat washers shall comply with ASTM A 563 (ASTM F 563M).

B. Concrete Anchors:

1. Expansion anchor bolt and sleeve assemblies shall have a capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing inspecting agency.

2. Materials:

a. Carbon‐steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 Class Fe/Zn 5

b. Galvanized machine screws or bolts with standard expansion‐shield type concrete anchors

3. Manufacturers:

a. Phillips Drill Co. “Red Head” masonry anchors

b. Wej‐It Expansion Products Inc. “Wej‐It” concrete anchors

c. Or equal

2.03 EQUIPMENT RACK – 4‐CHANNEL TYPE

A. Application: Suitable for the support of termination apparatus, cable and cord management apparatus, network equipment, and other similar equipment, within a telecommunications room.

B. Material: High strength, lightweight 6061‐T6 aluminum, extrusion construction.

C. Channel: 1. Size: 3” deep, with flanges on each side (“double sided”) 2. Flange: 1.265” wide by 0.25” thick, with mounting holes 3. Mounting Holes: Threaded, spaced at 5/8” ‐ 5/8” ‐ 1/2”, compatible with ANSI/EIA‐310‐D 4. Threading: #12‐24 rolled, compatible with ANSI/EIA‐310‐D 5. RMU Markings: The RMU markings shall be permanently stamped on the ‘outside’ of both

flanges on both channels.

D. Assembled Rack: Rack shall be complete with four mounting channels, two base angles (3.5” high by 6” deep by .375” thick), two top angles (1.5” high by 1.5” deep by .375” thick), a bottom ‘center pan’, and a top ‘center pan’. Assembled rack shall be 7’‐0” high (overall) by 19” mounting width (20.25” wide overall), 28” from front mounting plane to back mounting plane, and shall contain 45 EIA mounting spaces (1.75”).

E. Load Rating: 1,000 lbs[CPI’s “Universal” QuadraRack features 2,000lb capacity], when evenly distributed for the height of the rack.

F. Finish: Black, powder coat

G. Manufacturer:

1. CPI [CPI “Universal” “QuadraRack”]



a. #50120‐703; 7’‐0”H x 19” x 29”D 4‐channel rack, 45 RMU, black

2. Cooper B‐Line

a. #SB8301908424FB; 7’‐0”H x 19” x 24”D 4‐channel rack, 45 RMU, black

3. Or equal

2.04 EQUIPMENT RACK – 2‐CHANNEL TYPE

A. Application: Suitable for the support of termination apparatus, cable and cord management apparatus, network equipment, and other similar equipment, within a telecommunications room.

B. Material: High strength, lightweight 6061‐T6 aluminum, extrusion construction.

C. Channel: 1. Size: 3” deep, with flanges on each side (“double sided”) 2. Flange: 1.265” wide by 0.25” thick, with mounting holes 3. Mounting Holes: Threaded, spaced at 5/8” ‐ 5/8” ‐ 1/2”, compatible with ANSI/EIA‐310‐D 4. Threading: #12‐24 rolled, compatible with ANSI/EIA‐310‐D 5. RMU Markings: The RMU markings shall be permanently stamped on the ‘outside’ of both

flanges on both channels.

D. Assembled Rack: Rack shall be complete with two mounting channels, two base angles (3.5” high by 6” deep by .375” thick), two top angles (1.5” high by 1.5” deep by .375” thick), and hardware. Assembled rack shall be 7’‐0” high (overall) by 19” mounting width (20.25” wide overall) and shall contain 45 EIA mounting spaces (1.75”)

E. Load Rating: 1,000 lbs[CPI’s “Universal” Rack features 1,500lb capacity], when evenly distributed for the height of the rack.

F. Finish: Clear

G. Manufacturer:

1. CPI [CPI “Universal” Rack]

a. #46353‐503; 7’‐0”H x 19” 2‐channel equipment rack, 45 RMU, clear [CPI “Standard” Rack]

b. #55053‐503; 7’‐0”H x 19” equipment rack, clear

2. Or equal

2.05 SEISMIC GUSSET, FOR 2‐CHANNEL EQUIPMENT RACK

A. Application: Seismic gusset kit for stiffening and stabilization of critical joints in equipment racks.

B. Manufacturer:

1. CPI

a. #11592‐701; gusset kit, black

2. Or equal

2.06 VERTICAL MANAGEMENT SECTIONS

A. Application: Suitable for cable routing, cord routing, and cord slack storage vertically (between the top and bottom) within a rack bay.


B. The vertical management section shall be double‐sided (i.e., the management section having covered cable guides on the front and flip‐retainers on the rear).

C. Size & Capacity: Refer to the Drawings for sizes and configurations. 7’‐0” high by 6” or 10” wide, with 5‐1/3” deep cable storage capacity in back and 6” cord storage capacity in front.

D. Mounting: The vertical management section having matching bolt holes for attachment to the rack.

E. Color: black (guides and cover).

F. Manufacturer:

1. CPI [ “MCS‐EFX” = front and back ‘MCS’ style, with ‘extra long fingers’ ]

a. #40095‐703; 7’‐0”H x 6”W, “MCS‐EFX” double sided, extended depth, black

b. #40096‐703; 7’‐0”H x 10”W, “MCS‐EFX” double sided, extended depth, black

2. Cooper / B‐Line [ “RCM+” ‘1U Finger’ style ]

a. #SB86086D084FB; 7’‐0”H x 6”W, double sided, black

b. #SB860810D084FB; 7’‐0”H x 10”W, double sided, black

3. Or equal

2.07 HORIZONTAL MANAGEMENT PANEL

A. Application: Suitable for installation into equipment rack for horizontal cord management. The horizontal management panel shall match (and fully integrate with) the vertical management sections.

B. The horizontal management panel shall be single‐sided.

C. Size: 1U or 2U high (refer to Drawings) by 19” mounting wide.

D. Color: black (guides and cover).

E. Manufacturer: 1. CPI

a. #30139‐719; horizontal management panel, single sided, 1U, black

b. #30130‐719; horizontal management panel, single sided, 2U, black

2. Cooper / B‐Line

a. #SB87019S1FB; horizontal management panel, single sided, 1U, black

b. #SB87019S2FB; horizontal management panel, single sided, 2U, black

3. Panduit

a. #NCMHF2; horizontal cable manager with removable hinged front cover, front only, 2U

b. #NCMHF1; horizontal cable manager with removable hinged front cover, front only, 1U 4. Or equal



2.08 EQUIPMENT CABINET

A. Application: Suitable for the support of network equipment, IT equipment (servers, storage devices, etc.), termination apparatus, cable & cord management apparatus, common communications equipment, and other similar equipment.

B. Frame Material: High strength, lightweight 6061‐T6 aluminum, extrusion construction.

C. Assembly:

1. The frame shall be cubic in design, with a rectangular front, back, top, bottom, and sides.

2. The frame shall be welded.

3. The frame shall have the capacity for four mounting rails, minimum.

4. The frame shall come equipped with two vertical cable management sections, fully compatible with the frame.

D. Static load rating: 2,000 lbs.

E. Finish: epoxy‐polyester hybrid power coat paint, black

F. Exterior (Overall) Dimensions: 84” high x 24” wide x 45.4” deep.

G. Mounting Rails:

1. 45U capacity

2. RMUs shall be marked on the mounting channel.

3. The mounting holes shall be pre‐threaded as #12‐24 rolled threading.

4. Caged nuts shall be pre‐threaded as #12‐24 rolled threading.

H. Manufacturer:

1. CPI

a. #T1051‐742; “T‐Series Steelframe” cabinet, black; overall dimensions: 84” high x 24” wide x 37.4” deep; equipped with: 1 solid top, no sides, 1 ventilated front door, 1 ventilated back door, 2 tapped rail pairs

b. #T1057‐742; “T‐Series Steelframe” cabinet, black; overall dimensions: 84” high x 24” wide x 37.4” deep; equipped with: 1 solid top, 1 solid side, ventilated front door, 1 ventilated back door, 2 multi‐mount rail pairs

c. #T107A‐762; “T‐Series Steelframe” cabinet, black; overall dimensions: 84” high x 24” wide x 45.4” deep; equipped with: 1 vertical exhaust duct, 2 solid sides, 1 ventilated front door, 1 solid back door, 2 multi‐mount rail pairs

2. Or equal

2.09 BASKETWAY

A. Application: Suitable for the support & management of telecommunications (and other low voltage) cables, either overhead or mounted vertically on a wall, within Telecommunications Room. Also overhead equipment rack bracing.

B. Size: Refer to Drawings.

C. Material: Provide high‐strength steel wire straight sections meeting the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A510, and formed into a standard 2 inch by 4 inch wire mesh pattern with


intersecting wires welded together. Provide rounded wire ends along sides (flanges) during manufacturing for safety of cables and installers. Provide straight longitudinal wires (no bends).

D. Finish: Provide electro‐plated yellow zinc dichromate straight sections in accordance with ASTM B633 SC2.

E. Splicing Assemblies: serrated flange locknuts, either yellow zinc dichromate (in accordance with ASTM B633 SC2 hardware) or stainless steel (in accordance with AISI Type 304).

F. Manufacturer:

1. Cooper B‐Line

a. #WB209; 9” wide X 2” deep basket type cable support

b. #WB212; 12” wide X 2” deep basket type cable support

c. #WB218; 18” wide X 2” deep basket type cable support

d. #WB412; 12” wide X 4” deep basket type cable support

e. #WB418; 18” wide X 4” deep basket type cable support

f. #WB424; 24” wide X 4” deep basket type cable support

2. Or equal.

2.10 CABLE RUNWAY

A. Cable Runway Straight Sections

1. Application: Suitable for the support & management of telecommunications (and other low voltage) cables, either overhead or mounted vertically on a wall, within Telecommunications Room. Also overhead equipment rack bracing.

2. Construction: Constructed of two longitudinal side elements – “stringer”, with elements periodically crossing between stringers – “rung”; Rungs spaced 12” on center, and welded to stringer.

3. Material (both stringer and rung): Steel tube, rectangular, 1‐1/2” by 3/8” by 0.65” wall thickness.

4. Size: 9’ 11‐1/2” straight sections; width: refer to Drawings.

5. Manufacturers:

a. CPI [ “Universal Runway” series ]

1) #10250‐709; 9”W cable runway, black




b. Cooper / B‐Line [ “Tubular String (Boxed)” series ]

1) #SB17U09BFB; 9”W cable runway, black




c. Or equal

B. Cable Runway Installation Accessories



1. Application: Installation accessories for use with cable runway.

2. Refer to Drawings for additional information and instances for installation.

3. Manufacturer:

a. CPI

1) #11301‐001; butt splice kit

2) #10487‐001; swivel butt splice kit

3) #11313‐001; 45‐degree junction kit

4) #11314‐001; 90‐degree junction kit

5) #11302‐001; junction splice (“T”) kit

6) #10488‐001; swivel junction splice (“T”) kit

7) #10608‐001; vertical wall bracket kit

8) #10642‐001; end caps

9) #11421‐709; wall angle support kit for 9” wide cable runway, black

10) #11421‐712; wall angle support kit for 12” wide cable runway, black 11) #11421‐718; wall angle support kit for 18” wide cable runway, black 12) #11421‐724; wall angle support kit for 24” wide cable runway, black 13) #11312‐712; triangle support kit for 9” and 12” wide cable runway, black 14) #11312‐718; triangle support kit for 12” and 18” wide cable runway, black 15) #11770‐709; end closing kit for 9” wide cable runway, black 16) #11770‐712; end closing kit for 12” wide cable runway, black 17) #11770‐718; end closing kit for 18” wide cable runway, black 18) #11770‐724; end closing kit for 24” wide cable runway, black 19) #10595‐712; rack‐to‐runway attachment kit, for 9” or 12” wide runway, black

20) #10595‐718; rack‐to‐runway attachment kit, for 18” wide runway, black

b. Or equal

2.11 POWER STRIPS

A. Horizontal Power Strip

1. Application: Suitable for installation into equipment rack and/or cabinet for power distribution, and oriented horizontally for a 1U 19” rack mounted installation.

2. Input: 120V 20A, with a 6’ (minimum) long cord. Output: 6 NEMA 5‐20R outlets.

3. Switched, Non‐switched or Metered

4. Current Rating: 20 Amps.

5. Manufacturer:

a. Geist

1) #BR100‐1025; rack‐mountable power strip, 20A, 10 NEMA 5‐20 outlets

b. Server Technology

1) #C‐10H1‐C2; Power strip, rack‐mounted, metered

2) #PTCORD‐7; Power cord, IEC 60320/C19 to L5‐20P, 10 feet

c. Cooper B‐Line

1) #E2PSRM6P15ANS; rack‐mountable power strip, 15A, 6‐foot input cord, 6 NEMA 5‐15R outlets, 1U


d. Or equal

B. Vertical Power Strip

1. Application: Suitable for installation into equipment rack and/or cabinet for power distribution, and oriented vertically for a “0U” installation.

2. Input: 120V 20A, with a 6’ (minimum) long cord. Output: <12> NEMA 5‐20R outlets (6” center‐to‐center spaced).

3. Switched, Non‐switched or Metered


5. Manufacturer:

a. Wiremold

1) #V24GB606; Power strip, 20A, 12 outlet.

2) #7712ULBC20R; 77” long, 12‐plugs, non‐switched power strip, 15’ cord with twistlock plug

b. Cooper B‐Line

1) #VPS24602012S; vertical power strip, 20A, 15‐foot input cord, 5‐foot strip with 12 NEMA 5‐20R outlets

c. Or equal

C. Vertical Power Strips, for Equipment Cabinets

1. Power strip shall be oriented vertically for a “0U” back‐of‐cabinet installation.

2. Input: 208V 30A. Output: Eighteen IEC/C13 and six IEC/C19 outlets.

3. Non‐switched.

4. Metered.


6. Manufacturer:

a. Server Technology

1) #CS‐24V2‐L30A; Vertical power strip, metered [ OR ]


8. Input: 120V 30A. Output: twenty‐four NEMA 5‐20R outlets.

9. Current Rating: 30A input, with two 15A breakers; 20A output

10. Manufacturer:

a. Cooper B‐Line

1) #E3A44B2‐1; 4‐foot vertical power strip, 12‐foot input cord to NEMA L530P, strip with 24 NEMA 5‐20R outlets

[ OR ]


12. Input: 208V 30A. Output: 36 (two banks of 18) NEMA 5‐20R outlets.

13. Non‐switched




15. Manufacturer:

a. Wiremold

1) #4B86B2‐2

b. Or equal

2.12 LABEL PLATES, FOR EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Label plate shall be suitable to affix onto top angle of equipment rack or onto the top front of a frame/cabinet.

B. Label plate shall be ‘engrave‐able’ stock melamine plastic laminate substrate.

C. Size (minimum): 1/2‐inch high by 6 inches long by 1/16‐inch thick.

D. Color: Black.

E. Lettering shall be white, engraved, 1/8‐inch high.


3.01 GENERAL



A. Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable for the construction scope of this section. Schedule work to prevent damage caused by other trades during the course of that other construction.

B. Prepare surfaces, such as floors, for permanent installation of products, such as racks.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Plywood Backboards

1. General

a. Coordinate the installation with the Owner.

b. Complete installation work in a neat, high quality manner and conform to all applicable federal, state and local codes, and all telephone standards.

c. Replace or repair work completed by others that is defaced or destroyed by Work associated with installation of the plywood backboards. Contractor shall pay for the full cost of this repair/replacement.

d. Obtain written authorization from the Owner at least one week in advance of any drilling that may produce dust or particles in the air such as seismic anchorage into concrete sub‐floor (so, for example, the Fire Protection System may be deactivated during such drilling).

2. Preparation

a. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

b. Discard all units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.


3. Plywood

a. Install plywood in accordance with WIC Custom or Premium Quality Standard, as scheduled. Ensure work complies with applicable codes and recognized standards.

b. Install plywood as indicated on Drawings to the dimensions shown. In lieu of no dimensions, install plywood from +0’‐6” to +8’‐6” above the finished floor.

c. Install plywood plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims.

d. Trim plywood around electrical and telecommunications/IT devices. Coordinate locations with the Electrical Trade.

e. Install plywood to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level; and with 1/16 inch maximum offset in flush adjoining, 1/8 inch maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.

4. Fasteners

a. Install plywood using bolts, concrete anchors, or other fasteners suitable for the purpose.

b. Provide nails, screws, anchors and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material, and finish required for application/mounting substrate.

c. Do not use aluminum fasteners.

d. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

5. Painting

a. Paint plywood backboards with a low‐gloss, white (or similar color) paint.

b. Mask the plywood’s fire rated symbol/stamp from the paint such that the symbol/stamp is still visible after painting.

6. Cleaning, Finishing, and Protection

a. Cleaning: Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi‐exposed surfaces. Touch‐up shop‐applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

b. Protection: Protect and maintain protection to ensure work will be without damage or deteriorating at time of acceptance.

B. Rack Bays

1. Equipment Racks

a. Provide parts and accessories required to complete each rack. Completely assemble racks, according to manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Anchoring/Bracing

1) Use concrete anchors approved by structural engineer.

2) Anchor racks to the structural floor at four points.

3) If required for seismic bracing, provide bracing devices (e.g., brackets, threaded rod with strut, etc.) attached to the wall or structure above using appropriate fasteners.

2. Vertical Management Sections

a. Provide vertical management sections as shown on Drawings.

b. Bolt vertical management sections to the equipment racks at the points designed by the manufacturer and per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3. Tolerances:

a. Equipment Rack: Verify dimensions to establish proper clearances as follows:

1) Front: 40” clearance from channel’s front mounting flange.

2) Back: 57” clearance from channel’s back mounting flange.



b. Provide the correct amount of space between each rack for proper installation (according to manufacturer’s written instructions) of the vertical management sections.

4. Horizontal Management Panels

a. Provide horizontal management panels as shown on Drawings.

b. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.

5. Accessories

a. Provide rack mounting screws – 1 bag of screws per rack, as come packaged with the rack product. Attach the screws directly to the rack (visible for the punch walk). This shall constitute turn‐over to the Owner.

C. Overhead Cable Support

1. Provide support devices (e.g., brackets and threaded rod with strut) for overhead cable management system; install per the manufacturer’s instructions and fastened to the wall or ceiling using appropriate fasteners.

2. Provide parts required for complete installation (e.g., mounting brackets, splice kits, hardware, etc.).

3. Tolerances

a. Install overhead cable support centered over the equipment rack, or as shown on the Drawings.

4. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate the installation of the overhead cable support with other trades. Trapeze supports and ‘hanger rods’ (“all‐thread”), for example, may be shared to lower overall construction cost.

D. Vertical Cable Support

1. Provide cable runway installed vertically at the locations as shown on the Drawings for use to support cables routing vertically within telecommunications rooms.

2. Provide parts required for complete installation (e.g., vertical mounting brackets, bolts, etc.).

E. Horizontal Power Strips in IDFs

1. Provide horizontal power strips as shown on Drawings. If not shown, coordinate the installation height with the Owner / Owner’s Representative. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.

2. Route the input cord within designated cable management and provide cord fasteners to prevent movement of the input cord. Plug the input cord into the receptacle designated by the Owner / Owner’s Representative.

F. Vertical Power Strips in Cabinets/Frames

1. Provide vertical power strips as shown on Drawings. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.

2. Route the input cords within designated cable management and provide cord fasteners to prevent movement of the input cord. Plug the input cord into the receptacle designated by the Owner / Owner’s Representative.

G. UPSs in IDFs

1. Provide UPSs as shown on Drawings. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.


3.04 LABELING

A. General Requirements: Labeling and identifier assignment shall conform to TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner before installation.

B. Equipment Rack Label Requirements: Provide one label plate per rack and cabinet/frame. Permanently affix label plate and position as shown on the Drawings; if not shown on the Drawings, center the label plate on the rack’s front top angle or the cabinet’s top front frame.

C. Identifier Assignment 1. Equipment Racks

a. Prefix: “RACK” b. First field: the IDF room identity; for example: “02.S”. c. Second field: the rack number; for example: “01”. d. Example; “RACK 02.S‐01”

2. Equipment Cabinets a. Prefix: “CABINET” b. First field: the row identity; for example: “A”. c. Second field: the cabinet number; for example: “01”. d. Example; “CABINET A01”


A. Punch the Work of this Section compliant to the requirements of Section 27 00 00.


SECTION 27 1313 ‐ COMMUNICATION BACKBONE ISP TWISTED PAIR CABLING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Backbone ISP (inside plant/indoor) twisted pair cabling.

B. Related Sections


2. Section 270811 Communications Twisted Pair Testing

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with References requirements of Section 27 00 00.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 for Definitions.


1. “ALVYN”: sheath type consisting of corrugated polymer‐coated aluminum shield with and adhered flame retardant jacket

2. “ARMM”: Bell system cable type (shielded riser)

3. “CMP”: Communications Media Plenum [NEC plenum rating]



4. “CMR”: Communications Media Riser [NEC riser/non‐plenum rating]

5. “ISP”: Inside Plant [cabling]

6. “PE”: Polyethylene

7. “PIC”: Plastic Insulated Conductor

8. “PVC”: Polyvinyl Chloride

9. “PVDF”: Polyvinylidene fluoride


A. Work Covered Under Other Sections

1. Pathways: The communications pathways (backbone conduits, riser sleeves, basketway, cable tray, etc.) work will be covered under another Section. Refer to the Drawings for size/capacity and route information.

2. Rooms: Build out (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable runway, etc.) of the rooms (MDF, BDFs, IDFs) will be covered under another Section. Refer to the Drawings for build out information.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working telecommunications backbone twisted pair cabling system installation described in these specifications and shown on related Drawings.

2. The Drawings are diagrammatic in nature, and require shop drawings to complete the detailed design of the telecommunications infrastructure.

3. Consider backbone cabling shown on the Drawings as base bid work, unless otherwise noted. This includes terminations at both ends.

4. In general, the base bid work includes:

a. Submittals

b. Backbone inside plant (riser) twisted pair (copper) cables and termination apparatus

c. Cable management

d. Crossconnects

e. Cable identification tags and system labeling

f. Record Documents

g. Warranty

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittal Requirements Prior To Start Of Construction:

1. Product Data Submittal, indicating conformance with NEC, UL, TIA/EIA listings, certifications and specifications.

2. Shop Drawings Submittal, consisting of proposed changes to cable routing, or termination locations/configurations.

C. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:

1. As‐Built Drawings


2. Crossconnection records/cut sheets

3. O & M Manuals

D. Substitutions


1.06 QUALILTY ASSURANCE



1. In addition to the Contractor Qualifications requirements of Section 27 00 00, the Contractor shall be manufacturer certified to install the proposed and submitted cabling system and to provide an extended warranty. Provide satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the bid submission.



1.08 WARRANTY

A. The telecommunications cabling system, as specified in this section, shall carry a 15‐year (minimum) extended system warranty. This extended warranty shall cover parts and labor for the duration of the extended warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover electrical performance of cabling system to the specific category per ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐B performance criteria for backbone cabling.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. CommScope SYSTIMAX and/or UNIPRISE (No substitutions allowed)

B. Panduit BERK‐TEK Certification Plus System (No substitutions allowed).

2.02 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLES – PLENUM

A. Application:

1. Suitable for indoor installation, between floors in vertical riser system, under access flooring, and through overhead ceiling space (in cable tray, conduit, & hangers).

2. Each and every cable run shall be a continuous single cable, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

3. Twisted pair PIC type, air core cable.

B. Conductors and Insulation:

1. Annealed solid copper, 24 AWG

2. Fully insulated, consisting of a flame‐retardant PVC or other thermoplastic. CommScope SYSTIMAX = PVC

BerkTek = thermoplastic

General = semi‐rigid PVC



3. Conductors shall be twisted into pairs. Twisted pairs shall be stranded into 25‐pair bundles.

4. Color Coding: Twisted pairs and units individually color‐coded to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S‐80‐576, and EIA‐230).

C. Core and Sheath:

1. Cable sheath consisting of an overall flame‐retardant PVDF, or equivalent, jacket.

D. Cable shall be NEC rated as CMP, and UL listed as such.

E. Electrical performance of the twisted pairs and overall cable shall comply with TIA/EIA‐568‐A requirements for Category 3 UTP cabling.

F. Manufacturers:

1. CommScope SYSTIMAX

a. #2010 series cables

2. BerkTek

a. “Multi‐Pair PowerSum” series cables


a. #2010 025BWH R1000 (107 765 992); 25 pair, 24 AWG, white, CMP rated

4. BerkTek ‐

a. #10032111; 25 pair, 24 AWG, gray, CMP rated

5. Substitutions will not be allowed.

2.03 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLES – NON‐PLENUM

A. Application:

1. Cable suitable for indoor installation, between floors in vertical riser system, under access flooring, and through overhead ceiling space (in cable tray, conduit, & hangers).

2. Each and every cable run shall be a continuous single cable, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

3. Twisted pair PIC type, air core cable.

B. Conductors:

1. Annealed solid copper, 24 AWG

2. Fully insulated, consisting of a flame‐retardant PVC or other thermoplastic. SYSTIMAX = PVC

BerkTek = thermoplastic

General = semi‐rigid PVC

3. Conductors twisted into pairs are stranded into 25‐pair bundles and into units.

4. Color Coding: Twisted pairs and units individually color‐coded to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S‐80‐576, and EIA‐230).

C. Core & Sheath:

1. Cable sheath shall consist of an overall flame‐retardant PVC, or equivalent, jacket.

2. NEC rated as CMR and UL listed as such.


D. Performance:

1. Electrical performance of the twisted pairs and overall cable that complies with TIA/EIA‐568‐A requirements for Category 3 UTP cabling.

E. Manufacturers:

1. CommScope SYSTIMAX #1010 series cables

2. BerkTek “Multi‐Pair PowerSum” series cables

3. General Cable Category 3 Non‐Plenum series cables


a. #1010 025AGY R1000 (106824329); 25 pair, 24 AWG, gray, CMR rated

5. BerkTek

a. #10032396; 25 pair, 24 AWG, gray, CMR rated

6. No substitutions will be not allowed

2.04 TERMINATION APPARATUS – “110 BLOCK” TYPE

A. Application:

1. Termination apparatus shall be “110 block” type.

2. Termination apparatus shall be suitable for installation within a telecommunication facility for the termination of the backbone twisted pair cables specified within this Section.

3. Termination apparatus shall be vertically oriented and suitable for wall‐mount installations.

4. Termination apparatus, accompanied by the quantity of management panels, shall provide for both horizontal and vertical routing of cords and crossconnect wires, as shown on the drawings.

B. Manufacturer:


a. #110PA2‐300FT; 110 Block kit, 300 pair, 5‐pair based

b. #188D3; vertical management panel for 300‐pr block

c. #188B2; horizontal management panel, with legs

2. Panduit

a. #P110KT3005Y; 110 Block kit, 300 pair, 5‐pair based

b. #P110VCM300; vertical management panel for 300‐Pr kit

c. #P110VCM; horizontal management panel

2.05 CROSSCONNECT WIRE

A. Crossconnect wire shall be suitable for installation within a telecommunication facility and fully compatible with the termination apparatus specified within this Section.

B. Crossconnect wire shall be manufactured from a single, continuous length of insulated wire, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere. Factory splices of insulated conductors are expressly prohibited.

C. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 24 AWG conductors of solid copper. Fully insulated conductors with a flame retardant thermoplastic material (such as PVC, or equivalent).



2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair), individually color‐coded.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Belden B‐Plus Crossconnect Wire

a. #22208250; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Wh/Bl

b. #22208253; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Wh/Bl, spool

c. #22208260; crossconnect wire, 2 pair, Wh/Bl//Wh/Or

d. #22208266; crossconnect wire, 3 pair, Wh/Bl//Wh/Or//Wh/Gr

e. #22208270; crossconnect wire, 4 pair, Wh/Bl//Wh/Or//Wh/Gr//Wh/Br


a. #CCW‐F 1/24 S1000; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Red / Red‐Whi

b. #CCW‐F 1/24 S1000; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Blu / Blu‐Whi

3. General

a. #7023864; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Whi / Whi‐Red

b. #2114385; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Yel / Yel‐Red

c. #2114200; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Grn / Grn‐Red

d. #2114369; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Blu / Blu‐Red

e. #7023708; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Blk / Blk‐Red

f. #7041916; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Blk‐Yel / Yel‐Blk

g. #7023733; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Org‐Whi / Whi‐Org

h. #7023781; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Grn‐Whi / Whi‐Grn

i. #7036759; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Blk‐Whi / Whi‐Blk

j. #7023716; crossconnect wire, 2 pair, Blk‐Whi/Whi‐Blk // Org‐Whi/Whi‐Org 22 AWG

k. #2114363; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Org / Org‐Whi

l. #2114364; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Grn / Grn‐Whi

4. Superior Essex

a. #12‐101‐13; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Whi

b. #12‐102‐13; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Red‐Yel

c. #12‐103‐13; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Blu

d. #12‐104‐13; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Vio‐Blu

e. #102‐105‐13; crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Blk‐Whi

5. Or equal

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Backbone ISP Cable Labels

1. Labels shall be machine‐printable via a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand‐held printer


3. Color (print area): White.


4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #S050X075YAJ; laser/ink jet labels, 0.5” X 0.75”, for cable diameters 0.12”‐0.16”, white




5) #S200X225YAJ; laser/ink jet labels, 2” X 2.25”, for cable diameters 0.24”‐0.48”, white

6) #S200X400YAJ; laser/ink jet labels, 2” X 4”, for cable diameters 0.32”‐0.95”, white

b. Or equal.

B. Termination Apparatus Labels

1. General: Machine printable labels with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand‐held printer, and having an adhesive backing.

2. Color: White for backbone termination field; gray for 2nd level backbone termination field.

3. Manufacturer:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX

1) #110WA2‐4500L; 5‐pair marked label inserts, white

b. Panduit

1) #DSL110; label inserts, white

c. Or equal.


3.01 GENERAL



A. Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable to accept the backbone twisted pair cables and terminations.

B. Pathways: Prior to installation verify that pathways and supporting devices, provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports, devices, etc., have been removed. Verify dimensions of pathways, including length (for example, “True Tape” the conduits).

C. Cable Integrity: Prior to installation, verify the twisted pair cable is fully operational – both cable sheath and twisted pair conductors. Documentation of pre‐installation testing is not a close out requirement, and is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Backbone Cable Installation and Routing

1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

2. Maximum cable length of 500 meters from the termination within the MPOE to the termination in Telecommunications Room.

3. Placement

a. Place cables within designated pathways.



b. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and after installation.

c. Maintain pulling tension within manufacturer's limits.

d. Place and suspend cables in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables if damaged during installation

e. Place a pull rope along with cables where run in conduit and spare capacity still exists in the conduit. Tie off ends of the pull rope.

4. Routing

a. When routing horizontally within telecommunications rooms, utilize the overhead cable support. When routing vertically within telecommunications rooms, utilize the vertical cable support and provide cable ties every 24 inches on center using.

b. Route cables a minimum of 6" away from power sources to reduce interference from EMI.

5. Termination

a. Provide 15 feet cable slack loop at each end of the run. Store slack in overhead cable support or as noted on Drawings.

b. Properly relieve strain from cables at termination points per manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Terminate twisted pairs onto the termination apparatus in accordance with manufacturer’s latest instructions and TIA/EIA‐568‐B standard installation practices.

d. Perform post‐installation testing as described in the Telecommunication Testing specification.

B. Termination Apparatus

1. Provide accessories required for a complete installation.

2. Install the termination apparatus to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. If the dimensions are not shown, install the termination apparatus such that the bottom row of terminations is no lower than 24 inches (+/‐ 3”) AFF and the top row of terminations is no higher than 60 inches (+/‐ 3”) AFF.

3. Mount termination apparatus plumb and square.

C. Crossconnects

1. In the MDF, provide one 1‐pair crossconnect to length from the equipment field to the backbone field based on the records from the IDF crossconnections.

2. Utilize the horizontal and vertical management components to properly route the crossconnect wire.

3. Color:

a. For digital handsets, provide: White‐Blue / Blue‐White

b. For analog handsets, provide: White‐Red / Red‐White

4. Splices in crossconnect wire are prohibited.

3.04 LABELING


1. Labeling and identifier assignment and the label colors shall conform to the TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner or Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Provide permanent and machine‐generated labels; hand written labels will not be accepted.


B. Cable Labels

1. Label Format:

a. Label type shall be wrap‐around self‐laminating.

b. Label color shall be white background with clear laminating window.

c. Text color shall be black; text height shall be 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.

2. Provide labels on both ends of cables. Fully wrap label around the cable jacket. Install labels no more than 4 inches from the edge of the cable jacket. Install labels such that they are visible by a technician from a normal stance.

C. Termination Apparatus Labels

1. Use labels included in the product packaging. For substitutions, request approval by the Engineer.

2. Label color shall be white for respective field type, per TIA/EIA‐606‐A.

3. Text color shall be black, 3/32” high, minimum, or #10 font size.

D. Identifier Assignment

1. General: Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Backbone ISP Twisted Pair Cables

a. The first field shall identify the cable type: “CBT” (for Cable, Backbone, Twisted pair).

b. The second field shall identify the originating termination room identifier as shown on the plans; e.g., “BDF2.1”.

c. The third field shall identify the ending termination room identifier as shown on the plans; e.g., “IDF2.2”.

d. The fourth field shall identify the beginning and ending pair counts.

e. Identifier Example: “CBT‐BDF2.1‐IDF2.2‐0401‐0600”

3. Termination Positions at the 110 Termination Blocks

a. The first field shall identify the origination / destination room; for example “TO IDF2.2”.

b. The second field shall identify the pair count range; for example, “0401‐0450”

c. Identifier Example: “TO IDF2.2 0401 ‐ 0450”.



B. Remove and replace with new, at no cost to the Owner, cables or conductors failing to meet the indicated standards and not passing the testing requirements of Section 270811. The Owner, or Owner’s Representative, will not accept the installation until testing has indicated a 100% availability of all cables and conductors or the Owner or Owner’s Representative has approved any deviation from this requirement.

C. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 00 00.

SECTION 27 1323 ‐ COMMUNICATION BACKBONE ISP FIBER CABLING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Backbone ISP (indoor) fiber optic cabling.



B. Related Sections


1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with References requirements of Section 27 00 00.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



1. “MM”: Multimode [fiber type]

2. “OFCP”: Optical Fiber Conductive Plenum, plenum rating

3. “OFCR”: Optical Fiber Conductive Riser, non‐plenum riser rating

4. “OFNP”: Optical Fiber Non‐conductive Plenum, plenum rating

5. “OFNR”: Optical Fiber Non‐conductive Riser, non‐plenum riser rating

6. “OFN”: Optical Fiber Non‐conductive, general purpose indoor rating

7. “PVC”: PolyVinyl Chloride

8. “SM”: Singlemode [fiber type]



1. Pathways: The communications pathways (backbone conduits, riser sleeves, basketway, cable tray, etc.) work will be covered under another Section. Refer to the drawings for size/capacity and route information.

2. Rooms: Build out (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable support, etc.) of the telecommunications rooms will be covered under another Section. Refer to the drawings for build out information.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working telecommunications backbone fiber optic cabling system installation described in these specifications and shown on related drawings.

2. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature, and require shop drawings to complete the detailed design of the telecommunications infrastructure.

3. Consider Backbone cabling, as shown on drawings, as base bid work, unless otherwise noted, including terminations at both ends.


a. Submittals

b. Backbone inside plant (riser) fiber optic cables and terminations

c. Innerduct

d. Cable management

e. Crossconnections / patching.

f. Cable identification tags and system labeling


g. Record Documents

h. Warranty

1.05 SUBMITTALS




2. Schedule Submittal, consisting of proposed schedule of work. This schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for Division 27.

3. Shop Drawings Submittal, consisting of proposed changes to cable routing, or termination locations/configurations

C. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:

1. Copy of the manufacturer’s printed reel documentation, including the following.

a. Manufacturer’s reel number

b. Manufacturer’s traceable batch number

c. Length of the fiber cable on the reel

d. Maximum attenuation

e. Minimum bandwidth



4. O & M Manuals

D. Substitutions





1. In addition to the Contractor Qualifications requirements of Section 27 00 00, the Contractor shall be manufacturer certified to install the proposed and submitted cabling system and to provide an extended warranty. Provide satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the bid submission.



1.08 WARRANTY

A. The backbone fiber optic cabling system, as specified in this section, shall carry a 15‐year (minimum) extended system warranty. This extended warranty shall cover parts and labor for the duration of the extended warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover optical performance of cabling system.



PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. CommScope SYSTIMAX (substitutions allowed)

B. Corning Cable Systems (substitutions allowed)

C. Leviton (substitutions allowed)

D. Panduit (substitutions allowed).

2.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE – PLENUM RATED

A. Application:

1. Cable shall be suitable for indoor installation, between floors in vertical riser system, under access flooring, and through overhead ceiling space (in basketway, cable tray, conduit, and/or hangers).

2. Optical transmission performance shall not be significantly affected by environmental fluctuations, installation, or aging.

3. Materials shall not evolve hydrogen in quantities that will increase light attenuation.

B. Multimode 50/125 μm fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following geometry criteria:

1. Core diameter = 50 μm, ±3.0 μm

2. Cladding diameter = 125 μm, ±1.0 μm

3. Core/Cladding Concentricity = ≤ 3 μm

4. Minimum Tensile Strength = 100,000 psi

C. Multimode 50/125 μm fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: <

1. Attenuation = 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm wavelengths, maximum

2. Overfilled Bandwidth = 1,500 MHz•km at 850 nm and 500 MHz•km at 1300 nm wavelengths, minimum

3. Effective Modal Bandwidth = 2,000 MHz•km at 850 nm and 500 MHz•km at 1300 nm wavelengths, minimum

D. Primary Coating:

1. Each fiber shall be completely covered with a “primary coating” (acrylate material).

2. Coating diameter = 250 μm, ±5 μm

E. Buffering:

1. Each coated fiber shall be fully covered with a material extruded over and directly onto the coating. This shall be the tight buffer. Tight buffer diameter = 900 μm, ±5 μm. Material = PVC, or equivalent flame retardant thermoplastic.

2. Buffered strands shall be individually color‐coded to meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA‐598‐A‐1995. (Also, ref. ANSI/ICEA S‐83‐596‐1994, and EIA‐230)

F. Cable Sheath:

1. Strength Element: The cable shall have an internal strength element such as aramid yarn (e.g., Kevlar).


2. Outer Jacket: The cable shall have a seamless outer jacket (material = LS‐PVC, or equivalent) applied to and completely covering the internal components (fiber strands, strength element, other).

3. Tensile Strength: The cable shall have a 150‐lb, minimum, rated load.

4. Flame Rating: NEC (Article 770) rated as OFNP, and UL listed as such.

G. Manufacturers:


a. LazrSPEED 550 series cables

b. LazrSPEED 300 series cables

2. Corning Cable Systems

a. Pretium 550 MIC series cables

b. Pretium 300 MIC series cables

3. CommScope SYSTIMAX <LazrSPEED 550>

a. #5301‐024A‐XPAQ (760 012 146); 24 strand, 50/125�m, aqua, OFNP rated

4. CommScope SYSTIMAX <LazrSPEED 300>

a. #5301‐024A‐ZPAQ (700 009 699); 24 strand, 50/125�m, aqua, OFNP rated

5. Corning Cable Systems < Pretium 550>

a. #024S88‐33190‐29; 24 strand, 50/125�m, aqua, OFNP rated

6. Corning Cable Systems <Pretium 300>

a. #024S88‐33180‐29; 24 strand, 50/125�m, aqua, OFNP rated

7. Or equal

2.03 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

A. Application

1. Fiber optic patch cords shall be suitable for indoor installation within a telecommunications room within and/or between fiber patch panels.

2. Cord shall be assembled from a single, continuous length of cordage, homogenous in nature; Splices are not permitted.

B. Cordage – Multimode 50/125um

1. Conductors: Two 50/125um multimode tight‐buffered fibers.

2. Strength Element: Aramid yarn (Kevlar).

3. Jacket: Flame‐retardant PVC, or equivalent, in a ‘zipcord’ configuration.

4. NEC rated as OFN (or higher), and UL listed as such.

C. Cordage – Multimode 62.5/125um

1. Conductors: Two 62.5/125um multimode tight buffered fibers.






D. Cordage – Singlemode

1. Conductors: Two singlemode tight‐buffered fibers.




E. Connectors

1. Multimode patch cords shall be either terminated via duplex LC connectors at both ends or terminated via duplex LC connectors to connect with the cable plant and via the connector type as required for connection to equipment.

2. Singlemode patch cords shall be either terminated via duplex LC Ultra PC connectors at both ends or terminated via duplex LC‐UPC connectors to connect with the cable plant and via the connector type as required for connection to equipment

F. Connector Loss

1. Multimode: ≤ 0.5dB per mated pair at both 850nm and 1300nm.

2. Singlemode: 0.5dB per mated pair at both 1310nm and 1550nm.

G. Manufacturer:


a. #050502C5120003F; 2 strand MMF, duplex LC –to– duplex LC, 3 foot

b. #050502C5120005F; 2 strand MMF, duplex LC –to– duplex LC, 5 foot

c. #050502C5120007F; 2 strand MMF, duplex LC –to– duplex LC, 7 foot

d. #050502C5120009F; 2 strand MMF, duplex LC –to– duplex LC, 9 foot

e. #050502C5120015F; 2 strand MMF, duplex LC –to– duplex LC, 15 foot

f. #040402R5120003F; 2 strand SMF, duplex LC‐UPC –to– duplex LC‐UPC, 3 foot

g. #040402R5120005F; 2 strand SMF, duplex LC‐UPC –to– duplex LC‐UPC, 5 foot

h. #040402R5120007F; 2 strand SMF, duplex LC‐UPC –to– duplex LC‐UPC, 7 foot

i. #040402R5120009F; 2 strand SMF, duplex LC‐UPC –to– duplex LC‐UPC, 9 foot

j. #040402R5120015F; 2 strand SMF, duplex LC‐UPC –to– duplex LC‐UPC, 15 foot

2. Or equal

2.04 TERMINATION APPARATUS – FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

A. Application:

1. Fiber optic patch panels shall be an enclosed housing for protecting, storing and organizing the termination of fiber cable(s) and fiber strands, shall provide means to strain relieve and support of the specified cables, shall contain facilities to store fiber slack, and shall provide patch cord management.

2. Fiber optic patch panels shall be passive physical equipment and apparatus used in terminating, interconnecting, and cross‐connecting fiber optic cabling, shall possess a minimum fire resistant rating of UL94V‐1, and shall conform to existing OSHA Health and Safety Laws.

3. Fiber optic patch panels shall be <rack‐mountable><wall‐mountable>.

B. Fiber optic patch panels shall come equipped with safety labels such as laser identification or warning labels as required by system considerations.


C. Manufacturer:


a. #1000G2‐4U‐MOD‐SD; “1000G2 Modular” type patch panel, sliding, 4U, retains 12 “G2” modules

b. #600G2‐1U‐MOD‐SD; “600G2 Modular” type patch panel, sliding, 1U, retains 4 “G2” modules

c. #600G2‐2U‐MOD‐SD; “600G2 Modular” type patch panel, sliding, 2U, retains 8 “G2” modules

d. #MODG2‐12LC‐LS; “G2 Module” e/w 12 LazrSPEED MM LC adapters


a. #CCH‐04U; “Connector Closet Housings” type patch panel, 4U, 12 adapter modules

b. #CCH‐03U; “Connector Closet Housings” type patch panel, 3U, 6 adapter modules

c. #CCH‐02U; “Connector Closet Housings” type patch panel, 2U, 4 adapter modules

d. #CCH‐01U; “Connector Closet Housings” type patch panel, 1U, 2 adapter modules

e. #CCH‐CP12‐E4; Adapter Module e/w 6 duplex MM LC aqua adapters

3. Leviton

a. #5R4UH‐S12; “Opt‐X Ultra” type patch panel, 4U, 12 adapter modules

b. #5R2UH‐S06; “Opt‐X Ultra” type patch panel, 2U, 6 adapter modules

c. #5R1UH‐S03; “Opt‐X Ultra” type patch panel, 1U, 3 adapter modules

d. #5F100‐12A; adapter plate e/w 6 duplex MM LC aqua adapters

e. #5F100‐6MP; adapter module e/w 6 MM MTP adapters

f. #5RCMP‐KIT; “Opt‐X Ultra” ultra cable clamp kit

4. Panduit

a. #FMRE4; fiber optic patch panel, 4U, 12 adapter modules

b. #FMRE3; fiber optic patch panel, 3U, 9 adapter modules

c. #FMRE2; fiber optic patch panel, 2U, 6 adapter modules

d. #FRME1; fiber optic patch panel, 1U, 3 adapter modules

e. #FAP8WAQDLC: adapter panel with 8 duplex LC multimode adapters, aqua

f. #FAP6WAQDLC: adapter panel with 6 duplex LC multimode adapters, aqua

5. Or equal

2.05 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS

A. Multimode Fiber Optic Connectors – LC Type

1. Materials:

a. Ferrule: ceramic with pre‐radiused finish/face

b. Connector Housing: Plastic

2. Connector shall have an integral strain relief feature, including a bend limiting rear boot.

3. Connector shall be installable via either epoxy or anaerobic method.

4. Manufacturer:


1) #P1001A‐Z‐125; LC type connector, MM, zirconia ceramic, beige boot, for 0.9 mm buffered fiber



2) #P1001A‐Z‐125R; LC type connector, MM, pre‐radius zirconia ceramic, beige boot, for 0.9 mm buffered fiber

b. Corning Cable Systems

1) #95‐051‐98‐SP; LC type connector, ceramic ferrule, for 50/125 μm MM, aqua boot

2) #95‐101‐98‐SP; LC type connector, ceramic ferrule, for 62.5/125 μm MM, beige boot

c. Leviton

1) #49990‐LDL; MM LC type connector, zirconia ceramic, aqua boot for 0.9 mm buffer

d. Panduit

1) #FLCSMEIY; LC type connector, zirconia ceramic, MM, elec ivory

B. Singlemode Fiber Optic Connectors – LC Type

1. Materials:

a. Ferrule: ceramic (zirconia or alumina) with pre‐radiused finish/face

b. Connector housing: plastic

2. Connector shall meet or exceed Ultra PC performance (LC‐UPC).

3. Connector shall have an integral strain relief feature, including a bend limiting rear boot.

4. Connector shall be installable via either epoxy or anaerobic method.

5. Manufacturer:


1) #P1101A‐Z‐125; LC type connector, SM, zirconia ceramic, blue boot, for 0.9 mm buffered fiber

2) #P1101A‐Z‐125R; LC type connector, SM, pre‐radius zirconia ceramic, blue boot, for 0.9 mm buffered fiber

b. Corning Cable Systems

1) #95‐201‐98‐SP; LC type connector, ceramic ferrule, SM, blue boot

c. Leviton

1) #49990‐SDL; SM LC type connector, zirconia ceramic, blue boot for 0.9 mm buffer

d. Panduit

1) #FLCSSBUY; LC type connector, zirconia ceramic, SM, blue

e. Or equal

2.06 LABELS

A. Cable Labels

1. Labels shall be machine‐printable via a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand‐held printer


3. Color (print area): White.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit






5) #S200X225YAJ; laser/ink jet labels, 2” X 2.25”, for cable diameters 0.24”‐0.48”, white

6) #S200X400YAJ; laser/ink jet labels, 2” X 4”, for cable diameters 0.32”‐0.95”, white

b. Or equal

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Fiber Slack Storage Reel: Leviton #48900‐OFR, or equal

B. Velcro Cable Ties

1. Width: .75”.

2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is being applied.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Panduit

1) #HLS‐15R‐0 Black, 15’ roll, cut to length.

b. Or equal


3.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with Execution requirements of Section 27 00 00.


A. Pathways: Prior to installation verify pathways (conduits, etc.) and supporting devices, provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports, devices, etc., have been removed. Verify dimensions of pathways, including length (for example, “True Tape” the conduits).

B. Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are ready for cables and terminations.

C. Prior to installation, verify cables and conductors are fully operational – both cable sheath and fiber strands. Pre‐installation testing is the responsibility of the Contractor, though documentation of pre‐installation testing is not a close out requirement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Backbone Cable Installation, Routing, and Termination


2. Do not exceed 500 meters optical conductor length from the termination within the MPOE to the termination in IDF

3. Placement

a. Place cables within designated pathways. Place ISP cables in innerduct between points of termination throughout entire length (except at the fiber take up reel).

b. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 20 times the cable diameter during installation, and a minimum bend radius of 10 times the cable diameter after installation.

c. Maintain pulling tension within manufacturer's limits.

d. Place and suspend cables in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during installation.

e. Do not use cable‐pulling compounds for indoor installations.



f. Provide 20 to 30 feet of cable slack at each end within the Telecommunications Rooms; store slack <in fiber slack storage reel mounted on the wall> <in the overhead cable support>.

g. Place a pull rope along with cables where run in pathways and spare capacity in the pathway remains. Tie off ends of the pull rope.

4. Routing

a. When routing overhead within telecommunications rooms, neatly dress and organize cables on designated overhead cable support apparatus (for example, cable tray/runway), and fasten cables to cable support apparatus via approved straps. When routing vertically within telecommunications rooms, neatly dress and organize cables on vertical cable support apparatus (for example, vertical cable runway), and properly fasten cables to cable routing facilities via approved straps. “Properly fasten” shall consist of cable ties in a ‘crossed’ configuration per cable or cable bundle (up to three cables or innerducts) every 24 inches on center. Within Telecommunications Rooms, neatly dress and organize cables on designated cable support apparatus (for example, overhead and vertical cable support), and fasten cables to cable support apparatus via tie wraps or Velcro‐type straps.

5. Termination

a. Properly relieve strain from cables at termination points (at/within the fiber optic termination panels) per manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Terminate fiber strands via direct connectorization at both ends using the specified fiber optic connectors appropriate for the mode type of the fiber. Perform terminations in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Provide required accessories and consumables for the complete termination of fiber strands.

d. Provide 3 feet of unsheathed fiber (tight buffer) slack within the patch panel/termination enclosure at each end of the link. Properly store fiber slack in rear of patch panel into the ‘routing rings’, per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Fiber Optic Cable Termination Panel

1. Provide fully assembled termination panel in designated equipment rack; locate per drawings (if not shown, locate at the top). “Fully assembled” includes installation and mounting components and accessories such as adapter panels, coupling adapters, etc. required for operation.

2. Provide accessories required for proper installation of each termination panel, including connector panels and adapters.

3.04 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and the label colors shall conform to the TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner or Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Provide permanent and machine generated labels; hand written labels will not be accepted.

B. Cable Labels

1. Label Format:



c. Text color shall be black; text height shall be 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.



C. Termination Apparatus Labels

1. Use labels included in the product packaging. For substitutions, request approval by the Engineer.

2. Label color shall be white for respective field type, per TIA/EIA‐606‐A.

3. Text color shall be black, 3/32” high, minimum, or #10 font size.

D. Identifier Assignment

1. General: Separate all label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Backbone ISP Fiber Optic Cables

a. The first field shall identify the cable type: “CBF” (for Cable, Backbone, Fiber optic).

b. The second field shall identify the originating termination room identifier as shown on the plans; e.g., “BDF2.1”.

c. The third field shall identify the ending termination room identifier as shown on the plans; e.g., “IDF2.2”.

d. The fourth field shall identify the type and number of strands; for example, “Mxxx” where “M” stands for multimode and xxx stands for the ending fiber strand sequential count

e. Identifier Example: “CBF‐BDF2.1‐IDF2.2‐M025‐M048”

3. Termination Positions at the Termination Panels

a. Make the first field of the identifier the destination room; for example “TO IDF2.2”.

b. Make the second field of the identifier the strand count range; for example, “M025‐M048”

c. Identifier Example: “TO IDF2.2 M025‐M048”.



B. Remove and replace with new, at no additional cost, cables with conductors failing to meet the indicated standards and not passing the testing requirements of Section 270821. The Owner, or Owner’s Representative, will not accept the installation until testing has indicated a 100% availability of cables and conductors or the Owner or Owner’s Representative has approved in writing any deviation from this requirement.

C. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 00 00.

SECTION 27 1513 ‐ COMMUNICATION HORIZONTAL TWISTED PAIR CABLING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling (subsystem of Telecommunications Cabling Infrastructure)

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 00 00

2. 27 08 11 Communication Twisted Pair Testing

3. 27 13 13 Communication Backbone Twisted Pair Cabling



1.02 REFERENCES


1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. In addition, define the following list of terms as used in this specification as follows:

1. “CAT3”: Category 3 [UTP] performance grade

2. “CAT6”: Category 6 [UTP] performance grade

3. “Channel”: End to end transmission path; e.g., the entire portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if a full crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus and equipment cord.

4. “CMP”: Communications Media Plenum [NEC plenum rating]

5. “CMR”: Communications Media Riser [NEC riser {non‐plenum} rating]

6. “FEP”: Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene

7. “FTP”: Foiled Twisted Pair

8. “PE”: Polyethylene

9. “Permanent Link”: Test configuration for a horizontal cabling link excluding patch cords, equipment cords, and line cords; e.g., the ‘permanent’ portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of cable, consolidation point (if used), termination/connecting apparatus in the IDFs and the connector at the outlet.

10. “PVC”: PolyVinyl Chloride

11. “UTP”: Unshielded Twisted Pair



1. Pathways: The communications pathways (basketway, conduits, stubs, etc.) work will be covered under another Section. Refer to the Drawings for size/capacity and route information.

2. Rooms: Build out (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable runway, etc.) of the telecommunications rooms will be covered under another Section. Refer to the Drawings for build out information.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working communications Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling System installation described in this Section and shown on related Drawings. Consider Horizontal Cabling as shown on Drawings as base bid work, unless otherwise noted. This includes terminations at both ends.


a. Submittals

b. Horizontal cables, terminations, and outlets

c. Cable management

d. Patch cords and crossconnections

e. Cable identification tags and system labeling


f. Record Documents

g. Warranty

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittals article of Section 27 00 00 for procedural, quantity, content, and format requirements.

B. Substitutions

1. Conform to substitutions requirements and procedure in Section 27 00 00.



2. Sample Submittal, consisting of the following components:

a. Type “A” Outlet Sample – one fully configured outlet including faceplate, modular jacks, and label

b. Cable Label Sample

3. Schedule Submittal, consisting of proposed schedule of work. This schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for 27xxxx series Sections

4. Shop Drawings Submittal, consisting of proposed changes to cable routing, or termination locations/configurations

D. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:


2. Cable ID –to– Office Number Key: Submit a “cable ID‐to‐Office number key” as an electronic file in an MS‐Excel spreadsheet file format containing a list of every cable identifier associated with the final office number


4. O & M Manuals

E. Posted Documentation

1. Post one full size plot of as‐built drawings, specifically the floor plans and (as applicable) reflected ceiling plans, within MDFs such that show the MDF’s serving area. Coordinate location with Owner.




1. In addition to the Contractor Qualifications requirements of Section 27 00 00, the Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the cabling system (proposed, submitted, and approved) and to provide an extended warranty. Submit satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the bid.


A. Comply with the Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 00 00.



1.08 WARRANTY

A. The horizontal cabling system, as specified in this section, shall carry a 15‐year (minimum) extended system warranty. This extended warranty shall cover parts and labor for the duration of the extended warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover electrical performance of cabling system to the specific category per ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐C performance criteria for horizontal cabling.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. CommScope SYSTIMAX cabling system (no substitutions allowed)

B. Panduit cabling system (no substitutions allowed)

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. No substitutions allowed.

2.03 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT3 PLENUM (CMP) RATED

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation, within ceiling space in primary and secondary pathways, within access/raised floor space. Will be used primarily for any feature‐restricted locations (payphones, outdoor wallphones, etc).

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 24 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a flame retardant thermoplastic material (material =FR‐ PVC, or equivalent).

2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair) with individually color‐coded twisted pairs to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S‐80‐576‐1994, and EIA‐230).

C. Cable Sheath:

1. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = LS‐PVC, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs).

2. Flame Rating: NEC (Article 800) rated as CMP, and UL listed as such.

D. Electrical Performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐B requirements for CAT3 UTP cabling.

E. Manufacturer:


a. #2010 004 BWH 4/24 R1000; CAT3 4 pair UTP cable, CMP – White

2.04 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT6 PLENUM (CMP) RATED

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation, within ceiling space in primary and secondary pathways, within access/raised floor space.

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a flame retardant thermoplastic material (material = FEP, or equivalent).


2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair) with individually color‐coded twisted pairs to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S‐80‐576‐1994, and EIA‐230).

C. Cable Sheath:

1. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = LS‐PVC, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs).

2. Flame Rating: NEC (Article 800) rated as CMP, and UL listed as such.

D. Electrical Performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2‐1 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

E. Electrical Performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2‐AD10, ISO 11801 Class E Edition 2.1, and IEEE Std. 802.3an latest draft proposal channel requirements for supporting 10GBASE‐T.

F. Manufacturer:


a. #2071 004 EBL 4/23 R1000; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “GigaSPEED”, CMP – Blue

b. #2071 004 EYL 4/23 R1000; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “GigaSPEED”, CMP – Yellow


a. #2081 004 ABL 4/23 R1000; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “GigaSPEED XL”, CMP – Blue

b. #2081 004 AYL 4/23 R1000; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “GigaSPEED XL”, CMP – Yellow

3. Panduit

a. #PUP6004BU‐UY; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “TX6000”, CMP – Blue

b. #PUP6004YL‐UY; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “TX6000”, CMP – Yellow

4. Panduit

a. #PUP6504BU‐UY; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “TX6500”, CMP – Blue

b. #PUP6504YL‐UY; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable “TX6500”, CMP – Yellow

2.05 MODULAR PATCH CORDS – CAT6 RATED

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation within a telecommunications room or workstation environment.

B. Cords assembled from a single, continuous length of cordage, homogenous in nature, and terminated at both ends via 8 position modular plugs. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

C. Cordage

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG stranded copper, fully insulated with a flame retardant thermoplastic material (such as PVC, or equivalent).

2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair), and individually color coded.

3. Unshielded sheath and flame‐retardant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed. 4. Flame Rating: NEC CM (or higher) rated, and UL listed as such.

D. Electrical Performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2‐1 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

E. Length: Refer to Outlet Schedule for length requirements.



F. Manufacturer:


a. GS8E series stranded double ended patch cords


a. #CPC3312‐02F005; CAT6 modular patch cord “D8PS”, 5 feet, light blue

b. #CPC3312‐02F007; CAT6 modular patch cord “D8PS”, 7 feet, light blue

c. #CPC3312‐02F010; CAT6 modular patch cord “D8PS”, 10 feet, light blue

3. Panduit

a. #UTPSP3Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 3 feet, off white

b. #UTPSP5Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 5 feet, off white

c. #UTPSP7Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 7 feet, off white

d. #UTPSP10Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 10 feet, off white

e. #UTPSP14Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 14 feet, off white

f. #UTPSP20Y; CAT6 modular patch cord, 20 feet, off white

2.06 CROSSCONNECT WIRE

A. Crossconnect wire shall be suitable for installation within a telecommunication facility and fully compatible with the termination apparatus (for example, crossconnect blocks) specified within this Section.

B. Crossconnect wire shall be manufactured from a single, continuous length of insulated wire, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere. Factory splices of insulated conductors are expressly prohibited.

C. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 24 AWG conductors of solid copper. Fully insulated conductors with a flame retardant thermoplastic material (such as PVC, or equivalent).

2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair), individually color‐coded.

D. Manufacturer:


a. #CCW‐F 1/24 S1000; Crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Red / Red‐Whi

b. #CCW‐F 1/24 S1000; Crossconnect wire, 1 pair, Whi‐Blu / Blu‐Whi

2. Siemon

a. #CJ5‐W1‐1000‐03; Crossconnect wire, 1 pair, red/white

b. #CJ5‐W1‐1000‐06; Crossconnect wire, 1 pair, blue/white

3. Or equal

2.07 TERMINATION APPARATUS – MODULAR PATCH PANEL, CAT6 RATED

A. Application: Modular patch panels shall be suitable for installation within a telecommunication room (IDF) for the termination of the Horizontal Cables specified herein. Modular patch panels shall be horizontally oriented for a rack‐mounted configuration. Modular patch panels shall be capable of supporting, organizing, labeling and patching/ crossconnecting between the horizontal termination field and the equipment termination field.


B. Modular patch panel shall have 110‐type termination, and shall be compatible with the specified horizontal cables both electrically and physically.

C. Each port shall be an 8‐position modular jack, compliant to TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2.

D. Mechanical Performance: Each port (modular jack) shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2 5.7.

E. Electrical Performance: Each port (modular jack) shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2 6.8 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

F. Wiring: Modular connectors shall be T568B wired.

G. Manufacturer:


a. #1100GS3‐24; CAT6 modular patch panel “GigaSPEED”, flat, 24 ports.

b. #1100GS3‐48; CAT6 modular patch panel “GigaSPEED”, flat, 48 ports.

c. #PM‐GS3‐24; CAT6 patch panel “PatchMAX GigaSPEED”, 24 ports.

d. #PM‐GS3‐48; CAT6 patch panel “PatchMAX GigaSPEED”, 48 ports.

2. Ortronics

a. #OR‐PHD66U24; CAT6 modular patch panel “Clarity6”, flat, 24 ports in 6‐port modules

b. #OR‐PHD66U48; CAT6 modular patch panel “Clarity6”, flat, 48 ports in 6‐port modules

3. Panduit

a. #DP24688TGY; CAT6 modular patch panel “DP6 Plus”, flat, 24 ports

b. # DP48688TGY; CAT6 modular patch panel “DP6 Plus”, flat, 48 ports

4. Or equal

2.08 BEP PROTECTOR – FOR DATA CIRCUITS

A. Application: Protectors suitable for installation within a telecommunication facility for the termination of the Horizontal OSP/Underground cables intended for data circuits.

B. Protector shall be UL 497 listed.

C. Solid‐state protection with clamping voltage of 16VDC.

D. Protector shall have a 4‐pair capacity (minimum) with 110‐type input and 110‐type output

E. Manufacturer:


a. #760028373; OSP protector, CAT6 rated, 2‐cable capacity

b. #760033951; OSP protector, CAT6 rated, for PoE circuits, 2‐cable capacity

Or

2. Berk‐tek/Panduit products

2.09 HORIZONTAL CABLE SUPPORT BAR

A. Application: Suitable to support horizontal cables behind patch panels from vertical cable managers to termination point.

B. Color: Match rack.



C. Manufacturer

1. CPI

a. #12176‐701

2. Panduit

a. #SRB19BLY; ‘extended’ strain relief bar

b. #SRBS19BL‐XY; ‘straight’ strain relief bar

c. #SRBCT; ‘straight’ strain relief bar with cable tie clips

3. Or equal

2.10 MODULAR CONNECTOR / 8‐POSITION JACK – CAT6 RATED

A. Application: Modular connectors shall be 8‐position modular jacks, and shall be compatible with the specified CAT6 UTP 4‐pair cables both electrically and physically.

B. Mechanical Performance: Modular connectors shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2 5.7.

C. Electrical Performance: Modular connectors shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2 6.8 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

D. Wiring: Modular connectors shall be T568B wired.

E. Manufacturer:


a. #MGS400‐112; CAT6 8‐position “GigaSPEED XL” jack, orange

b. #MGS400‐123; CAT6 8‐position “GigaSPEED XL” jack, yellow

c. #MGS400‐262; CAT6 8‐position “GigaSPEED XL” jack, white

2. Ortronics

a. #OR‐TJ600; CAT6 modular connector/jack, “TracJack” “Clarity6”, flat, fog white

b. #OR‐TJ600‐43; CAT6 modular connector/jack, “TracJack” “Clarity6”, flat, orange

c. #OR‐TJ600‐44; CAT6 modular connector/jack, “TracJack” “Clarity6”, flat, yellow

3. Panduit

a. #CJ688TGWH; CAT5e 8‐position jack “Mini‐Com” series “TX6 Plus”, White

b. #CJ688TGOR; CAT5e 8‐position jack “Mini‐Com” series “TX6 Plus”, Orange

c. #CJ688TGYL; CAT5e 8‐position jack “Mini‐Com” series “TX6 Plus”, Yellow

2.11 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. Faceplates for Standard Flush‐Mount Outlets

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1‐gang and 2‐gang flush‐mount devices.

2. Faceplates shall have 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports, and shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

3. Color: White unless otherwise noted.

4. Manufacturer:

a. CommScope SYSTIMAX ”LE” type

1) #M10LE‐262; faceplate, 1‐gang, 1 port, White






b. CommScope SYSTIMAX ”L” type

1) #M10L‐262; faceplate, 1‐gang, 1 port, White






c. Leviton

1) #42080‐1WS;”QuickPort” faceplate, 1‐gang, 1 positions, white





d. Ortronics Plastic “TtracJack” series faceplates

1) #OR‐40300549; faceplate “TracJack” series, 1‐gang, 1 position, fog white

2) #OR‐40300548; faceplate “TracJack” series, 1‐gang, 2 positions, fog white




e. Panduit “Classic” series faceplates with label windoes

1) #CFPL2WHY; faceplate, “Classic” series, 1‐gang, vertical, 2 ports, white




B. Faceplate for Wall Phone Outlets

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1‐gang flush‐mount device equipped with 1 modular jack and two mounting studs for standard wall‐mount telephones.

2. Faceplates shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

3. Color: White, unless otherwise noted in drawings.

4. Manufacturer:


1) #M10LW‐262; wall phone faceplate, White

b. Panduit

1) #KWP6P, wall phone faceplate, stainless steel, with CAT6 jack

C. Faceplates for Modular Furniture Mount Outlets

1. Four port faceplates for modular furniture that fits into _” x _” opening.

2. Color: White.



3. Manufacturer

a. Panduit

1) #CFFP4BL, fourplex furniture faceplate

2) #MFFPHMBL, adapter for Herman Miller furniture.

D. “Poke‐Thru” Floor Outlets

1. Adapters that are fully compatible with both the “poke‐thru” type floor outlets and the specified connectors / connector accessories.

2. Manufacturer:

a. Wiremold

1) #CM2‐U2ATT; bezel adapter, accepts 2 SYSTIMAX M‐Series connectors

2) #CM2‐U1ATT; bezel adapter, accepts 1 SYSTIMAX M‐Series connectors

3) #CM2‐U2KEYA; bezel adapter, accepts 2 ‘keystone’ mount connectors

4) #CM2‐U1KEYA; bezel adapter, accepts 1 ‘keystone’ mount connectors.

E. Faceplates for Furniture Feeds

1. Application: Suitable for indoor installation for standard 1‐gang flush‐mount device box with round opening allowing cables to freely exit (towards furniture system entry).

2. Color: White, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

3. Manufacturer:

a. Leviton

1) # 80704‐4; faceplate with 1.4” round opening

2.12 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT HOUSING

A. Application: Overhead wireless access point mounting bracket

B. Manufacturer:

1. Wiremold

a. #WAPBRKT; overhead system wireless access point bracket, steel

2. Or equal

2.13 LABELS

A. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand‐held printer.

B. Labels for Horizontal Cables

1. Adhesive backed labels and self‐laminating feature.

2. Fit the horizontal cables listed above (i.e., shall fully wrap around the cable’s jacket).

3. Size: 2”x.05” printable area, minimum

4. Color: white

5. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #S100X150YAJ; labels for cable diameters 0.16”‐0.32”, white, desktop printer (laser or ink jet)


b. Or equal

2.14 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. Velcro Cable Ties

1. Width: .75”.

2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is being applied.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Panduit “Tak‐Ty” series cable ties

b. Panduit

1) #HLS‐15R‐0; black, 15’ roll, cut to length.

c. Or Equal

B. Plenum Cable Ties

1. Application: for use in plenum or air handling spaces

2. Color: maroon or other distinctive non‐white color

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #PLT1M‐xxxx

2) #PLT2S‐xxxx

3) #PLT3S‐xxxx

b. Or equal.


3.01 GENERAL



A. Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable to accept the horizontal cables and terminations.

B. Pathways: Prior to installation verify that pathways and supporting devices, provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports, devices, etc., have been removed. Verify dimensions of pathways, including length (for example, “True Tape” the conduits).

C. Cable Integrity: Prior to installation, verify the cable’s integrity – both sheath and conductors. Documentation of pre‐installation testing is not a close out requirement, and is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Installation and Routing


2. Place cables within designated pathways, such as cable tray, basketway, cable hangers, etc. Do no fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts,



pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non‐approved pathway systems.

3. Place and suspend cables and conductors during installation and termination in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during installation or termination at no additional cost.

4. Maintain minimum cable length of 15 meters from the termination in the IDF to the termination at the user’s faceplate (permanent link).

5. No cable length shall exceed 90 meters from the termination point in the IDF to the termination point at the work area (permanent link).

6. Route cables at 90‐degree angles, allowing for bending radius, along corridors for ease of access.

7. Do not exceed manufacturer's limits for pulling tension.

8. Do not use cable‐pulling compounds for indoor installations.

9. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and after installation.

10. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc); Do not route cables over building infrastructure. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables in the future.

11. Place cables 6", minimum, away from power sources to reduce interference from EMI.

12. Place a pull string along with cables where run in pathways and spare capacity in the pathway remains. Tie off ends of the pull string (to prevent the string from falling into the conduit).

13. Neatly dress and organize cables using designated cable routing facilities, and fasten to support devices via tie wraps or Velcro‐type straps.

14. When exiting the primary pathway (such as basketway or cable tray) to the work area, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.

B. Cable Routing and Dressing within the IDF

1. Place cables within the overhead cable support and, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall‐mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on‐center using cable ties.

2. At the rack bay, route cables into the back of the vertical management sections. Divide the cables equally between both sides of an equipment rack such that a cable does not travel past the midpoint of the rack prior to termination.

3. Provide 10‐15 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack in the overhead cable support

C. Termination in the IDF

1. Provide termination apparatus and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Properly strain relieve cables to and at termination points per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. For OSP cables, apply sealant (such as B‐sealant) to the end of the cable where the pairs exit the jacket – this step to seal the end of the cable and prevent water‐blocking gel from leaking of the cable’s sheath.

4. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate cable pairs onto


the termination apparatus. Terminate twisted pairs compliant to T568B wiring, per ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.0.

5. Modular Patch Panels and Horizontal Management Panels

a. Provide quantity of modular patch panels to support termination of cables served from respective IDF. Provide quantity of horizontal management panels based on the quantity of patch panels.

b. Install and assemble modular patch panels and horizontal management panels according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Install the patch panels and the horizontal management panels as shown on the Drawings. If configuration is not shown, install the patch panels in association with the horizontal management panels such that a management panel is mounted above and below given patch panel.

6. Discrete Port Patch Panels and Horizontal Management Panels

a. Provide quantity of discrete port patch panels to support termination of cables served from respective IDF. Provide quantity of horizontal management panels based on the quantity of patch panels.

b. Install and assemble discrete port patch panels and horizontal management panels according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Install the patch panels and the horizontal management panels as shown on the Drawings. If configuration is not shown, install the patch panels in association with the horizontal management panels such that a management panel is mounted above and below given patch panel.

7. Wall‐Mounted Termination Block

a. Provide termination blocks to support termination of cables served from respective IDF. Provide quantity of horizontal management panels based on the quantity of patch panels.

b. Install the termination blocks such that the bottom row of terminations is at a height as shown on the drawing. If no height is shown, install at 24” AFF (+/‐ 3”).

c. Mount blocks plumb and square.

8. Termination Sequence

a. Terminate the cables in sequential order using the link’s identifier starting at the top left and completing a panel before moving to the next panel below.

D. Cable Routing and Dressing at the Work Areas

1. Provide 2‐4 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within ceiling space neatly on a cable hanger.

2. Routing to Type “B” Furniture‐Mount Faceplates

a. Route cables from primary or secondary pathway within ceiling through the furniture‐feed pathway (stub within wall) into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.

b. Provide spiral wrap around cables from furniture‐feed pathway to point where cables enter furniture.

c. Route cables from under‐floor through pre‐cut access floor panel into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.

E. Termination at the Work Areas

1. Provide device components, connectors, and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble connectors, jacks, adapters, termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.



2. Provide six inches, minimum, sheathed cable slack behind each workstation outlet faceplate. Coil the slack cable inside the raceway, within the wall, or in the junction box (if used), per the cabling manufacturer's installation standards.

3. Type “A” Wall‐Mount Faceplates

a. Install devices at heights shown on the Drawings. If no heights are shown, install at 24” AFF on center (+/‐ 3”).

b. Mount faceplates plumb, square, and at the same level as adjacent device faceplates.

c. Patch gaps around faceplates so that faceplate covers the entire opening.

4. Type “B” Furniture‐Mount Faceplates

a. Coordinate installation of faceplate adapters with the furniture contractor, including color.

b. Mount faceplate adapters into the designated opening for telecommunications cabling.

5. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate cable pairs onto the connector compliant to T568B wiring, per ANSI/TIA‐568‐C.0.

F. Entrance Protector (for OSP/Underground Installation)

1. Provide protectors and accessories required for a complete installation.

2. Install the termination blocks such that the bottom row of terminations is at height shown on the Drawings. If no height is shown, install at 24” AFF on center (+/‐ 3”).

3. Mount blocks plumb and square.

G. Perform post‐installation testing as described in the Telecommunication Testing specification (refer to Section 270811). Replace terminations and connectors not passing the required media test.

H. Patching and Crossconnecting

1. In IDFs, provide modular patch cords as shown on Drawings for network service. If not shown, provide one modular patch cord per complement/device; install between the network switch and the horizontal field. Neatly dress patch cords within the horizontal and vertical management components. Store cord slack within the vertical management section.

2. In IDFs, provide crossconnections as shown on Drawings for voice service. If not shown, provide one 1‐pair crossconnect to length from pair #1 per voice link from the horizontal voice termination field to an available pair on the backbone voice termination field. Neatly route the crossconnect wire within the horizontal and vertical management components. Splices in crossconnect wire are prohibited. Color:

a. For digital handsets, provide: White‐Blue / Blue‐White

b. For analog handsets, provide: White‐Red / Red‐White

3. Record crossconnections to backbone cabling for MDF crossconnection purposes and for record documents.

3.04 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by the Owner before installation.

2. Permanent labels with machine‐generated text (hand written labels will not be accepted).


B. Label Formats

1. Horizontal Cable Labels

a. Text Attributes: Black, 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.

b. Install labels on both ends of cables no more than 4" from the edge of the cable jacket. Install labels such that they are visible by a technician from a normal stance.

2. Patch Panel Labels

a. Use modular patch panel labels included in the product packaging. Request approval by the Engineer for other labels.

b. Use a label color for the respective field type, per TIA/EIA‐606.

c. Text Attributes: Black, 3/32” high, minimum, or #10 font size.

3. Termination Block Labels

a. Use labels included in the product packaging. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner.

b. Use a label color for the respective field type, per TIA/EIA‐606‐A.


4. Outlet Labels

a. Use outlet labels included in the product packaging. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by Owner.

b. Label Background: White.


d. Install label in the top label window. Leave the bottom label window blank.

C. Identifier Assignment

1. General: Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Horizontal Cables

a. First field: the originating room identifier; for example: “A2.1”.

b. Second field: the destination room number; for example: “207”.

c. Third field: the cable’s intended service type followed by a unique sequential number; for example: “V1” (voice, cable #1) or “D2” (data, cable #2).

d. Fourth field: the cable type; for example: “CAT3” or “CAT5E”.

e. Example: “A2.1–207–D2–CAT5E”

3. Outlets

a. First field: the originating room identifier; for example: “A2.1”.


c. Third field: a unique sequential number; for example: “01”.

d. Example: “A2.1–207–01”

4. Individual Ports at the Outlets

a. The specified faceplate has individual port numbers molded into the product. However, if a substitution is accepted that does not have port numbers, provide port labels as follows.

b. First field: the cable’s intended service type followed by a unique sequential number; for example: “V1” (voice, cable #1) or “D2” (data, cable #2).

5. Individual Termination Positions at Termination Blocks

a. First field: the destination room number; for example: “207”.



b. Second field: the cable’s intended service type followed by a unique sequential number; for example: “V1” (voice, cable #1).

c. Example: “207–V1”

6. Individual Ports at Patch Panels

a. First field: the destination room number; for example: “207”.

b. Second field: the cable’s intended service type – for example: “D” (data), and a unique sequential number – for example: “2”.

c. Example: “207–D2”



B. Remove cables and replace with new those failing to meet the indicated standards and not passing the testing requirements of Section 27 08 11 with no impact to cost and schedule. The Owner, will not accept the installation until testing has indicated a 100% availability of all cables and conductors. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 00 00.

SECTION 27 1533 ‐ COMMUNICATION CATV HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Horizontal coaxial cabling in CATV distribution systems

B. Related Sections


1.02 REFERENCES


B. In addition to those codes, standards, etc., list in Section 27 00 00, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. FCC Regulation Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits

2. National Electrical Code.

3. National, State, Local and any other binding building and fire codes.

4. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings.

5. Society of Cable Television Engineers (SCTE).

6. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE).

7. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

9. National Cable Television Association (NCTA).

10. Electronic Industries Association (EIA).

11. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA).

12. BICSI Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual.


1.03 DEFINITIONS



1. “CATV”: Shall mean community antenna television

2. “CATV Signal”: Shall mean the transmission and FM transmission signal broadcast by CATV utility and received by the subscriber

3. “CATV Utility”: Shall mean the entity that broadcasts programmed content through a metropolitan television network to subscribers premises, and falls under the California Public Utilities Commission

4. “Headend: Shall mean the components and systems connected to (and physically near or adjacent to) the CATV Utility’s demarcation point which acts as the origin of the CATV signal of the premises distribution



1. Telecommunications Rooms

a. Buildout (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable runway, etc.) of the telecommunications rooms (MDF, BDFs, IDFs) work will be covered under another Section.

b. Refer to the Drawings for buildout information.

2. Pathways

a. The pathways (backbone conduits, riser sleeves, cable tray, basketway, device pathways, etc.) from the MDF to the IDFs and from the IDFs to the work areas are covered under another section.

b. Refer to the Drawings for size/capacity and route information.

3. Splices and Terminations

a. Communications Coaxial Splices and Terminations covered in another section.

4. Electrical / power services

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working CATV Distribution System installation described in this Section and shown on related Drawings. Consider cabling and equipment as shown on Drawings as base bid work, unless otherwise noted. This includes terminations at both ends.

2. Loss calculations throughout the distribution system

3. Refer to the related Drawings for additional information.


a. Submittals

b. Horizontal coaxial cables

c. Cable management,

d. Cable identification tags and system labeling,

e. Testing

f. Record Documents



g. Warranty

C. Coordination

1. Telecom Coordination: Coordinate the installation with the Telecom Contractor, including use of pathways, terminations in telecommunications rooms, terminations at work areas, etc.

D. Design Criteria

1. System components shall be rated for a minimum of 50‐750 MHz as a passband specification

2. System shall be bi‐directional.

3. The signal to any work area device shall be as close to that obtainable on a single standard receiver connected directly to the signal at the demarcation.

4. Signal strength at work area devices shall be 15dBmv maximum, 8.5dBmv minimum across 75�.

5. Carrier‐to‐noise ratio at work area devices shall be 46dB minimum.

6. Cross modulation level at work area devices off the last amplifier in the distribution system shall be ‐57dB.

7. The desired signal level at the television is 3dBmV to 6dBmV.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittal requirements of Section 27 00 00.



1. Product Data Submittal, including cables

2. Loss Calculations: Submit loss calculations (line diagram acceptable) including, but not limited to, the following points:

a. Headend amplifier output port

b. Splitter output port, per trunk line

c. Directional coupler trunk and branch ports, per telecommunications room

d. Tap‐off output ports, per telecommunications room

e. Work area devices

f. Isolation losses



2. Operations and Maintenance Manual

E. Substitutions




B. General


1. All installation work shall be completed in a neat, high quality manner acceptable to the Owner and in complete conformance with applicable codes and all telephone standards.

2. All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and unused, of current manufacturer and of highest grade.

3. Only products and applications listed in this Division may be used on the project.

C. Contractor Qualifications

1. Contractor must have at least 5 years of experience in satisfactory completion for CATV distribution system in project similar to scope and cost. A minimum of five such projects is required.

2. Contractor must provide satisfactory evidence of technicians qualified for the work.

3. Contractor shall posses a current and active, C7 or C10 California State Contractors License.

4. Contractor shall comply with any union labor requirements on the project.

D. Regulatory Requirements

1. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules of National Board of Fire Underwriters wherever such standards have been established and shall conform to all the regulations of the State Fire Marshal, OSHA and the codes of the governing local municipalities. Nothing in these specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to the most stringent of the applicable codes.

E. Project Management And Coordination Services

1. Contractor shall provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate the Division 27 work with all other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility shall include, but shall not be limited to the items listed in this section.


a. Obtain copies of all shop drawings for equipment provided by others that require telecommunication service connections or interface with Division 27 work.

b. Perform a thorough review of the shop drawings to confirm compliance with the service requirements contained in the Division 27 contract documents. Document any discrepancy or deviation as follows:

1) Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy.

2) Provide a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy.

c. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

1) Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material.

2) Date of your review.

3) Indication if follow‐up coordination is required.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A. Comply with Permits and Inspections requirements of Section 27 00 00.



1.09 WARRANTY

A. Contractor warrants that all installed hardware in their contract will, under normal use and service, be free from defects and faulty workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of acceptance, during this time the entire system shall be kept in operating condition at no additional material or labor costs to the Owner.

B. The manufacturer(s) of all cables shall demonstrate that a quality assurance program is in place to assure that all of the specifications are met. The program shall include, as a minimum, provisions for:

1. Incoming inspection of raw materials

2. In‐process inspection and final inspection of the cable product

3. Calibration procedures of all test equipment to be used in the qualifications of the product

4. Recall procedures in the event that out of calibration equipment is identified.

C. Conformance to certain government standards on quality assurance may be required for some applications outlined in these specifications.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with Substitutions requirements of Section 27 00 00.

2.02 CABLE – RG‐6 TYPE, PLENUM RATED

A. Cable shall be RG‐6 type, 75‐�, low‐loss, coaxial cable.

B. Cable constructions shall be as follows:

1. The center conductor shall be 18AWG solid copper covered steel.

2. The dielectric type shall be foamed (or cellular) PE, or equivalent.

3. The shield shall be quad‐shield – AL foil \ 60% AL braid \ AL foil \ 40% AL braid.

4. The jacket material shall be FR‐PVC, or equivalent.

C. The cable shall be NEC CATVP rated, and UL listed as such.

D. Manufacturer:

1. CommScope

a. #2227K

2. Belden

a. #1189AP

3. Or equal


3.01 GENERAL



A. Comply with Permits and Inspections requirements of Section 27 00 00.



A. Pathways: Prior to installation, verify pathways (cable trays, conduits, etc.) exist and are suitable to accept cables.

B. Telecommunications Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable to accept the cables and terminations.

C. Prior to installation, verify cables are fully operational. Documentation of pre‐installation testing is not a close out requirement, and is the responsibility of the Contractor

3.04 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of the horizontal distribution with the Telecommunication Contractor. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Routing of the horizontal cables within the telecommunications rooms through shared pathways (for example, cable tray, basketway, conduit, etc.) to the work areas devices

2. Termination within the telecommunications rooms

3. Termination at the work area devices

B. Horizontal Cable Installation and Routing

1. Provide RG‐6 type cable per symbol from the termination point in the telecommunications room through designated pathways to the work areas devices as shown on the Drawings. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature. No splices permitted.

2. Place cables within designated pathways. Provide additional supports as necessary to properly strain relieve and support the cable, and as directed by the Engineer or General Contractor.

3. Do no fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non‐approved pathway systems.

4. Place and suspend cables in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during installation or termination.




8. Do not exceed manufacturer’s minimum bend radius during and after installation. Place cables with sufficient bending radius so as not to break or kink, shear or damage binders, or to interfere with transmission in any way.

9. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc); do not route cables over building infrastructure. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables in the future.


11. Place a pull string along with cables where run in pathways and spare capacity in the pathway remains. Tie off ends of the pull string (to prevent the string from falling into the conduit).

12. When routing from the primary pathway to the secondary pathways and/or work area pathways, exit the primary pathway out the top. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.



C. Horizontal Cabling Termination within the IDF

1. Place horizontal cables within the overhead cable support and, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall‐mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on‐center using cable ties.

2. At the termination point, fasten the cables to the backboard within approximately 15 inches of the connector.

3. Provide four feet of sheathed cable slack per cable. Place the slack in the overhead cable support.

4. Terminate cables with compatible F‐type connectors using full‐cycle type crimping tools. Twist‐on type connectors are expressly prohibited.

3.05 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and the label colors shall conform to the TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner or Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Provide permanent and machine‐generated labels; hand written labels will not be accepted.

B. Horizontal Distribution Labeling


2. Horizontal Cable Label Format:



c. Text color shall be black. Text height shall be 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.

3. Horizontal Cable Identifier Assignment

a. First field: the originating MDFroom identity; for example: “A2.1”.


c. Third field: the cable’s intended service type followed by a unique sequential number; for example: “CATV”.

d. Fourth field: the cable type; for example: “RG6”.

e. Example: “A2.1–207–CATV–RG11”.

4. Horizontal Device Identifier Assignment

a. Refer to Section 27 15 13 for device identifier assignment.

3.06 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Punch Walks and Punch Lists

1. Execute punch walk with the Owner or Owner’s Representative to observe Work.

2. Develop a punch list for items needing correction. Issue this punch list to Engineer for review.

3. Correct the Work as noted on punch list.

4. Execute follow up punch walk with the Owner or Owner’s Representative to verify punch list items have been corrected.


B. System Acceptance.

1. Issue system acceptance certificate to the Owner requesting their signature and return of the certificate. Issue copies of this certificate to the Owner.

SECTION 27 2000 ‐ NETWORK SYSTEMS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Basic Network Communications (Ethernet switches and routers) to support TCP/IP network services

B. Relocation & Commissioning of Network Equipment

C. Related Sections


1.02 REFERENCES



1. Open System Interconnection (OSI) Reference Model and RFC 3439

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 standards

3. International Standardization Organization (ISO) Network architecture, OSI protocols

4. Alameda County Infrastructure Cabling Specifications (version 2010.6 or later)

1.03 DEFINITIONS



1. “BDF”: Building Distribution Frame

2. “BMS”: Building Management System

3. “CAN”: Campus Area Network

4. “CDF”: Campus Distribution Facility

5. “CDR”: Campus Distribution Router

6. “Ethernet”: compliance with IEEE 802.3 standards

7. “Gigabit”: 1x109 bits per second

8. “IDF”: Intermediate Distribution Frame

9. “LAN”: Local Area Network

10. “MAN”: Metropolitan Area Network

11. “MDF”: Main Distribution Frame



12. “MPOE”: Minimum Point of Entry

13. “NOS”: Network Operational Services

14. “PoE”: Power over Ethernet

15. “Router”: OSI layer 3 device

16. “Switch”: OSI layer 2 device

17. “TCP/IP”: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol

18. “WAN”: Wire Area Network


A. System Description

1. The network system, herein “System”, shall provide Ethernet network connectivity. The System shall support TCP/IP services over a LAN//MAN/WAN. The System shall be implemented with proven state‐of‐the‐art technology that can seamlessly integrate with the rapid evolution of technologies and business applications.

2. The System shall reliably provide Ethernet service and performance levels with compatible interface types such as 1000bT, 1Gigabit MM fiber, 10Gigabit SM fiber.

B. Design Criteria

1. The System shall provide 802.3 connectivity meeting or exceeding performance criteria outlined below.

2. The System shall provide network connectivity at location outlined below:

a. Data Closet to Ethernet devices such as workstations and BMS equipment

b. Data Closet to Internet

3. The System shall support multiple interfaces in a modular architecture so services can be added or removed without requiring new infrastructure or disturbing existing services.

4. The System shall enable services to be added without requiring additional cable

5. The System shall not impede any management features or functionality of any attached network and/or device management system. The System shall allow for proactive management and end‐to‐end alarming of active electronics. The System shall be able to engage with 3rd party SNMP‐based element management systems and provide fault management information.

6. The System shall provide sufficient capacity to meet or exceed the AYC minimum performance standards

C. Base Bid Work

1. The Work under this section includes furnishing materials, installation, and coordination through the General Contractor with other trades for a complete, operational, and balanced System. Furnish necessary materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required to provide the System specified herein.


2. Provide required network equipment (modules, interfaces) that meet the equipment preferences and design criteria. The equipment includes the following:

a. Ethernet switch and router modules and interfaces

b. Patch cords

c. Mounting hardware

3. The Work of this Section includes the following (described in greater detail in Part 3):

a. Project management services

b. Detailed System Design

c. Obtain design acceptance from AYC

d. Validate power, rack, and HVAC requirements

e. Coordinate installation scheduling with General Contractor

f. Receive and stage equipment

g. Ensure “Room Ready” criteria are met prior to installation of active equipment

h. Installation

i. Manage integration with NOS

j. System acceptance testing and turn over to Owner

k. As‐Built documentation

1.05 SUBMITTALS




2. Shop Drawings Submittal: Shop drawings shall include the following information:

a. System or functional block/line diagrams

b. Plans indicating equipment, and/or component locations, cable routes, and other installation information

c. Equipment and/or wall / rack elevations, showing equipment layout, space requirements and integration with other systems

d. Installation details for mounting, specialty cable hangers, and other components unique to the System, and other information that depicts the intended installation

C. Submittal Requirements Prior To Acceptance Testing:

1. Acceptance Testing Procedures Submittal: describes in detail the procedure for testing the System’s performance and balancing the System’s signal strength, including a description of the test data (or an example of the test report). The Contractor shall demonstrate the desired services have been successfully deployed and tested.



2. Patching documentation

3. AYC acceptance

4. Active equipment inventory

5. Operations and Maintenance Manual (refer to Section 27 00 00 for contents)



E. Substitutions






1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work and System to perform as described within this Section for a period of 90 days, including components, electronics, etc., and coverage. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cisco

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the Substitution requirements of Section 27 00 00.


3.01 GENERAL



A. Prior to the start of this Section’s installation Work, examine Communications Rooms and Pathways for completeness, compatibility with the Work of this section, and readiness for connections with the Work of this section.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Project Management Services: The Contractor shall assign a single‐point‐of‐contact to this project with overall responsibility for communications and ultimate delivery of contracted materials, installation, performance criteria, and services – “PM”. This PM shall be responsible for interfacing with the Owner, General Contractor, Engineer, and their own subcontractors. The PM shall present the design iterations to the Owner, coordinate cable routes with the Engineer, coordinate on‐site construction activities with the General Contractor, shall manage the process to coordinate bringing equipment into the facility, and shall close out the project with the Owner.

B. Pre‐Construction Detailed System Design: The Contractor shall use the requirements of this Section to complete the detailed design of the System. The pre‐construction submittals covering detailed design shall include iterations for AYC review and sign‐off.


C. Obtain design acceptance from AYC: The Contractor shall ensure the proposed design and choice of equipment is accepted by AYC. This includes model type, module selection, mounting placement, and patching.

D. Validate power, rack, and HVAC are available and sufficient to support installation. The Contractor will review power, rack, and HVAC provisions and validate that they are adequate for installation. This includes voltage, phases, amperage, receptacle type and placement, rack space, and cooling capabilities for space.

E. Coordinate installation scheduling with General Contractor: The Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor facility access, receiving, “room ready” inspections, power, cooling, and security of installation spaces.

F. Receive and stage equipment: The Contractor will receive and stage equipment in coordination with the General Contractor. Identification of staging area and access will be required

G. Ensure “Room Ready”: The Contractor is to ensure that a proper environment is available to support equipment installation. At a minimum this includes: cleanliness, racks, power, cooling, access, and security. The Contractor is responsible for equipment loss once the room is “Room Ready”

H. Installation: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and schedule with the Owner and General Contractor prior to the start of installation activities. Once the Owner and General Contractor have accepted the coordination and schedule, the Contactor may proceed with installation.

I. Manage integration with NOS: The Contractor will coordinate the integration of new equipment with the production network. IP address assignment, Network Management passwords, and configuration details and acceptance testing will need to be coordinated with AYC.

J. System acceptance testing and turn over to Owner: The Contractor shall demonstrate network connectivity in coordination with AYC’s NOS staff. Where applicable, provide access details (TCP/IP addresses and passwords) for AYC support staff to access and control of equipment.

K. As‐Built documentation: The Contractor will provide installation, mounting, patching, and configuration information. Also included will be an inventory that includes model, description, location, and serial number in a format that is acceptable by NOS. Where applicable, include software configuration information.

3.04 CONNECTIONS TO SYSTEM

A. Manage Integration of Ethernet services and applications: The Contractor shall provide equipment and components required to support the Ethernet services and to make adjustments to the System necessary for full operation.

B. The Contractor will coordinate access control and authentication with the Network Integrator and Owner to ensure access control and authentication is enabled and functional.

3.05 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Coordinate labeling and identifier assignment with the Engineer or Owner. Submit a labeling plan to the Engineer for approval prior to labeling work.



B. Label Format


3.06 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND TURN OVER TO OWNER

A. Complete the acceptance testing as prescribed in the accepted Testing Procedures submittal.

B. Present the completed System to the Owner, including functionality, features, ongoing maintenance, and warranty procedures. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer system operation,. Turn over at least 1 set of both electronic records and printed records, per the Owner’s request.

3.07 EXTENDED SUPPORT SERVICES

A. Provide a 90 day warranty period following the Owner’s acceptance of the System.

B. Provide 8x5xNBD SmartNet (or equivalent) support services for 12 months following the Owner’s acceptance of the System.




3.09 SYSTEM TRAINING

A. Comply with training requirements of Section 27 00 00.

B. For this System, provide 0 hours of training for Owner.

SECTION 27 2133 ‐ WIRELESS SYSTEM

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Wireless Access Points (radios in wireless network access system) to support multiple wireless services

B. Related Sections


1.02 REFERENCES



1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

a. Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices

b. Part 24: Personal Communications Services

c. Part 27: Miscellaneous Wireless Communications Services



1.03 DEFINITIONS



1. “802.11a”: LAN/WiFi wireless networking using 5 GHz frequency spectrum

2. “802.11b/g”: Wireless networking using 2.4 GHz frequency spectrum

3. “802.11a/b/g/n”: Wireless networking using both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency spectrums

4. “AWS”: Advanced wireless services

5. “LBS”: Location based services

6. “PCS”: Personal communications service

7. “RFID”: Radio frequency identification

8. “RSSI”: Received signal strength indication

9. “RTLS”: Real time location services

10. “WAP”: Wireless Access Point (aka: AP)

11. “WiFi”: Wireless Fidelity (802.11 service)

12. “WiMAX”: Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access


A. System Description

1. The wireless access point system, herein “System”, shall provide 802.11a/b/g/n RF coverage throughout designated spaces within the designated (interior and/or exterior) space. The System shall support LAN/WiFi wireless services. The System shall be implemented with proven state‐of‐the‐art technology that can seamlessly integrate with the rapid evolution of wireless technologies and business applications.

2. The System shall reliably provide wireless service levels at compatible frequency throughout the specified coverage area.

B. Design Criteria

1. Frequency Ranges: The System shall provide Wireless LAN/WiFi services utilizing both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz standard 802.11a/b/g/n frequencies spectrums

2. The System shall provide 802.11a/b/g/n coverage meeting or exceeding performance criteria outlined below and in the TEECOM Predictive Wireless Report.

3. The System shall provide 802.11a/b/g/n coverage at levels outlined below in the following areas of the building(s) – herein specified coverage areas:

a. Floor areas

b. Stairwells

c. Elevators

d. General Use spaces (break rooms, staff rooms)

e. Restrooms

f. Exterior public spaces.



4. The System shall be able to simultaneously support the following wireless services, applications, and/or technologies:

a. 802.11a/b/g/n (2.4 and 5.8Ghz) / WiFi – data

b. VoIP wireless phones that use 802.11a/b/g/n

c. If required, RTLS/LBS systems based on RFID tags that use 802.11a/b/g/n

5. The System shall have the capability for separate control over each frequency (aka channels) to allow the ability to adjust and control power levels without disturbing other services.

6. The System shall support multiple services in a modular architecture so services can be added or removed without requiring new infrastructure, without readjustment of signal power levels, or disturbing existing services.

7. The System shall enable services to be added without requiring additional cable plant or antenna systems.

8. The System shall not impede any management features or functionality of any attached network and/or device management system. The System shall allow for proactive management and end‐to‐end alarming of active electronics. The System shall be able to engage with 3rd party SNMP‐based element management systems and provide fault management information.

9. The System shall have the ability to locate wireless 802.11 rogue AP’s, clients, and other 802.11a/b/g/n devices within the defined coverage areas.

10. The System shall not have co‐channel interference stronger than ‐85dBm within 90% of the specified 802.11 coverage areas for WiFi.

11. The System shall support the following IEEE 802.11n‐2008 standards, including Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO), 40 MHz channel bonding, and Modulation, Coding Scheme (MCS) values 0 through 15.

12. Signal strength shall be measured with a predetermined industry standard tool such as Airmagnet calibrated test equipment (or equivalent). The System shall deliver signal at the following levels:

a. WiFi ‐85 dBm or stronger within 100% of the specified coverage areas for all systems, services, applications, and/or technologies.

b. WiFi 67 dBm or stronger within 90% of the specified coverage areas for Wi‐Fi signals with an RSSI without creating undesirable side‐effects such as co‐channel interference.

c. Public safety channels should be ‐95 dBm or stronger as specified by any local ordinance

13. The System shall provide sufficient capacity to support a minimum of 15 wireless clients per WAP throughout the specified coverage areas for Wi‐Fi.

14. The System shall support WiFi management applications and advanced AP features provided by the selected AP manufacturer.

15. To maintain performance as usage increases, the System shall have dynamic mechanisms for adding AP capacity and segmenting the WiFi coverage into smaller areas.

16. The System must be FCC certified with the specific access points that are to be deployed.

17. The System shall maintain a balanced link budget with the downlink (AP‐to‐client device) limited to match an assumed uplink (client device‐to‐AP) signal strength of 50mW.

C. Base Bid Work

1. The Work under this section includes furnishing materials, installation, and coordination through the General Contractor with other trades for a complete, operational, and balanced System. Furnish necessary materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required to provide the System specified herein.


2. The Work of this Section includes the following (described in greater detail in Part 3):

a. Project management services

b. Detailed System Design

c. Installation and system balancing

d. Manage Integration with 802.11 Wireless Network Integrator

e. Manage Integration with RFID Integrator

f. System acceptance testing and turn over to Owner

D. Work Provided Under Another Section

1. Wireless LAN controller

2. Communications Cabling (and Pathways)

3. Communications Rooms, including equipment support, power, cooling, and grounding

1.05 SUBMITTALS




2. Shop Drawings Submittal: Shop drawings shall include the following information:


b. Plans indicating equipment, antenna, and/or component locations, cable routes, and other installation information

c. Coverage plans, showing the design RF coverage (signal strength) for each frequency band required in 1.04 B.3

d. Expected density plans, indicating the WiFi client device‐to‐AP ratio

e. Channel plans, indicating the channel separation and interference amongst the defined coverage areas. This information will include channels, power settings, and percent interference above the ‐85dBm for the defined WiFi coverage areas

f. Equipment and/or wall / rack elevations, showing equipment layout, space requirements and integration with other systems

g. Installation details for antenna mounting, specialty cable hangers, and other components unique to the System, and other information that depicts the intended installation

C. Submittal Requirements Prior To Acceptance Testing:

1. Acceptance Testing Procedures Submittal: describes in detail the procedure for testing the System’s performance and balancing the System’s signal strength, including a description of the test data (or an example of the test report). The Contractor shall demonstrate the desired services have been successfully deployed and tested. Specifically, the WAPs must be deployed with the Wireless Operators criteria and approval.



2. Operations and Maintenance Manual (refer to Section 27 00 00 for contents)

E. Substitutions








1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work and System to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year, including components, electronics, etc., and coverage. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cisco

B. Meru

C. Belden/Trapeze

D. Aruba

E. 3Com

F. Or equal system

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS



3.01 GENERAL



A. Prior to the start of this Section’s installation Work, examine Communications Rooms and Pathways for completeness, compatibility with the Work of this section, and readiness for connections with the Work of this section.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Project Management Services: The Contractor shall assign a single‐point‐of‐contact to this project with overall responsibility for communications and ultimate delivery of contracted materials, installation, performance criteria, and services – “PM”. This PM shall be responsible for interfacing with the Owner, General Contractor, Engineer, and their own subcontractors. The PM shall present the design iterations to the Owner, coordinate cable routes with the Engineer, coordinate on‐site construction activities with the General Contractor, shall manage the process to coordinate bringing wireless operators into the facility, and shall close out the project with the Owner.

B. Pre‐Construction Detailed System Design: The Contractor shall use the requirements of this Section to complete the detailed design of the System. Design shall include computer RF modeling and site


surveys. The pre‐construction submittals covering detailed design shall include iterations for the Owner’s review and sign‐off. The Contractor shall be able to show design RF signal levels to sub‐room precision for all rooms within the defined coverage areas.

C. Installation: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and schedule with the Owner and General Contractor prior to the start of installation activities. Once the Owner and General Contractor have accepted the coordination and schedule, the Contactor may proceed with installation.

D. System Balancing: The Contractor shall balance the System component (e.g., antenna) signal strength to the device signal levels.

E. Active Survey: The Contractor shall perform an active wireless survey demonstrating performance according to the design criteria of Part 1 (above). From this survey, produce an active survey report, including floor plans.


A. Manage Integration of Wireless Services and Applications: The Contractor shall coordinate the integration of 802.11 wireless services with the Network Integrator, such as wireless LAN access points and telemetry applications. The Contractor shall provide equipment and components required to support the wireless services and to make adjustments to the System necessary for full operation.

B. The Contractor will coordinate access control and authentication with the Network Integrator and Owner to ensure access control and authentication is enabled and functional.

3.05 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Coordinate labeling and identifier assignment with the Engineer or Owner. Submit a labeling plan to the Engineer for approval prior to labeling work.

B. Label Format




B. Present the completed System and wireless services to the Owner, including functionality, features, ongoing maintenance, and warranty procedures. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer system operation, including signal strength at select locations. Turn over at least 1 set of both electronic records and printed records, per the Owner’s request.


A. Provide support services for 12 months following the Owner’s acceptance of the System (for services such as integration of additional wireless operators).








B. For this System, provide 20 hours of training for Owner.

3.10 SUPPORTING INFORMATION

Wireless Heat Map Ground Floor Plan of AYC


Wireless Heat Map Second Floor Plan of AYC

SECTION 27 3100 ‐ VOICE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT (NIC)

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Voice Communications Equipment shall be considered an active network component. The County will provide and install all Voice Communications Equipment.

B. Section Includes: Basic Voice Equipment (VoIP switch and voicemail/unified messaging) to support voice communication services

C. Relocation & Commissioning of Network Equipment

D. Related Sections


1.02 REFERENCES

A. Not included

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Not Included




A. Not included

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Not included


A. Not included


A. Not included

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Not included

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 NOT INCLUDED


3.01 NOT INCLUDED

SECTION 27 4113 ‐ ARCHITECTURALLY INTEGRATED PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Roll‐up, electrically operated projection screens

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05 50 00 ‐ Metal Fabrications: Metal fasteners and other support components for suspending projection screens.

2. Section 06 10 00 ‐ Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for installation of projection screens.

3. Section 09 29 00 ‐ Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings to contain recessed projection screens.

4. Section 09 51 00 ‐ Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended acoustical panel ceilings to adjoin recessed projection screens.

5. Division 26: Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for motorized projection screens.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See section 27 00 00 for submittal requirements



A. Source limitation: Obtain projection screens from single manufacturer as a complete unit including necessary mounting hardware, motor, controls, limit switches, and accessories.

B. Motorized projection screens shall bear UL label and be certified for use in the United States by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc.


A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin.

B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Da‐Lite Screen Company, 3100 North Detroit Street, Post Office Box 137 Warsaw, IN 46581‐0137, (800) 622‐3737

B. Draper, Inc., 411 South Pearl Street, Spiceland, Indiana 47385‐0425; (765) 987‐7999.

C. Stewart Filmscreen, 1161 West Sepulveda Blvd., Torrance, California 90502; (310) 784‐5300.

D. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01630 ‐ Product Substitution Procedures.

2.02 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS

A. Specifications for screens located in the Ashland Youth Center.

B. Type: Recessed, plenum rated, electrically operated, retractable projection screen with rigid metal roller housing screen motor and screen tensioning system; Tensioned Advantage Electrol Screen as manufactured by Da‐Lite Screen Company, Inc. or equivalent from another authorized vendor.

C. Method of installation: Recessed in ceiling.

D. Screen case: Extruded aluminum with steel end brackets designed to receive mounting hardware.

1. Ceiling flange: Fabricate case with bottom flange to accommodate adjacent ceiling finish.

2. Case length:

a. Living Room: 177‐1/4 inch case

b. Youth Activity Room 207: 121‐1/2 inch case

c. Large Meeting Room 417: 121‐1/2 inch case

d. Conference 119: 134‐1/2 inch case

3. Case access door: Aluminum door at bottom of case manually opens to access rollers.

4. Finish: White, powder coating.

E. Tensioning system: Tab guide cable system to maintain even lateral tension and to hold viewing surface flat.

F. Integral junction box: Box in housing shall contain 4‐prong connector for easy plug‐in to motorized roller assembly with viewing surface. Housing can be installed and wired to electrical supply during



construction. Motorized roller assembly shall be installed later after construction is substantially complete.

G. Permanently attach screen fabric to roller. Provide bottom of screen with metal rod in pocket.

H. MOTOR

1. Type: 110‐120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre‐set accessible limit switches.

2. Mount inside screen roller on rubber vibration insulators.

I. CONTROLS

1. Low voltage control: Wall‐mounted control station with 3 button switches for up, down and stop functions and interface to master control system. Wiring from switches or receivers to low voltage control unit to be 24 V.

2.03 VIEWING SURFACE

A. Material: Flame retardant, mildew resistant, smooth, white, vinyl coated fiberglass screen that can be rolled, folded, cleaned with mild soap and water solution. Da‐Mat or manufacturer equivalent.

B. Size of viewing surface:

1. Living Room: 90 inch x 160 inch, 16:9 aspect ratio

2. Arts Room 220: 58 inch x 104 inch, 16:9 aspect ratio

3. Youth Activity Room 207: 58 inch x 104 inch, 16:9 aspect ratio

4. Large Meeting Room 417: 58 inch x 104 inch, 16:9 aspect ratio

5. Conference 119: 65 inch x 116 inch, 16:9 aspect ratio

C. Joints: Viewing surface shall contain no seams.

D. Provide with black masking borders.


3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with ceiling construction and related components penetrating or above ceilings such as lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment, ductwork, and fire‐suppression system.

B. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, and bracing to ensure adequate means for installation of screens.

C. Coordinate requirements for power supply conduit, and wiring required for projection screen motors and controls.

D. Coordinate installation of recessed mounted screens with construction of suspended acoustical panel where appropriate. Where acoustical ceiling panels are to be adhered to screen case closure, provide and coordinate required tolerances and weight restrictions.

E. Prior to installation, verify type and location of power supply.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install projection screens and controls at locations and heights indicated on architectural drawings.


B. Comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings.

C. Install screen housing and make electrical connections prior to installation of suspended ceiling system. After interior construction is essentially complete, install viewing surface and drive assembly in housing.

D. Install screens securely to supporting substrate so that screens are level and back of case is plumb.

E. Provide required brackets, hanger rods, and fasteners.

3.03 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION

A. Test motorized projection screens to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and other operating components are functional. Ensure that screen is level and viewing surface plumb when extended. Correct deficiencies.

B. Demonstrate operation of screen to Owner's designated representatives.

3.04 PROTECTING

A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage from construction operations. If damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition.

SECTION 27 4116 ‐ INTEGRATED AUDIO‐VIDEO SYSTEMS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 CONDITIONS & REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of Contract, and Division 1, General Requirements. All of the provisions listed or specified therein apply to work under this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope of Work: This specification section defines certain audio, audiovisual, and television systems to be installed by an audiovisual systems contractor. Please see the “SYSTEM DESCRIPTION” section for specifics.

B. Definition of Terms:

1. The term "shall" is mandatory; the term "will" is informative; the term "should" is advisory; and the term "provide" means furnish and install.

2. The term "custom" indicates systems or components that shall be fabricated by the Contractor based on these specifications and drawings.

3. The term "OFE" refers to Owner Furnished Equipment. Provide for removal, relocation and testing prior to installation. Coordinate the integration of existing components or new components, provided by the Owner into the audiovisual system. Provide required mounting hardware, rack panels, cable, connectors, etc. to ensure proper operation of the OFE systems as specified.

4. The term "A/R" indicates component quantities as required.

5. The term "NIC" refers to work or equipment which is not in contract covered in this section.

6. The term "future" indicates equipment that will be added to the systems by the Owner or Owner representative at a later date. Provisions shall be made for this equipment.



7. The term "or equal" indicates equal in materials, size, color, design, function, efficiency of specified, and conforming with base bid manufacturer/model.

C. Section Includes:

1. Supply and install a turnkey audiovisual system, to include equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure a complete and operating system.

2. Generate submittal information for the complete fabrication, installation and wiring of the system. Provide (or sub‐contract for) the on‐site installation and wiring, and provide on‐going supervision and coordination during implementation.

3. Provide for the initial adjustment of the systems as herein prescribed and provide test equipment for the system checkout and acceptance tests. Prior to the systems acceptance tests submit an initial testing and tuning report showing methods and results for tests performed.

4. Supply and configure software (including custom software as required) needed to operate the system with the functionality specified.

5. Provide on‐the‐job training in the operation and maintenance of the systems for personnel designated by the Owner.

6. Provide one year warranty for systems installed.

D. Related Work: Equipment and materials provided and installed by others, and require coordination with audiovisual work, will include the following:

1. Division 01: General requirements.

2. Division 06 20 00: Finish carpentry.

3. Division 23: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

4. Division 26: Electrical systems.

5. Division 27: Communications systems

E. Alternates: Submit a written request for modification to an installation practice desired or required which is contrary to these specifications or drawings. Modifications shall not commence without written approval from the Consultant.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Codes: Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable requirements of governing codes, rules and regulations including the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

2. National Electric Code (NEC)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

5. City, and other local codes and requirements

6. Standards: Equipment and materials specified shall conform to the current edition of the following standards where applicable:

7. UL Underwriters Laboratories

8. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

9. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

10. ANSI American National Standards Institute


11. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

12. SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

13. EIA Electronic Industries Association

14. ISO International Standards Organization

15. Sound Systems Engineering, 2nd Ed., Davis and Davis, Howard W. Sams Co., 1987.

B. Systems Contract Documents: These specifications and drawings referred to herein are furnished with and are integral parts of this system construction document. The specifications and drawings shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be returned by unsuccessful bidders.

C. Specification Information Requests: Direct requests for clarification, substitution, or changes in these specifications or drawings to the Architect.

D. Unit Prices: Unit prices, as derived from the quotations in the Schedule of Values, shall be used for adjustments to the contract price.


A. General: The Ashland Youth Center consists of a new construction public building serving a number of different functions, including the following:

1. Audiovisual systems for video and audio recording studio

2. Provisions for the use of portable DJ audio equipment in the DJ booth

3. Provisions for video and audio recording equipment

4. Video projection system display in the Living Room for watching content from a Blu‐ray player

5. Provisions for video displays in multiple locations

6. Paging system linked to the telephone system

7. Provisions for the use of portable remote sound boards for interior and exterior music amplification and recording

8. Provisions for the use of a portable lighting control panel to control lighting over the outdoor stage (lighting system specified by others)

9. Provisions for remote video camera inputs

10. Provisions for CATV and or Satellite TV

B. Lobby/Check‐In 201 (Living Room)

1. General: This area will be the main reception area. This area will house the audiovisual source equipment used for Movie Nights in the Living Room.

2. Video: A video projector will mount in the ceiling just under the bleachers. A motorized projection screen will be the display surface.

3. Audio: Surface/wall‐mounted loudspeakers used for audio playback. Subwoofers will be used in this space. An RF assisted listening system will be used

4. Source equipment:

a. Blu‐ray player in a cabinet

b. CATV tuner (with a CATV drop)

c. Computer interface

5. Controls:



a. Simple hand –held remotes will be used for audiovisual systems control.

b. Projection screen control: Up, Stop, Down

6. Audiovisual equipment rack

7. Provisions:

a. Floor box with power and data including pathways to loudspeakers, subwoofers and projector

C. Café Public Seating 208A

1. Audio: In‐ceiling loudspeakers used for audio playback and paging.

2. Video: Remote video camera input


a. CD player in a cabinet

b. Stereo, AM/FM receiver in a cabinet

c. CATV tuner (with a CATV drop)

4. Control: Simple hand –held remotes will be used for audiovisual systems control.

D. Game Room 205


E. Exercise/Fitness Room 502

1. Audio: In‐ceiling loudspeakers paging. Audio amplifier. Auxiliary audio inputs.



a. CATV drops for exercise equipment

b. CATV tuner (with a CATV drop)

4. Control: Simple hand –held remotes will be used for audiovisual systems control.

F. Arts Room 220

1. Video: Remote video camera input, portable video projector. A motorized projection screen will be the display surface.

2. Projection screen control: Up, Stop, Down

G. Toddler Classroom 407

1. Video: A 42‐inch LCD on a wall mount will be provided

2. Audio: A horizontal bar‐type loudspeaker will be attached to the bottom of the display


a. CATV tuner (with a CATV drop)

H. Performance 204B4, 204B5, 204B6

1. General: Interfaces to support studio recording equipment (musical instruments and computer audio output/input interfaces)

2. Audio: Audio input interfaces for microphones, headphones, line audio and loudspeakers; Auxiliary audio inputs.



I. Record/Edit 204B1, 204B2, 204B3

1. General: Interfaces to support studio recording equipment

2. Audio: Audio output interfaces for microphones, headphones, line audio and loudspeakers. Auxiliary audio inputs.


a. Audio mixer

b. Audio recorder and playback

c. Listening monitor

d. Microphones

J. Media Room 200

1. Audio: Auxiliary audio inputs.



a. Editing stations – hardware and software


5. Control Booth

a. Audio mixer

b. Audio recorder and playback

c. Listening monitor

d. Lighting control board

K. Outdoor Stage

1. Audio: Loudspeaker inputs for portable audio system, microphone interface locations. An RF assisted listening system will be used.

2. Video: Remote video camera input on stage and at Mix Location

3. Mix location: Floor box with pathway to control booth; Remote video camera input

L. Dance/Exercise Studio 203A


2. Audio: Ceiling‐mounted loudspeakers used for audio playback and paging. Auxiliary audio inputs.


a. CD player in a cabinet

b. AM/FM tuner in a cabinet


M. Youth Activity Room 207



N. Conference 119




2. Provisions:

a. Floor box with power and data including a pathway stubbed up to the ceiling

b. Power and data for future ceiling‐mounted projector

O. Break Room 121A

1. CATV input

P. Large Meeting Room 417



Q. Media Public Viewing Monitors – Three Locations

1. Video: Incoming video feed from Media Room, Security server

a. Café Public Seating 208A

b. Lobby/Check In 201

c. Lobby F‐1 630

R. Building Paging

1. Five paging zones

a. Café Public Seating 208A

b. Exercise/Fitness Room 502

c. Youth Area

d. Child Area

e. Health Clinic

2. Power amplifier, page processing, and system controls located in MDF equipment rack.

1.05 BID SUBMITTAL

A. Provide in accordance with project Bidding Requirements, in addition to the items in this section.

B. Schedule of Values: Provide a Schedule of Values for equipment to be supplied. Each piece of equipment shall be individually priced. Equipment costs shall reflect required modifications and accessories.

C. Non‐Equipment Costs: Furnish separately a list of non‐equipment costs for each area, by the following categories:

1. Engineering: Including required design, drawings, run sheets, instruction manuals, etc.

2. Pre‐Installation: Including fabrication, modification, assembly, rack wiring, etc., performed on the Contractor's premises.

3. Installation: Including on‐site installation and wiring, coordination and supervision, testing, checkout, Owner training, etc., performed on the Owner's premises.

4. General and Administrative: Including G & A expenses, shipping, insurance, and guarantees.

5. Taxes: Including applicable Local, State, and Federal taxes.

D. Service Contract: Submit Service & Maintenance costs as outlined in section 3.08.

E. Alternates: Submit bids on the basis of the specified equipment. Submit proposals for "alternates" with associated equipment costs, separate and apart from the costs of the equipment "as specified".


1. Proposals for alternate equipment will receive careful and equitable consideration if the differences do not depart from the overall intent of the design and operation of the system, and are in the best interests of the Owner.

2. Proposals for alternate equipment shall be accompanied by full technical information, "cutsheets", and specifications for the equipment so proposed.

F. System Enhancements: Submit recommendations which will enhance the performance of the system, or reduce costs without loss of performance, in the bid submission. Suggestions that are of value to the Owner will be taken into consideration in the evaluation of the bid returns. Such proposals shall be made as "alternates", with the appropriate cost modifications shown separate and apart from the costs of the system "as specified".

G. Sub‐Contract Information:

1. Identify sub‐contractors and their responsibilities and qualifications in the bid submission.

2. Because of the complexity of the systems, the supervision of such sub‐contracted work cannot be intermittent. Provide virtually continuous supervision of subcontractors during the installation.

H. Make exceptions to these specifications with the bid submission. In the absence of exceptions, these specifications and related drawings shall be binding in letter and intent. It will further be assumed that the design and specifications have been examined in detail, and full responsibility for the performance of the complete installation as designed and specified is accepted.

I. Key Personnel: Provide information on the Project Manager, Field Installation Supervisor and other relevant personnel who will be assigned to the project.

J. Schedule of Implementation:

1. Site Visit: Make a site visit before submission of bid. Include date of site visit with bid return. Coordinate site visit arrangements with the General Contractor.

2. Submit a scheduling plan with the bid return indicating the various pertinent terminal dates after award of contract for completion of design, pre‐installation work, on‐site installation work, and testing and acceptance.

3. Obtain projected dates when the relevant areas will be available for the on‐site installation.

4. Investigate potential contract, union, and scheduling questions, and guarantee compliance with requirements and regulations in effect on the job site.

5. It is possible that certain portions of the work described herein will be ready for use prior to the completion of the entire scope of this specification. The Owner reserves the right to use substantially completed systems without obligation to the Contractor and without implying final acceptance of the systems or equipment so used.

1.06 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Section.

B. Prior to Fabrication:

1. Panels, plates, and designation strips, including details and samples relating to terminology, engraving, finish and color.

2. Custom designed consoles, tables, carts, support bases, and shelves.

3. Schematic drawings of custom circuitry.



4. Unusual equipment modifications.

C. Prior to Assembly and Installation:

1. System functional line drawings: For video, audio, and control systems, include equipment names and model numbers (e.g., "Program Amplifier ‐ Crown CT‐400"). Clearly label each item of equipment shown on the drawing with the manufacturer's terminal number or input/output designation (e.g., "Mic 1 In", or "Record Out Left").

2. Equipment rack and patch panel assignment drawings: Provide scaled equipment rack elevations and full scale patch bay drawings with proposed labeling. Labeling on the functional diagrams, rack elevations, patch panels, and on the equipment controls shall be consistent and uniform.

3. Provide full scale drawings of custom plates and panels indicating exact lettering, critical dimensions, and finish.

4. Run sheets or field wiring drawings: Clearly show at each terminal point the type of connector to be used and include typical wiring details of each connector. Note where shields are connected and where they will float to ensure the integrity of the grounding system. Call out wire types and color codes where appropriate. Assign wire numbers and patch bay locations to every wire and patch point in the drawing.

5. Equipment modification drawings: Include details of modifications that change or void manufacturer’s warranties.

6. Final schematic drawings of custom circuitry: Include receptacle pin numbers and component callouts. Show details of custom resistive combining networks, filters, or pads which may be required in the assembly. Show point‐to‐point wiring drawings for control system modules and interfaces, and for switches and relays in audio, video, or control systems.

7. Test Equipment: Provide a list of test equipment, including manufacturer, description, and model number, of equipment that is expected to be employed in the test and adjustment of the systems specified.

8. Mockup of the recognition plates as described in the “Installation” section.

D. At the Completion of the Installation:

1. Notification: Provide written notification to the Owner and Architect when initial checkout is complete, normal settings are documented, as‐built and operational documentation are complete, and systems are available for final acceptance tests. Provide a completed copy of the initial testing report in accordance with Part 3.

2. Submit equipment manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment.

3. Submit "as‐built" drawings for systems and items indicated as "Custom".

4. Submit a copy of control system programming, including touch screen layouts, in electronic form and one print‐out hardcopy of the complete control system program.

5. Submit System Operation and Maintenance Manual:

a. Describe in the "Operation" section, typical procedures necessary to activate each system to provide for the functional requirements as listed under the System Description. Include normal settings for equalizer, amplifier, signal processing, and user‐operated controls (as established during system check‐out) in tabular or pictorial form.

b. Provide in the "Maintenance" section, a recommended maintenance schedule with reference to the applicable pages in the manufacturer's maintenance manuals. Where inadequate information is provided by the manufacturer, provide the information necessary for proper maintenance.


c. List of Replacement Parts: Provide a list of necessary and recommended replacement parts for a normal maintenance period of one year.

d. Assume the reader of this manual to be technically competent, but unfamiliar with this particular facility. It is estimated that this manual should require a minimum of 15 pages.

E. System Software: Provide copy of control system software program printout and CD‐R discs containing source code and comments.

1.07 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

A. Meet the following performance standards with each system, unless restricted by the published specifications of a particular piece of equipment. Notify Design Consultant of restriction.

B. Audio System:

1. Program Audio System:

a. Frequency Response: +/‐ 3 dB per octave band, 100 Hz to 12,000 Hz. 3dB per octave roll off below 100Hz and above 12 kHz.

b. Total Acoustical Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2% at 90 dBC (1kHz reference) at four feet above finished floor in the middle of the room.

2. Distributed Audio System:

a. Frequency Response: +/‐ 3 dB per octave band, 125 Hz to 10,000 Hz. 3dB per octave roll off below 125 Hz and above 10 kHz.

b. Total Acoustical Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2% at 85 dBC (1kHz reference) at four feet above finished floor in the middle of the room.

3. The gain structure for all audio system components (mixer input to amplifier output) shall be adjusted to achieve the highest signal‐to‐noise ratio, 75 dB from 50 Hz to 15 kHz minimum.

4. The audio frequency response of the electronics system with equalizers bypassed shall vary less than +1 dB from 50 Hz to 12 kHz.

5. The electronic system audio distortion shall be less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at the equipment's rated input signal level.

6. Sound Output Capability: Provide program levels of not less than 95 dB and speech reinforcement levels of not less than 85dB in the seating area without objectionable distortion, rattles, or buzzes, employing as test signals several different samples of recorded music and microphones applied at each system input.

7. Hum and Noise: Hum and noise shall be inaudible (below the background noise level of the space) under normal operation and as observed in normal seat locations.

C. Video System:

1. Video system shall conform to RS‐170A standards, as applicable.

2. Signal‐to‐Noise Ratio (peak to RMS) Unweighted DC to 4.2 MHz: 55 dB minimum

3. Crosstalk: Crosstalk (unweighted DC to 4.2 mHz): 45 dB minimum

4. Frequency Response: Within plus‐or‐minus 0.5 dB to 4.2 mHz.

5. Line and Field Tilt: 2% minimum

6. Differential Gain: 3% maximum

7. Differential Phase: 2o maximum

8. Video Timing:



a. System Timing: Sync coincidence within 50 nanoseconds

b. Color Timing: Within 2o at 3.58 mHz

9. Radio Frequency (RF):

a. Visual Carrier Level: +6 dBmV minimum and +16 dBmV maximum at system outlets for utilized channels

b. Adjacent Channel Visual Carrier: 3 dB maximum differential at systems outlets

c. Non‐Adjacent Channel Visual Carrier: 10 dB maximum differential at systems outlets

d. Carrier‐to‐Noise Ratio: 43 dB minimum

e. Amplitude Response: Flat within plus‐or‐minus 1.0 dB

f. Signal‐to‐Noise Ratio: 50 dB minimum for the maximum level of the signal and the interference resulting from cross modulation from other signals on the system, after demodulation

g. Outlet‐to‐Outlet Isolation: 25 dB minimum

h. Audio carrier: Suppress 15dB below visual carrier for same channel

i. Slitter/combiners: Slope of 0.8dB, Return loss of 15dB

j. At no point in the system shall signal drop below 0dB.

D. Projection System:

1. Image size and clarity: Mount the video projector as indicated on the drawings and project the image onto the projection screen. Projected images shall be of maximum width and maximum height, centered on screen. Image tests shall utilize standard AMI test slides and similar video media to establish any image sizes on the screen.

2. Geometric Distortion: Shall be corrected using physical and/or optical adjustment only. Electronic or digital correction should be used only when called for by the design intent.

3. The total averaged light output from a projector, in lumens, shall be within plus‐or‐minus 15% of that specified by the projector manufacturer.

4. The light fall‐off from the center of the projected image to four corners, as measured at the projected image plane, shall not exceed 50% for video projector images or 35% for slide projector images.

5. Projectors, lenses, and mirrors shall be solidly mounted and braced so that there will be no observable movement in the image induced by motor vibration or other mechanical operations.

E. Control:

1. Verify functional operation for specified control operations.

2. Illuminated feedback of the active function via illuminated or shaded pushbutton at operator and wired remote control stations.

3. Wireless systems shall neither be the source of, nor be affected by, radio‐frequency interference to/from external signal devices.

4. Ensure that ergonomic parameters are taken into account when designing the human interface to the control system. Be aware that the level of technical inclination will vary between users. The following guidelines should be followed:

5. Graphics:

a. Avoid abbreviations

b. Size lettering at 1/8" minimum

c. Maintain background to lettering contrast


6. Positive logic: Avoid conditions which may cause command synchronization conflicts (i.e., alternate action (toggling) on/off without power reset of feedback. Provide power sensors or other devices where necessary to ensure that positive logic conditions are maintained.

7. Timing: Avoid the possibility for two or more serial macros or actions being sent simultaneously to the same piece of equipment through flag checking/setting routines.

8. Linking: Provide linking of functions to require the fewest number of user actions to effectively control the equipment.

9. Clearing: Ensure that each media selection clears the previous audio and visual selection (i.e. Slide "ON" clears the audio as well as video section of "VHS" SELECT".

10. Defaults: Establish default conditions for the system at power‐up including device audio levels, warm‐up routine, power conditions, switcher status and other default conditions as required by the Owner or Owner's representative.

11. Volume Memory: Provide easy‐to‐use memory for volume settings associated with each particular source device. They shall be maintained between alternate selections during each segment of the power‐up condition.

12. Status Indication: Buttons (hard and soft) which incorporate pilot light or inverted illumination capabilities shall be addressed through the software and programming.

13. Failsafe: No operation or sequence of operations shall cause the control system to become inoperable or interfere with further procession, correct operations or execution of commands.


A. Bear costs of shipping to the site, and of unusual storage requirements. Make appropriate arrangements, and coordinate with authorized personnel at the site, for the proper acceptance, handling, protection, and storage of equipment so delivered.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Warranty the entire system for a minimum of one year from the date of system acceptance by the Owner. Component warranties shall be honored for the term established by the manufacturer, if greater than one year. Include in the warranty quarterly site visits to check and adjust equipment and restore systems to original performance standards.

B. Activate manufacturer's equipment warranties in Owner's name to commence on the date of acceptance. In the case of Contractor‐ modified equipment, the manufacturer's warranty is normally voided. In such cases, provide the Owner with a warranty equivalent to that of the original manufacturer.

1.10 SOFTWARE LICENSE

A. Nondisclosure

1. In consideration of the disclosure to the Owner of information relating to all technical aspects of the Deliverables and other proprietary products, technology and/or processes of the AV Contractor, including, but not limited to, drawings, models, photographs, sketches and microfiche, the Owner agrees:

a. to maintain such information (including all portions or copies thereof) confidential in the same manner as its own Owner proprietary information is maintained,

b. not to disclose the information (or any portion or copy thereof) to any third party,

c. not to use such information (or any portion or copy thereof) for any purpose except maintenance and support of its in‐house systems.



d. The obligations of this Agreement shall not apply to any information which is or which becomes generally known to the public due to publication or by means other than a breach of duty by the Owner or which becomes otherwise available to the Owner through legal sources.

B. Obligations Governing the Software

1. Title to and exclusive ownership of the Software as licensed hereunder shall at all times remain with the AV Contractor or third party suppliers but the AV Contractor hereby grants to the Owner, or has obtained for the Owner from third party suppliers, successive irrevocable, royalty‐free, non‐transferable and non‐exclusive licenses to use the Software as licensed hereunder from the date of this Agreement in perpetuity.

2. The Owner shall have no right to sub‐license or part with possession of such Software as licensed hereunder or any part thereof to third parties.

3. The original and all copies of the Software as well as any updates which may be purchased by subsequent agreement shall be and remain the property of the AV Contractor. Title to all applicable rights in patents, copyrights, and trade secrets in the Software will remain with the AV Contractor.

4. The foregoing licenses shall extend to all equipment purchased or utilized by the Owner.

5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere herein, at no time shall the AV Contractor or third party suppliers be precluded or restricted from selling or licensing Software as licensed hereunder identical to the Software as licensed hereunder or any part thereof to other customers.

6. Software as licensed hereunder which is the property of any third party will be assumed to have been licensed by its proprietor to the AV Contractor and such Software as licensed hereunder shall be directly licensed by its proprietor or sub‐licensed to the Owner with the consent of the proprietor at no cost to the Owner on the same terms and Clauses as are contained in this Agreement in respect to the AV Contractor's own Software as licensed hereunder.

7. All Software as licensed hereunder will be, if developed exclusively for the Owner, delivered with the development system software tools such as cross‐assembler, linker, simulator and utilities. In addition, there shall be delivered Application specific notes and operating manuals for the Software and hardware that provide transparent access to the Software and Hardware control topology.

8. At the time of submitting the System to the Acceptance Tests, the AV Contractor will supply where applicable and having used its best efforts in the case of third party suppliers (best efforts will be demonstrated to the Owner by copies of correspondence between the AV Contractor and the third party stating the AV Contractor's request and giving the third party statement of compliance or otherwise) to the Owner media which will contain:

a. All source code pertaining to the System

b. Instructions and full description of equipment required which will enable the Owner to create executable programs from source code

c. All executable programs

d. Instructions and full description of equipment required which will enable the Owner to prepare operating systems and other third party Software as licensed hereunder for use

9. For any Software as licensed hereunder not developed by the AV Contractor all information, data, codes and documentation distributed to the AV Contractor and otherwise available to the Audio‐Visual system.

10. The above so submitted Software as licensed hereunder shall be in a form suitable for immediate access by the System.


11. In the event that the AV Contractor is unable to supply the source code pertaining to the System the AV Contractor warrants, and the Owner accepts, that at all times the latest version of the source code from the AV Contractor or any third party supplier has been deposited, at even date of this Agreement, and is available for inspection by the Owner during normal business hours at any time. The AV Contractor further warrants that the Independent Source Code Depository has been instructed and has acknowledged that the deposited source code will be released to the Owner upon insolvency of the AV Contractor.

12. If the Owner discovers an error in the coding or the logic of the Software as licensed hereunder and as supplied under the terms of this Agreement to the Owner, which prevents the System from performing in accordance with the performance requirements of this Agreement, the Owner shall notify the AV Contractor of the error and upon request by the AV Contractor will deliver to the AV Contractor its analysis thereof accompanied by complete program, module, data listings and sample runs exhibiting and rectifying the error.

13. The AV Contractor shall from time to time notify the Owner of the availability of newer versions of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder which the AV Contractor or any third party supplier has released for use by its customers generally and shall, within sixty (60) days of receipt of written request by the Owner, supply such newer version to the Owner. Any such Software as licensed hereunder provided must be documented as to: ‐

a. the fault being corrected (if any)

b. the enhancement it represents

c. the restrictions imposed or removed

d. the details of modifications to and differences from the version to be replaced

14. The Owner shall assist the AV Contractor in its performance under the terms of this Agreement by allowing the AV Contractor to use the Owner's System, data listings and sample runs to reproduce and/or correct the reported error and to install and check updated versions of the delivered Software licensed hereunder.

15. The AV Contractor represents and warrants that it is the owner or Licensee of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder and has the right to permit the Owner to use the same. The AV Contractor shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages, whether foreseeable or not, even if the AV Contractor has been advised of the possibility of such damages, resulting from or in any way connected with the use of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder.

16. The AV Contractor shall defend any suit or proceeding brought against the Owner and shall pay any adverse judgment entered therein so far as such suit or proceeding is based upon a claim that the use of the Software as licensed hereunder furnished by the AV Contractor under this Agreement constitutes infringement of any copyright or patent, provided the AV Contractor is promptly notified in writing and given authority, information and assistance (at the AV Contractor's expense) for the defense of same; and the AV Contractor shall, at its own expense and at its option, procure for the Owner the right to continue to use the said Software as licensed hereunder, or to replace the same with a non‐infringing release. The foregoing shall not be construed to include any agreement by the AV Contractor to accept any liability whatsoever in respect to copyrights or patents for inventions including more than the Software as licensed and furnished hereunder, or in respect of copyrights or patents for methods and processes to be carried out with the aid of said Software as licensed hereunder, except those which are inherent in said System as furnished. The foregoing states the entire liability of the AV Contractor with regard to copyright and patent infringement as related to the delivered Software as licensed hereunder.

17. The Owner acknowledges the rights of the AV Contractor and third party suppliers in and to the Software as licensed hereunder, including, but not limited to, computer programs, user manuals, other supporting material and data, identifying symbols, passwords, user numbers and security symbols, and further acknowledges that such are properly considered to be trade secrets in that



they involve processes and compilation of the information which are secret, confidential and not generally known to the public, and which are the product of the AV Contractor's own expenditure of time, effort, money and creative skills. The Owner also acknowledges and agrees that the use of the Software as licensed hereunder is on a confidential basis for the sole and exclusive use by the Owner and not for resale, and agrees that it will not use, publish disclose or otherwise divulge to any person, except necessary employees of the Owner, at any time, either during or after the termination of this Agreement, nor permit its employees to so divulge any such information regarding the software as licensed hereunder, without the prior written consent of an officer of the AV Contractor, except that the Owner is authorized hereby to reproduce information derived from the software as licensed hereunder for its own internal use by authorized employees. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the proprietary and secret information covered hereby may be disclosed by the Owner to a third party, person, firm or corporation if such disclosure is unavoidable because of its or their access to or control of the Owner's computers, provided that this sentence shall not be deemed to permit any use of the Software as licensed hereunder which would otherwise be prohibited. Nothing herein shall be deemed to limit any rights of the AV Contractor under copyright, patent or other law.

18. The Owner shall use the Software as licensed hereunder solely and exclusively for its own purposes and shall not, without the prior written approval of the AV Contractor, allow any third party to use the Software as licensed hereunder for purposes of any such third party whether or not the Owner is compensated therefore.

19. The AV Contractor warrants that a copy of the current and previous version of Software as licensed hereunder submitted to the Owner is available from the AV Contractor.

20. Provided that the Owner has obtained, under the terms of this Agreement or subsequent agreements, all items, such as but not limited to source code and compilers, required to modify the Software, the AV Contractor hereby grants the Owner the right to modify and to enhance the Software as supplied and licensed under the terms of this Agreement at its own risks and expense and further agrees such modifications and enhancements developed by the Owner to be the property of the Owner without prejudice to the rights of the AV Contractor to the basic Software. The Owner furthermore is under no obligation to notify the AV Contractor of any such modifications and enhancements.

21. The Owner warrants that all Software used for the duration of the warranty period is the Software as licensed hereunder and released from time to time by the AV Contractor to the Owner. Failure by the Owner to use the Software as licensed hereunder and released by the AV Contractor will constitute the conclusion of the warranty period as defined under the terms of this Agreement.

22. Any new version of Software as licensed hereunder and delivered to the Owner by the AV Contractor during the warranty period, under the terms of this Agreement which is deemed, and advised so by the AV Contractor, to rectify a failure which occurred during the operations of an event, will cause the warranty period for the Software as licensed hereunder to restart.

23. The AV Contractor hereby warrants the right by the Owner to any corrective Software updates for the next ten (10) years.

24. The AV Contractor restricts any enhancements to Software as licensed hereunder to the latest release of Software as licensed hereunder only.

25. The AV Contractor warrants that all contracts, contacts and arrangements between the AV Contractor and all third party Software suppliers providing Software as licensed hereunder will transfer to the Owner with the successful completion of the Final Acceptance.

26. The Owner warrants to inform the AV Contractor of all its dealings with third party Software suppliers supplying software as licensed hereunder for the duration of the warranty period.


27. The AV Contractor warrants that at no charge to the Owner it will reply to verbal queries from the Owner PROVIDED THAT:

a. the queries relate to the System provided by the AV Contractor pursuant to this Purchase Agreement

b. the query is raised by Owner staff or an authorized agent of the Owner

c. the query is during the AV Contractor's normal business hours

d. the Owner's representative or employee has attended standard basic training in the use of the System as provided by the AV Contractor

e. The Owner warrants that the use of this service is not intended as A vehicle for design consultation.

28. The Owner may make copies of the Software in any machine‐readable form for back‐up purpose only. Any such copies made by the Owner will include the AV Contractor's copyright notice, together with any other proprietary notices. The Owner will take all reasonable steps to ensure that the whole or any part of the Software is not reproduced or copied (save as aforesaid) by any employee, licensee, invitee or agent of the Owner or any other person under the control of the Owner and shall observe all reasonable security in relation to the storage, filing and use of the Software and basic materials. The Owner shall not sell, lease, rent, assign, transfer, deliver or otherwise part with possession of the licensed Software or permit any other person, firm or company to inspect or use the Software in any way provided that the external auditors formally appointed by the Owner shall have the power to inspect and have access to the Software held on Owner premises at any time.

29. The Owner acknowledges that in acquiring the right to use the Software it has relied upon its own skill and judgment in the selection thereof and in the use and result it intends to obtain therefore.

C. Software License Terms

1. The AV Contractor warrants that it has the right to grant this Software License(s) for the use of the Software and that the Licenses for Software supplied pursuant to this Purchase Agreement authorize the Owner to use the licensed Software in machine readable form on the processing devices which form part of the Owner's computer processing facilities so designated by make and model in respect of which this License is granted. If the designated processor is inoperative for any reason, any License granted under this Agreement shall be extended to authorize the use of the licensed Software on a back‐up processing unit until the designated processor is available again. If a designated processor is to be permanently phased‐out of operation and replaced by another processor, this License may be transferred to a replacement processor at no costs or liability to the AV Contractor upon written notification to the AV Contractor of the new processor make and model. For the purpose of this Agreement, use is defined as copying for processing any portion of the instructions or data in any licensed software from storage units or media into the designated processor, to the extent authorized above, into another processing unit in the event of malfunction.

2. Any additional licenses for Software and/or modifications, alterations and amendments to the licensed Software granted to the Owner by the AV Contractor shall be subject to:

a. Terms of any supplemental agreement between the parties, and the conditions of this Agreement insofar as they do not conflict with the terms of the supplemental agreement.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPLIER/INSTALLERS

A. General Qualifications:



1. Firm has been in business providing similar service required by this section for not less than five years.

2. Firm can outline the general scope of past projects, normal staffing levels, and union status of shop and field installation personnel.

3. Firm can list a minimum of three projects of similar scope successfully completed in the past 24 months, indicating the location, type of system installed, total contract amount, date completed, and include persons and telephone number to contact.

4. Firm can submit confirmation of current state or local contracting licenses, as required to perform the work under this section.

5. Firm shall be an authorized supplier and installer for all equipment.

6. Firm shall be an authorized service agent for repairs covered under warranty, for all equipment.

B. Sub‐Contract:

1. No sub‐contract will be permitted, unless specifically identified in the bid submission.

2. The Audiovisual Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the satisfactory implementation of each system, regardless of any subcontract arrangement.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide equipment as specified in the Equipment Schedule.

B. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment.

C. Materials: Supply materials and equipment that shall be new and shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the manufacturer.

2.03 CUSTOM FABRICATION

A. Electrical Power Connections: Electrical power junction boxes and circuits will be provided by others. Provide required interconnections to the power system from these junction boxes to the equipment and equipment racks.

B. Remote Control Panels and Receptacle Plates. Fabricate with 1/8 inch thick #6061‐T6 aluminum material. Finish brushed with 150 grit paper. Anodized finish to be approved by the Architect.

C. Equipment Rack: Provide power receptacle strips, with "U" ground outlets. Power receptacle strips shall be mounted on the rear interior of the rack space on the left side as viewed from the rear. Insulate power receptacle strips from the rack. Power receptacle strips shall be Middle Atlantic or approved equal. Provide UL‐approved florescent or LED work light magnetically attached on the upper left interior panel of each rack space.

D. Audio Transformers: Provide appropriate impedance ratio and power handling capacity for the function intended of audio transformers specified in the system.

E. Networks and Pads: Provide networks and pads as shown on the drawings or as required to achieve proper impedance matching and levels. Networks and pads shall be balanced. 0.5 watt, 5% composition resistors shall be soldered to fixed connection points at each end.

F. Loudspeaker Enclosures: Loosely fill with glass fiber to 2 lbs/cu. ft. density prior to installing loudspeakers.

G. Labeling: Provide permanently mounted 1/32" thick by 1/4" high black lamicoid or anodized, brushed aluminum labels with 1/8" engraved lettering for each piece of equipment and every user‐adjustable


control and input on the audiovisual equipment. Provide 3/8” to 1/2” high P‐touch or Dymo type labels on the back of each piece of equipment. Label should be white with black lettering.

H. Rack Shelves/Mount Adapters: Provide the appropriate factory or custom rack shelves/mount adapters for equipment installed in the audiovisual equipment rack, whether specifically itemized or not. Acceptable manufacturers for custom rack adapters: Middle Atlantic, Winsted, APC/Stantron.

I. Provide security covers or shaft locks for all level controls, as appropriate, on all equalizers, crossovers, signal delays, and other adjustable signal processors.

J. System Functional Diagrams: Provide reduced‐size as‐built functional diagram for the control, audio and video system. Frame with acrylic cover, or laminate drawing, and mount adjacent to equipment rack.

K. Seismic Safety: Mount and brace permanently‐installed equipment to the building structure to minimize potential damage to personnel or equipment from foreseeable seismic events. Physically bolt audiovisual equipment racks to the floor to prevent toppling. Brace hanging equipment such as video projectors, loudspeakers, graphic cameras, et cetera both to minimize sway and to prevent detachment from the overhead structure.

2.04 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. Note on substitutions: Most of the equipment in this list is standard equipment available from a variety of suppliers and manufacturers. Substitutions are permitted as long as the functional requirements in the System Description are met.

B. Lobby/Check‐In 201 (Living Room) Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

1 Blu‐ray Disk Player Denon DBP‐1610

1 HD Projector ; 6500 Lumen (1920x1080)

Christie DHD700‐HD Include appropriate lens

1 Surround sound receiver Denon AVR‐4810CI

1 AV Equipment Rack Middle Atlantic SRSR‐24

3 Loudspeaker (left, center, right)

Tannoy iw 62TDC

2 Surround sound loudspeakers Tannoy iw 62TDC

2 Subwoofer Tannoy VS 15HL

1 Assistive Listening Transmitter Listen Tech LT‐800‐072‐01 w/ universal antenna kit LA‐122

Include rack kit

#LA‐326

As req.

Assistive Listening RF Receiver Listen Tech LR‐500 Include #LA‐164 for each receiver



Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

1 CATV/SAT tuner Comcast As supplied

1 Computer Interface Extron DVI201AD Single‐gang Decora‐type DVI extender pair

C. Café Public Seating 208A Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

6 Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Tannoy CMS501 BM

1 Receiver Denon DRA‐397

1 CATV/SAT tuner Comcast As Supplied

1 CD Player Denon DCM‐27

1 Remote camera interface plate Panel Crafters PC‐G1860‐E‐P

D. Game Room 205 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes


E. Exercise/Fitness Room 502 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

6 Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Tannoy CMS501 BM

1 Stereo AM/FM amplifier Denon DRA‐397

1 CATV/SAT tuner Comcast As Provided

As req.

CATV drops tbd tbd

1 CD player Denon DCM‐27


F. Arts Room 220 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes


1 Portable video projector Christie LW400


G. Toddler Classroom 407 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

1 CATV/SAT tuner Comcast As Provided

1 42 inch LCD display NEC V421

1 Display Loudspeakers Innovox Audio FL‐H1

1 Display wall mount Chief LSM Series

H. Performance 204B4, 204B5, 204B6 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

3 Microphones Shure SM58 Add extra microphones as needed

3 Audio Interface Panel Panel Crafters custom Used for microphone, headphone and auxiliary inputs


I. Record/Edit 204B1, 204B2, 204B3 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

3 Audio Interface Panel Panel Crafters custom Used for microphone, headphone and auxiliary inputs

6 Audio Monitor Tannoy Precision 6 Keep as pairs

3 Mix/Record/Playback device Boss BR‐1200CD

J. Media Room 200 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

20 Editing station NIC Shown for coordination only.

1 Remote camera interface plate Panel Crafters custom

1 Audio/Video switcher Extron CrossPoint Ultra 1616 HVA



1 Audio interface plate Panel Crafters custom Used for microphone, headphone and auxiliary inputs

1 Digital signal processor Biamp AudiaSOLO

1 AV Equipment Rack Middle Atlantic WRK‐4MDK

K. Control Booth Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes


1 Digital Signal Processor Biamp AudiaSOLO

1 Lighting control console tbd tbd

1 Stereo headphones Sennheiser HD 380 PRO

2 Listening monitor Tannoy Precision 6 Keep as pairs


L. Outdoor Stage Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes


1 Lighting control console tbd tbd

1 Stereo headphones Sennheiser HD 380 PRO

1 Listening monitor JBL


2 Outdoor loudspeakers Tannoy POWERV 12 Provide stands

2 Remote camera interface plate Panel Crafters custom One on stage, the second at the mix location


1 Assistive Listening Transmitter Listen Tech LT‐800‐072‐01 w/ universal antenna kit LA‐122

Include rack kit

#LA‐326

As req.

Assistive Listening RF Receiver Listen Tech LR‐500 Include #LA‐164 for each receiver

M. Dance/Exercise Studio 203A Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

4 Wall mounted loudspeakers Tannoy V8 Mount close to ceiling in corners of room

1 Subwoofer Tannoy VS 15HL

1 CD player Denon DCM‐27

1 Stereo AM/FM receiver Denon DRA‐397

1 Amplifier Biamp MCA 8050

1 Digital Signal Processor Biamp AudiaSOLO

1 Audio Interface Plate Panel Crafters custom auxiliary inputs

1 Remote Camera Interface Plate Panel Crafters PC‐G1860‐E‐P

1 AV Equipment Rack Middle Atlantic EWR‐12‐22

N. Youth Activity Room 207 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes



O. Conference 119 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes



P. Break Room 121 A Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes



1 CATV/SAT Tuner Comcast As Provided


1 Display Loudspeakers Innovox Audio FL‐H1

1 Display wall mount Chief LSM Series

Q. Large Meeting Room 417 Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes



R. Media Public Viewing Monitors Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes


3 Display Wall Mount Chief LSM Series

3 Thin Client CPU Oracle Sun Ray 270

S. Building Paging Qty Description Manufacturer Model # Notes

1 Paging Control System with Amplifier

Bogen TPU100B

1 Paging Telephone Interface Bogen MVP130BG

As req.

Ceiling mounted loudspeakers Bogen CSUB


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that electrical requirements including junction boxes, floor boxes, ceiling loudspeaker enclosures, empty conduit and power circuits and receptacles are in place as shown on the drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Include the delivery, unloading, setting in place, fastening to walls, floors, ceilings, counters, or other structures where required, interconnecting wiring of the system components, equipment alignment and adjustment, and other work, whether or not expressly required, which is necessary to result in complete operational systems.

B. Physical Installation:


1. Firmly secure equipment in place unless requirements of portability dictate otherwise.

2. Mount permanently and/or provide a mechanical index insuring precise alignment of the projected image of optical projectors.

3. Provide adequate to support for fastenings and supports with a safety load factor of at least three.

4. Secure plumb and square boxes, equipment, etc.

5. Give consideration, not only to operational efficiency, but also to overall aesthetic factors in the installation of equipment and cable.

C. Cable Installation:

1. Mark cables, regardless of length, with permanent, non‐handwritten number or letter cable markers within six inches of both ends. There shall be no unmarked cables in the system. Marking codes used on cables shall correspond to codes shown on drawings and/or run sheets.

2. Furnish screw‐type terminal blocks, boards, strips, or connectors, for cables which interface with racks, cabinets, consoles, or equipment modules. Terminate wires terminating at screw‐type terminals with crimp‐on lugs. "Telephone‐style" punch‐down blocks are not acceptable for signal or data wiring.

3. Group cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal contamination, form separate groups for the following cables:

a. Power cables

b. Control cables

c. Video cables

d. Microphone audio cables

e. Line audio cables

f. Loudspeaker audio cables

g. Broadband RF cables

4. As a general practice, run power cables, control cables, and high level cables on the left side of an equipment rack as viewed from the rear. Run other cables on the right side of an equipment rack, as viewed from the rear.

5. Unless otherwise called for in these specifications and drawings, use the following cables:

a. Video cable RG59: Extron RG59, Liberty RG59‐CCTV‐CM‐BLK

b. Plenum‐rated video cable: Extron RG59P, Liberty RG59‐CCTV‐PL‐BLK

c. Microphone and line‐level audio cable: West Penn 454, Liberty 20‐2C‐SH‐GRY

d. Plenum‐rated microphone and line‐level audio cable: West Penn 25291B, Liberty 20‐2C‐PSH‐GRY

e. Program loudspeaker cable: West Penn 227, Liberty 12‐2C‐GRY

f. Plenum‐rated program loudspeaker cable: West Penn 25227B, Liberty 12‐2C‐P‐BLK

g. Distributed loudspeaker speaker cable: West Penn 224, Liberty 18‐2C‐GRY

h. Plenum‐rated distributed loudspeaker speaker cable: West Penn 25224B, Liberty 18‐2C‐P‐BLK

i. MATV trunk cable: West Penn 25821, Liberty RG11‐CCTV‐PL‐WHT

j. MATV drop cable: West Penn 25841, Liberty 18‐CMP‐VID‐COAX‐BLK

k. Control cable: West Penn 77350, C4215, Liberty LLINX‐U

l. Plenum‐rated control cable: West Penn D25350, Liberty LLINX‐U‐P

m. RGBHV signal cable: Extron M59‐5, Liberty RGB5C‐23‐CM



n. RGBHV mini‐cable: Extron MHRHF‐5, Liberty RGB5C‐25‐CM

6. Acceptable cable manufacturers: West Penn, Canare, Belden, Extron, Covid, Gepco, and Liberty.

7. Provide a service loop of appropriate length within racks and at boxes or points of termination.

8. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.

9. Clearly identify cable terminated in a floor pocket with permanent, indelible labels within 6" of the cable connector. Provide strain relief for cables. Provide a minimum of 3' of free cable coiled in the floor pocket. Use spiral wrap to group similar cable types.

10. Use plenum‐rated cable in plenum‐rated spaces. Where plenum‐rated cable is used, provide plenum‐rated and approved tie‐wraps and supports (Thomas & Betts #TYV525M, or approved equal).

D. Jacks and Connectors:

1. Panel‐mounted jacks must be recessed and have isolated grounds.

2. Contacts must be silver‐ or gold‐plated, bronze or brass.

3. Unless otherwise called for in these specifications and drawings, use the following types of jacks:

a. Microphone: XLR‐3 female

b. Line level audio: Combination XLR‐3/1/4 TRS

c. Loudspeaker: Neutrik Speakon

d. Video: BNC

e. RF: F

f. Camera: Triax or multi‐pin bulkhead

g. Wired Remote Control (multiplex signal): XLR‐5 female

h. Wired Remote Control (relay contacts): Neutrik Neutricon

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Canare, Switchcraft, Neutrik, Amphenol, Pomona, Extron, or Liberty.

5. Receptacle Plate Designation: Clearly engrave wall mounted receptacle plates with alphanumeric identification of input type (i.e., mic, line, speaker, video etc) and corresponding patch field designation.

E. Patch Panels:

1. Assignments: Wire patch panels so that signal "sources" (outputs from) appear on the upper row of a row pair; and "loads" (inputs to) appear on the lower row of a row pair.

2. Designation Strips: Utilize alphanumeric identifications and descriptive information on audio and video patch panel designation strips. Number the jack positions in each horizontal row sequentially from left to right. Letter the horizontal jack rows sequentially from top to bottom. Include the alphanumeric identification of each jack on the functional block drawings, as well as on reproductions of these drawings which shall be mounted in an appropriate location near the patch bays.

F. Grounding Procedures: In order to minimize problems resulting from improper grounding, and to achieve maximum signal‐to‐noise ratios, adhere to the following grounding procedures:

1. General: Because of the great number of possible variations in grounding systems, follow good engineering practice, as outlined above, and deviate from these practices only when necessary to minimize crosstalk and to maximize signal‐to‐noise ratios in the audio, video, and control systems.

2. System Grounds: Establish a single primary "system ground" for the systems in each particular area. Connect grounding conductors in that area to this primary system ground. Provide the


system ground in the audio equipment rack for the area. The ground shall consist of a copper bar of sufficient size to accommodate secondary ground conductors.

3. Rack Ground:

a. Connect the No.6 insulated copper wire connected to the earth ground to the primary system ground busbar in the Equipment Rack.

b. Bond a No.12 TW stranded wire from the Equipment Rack frame to the primary system ground bus bar.

4. Equipment Grounds: Grounding methods used will be dependent upon individual equipment interconnection of chassis ground, circuit common, and power supply common within the units. Provide ground method for equipment types as follows:

a. Equipment having a 3‐wire power cord with green wire of the power cord connected to chassis (Signal common is not internally connected to chassis): Make no connection from chassis ground to primary systems ground busbar in Equipment Rack.

b. Equipment having a 3‐wire power cord with green wire of the power cord connected to chassis: Make no connection from chassis ground to primary system busbar, but do make connection with 14AWG insulated wire from circuit common to primary system ground busbar in Equipment Rack. Separate circuit common from chassis ground.

c. Equipment having a 2‐wire power cord, no green wire, neutral is not tied to chassis, and circuit common is tied to chassis: Make connection from chassis to primary system ground busbar using 14AWG insulated wire.

d. Audio Cable Shields: Ground audio cable shields at one point only. There are no exceptions. For inter‐ and intra‐rack wiring connect the shield at one end only. For ungrounded portable equipment, such as microphones, connect the shield at both ends but grounded at only one end.


A. Initial Tests and Measurements: Before final adjusting and acceptance tests are scheduled, perform system checkout. Furnish required test equipment and perform work necessary to determine and/or modify performance of the system to meet the requirements of this specification. Include the following:

1. Test audio, video, RF, optical, and remote control systems for compliance with the functional requirements and Performance Standards.

2. Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality and to meet the manufacturer's published specifications.

3. Prepare and maintain documentation of performance tests, including numerical values of established equipment settings, for reference during the System Acceptance Tests. Submit final results prior to scheduling Final Acceptance Tests Manual.

4. Install 1/8" diameter vinyl "map dots" as indicators for nominal operating positions of rotary, slider, or switch controls available for operator adjustment. Provide multiple indicators, adequately distinguished, for controls having more than one nominal operating position.

5. Follow Electronic Industries Association Standards RS 219 and RS 160 in performing these tests.

B. Audio System:

1. Loudspeaker‐Line Impedance: Measure the impedance at 250 Hz, 1 kHz, and 4 kHz and the resistance of each loudspeaker line leaving the sound equipment rack with the line disconnected from its normal driving source. For lines to full‐range distributed loudspeaker systems, measure the magnitude of impedance at 1 kHz.

2. Hum and Noise Level:



a. Measure the hum and noise levels of the overall system for each microphone input channel and line‐level input channel.

b. Adjust gain controls for optimum signal‐to‐noise ratio so that full amplifier output will be achieved with 0 dBm at a line‐level input.

c. Terminate line‐level inputs with shielded resistors of 150 and 600 ohms, respectively, for these measurements.

d. Disconnect the loudspeaker lines and terminate the power‐amplifier outputs with power resistors for these measurements. The value of the load resistor shall be within 5% of the nominal load impedance of the amplifier under test. The power rating of the resistor shall equal the power rating of the amplifier.

3. Frequency Response of the System:

a. Measure the frequency response using the audio systems as described in Part 1. Adjust gain controls and equalizers to provide the octave‐band sound levels as specified.

b. Programmable Equalizers: Provide necessary controller with full audio spectrum display for the adjustment of programmable equalizers during system checkout. Do not provide equalizer programmers with the systems.

4. Uniformity of Coverage: Measure octave band of pink noise test signal, centered at 4 kHz, played through loudspeaker system.

5. Power‐Output and Signal‐Level Adjustment within System:

a. Measure the electrical distortion of the overall system for each line‐level input channel.

b. Adjust gain control as for the tests specified herein.

c. Apply a 1‐kHz sine‐wave signal from an oscillator having less than 0.5% total harmonic distortion at the input tested, at a level required to produce full amplifier output. Note that a pad with 150‐ohm output impedance is required for driving the microphone‐level input in accordance with the EIA standard.

d. Use a distortion analyzer to measure the output level and the total harmonic distortion of the amplification and control equipment. In the absence of a distortion analyzer, a high input impedance measuring device such as a DMM may be used to measure the output level. Lack of clipping or apparent deformation of a sine‐wave input signal at the power‐amplifier output, as seen on the oscilloscope, may serve as evidence that distortion of amplification and control equipment is within acceptable limits.

e. Make measurements with loads actually incurred in the system operation. Power‐amplifier loads shall be power resistors equal to the nominal load impedance of the output terminals used in the system.

6. Loudspeaker Polarity

a. Perform polarity checks of loudspeaker lines by means of a polarity tester or use DC source at one end of each line and a voltmeter at the other end. Loudspeaker lines shall be identically polarized with respect to color coding.

b. Test polarity of the loudspeakers using a sine‐wave test signal warbled about 500 Hz. The listener shall be located on axis of the loudspeaker. Switch the loudspeakers from nominally in polarity to nominally out of polarity with respect to the selected loudspeaker. With the loudspeakers in proper polarity, the quality and clarity of the music or speech should be greater, and the warble test signal should clearly come to the surrounding space from the loudspeaker.

7. Freedom From Parasitic Oscillation and Radio‐Frequency Pickup:

a. With systems set up for each mode of operation specified in the functional requirements, check to ensure that systems are free from spurious oscillation and radio‐frequency pickup, in the absence of audio input signal and when the system is driven to full output at 100 Hz.


b. Employ an oscilloscope having at least 5 MHZ bandwidth for these checks.

c. Apply slow sine‐wave sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz at a level of 6 dB below rated power‐amplifier output voltage to each system. Listen carefully for buzzes, rattles and objectionable distortion.

d. Correct causes of these defects unless the cause is clearly from other than the sound amplification system's equipment and installation, in which case bring the cause to the attention of the Architect.

8. Audio Test Signal Paths: Verify operation from source inputs (for microphones, audio tape units, video tape units, etc.) through ADAs, mixers, switchers, etc., to signal destinations.

C. Video System:

1. Input Signal Level: Measure standard composite signal level to be 1.0 volt peak‐to‐peak with oscilloscope, across standard input impedance.

2. Signal‐to‐Noise: Operate system at standard input and output levels. Terminate with standard load impedance. Measure noise level using oscilloscope for signals from 10 kHz to 4.2 MHZ and an RMS volt‐meter for signals from 0 to 10 kHz, and calculate signal‐to‐noise ratio.

3. Differential Gain: Using a step generator and waveform monitor measure chrominance, luminance, and normal synchronizing and blanking signals. Measure variation in amplitude of the chroma sub‐carrier at 10%, 50%, and 90% luminance.

4. Differential Phase: Operate system as defined above and measure variation in phase of the chroma sub‐carrier at 10%, 50%, and 90% luminance.

D. Optical System:

1. The light intensity shall be measured at five positions of the projected image (center and four corners) after the projector has been adjusted to provide the light output as specified above.

2. The "corner" locations shall be defined as the four points determined by intersecting lines drawn 5% of the distance in from the focused edges of the image.

3. The light meter used for the above measurements shall be a properly calibrated footcandle (or lux) meter and shall be cosine‐corrected.

E. Control System:

1. Verify operational functions at each control receptacle position.

2. Verify operational functions of wireless control device.

3. Verify operational functions of the control system and interfaced devices.

F. Radio Frequency (RF) System:

1. Use a standard television receiver connected to each system outlet. Make a subjective evaluation of picture quality and verify that no visible components of cross modulation, ghosting, or beat interference appear when the receiver is tuned to each of the desired channels.

2. Using an RF signal strength meter, record the signal levels in dBmV of modulated carriers transmitted through the system at representative outlets.

3. RF Test Signal Paths: Verify proper operation of the system from source inputs to the head end, including antennas, CATV feeds, and modulators, through line amplifiers, splitters, and directional couplers, to system outlets.



3.04 OWNER TRAINING

A. Provide on‐the‐job training by a suitably qualified instructor, to designated personnel, to instruct them in the operation and maintenance of the systems.

B. Arrange with the equipment manufacturer for such instruction, at no additional cost, in the event qualified instructors are not available on staff for certain sophisticated equipment.

C. Schedule the first training after the systems are operational. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training (total) on the systems included in this specification.

3.05 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. System acceptance tests shall not be performed until the initial system checkout and the initial testing and tuning report has been completed by the Contractor. The system acceptance tests consist of the following:

1. Take a physical inventory of equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract documents.

2. Demonstrate the operation of system equipment.

3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified for these tests.

4. Provide final, "as‐built" drawings, run sheets, manuals, and other required documents, as detailed in Part 1.

B. In the event further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the Architect.

1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing, continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall include, but not be limited to, changes to or installation of resistive pads, readjustment of loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system equalizers, programming changes to the control system, convergence of the video projector, if these adjustments are required.

2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Owner for time and expenses for these tests during extensions of the acceptance‐testing period.

3.06 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of the work, remove refuse and rubbish from and about the premises, and shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair damage caused to the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner.

3.07 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost to the Owner.

SECTION 27 4219 ‐ PUBLIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS (NOT IN CONTRACT)


A. Outdoor Modular LED Display.

2.01 SYSTEM


A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Barco.

B. Description: SLite 10 XP FX outdoor modular LED display. 1. Visual resolution 10.18 mm 2. Physical resolution 20.36 mm 3. Brightness 6,500 NIT (Display callibrated at 6500°K) 5,500 NIT 4. LED configuration 2R, 1G, 1B 5. LED density 9,646/m2 (896/ft2) 6. 5,808/panel (88 x 66) 7. Viewing angle • Horizontal 120° Vertical 60° 8. Contrast ratio (at 200 lux) 2,000:1 9. Lifetime (full white ‐ half brightness) 50,000 h 10. Lifetime (typical use) 100,000 h 11. Power consumption / tile

a. Maximum 640 W b. Average 160 W

12. Weight / tile (excluding structure) 40 Kg (88.2 lbs) 13. Processing (Color) 14 bit 14. Colors 4,4 trillion 15. Refresh rate (PAL/NTSC) minimum > 2000 Hz 16. Ruggedness IP 65 17. D320 input compatibility (modules) S‐Video ‐ Composite ‐ YUV ‐ RGB ‐ SDI ‐ HDSDI ‐ Data DVI up to

UXGA 18. Certification UL ‐ CE ‐ TUV ‐ FCC Class A

SECTION 27 5316 ‐ INFRARED AND RADIO FREQUENCY TRACKING SYSTEM

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Radio frequency tracking and identification and Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)

B. Related Sections 1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 00 00.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. In particular or addition to the codes and standards listed in Section 27 00 00, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. FCC Regulations:

a. Part 15: WLAN

b. Part 22: 850 MHz cellular band services

c. Part 24: Personal Communications Server

d. Part 27: Miscellaneous Wireless Communications Services

e. Part 90: Specialized Mobile Radio Service




1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. In addition to those Definitions of Section 27 00 00, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows: 1. “RFID”: Radio Frequency IDentification 2. “WiFi”: Wireless Fidelity ‐ radio frequency /wireless access method to a local area network, as

standardized by IEEE 802.11 3. “AWS”: Advanced Wireless Services 4. “iDEN”: Integrated Digital Enhanced Network 5. “LAN”: Local Area Network 6. “LBS”: Location Based Services 7. “LTE”: Long Term Evolution 8. “PCS”: Personal Communications Service 9. “RSSI”: Received Signal Strength Indication 10. “RTLS”: Real Time Location Services 11. “SMR”: Specialized Mobile Radio 12. “WiMAX”: Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access 13. “WMTS”: Wireless Medical Telemetry System


A. Work Covered Under Other Sections 1. Cabling 2. Conduit, device boxes, and sleeves 3. Power

B. System Description 1. The RF tracking system / RFID system, herein “System”, shall accurately and reliably locate and

track assets. The technology and medium is left to the solutions provider. The System shall be implemented with proven state‐of‐the‐art technology that can seamlessly integrate with business applications and rapidly‐evolving RFID technologies.

2. The System should be able to track identified objects. Examples of items that can be tracked:

a. Library books

b. Equipment

c. Laptops or mobile computers

C. Design Criteria 1. The System can utilize the Owner's LAN and/or Owner's wireless LAN. 2. The System shall be standards based, and preferred “open architecture”. 3. The System coverage area is described as follows:

a. Interior space with control/choke points located at receptionist turnstiles and rear doors. 4. The System’s location accuracy shall be pass through a control/choke point. 5. The System shall integrate with existing business applications and operate on commonly

available off‐the‐shelf server platforms and operating systems. 6. The System shall integrate with backend systems such as:

a. Inventory Control (if required)

b. Personnel mgmt (if required)


7. Backend integration for Tags shall be configurable. 8. Tags shall support flexible mounting options for people and assets. 9. Tags shall resist water and dust: tags shall meet IP‐65 for badge‐like tags and shall meet IP‐67

and IP‐68 for harsh environments. 10. The System shall accurately track assets indoors using a single platform. 11. The System shall be scalable enough to support multiple buildings per site and multiple sites in a

single platform. 12. The System shall be scalable enough to support anticipated tag density. 13. The System shall have a locally‐managed Location Server with the following features:

a. Redundancy in database and positioning

b. Support the anticipated tag density

c. Tag calibrating

d. Accessible using a standard browser

e. Allow for proactive management of active electronics

f. Support SNMP‐based element management systems and provide fault management information.

14. The System shall support choke‐point functionality. 15. The System shall be able to work supporting tag movement from one environment to another,

the tag must change the working mode dynamically without manual user intervention. 16. The System shall not impede any management features or functionality of any attached network

and/or device management system. 17. The System must be FCC certified where required.

D. Base Bid Work 1. The Work under this section includes furnishing materials, installation, and coordination through

the General Contractor with other trades for a complete, operational, and balanced System. Furnish necessary materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required to provide the System specified herein.

2. In general, the Work of this Section includes the following:

a. Submittals

b. Project management services

c. Detailed system design

d. Location server, tags, application software (including site licenses), and required integration equipment

e. Installation and validation

f. Manage Integration with backend systems described in 1.04 C.5, .6, and .7.

g. System acceptance testing and turn over to Owner

h. Owner’s network management system

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittal Requirements Prior To Start Of Construction: 1. Product Data 2. Network requirements. If using 802.11 WiFi technology, describe WiFi requirements. 3. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following information:


b. Integration with other systems

c. Coverage plans, showing the design coverage for each as described in 1.04 C.3.



d. Expected density plans, indicating the number of tags by region

e. Equipment and/or wall/rack elevations, showing equipment layout, space requirements 4. Infrastructure Requirements, such as power and cooling (e.g., heat load in BTU/hr) 5. Mounting Requirements, for headend equipment and examples of each type of field

device/device group

C. Submittal Requirements Prior To Acceptance Testing: 1. Acceptance Testing Procedures: describe in detail the procedure for testing the System’s

performance in accurately locating objectives. Include a description of the test data (or an example of the test report).

D. Submittal Requirements at Close Out: 1. As‐Built Drawings Submittal 2. Operations and Maintenance Manual (refer to Section 27 00 00 for contents)

E. Substitutions 1. Requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in

Section 27 00 00.





1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work and System to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year including components, electronics, etc., and coverage. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sensormatic

B. Checkpoint Systems

C. 3M

D. Aeroscout

E. Alien Technology Corporation

F. Allaura

G. Bosch

H. Confidex

I. Crib Master

J. FrontWeb

K. HID Corporation

L. IDMicro Inc.


M. IntermecWilliam Frick

N. LaserCard Corpoation

O. MetalCraft

P. Motorola

Q. Mobile Aspects

R. Starport

S. ThingMagic

T. Versus Technology – infrared & 433 MHz

U. Wavemark

V. Passive RFID/WhereNet

W. Or equal system

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS



3.01 GENERAL



A. Prior to the start of this Section’s installation Work, examine 802.11 wireless network for compatibility with the work of this section, and readiness for connections with the System.

B. Identify types and quantities of required tagging

C. Identify backend systems and their respective resources

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Project Management Services: The Contractor shall assign a single‐point‐of‐contact to this project, “PM”. The PM shall have overall responsibility for communications and delivery of contracted materials, installation, performance criteria, and services. The PM shall be responsible for interfacing with the Owner, Engineer, General Contractor, and the subcontractors. The PM shall present the design iterations to the Owner, coordinate cable routes with the Engineer, coordinate on‐site construction activities with the General Contractor, manage the process to coordinate bringing wireless operators into the facility, and close out the Project with the Owner.

B. Detailed System Design: The Contractor shall use the requirements of this Section to complete the detailed design of the System. Design shall include computer RF modeling and site surveys. The detailed design shall deliver the pre‐construction submittals, including iterations for the Owner’s review and sign‐off. The Contractor shall be able to show design and RFID performance to sub‐room precision for all rooms within the defined coverage areas.

C. Installation: The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and schedule with the Owner and General Contractor prior to the start of installation activities. Once the Owner and General



Contractor have accepted the coordination and schedule, the Contactor may proceed with installation.

D. Active Survey: The Contractor shall perform an active RFID survey demonstrating performance according to the design criteria of Part 1 (above). From this survey, produce an active survey report, including floor plans.


A. Manage integration of RFID: The Contractor shall coordinate the integration of the RFID system with the Network Integrator, such as wireless LAN access points and telemetry applications. The Contractor shall provide equipment and components required to support the RFID services and to make adjustments to the System necessary for full operation.

B. Manage integration with the following: 1. Inventory Control system

C. Manage acquiring FCC license. The Contractor shall represent the Owner to obtain required licenses for operation under FCC Regulations.

3.05 LABELING

A. General Requirements 1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to TIA/EIA‐606‐A Administration

Standard and as approved by Owner’s Representative before installation. 2. Permanently label equipment, components, and cables. Affix label as close as practical to each

end of cables. 3. Coordinate labeling and identifier assignment with the Engineer or Owner. Submit a labeling

plan to the Engineer for approval prior to labeling work.

B. Label Format 1. Provide permanent labels with machine‐generated text; hand written labels will not be accepted. 2. Labels on cables shall fully wrap around conductors with a self‐laminating feature to provide

permanent marking.






B. Present the completed System to the Owner, including functionality, features, ongoing maintenance, and warranty procedures. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer system operation, including system operation at select locations. The Contractor shall demonstrate the desired services have been successfully deployed and tested prior to Owner’s written acceptance.

C. Issue to Owner 1 set of records – both electronic and printed.


A. Provide support services for 12 months following the Owner’s acceptance of the System (for services such as integration of additional wireless operators).




B. Provide 16 hours of training for Owner / Owner’s representative. Training shall cover, at a minimum, Location server operation, calibrating field devices, other settings and adjusting, and routine maintenance.

End of Division


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security, Page: 1

DIVISON 28 ‐ ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 0000 ‐ BASIC SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 28 and is intended to supplement, not supersede, the requirements specified in Division 1.

B. The requirements described herein include the following:

1. References

2. Definitions

3. System Description

4. Submittals

5. Quality Assurance

6. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling

7. Project Management and Coordination Services

8. Warranty

9. Maintenance

C. Products furnished and installed under another section:

1. 120V power

2. Conduit and junction boxes

3. Door hardware

D. Related Sections

1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work, and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable installation.

2. Section 28 05 13 – Security System Cabling

3. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling

4. Section 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System

5. Section 28 16 00 – Intrusion Detection System

6. Section 28 23 00 – Video Surveillance System

7. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the installation of underground conduit, in‐grade pull boxes, vaults, and bollard foundations. Refer to Division 31, Earthwork.

8. Selective Demolition: Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as indicated. Also dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations. Refer to Division 2, Selective Demolition.

9. Concrete Work: Include forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast‐in‐ place concrete, finishing and grouting as required for underground conduit encasement, pedestal foundations, and curbs (also includes saw‐cutting of existing slabs and grouting of conduits in saw‐cut).

Volume 2: Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

10. Miscellaneous Metal Work: Include fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, equipment enclosures, cameras, and similar devices. Refer to Division 5, Metals.

11. Miscellaneous Lumber and Framing Work: Include wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of security materials and equipment. Refer to Division 6, Rough Carpentry.

12. Moisture Protection and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Include membrane clamps, sheet metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealant as required for waterproofing of conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors, ceiling slabs and foundation walls. Tape and make vapor tight penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade. Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

13. Locking Hardware: Include interface to electronic hardware and door controllers on security related doors. Refer to Division 8, Doors and Frames.

14. Access Panels and Doors: Required in walls, ceilings, and floors to provide access to security devices and equipment.

15. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for security cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, and devices where indicated as field painted in this Division. Refer to Division 9, Painting.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. General

1. Codes, standards, and industry manuals/guidelines listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Consider such codes and/or standards a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.

2. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

3. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid unless otherwise specifically stated.

B. Codes: Perform Work executed under this Section in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest edition of governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. United States Department of Labor (DOL) Regulations (Standards ‐ 29 CFR)

a. Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards”

2. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)

b. NFPA 75, “Protection of Information Technology Equipment”

3. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, California Building Standards Code Part 2, Basic Building Regulations and Part 3, California Electrical Code (CEC)

4. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

5. Uniform Fire Code (UFC)

6. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC)

7. National, State, Local and other binding building and fire codes



8. FCC Regulations:

a. Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits

b. Part 68 – Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network

C. Standards: Perform Work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 28 in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards as applicable:

1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings.

a. UL 294: Access Control System Units

b. UL 1076: Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

c. UL 2044 Commercial Closed‐Circuit Television Equipment

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. The Definitions of Division 1 apply to the 28xxxx sections

B. In addition to those Definitions of Division 1, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “Owner”: Alameda County Redevelopment Agency

2. “Engineer”: TEECOM Design Group

3. “Furnish”: To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories.

4. “Install”: To set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together and test before turning over to the Owner, parts, items, or equipment supplied by contractor or others. Complete installation and make ready for regular operation.

5. “Provide”: To furnish, transport, install, erect, connect, test and turn over to the Owner, complete and ready for regular operation.

6. “Connect”: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross‐connect wire, etc. to complete an electrical or optical circuit.

7. “As directed”: As directed or instructed by the Owner, or their authorized representative.

8. “Cabling”: A combination of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware (e.g., cables, conductor terminations, connectors, outlets, patch panels, blocks, and labeling).

9. “System”: The access control, video surveillance, intrusion detection, and entry telephone systems

10. “SEC”: Security Equipment Cabinet

11. “SJB”: Security Junction Box

12. “ACAMS”: Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System

13. “VSS”: Video Surveillance System

14. “IDS”: Intrusion Detection System


A. Overview

1. The Owner intends to construct/renovate a 2‐Story; multi‐level youth center facility at 16335 East 14th Street San Lorenzo, CA.

2. Security at the new facility will consist of video surveillance, access control and alarm monitoring, and intrusion detection systems.


3. The System will connect to the Owner’s new head end located in the IDF Room over the Owner’s local/wide area network.

4. Provide a high level of coordination services to ensure the proper installation and functioning of the security system.

5. Coordinate the installation of the security system with other trades. This may include: review of other’s subcontractor’s shop drawings, attendance at meetings, providing samples for mockup, and preparation & distribution of written documentation.

6. Refer to Division 1 for detail building description.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System (ACAMS)

a) The Owner requires an access control system to automate opening and closing of the building, restrict access after hours by cardholder privileges, and monitor specific spaces for intrusion.

b) The ACAMS consists of card readers, control panels, power supplies, workstations, alarm monitoring devices, and interfaces to other security equipment.

c) Refer to Section 28 13 00 for detailed description of system.

2. Intrusion Detection System (IDS)

a) The IDS consists of keypads, control panels, alarm monitoring devices, and interfaces to other security equipment.

b) The IDS will communicate with a remote, third‐party central station for alarm monitoring and dispatch of the local Police Department or the local, on‐site security personnel.

c) Refer to Section 28 16 00 for detail description of system.

3. Video Surveillance System (VSS)

a) The Owner requires a video surveillance to provide real‐time monitoring of the facility, a photographic record of access control transactions and alarm events.

b) The VSS consists of an Interior/Exterior Fixed IP cameras, Exterior Pan‐Tilt‐Zoom Cameras, power supplies, and network video recorders.

c) Refer to Section 28 23 00 for detailed description of system.

4. The System includes integration with the Fire/Life‐Safety system to provide the following:

a) Automatically release locks upon fire alarm activation for doors within the path of egress

b) Disconnect power to magnetic door holders to automatically close doors after business hours.

C. Alternates

1. ALT‐280000‐01: Renewable Annual Maintenance Agreement

a) Perform bi‐annual examinations by trained personnel including necessary measurements, adjustments, and parts replacement to keep the equipment in efficient and proper operation.

b) Perform maintenance work, except emergency repairs, during regular working hours of regular working days.



c) Perform emergency repairs on an immediate basis (4 hour response time maximum, 7 days a week, 24 hours a day) when a system or component malfunctions during use.

d) Do not subcontract or assign maintenance work unless the Owner has approved such assignment in writing.

2. ALT‐280000‐02: Alarm Monitoring Agreement

a) Provide an alarm monitoring agreement for the IDS with the following features:

(1) Opening and closing reports

(2) Daily test

(3) Cellular backup

b) Coordinate with the Owner for alarm dispatch requirements and contact information.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit required submittals to the General Contractor in the quantities and formats as required under the general contract. In the absence of requirements, provide as described in the following with reference to quantity and format.


1. Resumes of the Project Manager, General Foreman, and Lead Technician(s) indicating role, years of experience, product certifications and training, listing of similar projects the individual performed the role proposed for this project along with client contact information for each.

2. Certification letters stating the Contractor is an authorized reseller, installer, and extended warranty provider for the selected access control, video surveillance and intrusion detection systems:

C. Product Data

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the product data submittal prior to the release of materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity: Submit product data submittals as described in Division 1.

3. Format:

a. Minimum Format: Submit each product data submittal in an 8‐1/2 x 11 inch folder. Product data submittal shall be in a 3‐ring binder (or similar). If in a 3‐ring binder, insert the submittal information the transparent front cover and spine pockets.

b. Clearly label the cover and spine of each submittal with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Project Submittal Number

4) Submittal Name (e.g., “Product Data Submittal for Video Surveillance System”)

5) Specification Section Number (e.g., “Section 28 23 00”)

6) Date of Submittal Format: <month> <day>, <year> (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

7) Contractor Name

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning of the submittal that lists materials by article and paragraph number (e.g., “2.02‐A Network Video Recorders”).

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the submittal.

4. Content


a. Cover Letter: Product data submittals shall include a cover letter stating that the submittal is in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Sign (and stamped, if applicable) cover letter and list items and data submitted. Have the person who prepared the submittal sign the document as well. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of submittal.

b. Product Information: Product Data submittal shall consist of manufacturer's technical data, product literature, "catalog cuts", data sheets, specifications, and block wiring diagrams (if necessary). This data shall clearly describe the product’s characteristics, physical and dimensional information, electrical performance data, materials used in fabrication, material color & finish, and other relevant information such as test data, typical usage examples, independent test agency information, and storage requirements. Clearly indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional accessories, which are included and those which are excluded. At a minimum, include products listed in the Division 28 specifications. Include relevant products that will be installed, which are not listed in the specifications.

c. Re‐submittals: Provide a cover letter with the re‐submittal that lists the action taken and revisions made to each product submittal in response to Submittal Review Comments. No review shall take place for any re‐submittal packages that is not accompanied by this cover letter. Failure to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the re‐submittal package.

D. Shop Drawings

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the shop‐drawings submittal prior to the release of materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity and Media: Submit shop‐drawings as described in Division 1.

3. Format:

a. Produce shop drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD‐compatible files.

b. Use the same size drawing sheet as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

c. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

d. Screen background information.

e. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

f. Scaling:

1) Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’‐0”

2) Scale enlarged room plans at 1/4”=1’‐0”

3) Scale wall elevations at 1”=1’‐0”

4. Content:

a. Submit shop drawings that represent proposed installation of security system.


1) Locations and identifiers of security devices.

2) Size, quantity, location and proposed routes of security cabling.


c. Point‐to‐Point Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices.

d. Schedules: Provide schedules for devices and control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.



e. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the devices, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

f. Proposed mounting details

E. As‐Built Drawings

1. Quantity and Media: Submit as‐built drawings as described in Division 1.

2. Format:

a. Produce as‐built drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD‐compatible files.

b. Use the sheet size as the drawings of the Contract Documents, and use the project title block.

c. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

d. Use symbols identical to the symbols shown on the Drawings.

e. Screen background information.

f. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

3. Content:

a. Submit as‐built drawings that fully represent actual installed conditions and that incorporate modifications made during the course of construction.


1) Locations and identifiers of security devices.

2) Size, quantity, location and proposed routes of security cabling.


c. Point‐to‐Point Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices.

d. Schedules: Provide schedules for devices and control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

e. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the devices, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

f. Custom mounting details

F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

1. Quantity: Submit quantity of O&M Manuals as described in Division 1.

2. Format:

a. Submit each O & M Manual in a white, 3‐ring binder with front cover and spine clear pockets for insertion of the project information.

b. Clearly label the cover of each O&M Manual with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Manual Name (e.g., “Operation and Maintenance Manual for Telecommunications Cabling System”)

4) Date of Submittal Format: <month> <day>, <year> (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

5) Contractor Name

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning that lists the contents.

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the manual.


3. Content:

a. 11”x17” prints of as‐built drawings, as described above

b. Manufacturer's original catalog information sheets for each component provided under applicable Section (typically, this is similar to the accepted product data submittal)

c. Warranty certificate from the manufacturer and the Contractor

d. Manufacturer’s instructions for system or component use

e. Instructions and requirements for maintenance and warranty issues

1) Contents shall include requirements and methods for maintaining installed products.


A. Contractor Qualifications

1. A current, active, and valid and C7 or C10 California State Contractors License

2. Minimum five years experience in installation and service of access control, video surveillance, and intrusion detection systems.

3. Minimum five completed projects similar to scope and cost.

4. Evidence of technicians qualified for the work in the form of current manufacturer’s training certification

5. IBEW or CWA union affiliation

B. Materials

1. Materials, support hardware, equipment, parts comprising units, etc., shall be new, unused, without defects and of current manufacturer, materials

2. Use specified products and applications, unless otherwise submitted and approved in writing.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules of National Board of Fire Underwriters wherever such standards have been established and shall conform to the regulations of the State Fire Marshal, OSHA and the codes of the governing local municipalities. Work under Division 28 shall confirm to the most stringent of the applicable codes.

2. Provide the quality identified within these Specifications and Drawings when codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent. The Contract Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

D. Drawings

1. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings except where other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

2. Drawings for the Work within this Division are essentially diagrammatic within the constraints of the symbology applied.

3. The Drawings do not fully represent the entire installation for the security system. Drawings indicate the general route for the cables and the location of outlets. The Drawings might not expressly show every conduit, sleeve, hanger, etc., but a complete system is required.



1.07 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SERVICES

A. Project Management and Coordination Services

1. Provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate this Work with other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility include, but are not limited to, the items listed in this section.


a) Obtain copies of shop drawings for equipment provided by others that require telecommunication service connections or interface with Work.

b) Perform a thorough review of the shop drawings to confirm compliance with the service requirements contained in the Division 28 contract documents. Document discrepancies or deviations as follows:

(1) Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy

(2) Submit a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy

c) Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

(1) Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material

(2) Date of the review

(3) Name of the individual performing the review

(4) Indication if follow‐up coordination is required

B. Role of the Engineer

1. During the construction phase of the project, the Engineer will work with the Contractor to provide interpretation and clarification of project contract documents, reply to (and ‘process’) relevant Requests for Information (RFIs), and act as an interface between the Contractor and the Owner.

2. The Owner has retained the Engineer’s services to observe the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that the installation meets the design intent of the system.

3. In general, the Engineer will participate during the construction phase as follows:

a) Review product data and shop drawings submittals for general compliance with the contract drawings and specifications.

b) Review changes as they arise, and confirm that the proposed solutions maintain the intended functionality of the system.

c) Interpret field problems for Owner, and translate between Owner and Construction Team.

d) Review the testing procedures to confirm compliance with industry‐accepted practices.

C. Use of CAD Files

1. Should the Contractor need the Engineer’s CAD files to produce shop drawings and/or as‐built drawings, the Engineer requires the Contractor sign a CAD files release agreement.

1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery


1. Do not deliver security system components to the site until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

2. Replace equipment damaged during shipping and return to manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.

B. Storage

1. Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes.

2. Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

3. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation or temperature related damage.

C. Handling

1. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment. Replace damaged equipment and return equipment to manufacturer.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide the Security System as described in this specification with a one‐year parts and service warranty at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Include in the warranty package, at a minimum, the following:

1. Software support agreement for the ACAMS and VSS

2. Software upgrades and patches

3. Labor to install software upgrades and patches necessary to maintain the latest version

4. Emergency service on regular working hour basis

5. Service by factory trained and employed service representatives of system manufacturer

C. Maintain regular service facilities and provide a qualified technician familiar with this work at the site within four (4) hours of receipt of a notice of malfunction including weekends and holidays. Provide material, devices equipment and personnel necessary for repairs. Install approved temporary, alternate equipment if required by the Owner, complete and operational within twenty four (24) hours after notification of a malfunction, at no additional cost.

D. Conduct warranty repairs and service at the job site unless in violation of manufacturer's warranty; in the latter event, provide substitute systems, equipment and/or devices, acceptable to the Owner, for the duration of such off‐site repairs. Transport warranty substitute and/or test systems, equipment, devices, material, parts and personnel to and from the job site at no additional cost.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials

1. Deliver extra materials to a secured location determined by the Owner.

2. Provide a complete Bill of Materials listing quantities, part numbers, and descriptions for each device for the Owner to sign indicating receipt of equipment.

3. Provide new and unused spare parts in their original packing materials upon delivery.



B. Maintenance Service

1. For the first year of service, conduct quarterly system performance review meetings to review system operation problems and/or defects that occurred during the preceding 3 months. During these performance review meetings, perform the following:

a) Visual checks and operational tests of the central processor, local processors, monitors, keyboards, system printers, peripheral equipment, ACAMS equipment, power supplies, and electrical and mechanical controls

b) Clean system equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces

c) Perform diagnostics on equipment

d) Check and calibrate each device

e) Run system software and correct diagnosed problems

f) Resolve previous outstanding problems

2. Provide software and firmware updates issued free of charge by the manufacturer.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Material and equipment specified herein have been selected as the basis of acceptable quality and performance and have been coordinated to function as components of the included systems. Where a particular material, device, equipment or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for same is a part of these specifications, as if completely elaborated herein.

B. Use standard, regularly manufactured, materials and equipment for this and/or other similar systems, and not custom designed especially for this project. Provide systems and components thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. Provide subsystems of one manufacturer.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Division 1 in the Request for Substitution.

B. Only one substitution allowed for each product specified.

C. Where products are noted as "or equal", a product of equivalent design, construction, and performance will be considered. Submit product data – catalog cuts, product information, and pertinent test data –required to substantiate that the product is in fact equivalent to that specified. The burden of proof rest with the Contractor that the substituted product is equivalent to the specified product.

D. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are equivalent in quality, utility and appearance will be approved as substitutions to that specified when “or equal” follows the manufacturers' names or model number(s).

E. When the Engineer accepts a substitution in writing, it is with the understanding that the Contractor guarantees the substituted product, component, article, or material to be equivalent to the one specified and dimensioned to fit within the construction according to contract documents. Do not provide substituted material, processes, or equipment without written authorization from the Engineer. Assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, are at the sole risk of the Contractor.


F. Approved substitutions shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the Work, or from provisions of the Specifications.

G. Pay expenses, without additional charge to the Owner, in connection with substitution materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of substitution on self, subcontractor's or other Contractor's work.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Conditions: Verify existing conditions, which have been previously provided under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Pathways: Verify that pathways and supporting devices, which have been previously provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports and devices have been removed.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of pathways, including length of pathways. For example, “True Tape” the conduits to verify cable distances.


A. Staffing: Provide a qualified foreman who is in charge of the Work and who is present at the job site at times Work is being performed. Perform the Work using skilled technicians under the direction of the foreman. Supervise the work force executing the Work. Perform the installation within the restraints of the construction schedule. Do not change the supervisor during the project without prior written approval from the Owner.

B. Inspection: Perform inspection after installation. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities, or designated inspectors, of work completion released for inspection. Document completion and inspection as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform this work in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices and the procedures specified herein.

B. Provide a complete, operating system. Include devices specified including basic components and accessories, interconnecting wiring and other equipment and installation devices necessary for a complete system as specified.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions:

1. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

2. Maintain jobsite file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product delivered to jobsite.

D. Boxes, Panels, and Enclosures

1. Install boxes, panels, and enclosures square and plumb.

2. Set "flush mounted" units with the face of the cover, bezel or escutcheon in the same plane as the surrounding finished surface.



3. Mount boxes, panels and trim so that there are no gaps, cracks or obvious lines between the trim and the adjacent finished surface and ready them to receive final finish, as applicable.

4. Install insulating terminations in signal circuit boxes, panels, wireways or enclosures.

E. Painting

1. Custom paint devices as indicated on the drawings.

3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. Replace or repair work completed by others that you deface or destroy, at no cost to the Owner.

B. Punch List:

1. Inspect installed work in conjunction with the General Contractor and develop a punch list for items needing correction.

2. Provide punch list to Engineer for review prior to performing punch walk with the Engineer.

C. Re‐Installation:

1. Make changes to the system such that defects in workmanship are correct and cables and the associated termination hardware passes the minimum test requirements.

2. Repair defects prior to system acceptance.

D. Painting: Repaint surfaces altered during installation of the security system to match previous conditions.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Remove unused products, debris, spills, or other excess materials. Remove installation equipment.

B. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean condition with no evidence of damage.

C. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

D. Legally dispose of debris.

E. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance.

SECTION 28 0513 ‐ SECURITY SYSTEM CABLING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working security system installation, as described in these specifications.

B. Section Includes:

1. Wire and cable

2. Compression Seal BNC Connectors


C. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, installation, and warranty requirements.

3. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling: includes label types and formats.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product information, including:

1. Cable Description and Use

2. Jacket Rating

3. Outside Diameter (of the overall wire or cable)

4. Manufacturer and Part Number

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE

A. General

1. Provide required wire and cable sized to allow for voltage drop on long runs and effectively shielded as required to allow the routing of 12 & 24V power and video signal cable in the same conduit without interference or signal noise.

2. Cable installed outdoors or in underground conduit must contain a PVC or Polyethylene jacket to prevent water intrusion and compliant with the TIA‐455‐82B water infiltration test.

3. Cables installed indoors to contain a plenum rated jacket (type CMP).

B. Manufacturers:

1. West Penn

2. Or Equal

C. Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System

1. Plenum Jacketed Cable

a. #18/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25224B, door contact cable

b. #18/4 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25244B, REX and alarm device cable

c. #18/6 AWG shielded (overall): West Penn #253186B, card reader cable

d. #16/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25225B, lock power cable

e. #14/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25226B, lock power cable from local power booster to exit device

f. #24/4 AWG shielded (overall): West Penn #D4854, RS‐485 communications cable

D. Intrusion Detection System


a. #22/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25221B, door contact cable

b. #22/4 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25241B, keypad and alarm device cable



c. #18/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25224B, control panel power cable

E. Video Surveillance System

1. Cabling for IP cameras provided by Telecommunications contractor. Refer to Section 27 15 13 – Communications Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling.


a. #18/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25224B, power cable

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. Cable Ties

1. General

a. Provide Velco‐style cable ties on security cabling within telecommunications spaces and covered wireways.

b. Dress and bind cabling with cable ties every 24” minimum.

c. Width: 0.75 inches

d. Color: Black

2. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit #HLS‐15‐R‐0 Black, 15 feet roll, cut to length

b. Or Equal


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Label cables in accordance with Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling.

B. Horizontal Cable Installation and Routing

1. Provide wire and cable with a continuous, splice‐free sheath for the entire length of run between designated connections or terminations. Splices not permitted.

2. Place cables within designated pathways, such as cable tray, basketway, cable hangers, etc. Do no fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non‐approved pathway systems.

3. Place and suspend cables and conductors during installation and termination in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during installation or termination at no additional cost.




7. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc) so the installation results in easy accessibility to the cables in the future. Do not route cables over building infrastructure.

8. Dress and secure coaxial cables to preclude stress and/or deformation.

9. Install shielded wiring or route in separate raceways as recommended by the manufacturer's current requirements.



11. Do not run signal wire and cable in parallel to power (120VAC).

12. Make connections to screw‐type barrier blocks with insulated crimp‐type spade lugs. Size lugs properly to assure high electrical integrity, i.e., low resistance connections.

13. Follow manufacturers recommended guidelines for installation.

14. When exiting the primary pathway (such as basketway or cable tray) to the work area, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.

C. Cable Routing and Dressing within Telecommunication Rooms

1. Place cables within the overhead cable support and, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall‐mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on‐center using cable ties.

2. Only use Velcro type cable ties within the IDF.

3. Neatly bundle (dress cable longitudinally) and support security cables within overhead cable runways.

4. Dress and bind cabling with cable ties every 12” minimum.

5. Provide 4 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within the screw cover gutter wireways.

3.02 CABLE SUPPORT

A. Horizontal Support

1. Concrete and Metal construction (Above Ceiling)

a. Provide separate and dedicated cable support system for security cable runs. Anchor cable support system to structural ceiling. Support and tie cables at a maximum of 5‐foot intervals.

2. Wood Construction (above ceiling and no ceiling)

a. Support cable utilizing appropriately sized drive rings or "D" rings.

b. Fasten rings to structural ceiling.

c. Install drive rings at approximately 5 foot intervals.

d. Route cable through drive rings and cable tie at 10 foot intervals, or every other drive.

B. Vertical Support

1. Riser Systems

a. Route cable through conduit in vertical riser systems.

b. Terminate conduit at each stacked closet in a lockable junction box. Refer to Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements for minimum sizing of junction boxes and equipment enclosures.

c. Fastened entire cable group to the inside of junction box at every other floor or approximately every 24 feet.

d. Fasten cable in Junction box utilizing cable ties equipped with eyelets designed to accept screws for fastening or approved equivalent method.

2. Vertical cable on floor space not in riser system

a. Route cable from below suspended ceiling devices to above ceiling when possible.

1) Provide conduit and firestoppping for cable routed in fire rated wall assemblies.



2) Provide conduit for cable routed from below ceiling devices to above ceiling on concrete tilt up style walls.

b. Cable routed vertically from devices with no suspended ceiling.

1) Provide conduit stub from device junction box to 14 feet above finished floor minimum.

SECTION 28 0553 ‐ SECURITY SYSTEM LABELING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working security system installation, as described in these specifications.


1. Labeling of wire, cable, security devices, enclosures, and raceways.

C. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, warranty, and installation requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit the following:

1. Product information for components specified herein.

2. List of equipment (wire, cable, devices, enclosures, and raceways) and the corresponding text for the label.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Engraved, plastic laminated nameplates, signs, and instruction plates. Engrave stock melamine plastic laminate 1/16 inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Use white letters for engraved nameplates and punch for mechanical fasteners.

2.02 LABELS

A. Wire and Cable Labels:

1. General

a. Self‐laminating adhesive laser labels.

b. Machine printable with a laser printer.

c. Cable size: 0.16 – 0.32” OD

d. Color: white with black lettering

2. Manufacturer:

a. Brady #WML–211‐295 and #WML‐311‐292 wire marking labels


b. Or Equal

B. Device Labels:

1. Self‐laminating, type on tape, adhesive labels. Use Helvetica 12 pt text


3.01 INSTALLATION


1. Label the security system components. The components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Equipment Enclosures

b. Conduits

c. Security Devices

d. Batteries

e. Wires and Cables

f. Equipment Racks

g. Terminal Blocks

h. Relays

i. Patch panels, and the termination positions within the patch panels.

2. Labels to coincide with device IDs used on the record drawings.

3. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels

4. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.

B. Equipment Cabinets

1. Label SEC enclosures associated with the security system with a nameplate.

2. Mount label on exterior of door, centered horizontally, and positioned one‐third of the door height vertically from the top.

3. Example: Line 1: “SEC‐01” (1/2 inch high letters)

Line 2: “Security Equipment Cabinet” (1/4 inch high letters)

C. Conduits

1. Write the destination for every conduit entering a junction box, SEC, and CEC enclosure, or wireway using a black permanent ink marker next to the conduit inside the box.

2. Example: “To SEC‐01”

D. Security Devices

1. Label devices associated with the security system with a permanent machine generated, laminated, label. Use 12 point Helvetica text with a clear background. Use white or black lettering depending upon the color of the device.

2. Label each device in a concealed location with the system point number and address.

E. Batteries

1. Label power supply batteries with the month and year they were installed.



2. Example: “April 2012”

F. Wire and Cable

1. Identify wire and cable clearly with permanent machine‐generated labels wrapped about the full circumference within one (1) inch of each connection.

2. Indicate the cable ID designated on the associated field or shop drawings or run sheet, as applies.

3. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system; i.e., each wire or cable to carry the same labeled designation over its entire run, regardless of intermediate terminations.

4. Provide labels where wire and cable first enter and exit from conduit, junction or distribution boxes; locate labels within six (6) inches of the point of exit.

5. Positional labels so they are clearly visible without the need to remove wire management or other obstructions.

6. Label cables at both ends of a run and within pull and junction boxes using machine generated wrap‐around labels.

3.02 CABLE LABEL FORMAT

A. From Panel to Field Device

1. Line 1: Device Type and Device Number

2. Line 2: Panel ID – Port Number

3. Example: CR 001 PANEL 2 – CR5

4. Standard Device Types

a. CR = Card Reader

b. K = Camera

c. ET = Entry Telephone

d. R = Relay Output

e. A = Alarm Point

5. Standard Port #s

a. CR = Reader

b. M = Monitored Input

c. R = Relay Output

B. From Door Junction Box to Card Reader

1. Line 1: Device Type and Device Number

2. Line 2: Panel ID – Port Number

3. Example: CR 001 PANEL 4 – CR3

C. Miscellaneous Examples:

1. From Door Junction Box to Door Contact

a. CR001

b. DC


2. From Door Junction Box to Rex Alarm

a. CR001

b. REX ALM

3. From Panel to Rex

a. CR001

b. REX PWR

c. 12 VDC

4. From Panel to Lock

a. CR001

b. LCK PWR

c. 24 VDC

D. Communications Cable

1. Line 1: Communication Type and Direction

2. Line 2: Panel ID

3. Example: RS‐485 TO PANEL 2

4. Typical Communication Types

a. RS‐485

b. RS‐232

c. RS‐422

SECTION 28 1300 ‐ ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working Access Control & Alarm Monitoring system installation, as described in these specifications.


1. ACAMS server and client workstations

2. ACAMS control panels, input/output modules, and card readers

3. ACAMS power supplies

4. Alarm initiating devices, including: magnetic switch contacts, request‐to‐exit sensors, and glass break detectors.

5. Interface to electric door hardware and ADA door operators

6. Interface to fire/life‐safety system

7. Interface to turnstiles

8. Interface to security subsystems to allow bi‐directional communication with one another



C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. Electric feed‐through power transfer hinges

2. Electrified locking hardware cable and termination to transfer hinge and security system

D. Products Specified but Not Installed Under this Section:

1. None.

E. Products Furnished and Installed Under another Section:

1. 120V power

2. Conduit, junction boxes, and telecom cable trays

3. ADA door operators and push buttons

4. Fire/life‐safety system interface relays

5. Electromagnetic door holders

6. Network connectivity for ACAMS devices via Owner’s local/wide area network

F. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Divisions, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements: for submittal formats, warranty, general product requirements, and installation requirements.

3. Section 28 05 13 – Security System Cabling: for cable requirements related to the ACAMS.

4. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling: for device labeling requirements.

5. Section 28 16 00 – Intrusion Detection: for interface requirement to the ACAMS.

6. Section 28 23 00 – Video Surveillance System: for interface requirement with the ACAMS.

1.02 System Description

A. Overview

1. The ACAMS is a distributed network of control panels connected to and programmed from a host server and client workstations.

2. The ACAMS is utilized for electronically controlling access to visitors, delivery personnel, members, and employee entrances to the building.

3. The ACAMS consists of a host server provided by the owner, located in the IDF Room, client workstations, control panels, card readers, and alarm initiating devices. The host server communicates with the field panels via the Owner’s local/wide area network.

4. The ACAMS includes badging software and peripherals to process, print, and manage cardholder photo IDs. Coordinate location of the badging workstation with the Owner to provide appropriate space and lighting for the photo ID process.


5. The ACAMS will provide secondary monitoring of the IDS.

B. Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System

1. Utilize rack‐mounted host server provided by owner. Connect server to Owner’s local/wide area network.

2. Utilize rack‐mounted UPS to support ACAMS server and other rack‐mountable security equipment in the IDF Room.

3. Provide ACAMS server software and client access licenses to owner provided server and client workstations to support administrative workstations.

4. Provide ACAMS badging software license.

5. Provide ACAMS interface software for IDS control panels to enable bidirectional alarm communication and notification.

6. Provide ACAMS interface software to VSS network video recorders to enable alarm event recording and automatic call up of associated cameras upon alarm activation (forced door, door held open, etc).

7. Provide ACAMS control panels located in the IDF Room. Panels support up to 16 card readers with locking control outputs and multiple general purpose input/output modules for automation.

8. Provide multi‐technology card readers with optical tampers.

9. Provide alarm contacts and request‐to‐exit motion detectors or interface to request‐to‐exit sensor within electrified door hardware for card reader controlled doors.

10. Provide alarm contacts for non‐card reader controller perimeter doors as indicated on project drawings.

11. Provide glass break sensors.

12. Provide interface to ADA automatic/power assist door operator and corresponding actuator push plates.

13. Provide 12/24VDC ACAMS device and lock power supplies as indicated on project drawings.

14. Provide battery backup of system components and power supplies.

15. Provide one UPS per ACAMS workstation.

C. Fire/Life‐Safety System Interface

1. Coordinate with Fire/Life‐Safety system contractor to automatically drop power from stairwell, elevator vestibule lobby, and other doors within the path of egress upon alarm activation of the Fire/Life‐Safety system.

2. Coordinate with Fire/Life‐Safety system contractor for scheduled release of electromagnetic door holders on designated card reader doors as indicated on project drawings. Provide ACAMS output modules as necessary to interface with Fire/Life‐Safety system.

D. Tamper Monitoring

1. Provide additional monitor input points for monitoring the following:



a. Tamper switches located within each security equipment enclosure and wireway (use unsupervised inputs for this purpose).

b. Supervision of power supplies and batteries (use unsupervised inputs for this purpose).

c. Tamper switches located within each door junction box.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor Qualifications: Submit certification letters for the manufacturer of the ACAMS.

B. Product Data: Submit product information for components specified herein.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Device placement on floor plans

2. Point‐to‐Point Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices between the following:

a. ACAMS control panel

b. ACAMS card reader and input/output modules

c. ACAMS power supplies

d. Card Readers

e. Alarm contacts and request‐to‐exit sensors

f. Glass break sensors

g. Interface to electrified door hardware

h. Interface to fire/life‐safety system

i. Cable conductors (identify conductors on the point‐to‐point diagrams with the same tag as the installed conductor)

3. Schedules: Provide schedules for ACAMS control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

4. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the ACAMS components, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

5. Custom mounting details

1.04 Extra Materials

A. Provide 10% spare parts of total installed the following: (Round up to the next complete device)

1. Card Readers

2. Glass break sensors

3. Fuses (Place five (5) of each type of fuse inside each SEC and power supply housing).

4. Relays


PART 2 ‐ Products

2.01 Manufacturers

A. Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System

1. Software House

2. Honeywell ProWatch

3. GE Security

2.02 ACAMS server & components

A. ACAMS Server

1. Coordinate ACAMS manufacturer recommended hardware requirements with Owner’s IT Department.

B. ACAMS Software

1. Include software licenses:

a. Card reader licenses to support a minimum of 128 card reader capacity

b. Client software licenses to support a minimum of 5 concurrent users

c. VSS integration

2. Manufacturer

a. Software House # C‐Cure 9000 software

b. Honeywell # ProWatch software

c. GE # Facility Commander Wnx software

C. KVM Console with Integrated LCD Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse

1. Features

a. Integrated 1x8 KVM switch

b. 17” LCD monitor, 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum

c. Trackball or touchpad mouse

d. Rack mount chassis in a 1U sliding tray

2. Provide cables required for connection to ACAMS and other rack mountable security devices.

3. Manufacturer

a. Dell # PowerEdge 180AS KVM with Dell # XT912 LCD monitor, keyboard, and touchpad

b. HP # 336044‐B21 KVM with HP # TFT7600 LCD monitor, keyboard, and touchpad

c. Or Equal



2.03 ACAMS workstations

A. ACAMS Workstation

1. Coordinate ACAMS manufacturer recommended hardware requirements with Owner’s IT Department.

B. ACAMS Software

1. Include software licenses:

a. Integrated CCTV client software for specified network video recorder, refer to Section 28 23 00 – Video Surveillance System

b. Badging software license

2. Manufacturer

a. Software House # C‐Cure 9000 client software

b. Honeywell # ProWatch client software

c. GE # Facility Commander Wnx client software

2.04 Security System Printers

A. Badging System Printer

1. Features

a. Print Method: Dye‐sublimation, resin thermal transfer

b. Resolution: Up to 300 dpi

c. Colors: Up to 16.7 million, 256 shades per pixel

d. Accept card thickness from 0.020 inches to 0.060 inches

e. Capable of utilizing custom watermarks for additional security

f. Includes Ethernet NIC option

2. Manufacturer

a. HID # DTC550 card printer

b. Zebra # P430i card printer

c. Magicard # Tango 2e card printer

d. Or Equal

2.05 ACAMS controllers

A. General

1. An intelligent controller with integrated battery backup, database, and communication ports that supports 16 card readers.


2. Supports multiple communication channels to which a variety of devices can connect.

3. Supports hardware modules used for additional memory and/or for future feature enhancements.

4. Functions provided include:

a. Central control for attached devices and addressable modules

b. Makes decisions for access

c. Responds to monitor activity

d. Receives input to control its decision making

e. Reports activity to other devices

B. Features

1. Supports HID proximity, MIFARE, and DESFire card reader formats

2. Supports flash upgrades for firmware updates

3. Utilizes an onboard Ethernet NIC

4. Global input/output and anti‐passback functionality

5. Capable of utilizing keypad commands to activate/deactivate events

C. Supports RS‐485 or RS‐422 connectivity to addressable modules:

1. Input Module: Supports 16 Class A supervised input points

2. Output Module: Supports 16 Form C dry contact relays

3. Reader Interface Module: Supports a minimum or 2 card readers with associated alarm contacts, request‐to‐exit devices, and lock outputs

D. Manufacturer

1. Software House # iSTAR Pro 64MB control panel

a. Accessories

1) Software House # I8 input module

2) Software House # R8 output module

3) Software House # RM‐4E four‐reader interface module

2. Honeywell ProWatch # PW6000 intelligent system controller

a. Accessories

1) Honeywell ProWatch # PW6K1IN input module

2) Honeywell ProWatch # PW6K1OUT output module

3) Honeywell ProWatch # PW6K1R2 two‐reader interface module



3. GE Security # PXNplus M‐controller series

a. Enclosure

1) GE Security # M5 enclosure

b. Accessories

1) GE Security # 20‐DI input module

2) GE Security # 16‐DO output module

3) GE Security # 2RP two‐reader interface module

4) GE Security # 8RP eight‐reader interface module

2.06 Equipment Enclosures

A. General

1. Provide enclosures with butt hinged and lockable door containing a lock kit (keyed alike with other security enclosures on the project).

2. Provide perforated back panel for mounting control boards, relays, and terminal strips with enclosure.

3. Provide slotted wiring duct for routing security cabling within enclosure.

4. One tamper switch for each enclosure

B. Security Equipment Cabinets

1. Type: NEMA type 1 enclosure

2. Size: 36” x 24” x 6” minimum

3. Finish: ANSI 61 gray polyester powder paint finish inside and out

4. Manufacturer:

a. Cooper B‐Line # 36246‐1PP enclosure with back panel and lock kit

b. Hoffman #A36N24M enclosure with #A36N24MPP back panel and #A612AR lock kit

c. Or Equal

C. Security Junction Boxes




4. Manufacturer:

a. Cooper B‐Line # 12126‐1PP enclosure with back panel and lock kit

b. Hoffman # A12N126 enclosure with # A12N12PP back panel and # A612AR lock kit


c. Or Equal

D. Slotted Wiring Duct

1. Type: Lead‐free PVC with narrow finger design

2. Size: 1” x 1” minimum

3. Color: Light gray

4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit # Type‐F narrow slot wiring duct

b. Iboco # T1‐1010 wiring duct

c. Or Equal

2.07 Wireways

A. General:

1. Provide screw cover wireway sections with open top assembly as shown on Security drawings.

2. Provide closure plates to secure end of wireway sections.

B. Screw Cover Gutter Wireways




4. Manufacturer:

a. Copper B‐Line # 4448‐G‐NK lay‐in painted wireway without knockouts

b. Hoffman # F44T148GVP lay‐in painted wireway without knockouts

c. Or Equal

5. Accessories:

a. Cooper B‐Line # 44‐E‐NK closure plate without knockouts

b. Hoffman # A44GCPNK closure plate without knockouts

c. Or Equal

2.08 Card Readers

A. General

1. Presenting an access card to the reader initiates a single transmission to the ACAMS controller.

2. Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand an operating temperatures of ‐22 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit (‐30 to 65 degrees Celsius) and operating humidity of 5‐95% non‐condensing.



3. Utilizes a Wiegand protocol for communication for compatibility with standard access control systems.

4. Utilizes a multi‐color LED and an audible sounder to indicate the status of the door.

5. Utilizes an internal tamper switch that will indicate an alarm condition if an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the unit.

6. FCC and CE certified, and conform to the following ISO standards:

a. 15693 (CSN read‐only)

b. 14443A (CSN read‐only)

c. 14443B (CSN read‐only)

7. Capable of reading the following frequencies and card formats:

a. 125kHz – HID, Indala, or AWID proximity

b. 13.56MHz – MyD, ISO 15693 CSN (MyD, ICODE, Tag‐it), ISO 14443A CSN (MIFARE, DESFire), ISO 14443B CSN, and US Government PIV

B. Manufacturer

1. HID # multiCLASS series

a. Wall mount: HID # RP40 multi‐technology card reader

b. Wall mount with keypad: HID # RPK40 multi‐technology card reader with integrated keypad

c. Mullion style: HID # RP15 multi‐technology card reader

2. XceedID #ISOX series

a. Wall mount: XceedID # XF1500 multi‐technology card reader

b. Mid‐range wall mount: XceedID # 2100 multi‐technology card reader

c. Mid‐range wall mount with keypad: XceedID # XF2110 multi‐technology card reader with integrated keypad

d. Mullion style: XceedID # XF1100 multi‐technology card reader

2.09 ACCESS CARDS

A. General

1. Provide 500 iCLASS cards.

2. Utilizes a graphics quality surface that supports direct‐to‐card printing.

3. Capable of being produced with holograms, ultra‐violet fluorescent inks, or other anti‐counterfeiting features.

B. Manufacturer

1. HID # 2002 iCLASS smart card


2. XceedID # 9500 smart card

2.10 magnetic contact switches

A. Wood, Steel, and Hallow Metal Doors

1. General

a. Mounting: Recessed

b. Contacts: Single Pole, Single Throw

c. Gap Distance: 0.5” maximum

2. Manufacturer

a. GE Security # 1078C 3/4” alarm contact switch

b. Or Equal

B. High Security Doors

1. General

a. Mounting: Surface

b. Contacts: Single Pole, Double Throw


d. Utilizes three independent Form C biased reed contacts

e. Supervised loop with magnetic tamper feature

2. Manufacturer

a. GE Security # 2707A high security alarm contact switch

b. Or Equal

C. Overhead Roll‐Up Doors

1. General

a. Mounting: Surface

b. Contacts: Single Pole, Single Throw


d. Wiring: Armor Cable, 12” minimum

2. Manufacturer

a. GE Security # 2205 floor mounted contact switch with 3’ armored cable lead

b. Or Equal

2.11 Request‐To‐Exit Motion Sensors



A. General

1. Power: 12 or 24VDC, 35mA

2. Relay Output: 2 form “C” contacts

3. Adjustable relay latch time

4. Programmable retrigger or non‐retrigger mode

5. Programmable Fail Safe or Fail Secure Modes

6. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Immunity range from 26 to 1,000 MHz at 50 v/m

B. Manufacturer

1. Bosch #DS160 with TP160 trim plate

2. Honeywell #IS320WH with IS310WHTP trim plate

3. Or Equal

2.12 Glass Break Sensors

A. General

1. Type: Digital, utilizing DSP technology

2. Operating Voltage: 6‐18 VDC

3. Range: 25’ maximum, omnidirectional

4. Integrated tamper switch

B. Manufacturer

1. Honeywell # FG‐1628T glass break sensor

2. Or Equal

2.13 AcamS Power supplies

A. General

1. Provides a 120VAC to 12 and 24VDC output, fully supervised power supply to power ACAMS field devices.

2. Utilizes 16 PTC Class 2 rated power limited outputs.

3. Short circuit and thermal overload protection.

4. Integrated charger for sealed lead acid or gel type batteries.

5. Capable of providing a 10 amp supply current.

6. Supports a fire alarm disconnect to relay that individually selects any or all of the 16 outputs.

B. Manufacturer


1. Altronix # MAXIM75 power supply

2. Or Equal

2.14 Batteries

A. General:

1. Voltage: 12.00

2. Amps: 12.00

3. Chemistry: SLA or VRLA valve regulated

4. Termination: Spade protected terminals

B. Manufacturer:

1. Yuasa #RE12‐12 sealed lead acid 12V 12Ah battery

2. Interstate Batteries #SLA1105 sealed lead acid 12V 12Ah battery

3. Or Equal


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. KVM Console

1. Rack mount KVM console with integrated LCD monitor, keyboard, and mouse in the security equipment rack in IDF Room.

2. Connect ACAMS servers to the KVM console. Provide adapters and cable extensions as required.

B. Video Badging System

1. Coordinate with Owner’s representative for exact location of video badging system, mounting height and location of camera and photo backdrop.

C. Video Badging Pinter

1. Provide ribbons to badge provide cards.

2. Run print test for the printer confirming communications between PC and printer, and for proper calibration for thickness of card being used.

D. ACAMS Control Panels

1. Place power supply and associated hardware in same location.

2. Install supervisory and end‐of–line (EOL) resistors as required. Refer to Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements for EOL supervision requirements.

E. Four‐State End‐of‐Line (EOL) Supervision

1. Provide designated resistors at device end of line per manufacturer’s EOL recommendation to provide four‐state supervision of security device and cabling.



2. Provide EOL supervision for alarm contacts, glass break detectors, and other designated security devices connected to the ACAMS and IDS.

3. Provide the following states of supervision:

a. Contact closed = Secure

b. Contact open = Alarm

c. Short circuit = Line fault

d. Open circuit = Line fault

F. Card Readers

1. Wire the card reader‘s multi‐color LED to indicate the following status of the door.

a. Red status indicates the door is secure (locked).

b. Green status indicates the door is unsecured (unlocked).

c. Yellow status indicates the card reader is not functioning (off‐line/trouble), is processing a read request, or has denied access.

2. Utilize configuration card to enable optical tamper.

3. Wire the card reader’s optical tamper to spare input on the ACAMS reader module and jumper ground wire from door contact to provide a Normally Closed circuit.

4. The card reader to produce an audible beep tone to indicate to the user:

a. The card was read and/or access was denied.

b. Door is being held open and needs to be closed.

G. Door Hardware

1. Route power to electrically controlled locks on life‐safety doors through fire alarm output to automatically unlock the door upon activation of Fire/Life‐Safety system. Connect fire alarm output to the disconnect relay on the associated 24VDC lock power supply.

2. Setup and conduct a door hardware coordination meeting.

3. Coordinate the installation and termination of the security cable with the installation of the electric door hardware and transfer hinge.

4. Provide cable and terminate wires to delayed egress devices for monitoring activation of delayed egress by the ACAMS system.

H. Door Contacts

1. Install on protected (secured) side of door.

2. Install 6” from leading edge at top of door.

I. Request‐To Exit Motion Detectors

1. Mount motion detector on the secured (protected) side of door.


2. Install motion detector so that detection pattern is not obstructed by Exit Signs, light fixtures and other objects that would interfere with proper operation.

3. Adjust relay hold time and pattern to properly detect valid exit and allow shunting of door contact.

4. Adjust detection sensitivity to pulse.

5. Mask detector lens to provide a confined detection area limited to the door handle or pushbar.

6. Run wire inside structural tube steel frame into back of condulet for cage locations.

J. Glass Break Sensors

1. Mount glass break detectors as indicated on drawing. Verify correct location to maximize coverage prior to installation.

3.02 Programming

A. Prior to the completion of construction, schedule a meeting with the Owner to determine the programming criteria. Discuss the following:

1. Access card levels and door groupings

2. Alarm priority levels

3. Schedules and time codes

4. Holidays and holiday types (priorities)

5. Action/responses from individual input points

6. Standard and custom (expanded) reports

7. Defining alarm messages and standard response messages applicable to site

8. Routing of alarm points to selected pagers

9. Routing of alarm points to operator’s workstations, printers, and history files

10. Coordinate implementation of graphics with Owner. Develop sample graphic complete with icons and text. Alarms to appear on building floor plans depicting the nature and location of alarms. Review and revise graphic layout as required by Owner.

11. System data base backup to CD‐ROM

B. Document the results of the meeting and perform necessary programming to achieve the Owner’s requests.

C. System Operation, Alarm and Reporting Function: Program door control panel tamper switches to immediately report as a separate “tamper” point to the system resulting in an alarm condition displayed in both text and graphic form on the applicable workstation(s) and an alarm message transmitted to the appropriate pager(s).

D. Receive CAD drawing files of floor plans and perform the following relative to system graphics:

1. Delete non‐applicable drawing layers and details to arrive at simple floor plans of the building as built.



2. Convert drawings to a graphic file format compatible with the Owner’s access control and alarm monitoring system.

3. Load drawing files into the system.

4. Apply new and predefined icons and other points on each graphic to indicate point and control status.

5. Link graphic images to reader, monitor and control points.

E. Program routing of monitor and control points. Route activations and restore messages to one or more of the following locations as directed by the Owner’s Representative:

1. One or more system workstations;

2. One or more system printers;

3. One or more alphanumeric pagers;

4. History files in addition to the above;

5. History files only.

F. Program the system such that reliance on a remote host for routine building operations, such as scheduled door commands and conditional events, are minimized to the greatest extent possible and decisions are made at the local building controller.

G. Program the system in a manner that minimizes the amount of time required for the users to make updates and maintain the system on a daily basis especially updates that impact card holder record updates. Nested programs, such as reader groupings used in access codes shall be used to the greatest extent possible such that single actions are required to update an entire card data population. If there is a question regarding the appropriate approach to programming, given the flexibility of most systems, contact the Engineer prior to any initial programming

H. Complete other programming as required for system operation.

I. Program and setup the system such that no additional programming other than entering new access cards is required. Include setup of available features of the software.

J. Use the point names provided on the system point schedule.

K. Perform 2 full system back‐ups at completion of initial programming and deliver one copy to owner with letter of Transmittal explaining information included in back‐up and brief description of recovery procedures. Label the second CD‐ROM and store onsite. Perform back‐ups on a regular basis through the remainder of the project.

L. Customize menus with the assistance of the factory to “gray‐out” features not used on project (such as elevator control).

M. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to "fine tune" operating parameters and sequence of operations based on revised operating requirements.


SECTION 28 1600 ‐ INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction, and special or occasional services required to make a complete working intrusion detection system installation as described in these specifications.

B. Section includes:

1. Intrusion Detection System, including digital communicator, keypad, and alarm devices.

2. Door contacts, glass break detectors, motion sensors

3. Duress alarm stations

4. Interfaces and connections between intrusion detection subsystems to allow communication with one another

C. Products furnished and installed under another section:

1. 120V power

2. Phone line

D. Related sections:

1. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements: for submittal format, warranty, general product requirements, and installation requirements

2. Section 28 13 00 – ACAMS: for interface requirement to the intrusion detection system

3. Section 28 05 13 – Security System Cabling: for cable requirements related to the IDS

4. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling: for device labeling requirements


A. Overview

1. The IDS is comprised of multiple areas that can be armed and disarmed independently of each other.

2. The IDS is utilized for after hours monitoring of the Ashland Youth Center and 24 hour monitoring of the access controlled and monitored perimeter doors as well as specific interior doors.

3. Activation of the IDS dials a remote, third party central station to dispatch the local Police Department and/or local security personnel.

4. The IDS integrates with the ACAMS through hardwired input/output points to provide bidirectional communication and notification of alarm events.

B. Intrusion Detection System

1. Provide an IDS control panel with integrated UL listed digital communicator located in the IDF Room as indicated on project drawings. Panels support up to 8 areas and 128 zones by use of addressable input/output point modules.

2. Provide LCD command keypads as indicated on project drawings. Keypads allow for system arming and disarming by authorized users.

3. Provide wireless back up alarm communicator.



4. Provide battery backup of IDS components and power supplies for a minimum of 24 hours in the event of a power failure or emergency.

C. Interface with ACAMS

1. Connect ACAMS alarm outputs to the IDS control panel. Provide expansion modules as necessary to support the security devices shown on the project drawings.

D. Tamper Monitoring

1. Provide additional monitor input points for monitoring the following:

a. Tamper switches located within each security equipment enclosure and wireway (use unsupervised inputs for this purpose).

b. Supervision of power supplies and batteries (use unsupervised inputs for this purpose).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product information for the intrusion detection systems, including:

1. IDS control panel

2. Keypads

3. Cellular backup communicator

4. Calculations for backup batteries

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings containing the following:

1. Device placement on floor plans

2. Point‐to‐Point Wiring Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connect, and interconnecting devices between the following:

a. IDS control panel

b. IDS expansion modules and relays

c. Keypads

d. Power supplies

e. Cable conductors (identify conductors on the point‐to‐point diagrams with the same tag as the installed conductor)

3. Schedules: Provide schedules for the IDS control panel that show each alarm zone, applicable area or partition, and a description of the connected device.

4. Custom mounting details

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Intrusion Detection System

1. Bosch

2. Honeywell

3. GE Security

2.02 IDS CONTROL PANELS

A. General


1. Integrated UL listed digital communicator with phone line monitor (loop or ground start).

2. Supports up to75 alarm zones and 8 programmable areas or partitions.

3. Capable of utilizing multiple telephone numbers, primary and duplicate paths with main and alternate destinations.

4. Capable of utilizing a dual phone line switcher to monitor 2 phone lines.

5. Capable of sending daily automatic test and status reports.

6. Supports supervised expansion and relay output modules.

7. Supports RS‐232 connectivity to third party devices for automation.

8. Capable of utilizing a TCP/IP converter for Ethernet connectivity.

B. Manufacturer

1. Bosch # D7412GV2 control panel

a. Accessories

1) Bosch # D8108A attack‐resistant enclosure

b. Expansion modules

1) Bosch # D8128D OctpPOPIT 8‐point input module

2) Bosch # D8129 Octo‐relay 8‐point output module

3) Bosch # DX4020 Connettix Ethernet network interface module

c. Wireless back‐up communication device

1) Telular # TG‐MC Bosch interface module

2) Telular # TG‐4 GSM digital wireless communicator

2. Honeywell # Vista‐128BP control panel

a. Accessories

1) Honeywell # VISTA‐ULKT attack‐resistant enclosure


1) Honeywell # 4208U 8‐point input module

2) Honeywell # 4204 4‐point output module

3) Honeywell # Vista ICM Ethernet network interface module


1) Honeywell # 7845i‐GSM internet and GSM digital wireless communicator

3. GE Security # NX‐8E control panel

a. Accessories

1) GE Security # NX‐003‐C attack‐resistant enclosure


1) GE Security # NX‐408E 8‐point input module

2) GE Security # NX‐508E 8‐point output module

3) GE Security # NX‐590E Ethernet network interface module


1) GE Security # NX‐582E AES radio interface module

2) AES # 7450 RF subscriber unit



2.03 IDS KEYPADS

A. General

1. 32‐character display

2. Keys light on entry or key press

3. Back lighted multi‐key touch pad

4. User controlled brightness and loudness

B. Provide the ability to display for each detection point:

1. Alarm

2. Trouble

3. Supervisory

4. Faulted

5. Custom text

C. System wide displays include:

1. Local system test

2. Sensor reset

3. Event log

D. Manufacturer

1. Honeywell # 6160 alphanumeric LCD display keypad

2. Bosch # D1260 alphanumeric LCD display keypad

3. GE Security # NX‐1192E alphanumeric LCD display keypad


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Follow manufacturers recommended guidelines for installation.

B. Components

1. IDS Control Panel

a. Place control panel and associated expansion boards in large NEMA Type‐1 enclosure with ACAMS equipment.

b. Utilize ACAMS power supplies to power control panel and associated expansion boards. Do not use plug‐in transformers.

c. Provide standoff brackets to mount control boards to perforated panel within enclosure.

d. Place power supply and associated hardware in same location.

e. Install supervisory and end of line resistors as required.

f. Coordinate installation of phone jack in IDS control panel enclosure for communications to the contracted central station.

2. Keypads

a. Mount keypads as indicated on project drawings.


3.02 PROGRAMMING

A. Prior to the completion of construction, schedule a meeting with the Owner to determine the following programming criteria:

1. Zone or alarm point descriptions

2. User authority levels to arm/disarm areas or alarm partitions

3. Auto arm/disarm schedules

4. Interface requirement with ACAMS

5. Central station response from individual alarm points

6. Central station password and call list information

B. Document the results of the meeting and perform necessary programming to achieve the Owner’s requests. Program and setup the system such that no additional programming other than entering new access codes is required.

SECTION 28 2300 ‐ VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. General: Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction, and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working video surveillance system installation, as described in this specification.

B. Section Includes: 1. Video Management Software 2. Network Video Recording System 3. HD fixed IP cameras, lens, mounts, and housing 4. Integration with ACAMS 5. Interfaces and connections between video surveillance subsystems to allow communication with

one another

C. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. None

D. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. None

E. Products Specified But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. None

F. Products Furnished and Installed Under Another Section: 1. 120V power 2. Ethernet cable for IP Cameras 3. Network ports in the IDF for CCTV connectivity via LAN/WAN



G. Related Sections: 1. Consult other Divisions, determine the extent and character of related work and properly

coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 00 00 Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, installation, and warranty requirements.

3. Section 28 13 00 Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System: includes product information for video integration with the ACAMS.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Overview 1. Exterior IP Cameras will be located throughout the perimeter of the building. These cameras will

be recorded on the Network Video Recorders located in the IDF Room. Authorized staff members will be able to view live and recorded video from client workstations over the LAN/WAN.

2. Video Monitors located at the exit points will provide views of the surrounding parking areas

B. CCTV Camera System 1. Provide NVR Software Server with sufficient software licenses to support all CCTV cameras.

Owner will provide security server/workstations to support the video surveillance system. 2. Provide NVR client workstation software for monitoring and viewing capabilities. Load client

software on VSS workstations at locations specified by the owner. 3. Provide built in video motion detection for building perimeter cameras through DVR. 4. Provide fixed CCTV cameras:

a. Main entrance/exit points b. Toddler Outside Play Area c. Outdoor Stage

5. Provide flat screen monitors in the exit points. 6. Owner to provide PoE switches to power IP cameras and allow for network connectivity to NVR. 7. Provide software interface to the ACAMS for alarm call up of cameras on predefined alarm

events.

C. Custom Device Requirements 1. Coordinate exact locations with owner/architect.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor Qualifications: Submit certifications for the manufacturers of the video surveillance equipment.

B. Product Data: Submit product information for components specified herein.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Device placement on floor plans. 2. Point‐to‐Point Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices

between the following: a. Video surveillance system, monitors, and recording equipment b. Devices connected to the system


c. Miscellaneous control relays d. Conductors (identify conductors on the point‐to‐point diagrams with the same tag as the

installed conductor) 3. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the video surveillance system components, conduit, wire

types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware. 4. User interface graphics with icons and control buttons displayed. 5. Custom mounting details

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Video Surveillance System 1. Network Video Recorder Software

a. OnSSi b. Milestone c. Or Equal

2. Cameras a. Sony b. Axis c. Or Equal

2.02 CCTV CAMERA SYSTEM

A. General 1. Type: Day/Night HDTV 720p mini‐dome camera 2. Power: PoE IEEE802.3f Class 2 3. Imager: 1/4" Progressive scan RGB CMOS 4. Lens Mount: Accept a "CS" mount auto or manual‐iris lens 5. Synch: Adjustable line lock for synchronizing camera to power line. No auxiliary sync cable

required. 6. Resolution: 1280x720 @ 30 frames per second 7. Minimum Light Level: Color: 0.3 lux, F1.6, B/W: 0.06 lux, F1.6 8. Lens: Field determine, unless otherwise noted

B. Interior Megapixel IP Cameras 1. Manufacturer:

a. Axis #0327‐001 P3344‐V 1MP/720P interior vandal resistant mini‐dome camera b. Or Equal

C. Exterior Megapixel IP Cameras 1. Manufacturer:

a. Axis #0325‐001 P3344‐VE 1MP/720P exterior vandal resistant mini‐dome camera b. Or Equal

2. Accessories: a. Axis #5502‐321 pendant kit for P33 series b. Axis #5017‐611 wall bracket for P33 series c. Or Equal



D. Exterior IP PTZ Cameras 1. Manufacturer:

a. Axis #215 PTZ‐E b. Or Equal

2.03 POINT‐TO‐POINT WIRELESS VIDEO TRANSMISSION

A. General 1. MPEG4 based wireless video 2. Support for pan‐tilt‐zoom and video transmission in one unit 3. 4‐mile line‐of‐sight 4. Integral motion track capabilities 5. Auto‐detect frequency 6. Weatherproof

B. Manufacturer: 1. Verint #S4100 Nextiva series wireless video transmitter/receiver 2. The products specified herein form the basis of design for this Work. Contractor shall submit

shop drawings meeting the basis of design for Owner's acceptance prior to procurement and installation of the Work.

2.04 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER

A. Features 1. Complete Network Video Recorder platform that encompasses recording video, viewing video,

reviewing recorded video, and storing video for indefinite periods of time. 2. Full control of camera selections, sequencing, and viewing modes 3. The system simultaneously records, displays live video, and plays back video. None of the video

operations interfere with each other. Live view and video playback does not interrupt the recording process.

4. Recorders capture, digitize, and store video. Recorders may record full‐time, in response to an alarm, or based on a user‐defined schedule. Full‐time recording refers to 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, and 365 days per year.

B. Recorder Software Features 1. Utilizes TCP/IP Network protocol to communicate to IP network cameras, video

encoder/decodes, and other IP security devices. 2. Video Information

a. Store the time, date, and source of the video and make it available during playback. b. Store for each clip video source, capture date, start time, and stop time. Source identified

as either a monitor or a camera. c. Store alarm information in the database on the main server when the video is in response

to an alarm condition. 3. Video Storage

a. Video stored in clips on the recorder’s internal hard drive. As the hard drive becomes full, groom oldest clips to make room for new video.

b. Ability to utilize a variety of network storage devices such as external disk arrays, RAID and NAS devices, and external disk drives for exporting, backup, or sharing images.


c. Provide enough storage to record cameras for a minimum of 7 days.. 4. Video Authentication

a. Fingerprint each video clip through a mathematical algorithm during the video capture process. The fingerprint becomes part of the clip and used by the playback software to verify the video has not been altered.

5. Alarm recording a. Recording Options

1) Alarm condition via activation of an external alarm contact. 2) Internal video motion detection

b. Recording programmable by camera and by time and date schedule. c. Allow a mix and match of continuous recording and alarm recording, based on camera input

and capture card connection. d. Pre and post alarm recording

6. Video Motion Detection a. Each video input capable of detecting activity from camera input and to initiate an alarm

condition. b. Video motion detection areas operator selectable for each camera input. If the scene

changes within the alarm area, an alarm condition is initiated. 7. Viewing of both live and archived images, from multiple remote systems. 8. Remote event notification 9. Password protected via user authorization, with profiles assigned by the system administrator,

and database tracking of evens.

C. Manufacturer: 1. NVR Server

a. Provided by Owner 2. NVR Software

a. OnSSI b. Miletstone c. Or Equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. CCTV Cameras a. Provide outdoor housing and mounts for exterior cameras. b. Field determine exact placement of cameras to ensure complete coverage. c. Field determine fixed camera lens size to ensure complete coverage. d. Route watertight flex from junction box to camera housing from below on exterior cameras.

3.02 PROGRAMMING

A. Prior to the completion of construction schedule a meeting with the Owner to determine the programming criteria. Discuss the following: 1. Camera naming. 2. CCTV camera call‐up & recording features (including video motion detection)



B. Document the results of the meeting and perform necessary programming to achieve the Owner’s requests.

C. Setup and program the system such that no additional programming required.

D. Use the camera naming convention agreed upon at in the programming meeting when programming point names into the system.

E. Perform 2 full system back‐ups at completion of initial programming and deliver one copy to the Owner with a Letter of Transmittal explaining information included in back‐up and brief description of recovery procedures. Label the second DAT and store onsite. Perform back‐ups on a regular bases through the remainder of the project.

F. Customize menus with the assistance of the factory to “gray‐out” features not used on project (such as elevator control).

G. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to "fine tune" operating parameters and sequence of operations based on revised operating requirements.

End of Division




January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 31, Earthwork, Page: 1

DIVISION 31 ‐‐ EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 0513 ‐ SOILS FOR EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. All grading, earthwork, excavations, backfills, compaction, and other grading operations shall be accomplished in accordance with the soils report (which shall be a part of the contract documents). Contractor shall be responsible for securing a copy of the soils report. The project soils engineer shall be present during all grading operations. The soils engineer shall direct samples to be submitted and tests to be taken. Contractor shall cooperate with the requirements of the soils engineer.

2. Related Sections:

1. Section 31 22 13 ‐ Rough Grading.

2. Section 31 23 00 ‐ Excavation and Fill.

3. Section 31 23 23.13 ‐ Backfill.

4. Section 31 23 16.13 ‐ Trenching.

5. Section 32 12 16 ‐ Asphalt Pavement.

6. Section 32 11 23 ‐ Aggregate Base Course.

7. Section 32 90 00 ‐ Planting.

1.2 REFERENCES

1. The project Soils Report

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TOPSOIL MATERIALS

1. Topsoil materials shall meet to the requirements of Section 32 90 00 Planting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SOIL REMOVAL

1. Conduct earthwork operations in accordance with the provisions of the Soils Report and as directed by the Soils Engineer.

SECTION 31 1000 ‐ SITE CLEARING

Coordinate with the Owner’s site clearing and preparation phase that is not in this contract.

Volume 2: Division 31, Earthwork, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes removal of surface debris; removal of paving, curbs, sidewalks; removal of trees, shrubs, and other plant life; removal of underground storage tanks; and removal of abandoned utilities.


1. Section 31 05 13 – Soils for Earthwork.


PART 2 PRODUCTS ‐ NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.

2. Removed materials are to be removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner.

3.2 PROTECTION

1. Locate, identify, and protect utilities from damage that are to remain.

2. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain.

3. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or displacement.

3.3 CLEARING

1. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.

2. Remove trees and shrubs indicated and in a manner specified on the drawings or in these specifications.

3.4 REMOVAL

1. Remove remaining debris from site to the limits indicated on the drawings.

2. Neatly saw cut edges at limits indicated for all pavement, curbs, and walkways to be removed.

3.5 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

1. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded, without mixing with foreign materials for use in finish grading.

2. Stockpile on site and protect from erosion.

3. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.



SECTION 31 2213 ‐ ROUGH GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes removal of topsoil and cutting, grading, filling, rough contouring, and compacting as indicated on the drawings.


1. Section 31 05 13 ‐ Soils for Earthwork.

2. Section 31 10 00 ‐ Site Clearing.





1.2 REFERENCES

1. The provisions of the project Soils Report shall be adhered to for rough grading of the site.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

1. Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements.

2. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Topsoil: as specified in Section 32 90 00 Planting.

2. Other Fill Materials: shall adhere to the provisions of the project Soils Report.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements.

2. Verify site conditions.

3. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.


3.2 PREPARATION

1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

2. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.

3. Locate, identify, and protect from damage utilities that are to remain.

4. Notify affected utility companies to remove or relocate public utilities indicated on the plans to be removed or relocated by the utility company.

5. Protect above and below grade utilities that are to remain.

6. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

7. Protect bench marks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.3 SOIL EXCAVATION

1. Excavate soil from areas to be further excavated, relandscaped, or regraded as shown on the drawings.

2. When excavating through roots, for trees to remain, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

3. Remove excess soil from site.

4. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key placed fill material to slope to provide firm bearing as required by the Soils Report.

5. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

3.4 FILLING

1. Install Work in accordance with the project Soils Report.

2. Fill areas to contours and elevations with suitable materials.

3. Place fill material on continuous layers and compact in accordance with the project Soils Report.

4. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

5. Slope grade away from buildings at a minimum slope of two (2%) percent unless noted otherwise.

6. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.

7. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

3.5 TOLERANCES

1. Section 01 40 00 ‐ Quality Requirements.



2. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.05 feet from required elevation on paved or walkway areas and zero (0) feet to minus 0.10 foot in building pad areas.


1. Testing and inspection shall be provided by the project soils engineer.

2. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

SECTION 31 2300 ‐ EXCAVATION & FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes excavating for building foundations, roads, parking areas, site grading, slabs‐on‐grade, landscaping areas, and for site structures.






1.2 REFERENCES

1. The project Soils Report:

2. Local utility standards when working within 24 inches of the respective utility lines.

PART 2 PRODUCTS ‐ Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

3.2 EXCAVATING

1. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavating work.

2. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs‐on‐grade, paving and site structures.

3. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 23.13 and 31 23 16.13.

4. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

5. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.


6. Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

7. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

8. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock in accordance with the provisions of the Soils Report.

9. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume Work.

10. Correct areas over excavated with backfill and compact replacement as specified for authorized excavation.

11. Remove excess excavated material from site.


1. The project Soils Engineer shall provide testing and inspection services.

3.4 PROTECTION

1. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

2. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.

SECTION 31 2316.13 ‐ TRENCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes excavating trenches for utilities from outside building to final connection point or public right‐of‐way or utility; compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations; and backfilling and compaction.

2. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 05 13 – Soils for Earthwork. 2. Section 31 22 13 ‐ Rough Grading. 3. Section 31 23 00 ‐ Excavation and Fill. 4. Section 31 23 23.13 ‐ Backfill. 5. Section 32 90 00 – Planting. 6. Section 33 30 00 – Sanitary Sewerage Utilities. 3. Section 33 40 00 – Storm Drainage Utilities. 4. Section 03 30 00 – Cast‐in‐Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES


1.3 DEFINITIONS

1. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.

1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.



1.5 COORDINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements.

2. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities.

3. Verify elevations of existing facilities prior to placing new Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

1. Fill and Structural Fill shall be: As specified in the project Soils Report.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

1. Filter Fabric: Non‐biodegradable, woven as manufactured by TC Mirafi, Tenax Corp., Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LINES AND GRADES

1. Grades

1. Pipes shall be laid true to the lines and grades indicated.

2. The grade alignment of the pipe shall be maintained by the use of a string line parallel with the grade line and vertically above the centerline of the pipe. This line shall be established on level batter boards at intervals of not more than 25 feet. Batter boards shall span the trench and be rigidly anchored to substantial posts driven into the ground on each side of the trench. Three adjacent batter boards must be set before laying pipe to provide a check on the grades and line. Elevation and position of the string line shall be determined from the elevation and position of offset points or stakes located along the pipe route. Pipe shall not be laid using side lines for line or grade.

3. As an alternative means of establishing alignment and grade, a "Laser‐Beam" instrument may be utilized with a competent operator.

2. Location of Pipe Lines:

1. The location and approximate depths of the proposed pipe lines are shown on the Drawings.

2. An underground locate service shall be enlisted to discover the location of existing utilities regardless if they are shown on the drawings.

3. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of pipe lines and manholes when such changes are necessary.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.


2. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

3. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

4. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

5. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

3.3 EXCAVATING

1. Excavate subsoil required for utilities.

2. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

3. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

4. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

5. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock as directed by the Soils Engineer or other inspector.

6. Correct over excavated areas with backfill and compact replacement as specified for authorized excavation.

7. Stockpile excavated material on site. Remove excess material not being used from site.

3.4 TRENCHING

1. Excavations:

1. Excavation shall be dug so that the pipe can be laid and jointed properly. The trench shall be made so that the pipe can be laid to the alignment and depth as shown on the Drawings, and it shall be excavated only so far in advance of pipe laying as permitted by the Architect/Engineer. The excavation shall not be more than two feet wider at the bottom than the outside diameter of the pipe or structure. If there is no interference with construction, or adjacent property, and if soil permits, the Contractor at his own expense shall be permitted to slope the side walls of the excavation starting at a point two (2) feet above the top of pipe.

2. The trench shall be excavated to the depth required so as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support for the pipe on bedding material at every point between joints, except where pipe slings or other lifting tackle are withdrawn.

3. Excavation Below Grade:

1) Where excavation indicates that the subsurface materials at the bottom of the trench are in a loose or soft state, the Contractor shall be advised to excavate to a depth where suitable material is encountered, as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

2) Where the bottom of the trench has been excavated by mistake to a greater depth than required, the Contractor shall refill this area using approved



material. No additional compensation shall be given to the Contractor. Refilling with earth to bring the bottom of the trench to the proper grade will not be permitted.

4. Excavation within 24 inches of existing utilities shall be governed by specifications of the Owner of the respective utility. The Contractor shall obtain these specifications and follow the same at no extra cost.

2. Trenching in Advance of Pipe Laying: The trench for the pipe lines shall not be opened for a distance of more than 200 feet at any one time, unless authorized by the Architect/Engineer. At no time will the Contractor be permitted to leave more than 50 feet of trench open at the end of a working day. Adequate protection of open trench shall be provided by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible therefore.

3.5 SHEETING AND BRACING

1. General

1. Sheeting and bracing of all excavations shall conform to the latest statutes of the State of California governing safety of workers in the construction industry. When necessary, in the opinion of the Contractor, adequate sheeting and bracing shall be installed to prevent ground movement that may cause damage or settlement to adjacent structures, pipelines and utilities. Any damage due to settlement because of failure to use sheeting or because of inadequate bracing, or through negligence or fault of the Contractor in any other manner, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

2. Sides of trenches in unsuitable, loose or soft material, five feet or more in depth, shall be shored, sheeted, braced, sloped, or otherwise supported by means of sufficient strength to protect employees working within them.

2. Sheeting Requirements:

1. Where excavations are made with vertical sides which require supporting, the sheeting and bracing shall be of sufficient strength to sustain the sides of the excavations and to prevent movement which could in any way injure the Work, or adjacent structures, or diminish the working space sufficiently to delay the Work. Special precautions shall be taken where there is additional pressure due to the presence of other structures.

2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select sheeting and bracing of sufficient dimensions and strength and type to adequately support the sides of trenches and excavations.

3. Sheeting and bracing shall be removed before the completion of the Work.

3.6 BACKFILLING

1. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations shown on the drawings.

2. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

3. Fill materials shall be as specified in the Soils Report.


4. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trench. Jetting of backfill materials to achieve compaction shall not be permitted.

5. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

6. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

3.7 TOLERANCES


2. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.05 feet from required elevations.

3. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1/10 feet from required elevations.


1. Compaction testing will be performed by the project Soils Engineer.

2. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK


2. Reshape and re‐compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

SECTION 31 2323.16 ‐ BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes building perimeter and site structure, filling and backfilling to subgrade elevations; fill under slabs‐on‐grade, paving; fill for over‐excavation; consolidation and compaction as specified in the Soils Report.






3. Section 03 30 00 ‐ Cast‐in‐Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

1. Fill and Structural Fill as specified in the Soils Report.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

1. Geotextile Fabric: Non‐biodegradable, woven as manufactured by TC Mirafi, Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

2. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.

3. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support loads imposed by the fill.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

2. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3. Roll subgrade surface to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

3.3 BACKFILLING

1. Backfill areas to contours and elevations shown on drawings.

2. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

3. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

4. Backfill against supported walls and structures. Do not backfill against unsupported walls or structures.

5. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported walls and structures until supports are in place.

6. Slope grade away from building at a minimum slope of two (2%) percent, unless noted otherwise.

7. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

8. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.


3.4 TOLERANCES


2. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.05 feet from required elevations.

3. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1/10 feet from required elevations.


1. The project Soils Engineer shall provide testing and inspection services.



2. Reshape and re‐compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

End of Division

Bridging Documents Performance Standards Ashland Youth Center County of Alameda

RossDrulisCusenbery Architecture, inc. Volume 2 – Technical Specification

January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 32, Exterior Improvements, Page: 1

DIVISION 32 ‐‐ EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

REFER TO VOLUME 3 NARRATIVES FOR LANDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 32 1123 ‐ AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes aggregate base course.






5. Section 32 12 16 ‐ Asphalt Pavement.

6. Section 32 13 13 ‐ Concrete Paving.

7. Section 33 49 13 ‐ Storm Drainage Manholes, Frames, and Covers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Class II Aggregate Base per Caltrans Standard Specifications, or Local Municipality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


2. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re‐compacting.

2. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

1. Place aggregate in maximum 6‐inch layers and compact to specified density.

2. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.

Volume 2: Division 32, Exterior Improvements, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

3. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.

4. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

5. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES

1. Section 01 40 00 ‐ Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

2. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10‐foot straight edge.

3. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

4. Variation from Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


1. Section 01 40 00 ‐ Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

2. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.

3. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to owner.

SECTION 32 1216 ‐ ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes asphaltic concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course; surface sealer; and aggregate base course.



2. Section 31 22 13 ‐ Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.

3. Section 31 23 23.13 ‐ Backfill: Compacted subbase for paving.



1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM D946 ‐ Penetration‐Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.

6. ASTM D3381 ‐ Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.

7. TAI ‐ (The Asphalt Institute) ‐ MS‐2 Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types.




8. TAI ‐ (The Asphalt Institute) ‐ MS‐3 Asphalt Plant Manual.

9. TAI ‐ (The Asphalt Institute) ‐ MS‐8 Asphalt Paving Manual.

10. TAI ‐ (The Asphalt Institute) ‐ MS‐19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design.


1. Perform Work in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standard.

2. Mixing Plant: Conform to local municipality Public Work's standard.

3. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

4. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements.

2. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Asphalt Pavement: In accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2. Fog Seal: In accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

1. Section 01 45 23 ‐ Quality Control: Testing and Inspection Services: Provide mix design for asphalt.

2. Submit proposed mix design for review prior to beginning of Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


2. Verify compacted granular base is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

3. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.


3.2 SUBBASE

1. Section 32 11 23 ‐ Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for Work of this section.

3.3 PREPARATION ‐ PRIMER

1. Apply primer in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

3.4 PREPARATION ‐ TACK COAT

1. Apply tack coat in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters.

3. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT ‐ SINGLE COURSE

1. Install Work in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

3.6 PLACING FOG SEAL

1. Install Work in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

3.7 CURBS

1. Install extruded asphalt curbs of profile as indicated on drawings.

3.8 TOLERANCES


2. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10‐foot straight edge.

3. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

4. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


1. Section 01 40 00 ‐ Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services

2. Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


1. Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

2. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 24 hours or until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F.




3.11 SCHEDULES

1. Pavement sections for various locations and uses are to be as shown on the drawings.

SECTION 32 1313 ‐ CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, gutters, parking areas, driveways, and roads; and aggregate base course.







1.2 REFERENCES

1. ACI 304 (American Concrete Institute) ‐ Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.

2. ASTM A185 ‐ Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A497 ‐ Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

4. ASTM A615 ‐ Deformed and Plain Billet‐Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.

5. ASTM C33 ‐ Concrete Aggregates.

6. ASTM C94 ‐ Ready Mix Concrete.

7. ASTM C150 ‐ Portland Cement

8. ASTM C260 ‐ Air‐Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

9. ASTM C309 ‐ Liquid Membrane‐Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

10. ASTM C494 ‐ Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

11. ASTM D1751 ‐ Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

12. ASTM D1752 ‐ Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.



1. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Local Municipality.


3. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.


1. Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements.

2. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees, or surface is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

1. Wood or Steel form material, profiled to suit conditions.

2. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT

1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; Grade 60 deformed billet steel bars; unfinished.

2. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185 in flat sheets or coiled rolls; unfinished.

3. Dowels: ASTM A615; plain steel, unfinished.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

1. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300. Provide in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2.4 CONCRETE MIX ‐ BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi @ 28 days.

2. Exterior Concrete Integral Color: Color the concrete to match the existing concrete paving.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


2. Verify compacted subgrade or granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

3. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.




3.2 SUBBASE

1. Section 32 11 23 ‐ Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for Work of this section.

3.3 PREPARATION

1. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

2. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.

3. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.4 FORMING

1. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

3. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT

1. Place reinforcement as indicated on drawings.

2. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.

3. Place reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.

3.6 PLACING CONCRETE

1. Place concrete in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standards.

2. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and are not disturbed during concrete placement.

3. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints.

4. Place concrete to pattern indicated on drawings.

3.7 JOINTS

1. Place expansion and contraction joints as shown on drawings. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

2. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement.

3. Provide scored sawn joints as indicated on drawings and between sidewalks and curbs.


3.8 EXPOSED AGGREGATE

1. See Landscape Drawings and Specifications.

3.9 FINISHING

1. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom and trowel joint edges.

2. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom.

3. Direction of Texturing: Transverse to pavement direction.

4. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.

5. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.

3.10 JOINT SEALING

1. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with thick joint filler.

2. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

3. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/8 inch of finished surface. Conform to joint sealer manufacturer requirements.

3.11 TOLERANCES


2. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/2 inch.



Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

2. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump [and air entrainment] tests in accordance with ACI 301.

3. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

4. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

3.13 PROTECTION

1. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

2. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.




SECTION 32 1313.1 – PERVIOUS CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 General Description

The work of this Section includes sub‐grade preparation and installation of Portland Cement Pervious Pavement streets, sidewalks or parking areas.

1.02 Scope of Work:

The Work to be completed under this contract includes the furnishing of all labor, materials and equipment necessary for construction of the proposed improvements in conformance with the plans and specifications.

1.03. Submittals:

A. Concrete Mix Design:

Contractor shall furnish a proposed mix design with proportions of materials to the Owner prior to commencement of work. Cement content shall be a minimum of 580 pounds per cubic yard, with total cementitious content to be a minimum of 630 pounds per cubic yard. Water cement ratio shall be a maximum of 0.30. The data shall include unit weights determined in accordance with ASTM C29 paragraph 11, jigging procedure. Based on the unit weight of the mix, compacted void content of the mix shall be a minimum of 10% and a maximum of 20%.

1.04 Quality Assurance:

A. Prior to the awarding of the contract, the placing contractor shall furnish Owner a statement attesting to qualifications, experience, sample of workmanship and installed product (e.g. references and project addresses).

B. The Pervious Concrete Placing Contractor and the Pervious Concrete Producer shall have prior experience with Pervious Concrete Pavement.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01 General:

Locally available materials having a record of satisfactory performance shall be used.

2.02 Cement:

Portland cement Type I or II conforming to ASTM C150 or Portland cement Type IP or IS conforming to ASTM C595

2.03 Aggregate:

Use 3/8 coarse aggregate that meets 3/8 to No. 16 per ASTM C33, or meeting 3/8 to No. 50 per ASTM D448. Smooth rock aggregate shall be used. If other gradation of aggregate is to be used, submit data on proposed material to Owner for approval. Note that reductions below the cement minimums stated herein require the written approval from the Owner.


2.04 Chemical Admixtures:

A. Air entraining agents shall comply with ASTM C260.

B. Type A Water Reducing Admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494

C. Type B Retarding Admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494

D. Type D Water Reducing/Retarding Admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494

E. Hydration stabilizer shall meet the requirements of ASTM C494 Type B Retarding Admixtures or Type D Water Reducing/Retarding Admixtures.

2.05. Mineral Admixtures:

A. Fly ash conforming to ASTM C618 may be used in amounts not to exceed 20% of total cementitious material.

B. Ground Iron Blast‐Furnace Slag conforming to ASTM C989 may be used in amounts not to exceed 50% by weight of total cementitious material.

C. Color: Color as selected by the Owner from the full range of Davis Colors or Owner approved equal.

2.06 Water:

2.6.1 Potable water shall comply with conventional local good concrete practice.

2.07 Proportions:

A. Cement Content:

Portland cement content shall be at least 580 pounds per cubic yard.

B. Water Cement Ratio:

Maximum of 0.30

C. Aggregate Content:

The volume of aggregate per cubic yard shall be equal to 27 cubic foot when calculated as a function of the unit weight determined in accordance with ASTM C29 jigging procedure. Fine aggregate, if used, shall not exceed 3 cu. ft. and shall be included in the total aggregate volume.

D. Admixtures:

Shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

E. Mix Water:

Mix water shall be such that the cement paste displays a wet metallic sheen without causing the paste to flow from the aggregate. (Mix water yielding a cement paste with a dull‐dry appearance has insufficient water for hydration).




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Subgrade Preparation and Form‐Work:

A. Subgrade Material:

The top 6 inches shall be composed of granular or gravelly soil that is predominantly sandy with no more than a moderate amount of silt or clay. Granular sub‐base may be placed over the subgrade.

B. Subgrade Permeability:

Subgrade shall have a reasonable level of permeability.

C. Subgrade Support:

1. The subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 12” and compacted by a mechanical vibratory compactor to 92 ‐95% of a maximum dry density as established by ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T180. Subgrade stabilization shall not be permitted.

2. If fill material is required to bring the subgrade to final elevation, it shall be clean and free of deleterious materials. It shall be placed in 8‐inch maximum layers, and compacted by a mechanical vibratory compactor to a minimum density of 92% of a dry density as established by ASTM D1557 or AASHTO T180.

D. Subgrade Moisture:

To avoid moisture being absorbed from the concrete mix upon placement, the subgrade shall be in a moist condition.

E. Formwork:

Forms may be of wood or steel and shall be the depth of the pavement. Forms shall be of sufficient strength and stability to support mechanical equipment without deformation of plan profiles following spreading, strike‐off and compaction operations. Forms shall have a removable spacer of ½” to 5/8” thickness placed above the depth of pavement. The spacers are removed following placement and vibratory strike‐off to allow roller compaction. Forms shall allow for tie‐in to adjacent concrete via the use of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) reinforcing bar.

F. Mixing, Hauling and Placing:

1. Mix Time:

Truck mixers shall be operated at the speed designated as mixing speed by the manufacturer for 75 to 100 revolutions of the drum.

2. Transportation:

The Portland cement aggregate mixture may be transported or mixed on site and shall be used within one (1) hour of the introduction of mix water, unless otherwise approved by an engineer. This time can be increased to 90 minutes when utilizing a hydration stabilizer as specified in section 2.4.4.


3. Discharge:

Each mixer will be inspected for appearance of concrete uniformity. Water may be added to obtain the required mix consistency. A minimum of 20 revolutions at the manufacturer’s designated mixing speed shall be required following the addition of any water to the mix. Discharge shall be a continuous operation and shall be completed as quickly as possible. Concrete shall be deposited as close to its final position as practicable and such that fresh concrete enters the mass of previously placed concrete.

4. Placing and Finishing:

a. The pervious concrete pavement will be placed to the required cross‐section and shall not deviate more than +/‐ 3/8 inch in 10 feet from profile grade.

b. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner or Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall provide either slip form or form riding equipment to place the concrete. Normal placement procedures involve utilizing a mechanical vibratory screed to strike off the concrete ½” to 5/8” above final height, utilizing the form spacers described in section 3.1.5.

c. Following strike‐off, the spacers shall be removed, and the concrete shall be compacted to form level, utilizing a steel roller made from nominal 10” diameter steel pipe of ¼” thickness. The roller shall have enough weight to provide a minimum of 10 psi vertical force. Care shall be taken during compaction that sufficient compactive force is achieved without working the concrete surface enough to seal off the surface porosity.

d. Workers shall avoid stepping on the mix immediately after its placement.

e. Any apparent defects in the surface shall be carefully remedied by placing some fresh concrete into any depressions and compacting with a hand tamper.

f. Upon strike‐off, a compactive roller will provide a minimum of 10 psi vertical force in order to secure the surface materials and assure durability. The pervious concrete pavement will be placed to the required cross‐section and shall not deviate more than +/‐ 3/8 inch in 10 feet from profile grade.

g. After roller compacting, defect inspection and repair, and finishing is performed the surface shall be immediately cured.

5. Curing:

Curing procedures shall begin immediately after and no longer than 20 minutes after final placement operations. The pavement surface shall be covered with a minimum of six (6) mil thick polyethylene sheet or other approved covering material. Prior to covering, a fog or light mist shall be sprayed above the surface when required due to ambient conditions (temperature, wind and humidity). The cover shall overlap all exposed edges and shall be secured to prevent dislocation due to winds or adjacent traffic conditions.

a. Due to the moisture required for proper hydration and strength gain, the curing cover shall remain securely in place for the suggested curing periods. The following cure times shall be used:




• Portland Cement Type I, II or IS – 7 days minimum

• Portland Cement Type I or II with Class F Fly ash (as part of the 630 lbs/cy minimum cementitious) or Type IP – 10 days minimum

b. No vehicle traffic shall be allowed for 10 days.

6. Jointing:

a. Control (contraction) joints shall be installed at regular intervals as indicated on the drawings and not to exceed 40 feet, or two times the width of the placement.

b. The control joints shall be installed at ¼ the depth (to a maximum depth of 1½”) of the thickness of the pavement.

c. These joints can be installed in the plastic concrete or saw cut.

G. Testing and Acceptance:

1. A minimum of one test for each day’s placement of pervious concrete in accordance with ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 29 to verify unit weight shall be conducted. Delivered unit weights are to be determined in accordance with ASTM C 29 using a 0.25 cubic foot cylindrical metal measure. The measure is to be filled and compacted in accordance with ASTM C 29 paragraph 11, jigging procedure. The unit weight of the delivered concrete shall be +/‐ 5 pcf of the design unit weight. Based on the unit weight of the mix, compacted void content of the mix shall be a minimum of 10% and a maximum of 20%.

SECTION 32 1413 ‐ PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING


A. Interlocking concrete paver units.

B. Sand setting bed.

C. Sand joint filler.

D. Edge restraints.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Interlocking Concrete Pavers: Hydraulically pressed concrete, configured for interlocking with adjacent units and complying with ASTM C 936.

B. Sand for Setting Bed: Clean washed natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

C. Sand for Joints: Fine washed sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and not more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

D. Edging: Formed galvanized steel, as detailed.

E. Color and Finish: Color and finish to be selected by the Owner from the Manufacturers full range of colors and finishes.


SECTION 32 1700 ‐ PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL


A. Parking lot striping.

B. Disabled loading zone striping and disabled parking symbol.

C. Traffic symbols.

D. Curb painting.

E. Traffic and parking control signage.

F. Sport Court striping.


A. Section 32 1216 ‐ Asphalt Pavement.

B. Section 32 1313 ‐ Concrete Paving.

C. Section 10 1400 ‐ Signage.


A. Materials and work of this section shall conform with Local Municipality Public Works standards and specifications.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to regulations of Bay Area Air Quality Management District and California Air Resources Board regarding use of paint.


A. Do no painting when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or below those temperatures recommended by the paint manufacturer.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD CATALOG PRODUCTS

A. Symbol Marking Paint and Traffic Marking Paint: Water borne product conforming to State Specification 8010‐426‐30; Dunn‐Edwards Traffic Paint W801, Sinclair 160 Vinyl Traffic Paint, or equal product.

1. Handicapped Symbol Background: Blue color.

2. Parking Stall Striping, Traffic Symbols and Disabled Loading Zone Striping and Lettering: White color.

3. Disabled Stall Curbs: Blue color.




4. Sport Court Striping: White color.

B. Traffic and Parking Control Signage: 16 gauge galvanized steel or 0.080 inch aluminum; reflective surface; radiused corners.

1. Accessible Parking Signs:

a. Upper Sign: Complying with CBC Section 7102(F) and ADAAG Section 4.6.4; 12 inches high x 12 inches wide; blue with white inset border and international symbol of accessibility.

b. Lower Sign: Complying with ADAAG Section 4.6.4; 6 inches high x 12 inches wide; blue with white inset border and Gothic letters minimum 2 inches high reading "VAN ACCESSIBLE" arranged in two lines.

2. Parking Control Sign ‐ Entries to Parking Lots with Parking Reserved for Disabled: Complying with CBC Section 7202(F); 18 inches high x 27 inches wide; 1 inch high black Gothic letters reading "UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES NOT DISPLAYING DISTINGUISHING PLACARDS OF LICENSE PLATES ISSUED FOR PHYSICALLY DISABLED PERSONS MAY BE TOWED AWAY AT THE OWNER'S EXPENSE. TOWED VEHICLES MAY BE RECLAIMED AT SOUTH BAY TOWING BY TELEPHONING 408‐354‐4838" on white background with black inset border.

3. Pipe: Galvanized steel; 2 inch inside diameter.

4. Concrete: Refer to Section 03 3100 for requirements.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine receiving surfaces and verify that surfaces are proper for installation.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter from the areas of the pavement and curbs to be painted.

B. Do not apply traffic paint to surfaces which are excessively dirty, damp, and cold.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply parking lot as a 4 inch wide solid line. Apply loading zone striping as 8 inch wide solid line.

B. Stripe parking stalls to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings; traffic symbols shall be as shown. Stripe loading zone to dimensions shown on Drawings.

C. Paint the handicap parking symbol in each handicap parking stall as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the CBC Chapter 11B diagrams.


D. Paint horizontal and vertical face of curbs abutting handicapped parking stalls. See Drawings for extent of painted curbs.

E. Apply traffic paint with atomizing spray type striping machine equipped with separate thermostatically controlled heating devices for each paint pot and capable of applying paint whereby the lines and markings have clear‐cut edges, true and smooth alignments and uniform thicknesses.

F. Apply paint with completed lines and marking clean, sharp and to dimensions.

1. Ragged ends of segments, fogginess along the sides or objectionable dribbling of paint along the unpainted portions of the strips will not be permitted.

2. The finished paint shall have an opaque, well painted appearance with no black or other discolorations showing through.

G. Set posts for parking sign plumb in minimum 12 inch diameter concrete footings with top of footing 6 inches below finished grade and bottom of footing minimum 36 inches below finished grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. Cap top of pipe.

H. Secure signs to posts with saddles and vandal‐proof nuts.

I. Install parking control signs with bottom of upper sign 60 inches above finished grade. Install handicapped parking signs with bottom of upper sign 80 inches above finished grade. Install lower signs in two sign assemblies with top within 1 inch of bottom of upper sign.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Exercise reasonable precautions to protect the paint, as applied, during drying time. Remove objectionable tracking.

SECTION 32 1713 ‐ PARKING BUMPERS


A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends.

B. Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, 1/2 inch diameter, 18 inch long, pointed tip.

C. Adhesive: Epoxy type.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten units in place with full bed of adhesive and 2 dowels per unit.

SECTION 32 1716 ‐ TACTILE WARNING SURFACES


A. Provide tactile warning surface to provide a tactile warning for persons with visual impairments as required by state and federal requirements.




1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Ensure substrates to receive tactile warning surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'‐0".

B. Ensure concrete is dry (maximum 7 percent moisture content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Tactile Warning Surface: Comply with requirements of or obtain written approval of ATBCB for use as a tactile warning as defined by Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines, Sec. 4.29. 1. Color: Black.

SECTION 32 1816.13 ‐ PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING


A. Protective surfacing for playground area.

2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Because the safety of the playground depends on strict conformance to the design criteria, this information is provided for Design‐Builder's information. 1. The protective surfacing constitutes a resilient layer installed over the subgrade, with the top of

playground equipment footings and anchorage devices located below the surface of the subgrade.

B. If deviation from specified depth is required, it is the Design‐Builder's responsibility to make all changes required to maintain specified top elevation and required impact attenuation at no extra cost to Owner; obtain approval prior to proceeding; follow approval request procedure as specified for substitutions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Poured‐In‐Place Membrane Surfacing: Weather‐resistant wear layer over impact attenuating substrate over rigid subbase. 1. Wear Layer: Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) particles adhered with a ultraviolet‐

stabilized polyurethane binder to produce an even, uniformly colored surface. 2. Wear Layer Thickness: 3/8 inch, minimum. 3. Coefficient of Friction: 0.8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2047. 4. Wear Layer Color(s): As selected from manufacturer's full range of bright colors. 5. Impact Attenuating Substrate: 100 percent recycled shredded styrene butadiene rubber (SBR)

shreds or granules with 100 percent solids polyurethane binder to form a resilient material; do not use foam rubber.

6. Resilient Depth ‐ Other Than High Play Activity Area: 3 inches, maximum. 7. Resilient Depth ‐ High Play Activity Area: 4 inches, maximum. 8. Certification: Provide IPEMA certification of ASTM F 1292 Critical Fall Height at thickness specified. 9. Color: Color shall be selected by the Owner from the Manufacturers full range of colors.

SECTION 32 3100 – PANELIZED FENCING AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following:

1. Swing gates

2. Swing gate hardware


1.02 WARRANTY

A. Materials and Workmanship: Manufacturer to warrant the original purchaser of fencing / infill /gate systems to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and all fabrications to be in accordance with NAAMM steel fabrication industry tolerances and standards. Manufacturer to supply written warranty information.

B. 20‐Year Finish Warranty: When supplied with 20‐year warranty TGIC polyester powder coat finish system (not applied over hot‐dip galvanizing), manufacturer guarantees supplied components will not rust, peel or blister for a period of 20 years from the date of purchase.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Custom Steel Door and Frame: Refer to Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

B. Steel Bar Stock: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

D. Swinging Gates: Hollow metal steel door, sealed for exterior application.

E. Gate Frame: Hollow metal steel frame, sealed for exterior application.

F. Finish: Finished with a polyester powder coat. Custom color to be selected by Owner from the manufacturers full range of powder coat colors

2.03 FINISH

A. DuPont TGIC polyester powder color coating, 20‐year warranty finish system or Owner approved equal. All supplied components will be finished with this system or Owner approved equal.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Bolts: Stainless steel bolts and nuts, vandal‐proof design.

B. Hinges: Refer to Section 08 7100 Door Hardware. Commercial grade, heavy duty, stainless steel for exterior application.

C. Panic Hardware: Refer to Section 08 7100 Door Hardware. Provide panic hardware for exterior application.

D. Keypad Access Lock System: Refer to Section 08 7100 Door Hardware.

E. Fire Department Lock Box: Provide Fire Department‐approved lock box near each gate for Fire Department access to gate lock.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. With installer present, examine area and conditions prior to installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 GATE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gates according to manufacturer’s written instructions, plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground‐set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Gate operation shall comply with all code and accessibility requirements.

3.03 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR

A. Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from the site.

B. Protect gates and frames from damage until the time of Substantial Completion.

C. Repair or replace damaged or defective gates and frames.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware, gate operator, and other moving parts.

SECTION 32 8400 – IRRIGATION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

The intent of this section is to provide County approved automatic irrigation for Ashland Youth Center which shall be connected to the Holland Park irrigation system. Ashland Youth system shall provide water efficient automatic irrigation to all at grade planting. System shall connect to the existing Holland Park Controller and at mainline stub outs. The materials specifications are provided in order to establish continuity within the multiple projects that create the Ashland/Edendale campus. If specific models are not appropriate to actual conditions then with Owner approval, materials from the same series or alternates may be used. Some materials are not identified in the site plans but if needed to complete the project, information is made available within this specification. New irrigation shall comply with all required Bay Friendly Qualified Landscape Practices and; the most current available State and County Water Efficient Landscape Ordinances.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Landscaping Irrigation system complete in place.


A. Section 02900 ‐ PLANTING


1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 1784: Standard specification for rigid poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) compounds and chlorinated poly (vinyl chloride) (CPVC) compounds.

2. ASTM D 1785: Standard specification for poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80, and 120, and class 200 and 315.

3. ASTM D 2241: Standard specification for poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe.

4. ASTM D 2464: Threaded poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80.

5. ASTM D 2466: Standard specification for poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 40.

6. ASTM D 2467: Standard specification for socket‐type poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80.

7. ASTM D 2564: Standard specification for solvent cements.

8. ASTM 2672: Standard specification for bell‐end poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe.

B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

D. PVC pipe, AWWA Manual M23. AWWA, Denver, Colorado. (1980).

1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC), latest edition

2. National Electric Code (NEC), latest edition

3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

4. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Department of Labor

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Labor Force: Provide installation and maintenance force thoroughly familiar with, and trained in, the work to be accomplished to perform the task in a competent, efficient manner, acceptable to the County.

B. Do not install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies exist that might not have been considered in engineering the system. Bring such obstructions or differences to the attention of the Architect. In the event this notification is not given, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to all federal, state, County, local codes and requirements for installation as referenced herein and as applicable.




1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300 and as follows:

B. Submit to the Architect, within five (5) calendar days after the date of commencement specified in the notice to proceed and prior to performing any work, three (3) typewritten lists containing a description of all proposed irrigation material to be used. Submittal shall also include proposed substitute material. Include manufacturer’s name and local representative, catalogue data, samples, warranties, and full descriptive/technical literature for all material specified on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

C. Material substitution will not be permitted without prior written approval of the County Contact or designated representative.

D. Material list shall be submitted using the following layout:

Item No. Description Manufacturer Model No.

A. Lateral supply lines XXXX Sch. 40

B. Lawn head Rain Bird 1804

C. Etc. Etc. Etc.

E. Equipment or material installed or furnished without the prior written approval of the Architect or designated representative may be rejected and such materials removed from the site at no expense to the County.

F. Approval of any items, alternates, or substitutes indicates only that the product(s) apparently meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications on the basis of the information or samples submitted.

G. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee.


A. Manufacturer: Company(ies) specializing in the manufacture of products specified in the Section with a minimum of five years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of the Section with minimum five years documented experience in installation of irrigation systems.

1.08 MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit maintenance data under provisions specified herein and as follows:

1. Prepare and deliver to the County, ten (10) days prior to completion of construction, all required and necessary descriptive material in complete detail and sufficient quantity, properly prepared in two (2) individually bound copies of the operation and maintenance manual.

2. The manual shall describe the material installed and shall be in sufficient detail to permit operating personnel to understand, operate and maintain all equipment. Spare


parts lists and related manufacturer information shall be included for each equipment item installed. Each complete, 3‐ring binder manual shall include the following information:

a. Index sheet stating Contractor’s address and telephone number.

b. Duration of guarantee period.

c. List of equipment with names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives.

d. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. Include exploded parts drawing and parts list where available from manufacturer.

e. In addition to the above maintenance manuals, provide the County with instructions for major equipment and show written evidence to the County at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.

B. Include maintenance information on regular maintenance, adjustment and testing.

1.09 WARRANTIES AND REPLACEMENT

A. Provide written guarantee, on Contractor's letterhead of the following:

Irrigation material and installation: Warrant that the installed irrigation system will be free from defects, malfunction and failure due to faulty workmanship or defective material or equipment, and comply with these Specifications, for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the County.

B. Replacements: Replace irrigation materials or components that are identified, within one year, as being inadequate, not as specified or accepted substitution, with the specified material or component. Replacement to comply with all requirements of this Specification. Upon being informed by the County of any defects or malfunctions, the Contractor shall affect all necessary repairs and/or replacements according to Specifications in a reasonably expedient manner at no additional cost to the County. If the Contractor does not respond to the County’s request for repair work within a period of three (3) working days, the County may proceed with necessary repairs and charge the Contractor for all expense incurred in the repair work.

C. The County may make emergency repairs, when necessary, without relieving the Contractor of his or her guarantee obligation. The Contractor is also obligated to restore any and all damaged plantings, paving, or other improvements where damage was a result of the improper operation of the system or where damage occurred during repair procedures.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01700 and as specified below.

B. Materials Delivery and Storage: Protect work and materials from damage during construction and store as directed by the County. Deliver manufactured materials in original containers with brand and maker's name marked thereon. Materials in broken containers or showing evidence of damage will be rejected and must be immediately removed from the site. Deliver quantities necessary to complete the work shown on the Drawings. Any discrepancy in the quantities given on the plans shall not entitle Contractor to additional remuneration.




C. Handle plastic pipe carefully; especially protect it from prolonged exposure to sunlight.

1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. OSHA Compliance: All articles and services covered by this Specification shall meet or exceed the safety standards established under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, together with all amendments in effect as of the date of this Specification.

B. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards.

1. All work and materials to be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the National Electric Code; the Uniform Plumbing Code, published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association; and other applicable State or Local laws or regulations. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.

2. When the Specifications call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above‐mentioned rules and regulations, the provision of the Specifications take precedence over the requirements of the said rules and regulations.

3. Furnish without any extra charge any additional material and labor when required by the compliance with these rules and regulations, though the work may not be mentioned in these particular Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

4. Erect and maintain barricades, guards, warning signs, and lights as necessary or required by OSHA regulations for the protection of the public or work crew.

5. Any existing building, utilities, equipment, piping, sewers, electrical, sidewalks, landscaping, etc., damaged during the course of this Contract work shall be replaced or repaired by the in a manner satisfactory to the County Representative at Contractor's own expense, and before the final payment is made. Be responsible for damage caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been installed under this contract work. Repair, at no additional expense to the County, all damage so caused, in a manner satisfactory to the County.

6. Pay for all permits, licenses, and fees as required.

1.12 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Site Visit: At beginning of work, visit and walk the site with the County's Representative to clarify scope of work and understand existing project site conditions. Identify location of utilities and other improvements. Notify Architect of conflicts prior to start of work for resolution.

1.13 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. Stake out the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings. These areas to be checked by the Architect before construction is started. Any changes, deletions, or additions to be determined at this check.

B. The drawings show, if applicable, existing and below grade structures and utilities which are known to the County. Locate known existing installations before proceeding with construction operations that may cause damage to such installations. Keep existing installation in service where possible and damage to them repaired with no adjustment to the Contract Sum. If other structures or utilities are encountered, request County’s Representative to provide direction on


how to proceed with the Work. If a structure or utility is damaged, take appropriate action to insure the safety of persons and property.

1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Acceptance: Do not install main line trenching prior to acceptance by Architect of rough grades completed under another Section.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with the work of other sections to insure the following sequence of events:

1. Sleeves and Conduits: Installation of all sleeves and conduits to be located under paving and through walls prior to placement of those materials.

2. Bubbler Heads: Install after placement of tree, but prior to backfill with planter soil mix.

3. If required, coordinate work schedule with County to avoid disruption of landscape maintenance of existing landscaping.

1.15 INSTRUCTION

A. After the system has been installed and approved, instruct the County’s maintenance representative in complete operation and maintenance of the irrigation system.

1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain one (1) complete set of blueline or blackline prints of all irrigation contract drawings in the field office. The prints shall be in order and available for review at all times.

B. Record accurately on one (1) set of prints of the irrigation drawings, all changes in the work constituting departures from the original Contract Drawings, including changes in both pressure and non‐pressure line.

C. Upon completion of each increment of work, transfer all such information and dimensions to the prints. The changes and dimensions shall be recorded in a legible and professional manner to the satisfaction of the County Representative. When the drawings are approved, transfer all information to a set of reproducible drawings supplied by the County.

D. Dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference (buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs, pavement, etc.). Locations shown on "as‐built" record drawings shall be kept day‐to‐day as the project is being installed.

E. Show locations and depths of the following items:

1. Points of connection to water and electrical power

2. Routing of constant pressure lines (dimension maximum 30 m (100 feet) along routing).

3. Ball valves.

4. Sprinkler control valves.

5. Routing of lateral lines




6. Quick coupling valves (QCV).

7. Routing of low voltage wires.

8 Sleeve locations

9. Other related improvements and equipment (as may be directed by the County Representative or designated representative).

F. Make all changes to reproducible drawings in ink (no ballpoint pen). Use eradicating fluid when redoing drawings, in a manner equal to the original drawing.

G. Upon completion of "as‐built" conditions to reproducible drawings, submit reproducible "as‐built" record drawings to County for review and approval.

H. "As‐built" record drawings must be completed and approved before release of job.

1.17 CONTROLLER CHARTS

A. The County must approve “As‐built” record drawings before charts are prepared.

B. Provide controller chart showing the area covered by the controller. Provide the maximum size the controller door will allow.

C. The chart is to be an A4 (8‐1/2" X 11") reduced drawing of the actual "as‐built" system and shall include the items as stated in 1.10 Record drawings with the exception of the dimension lines.

D. Chart shall be blackline print and a different color used to show area of coverage for each station.

E. When the charts are completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum .5 mm (20 mil) thick.

F. These charts must be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the irrigation system.

1.18 CHECKLIST

A. The following checklist shall be completed at the end of the project, using the format shown:

1. Plumbing permits (if none are required, so note)

2. Material approvals (approved by and date)

3. Pressure line tests (by whom and date)

4. "As‐built" record drawings completed (received by and date)

5. Controller charts completed (received by and date)

6. Materials furnished (received by and date)

7. Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by and date)

8. System equipment operation instructions (received by and date)


9. Manufacturer warranties, if required (received by and date)

10. Written guarantee (received by and date)

B. Signed and dated checklist must be forwarded to the County’s designated representative before final acceptance of the project.

1.19 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions shall be per Section 01630 and as follows:

1. If proof is submitted to the Architect that any irrigation material or component specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of nearest equivalent.

2. Substantiate and submit proof in writing to the Architect within 10 days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01 Materials List for compatibility with Existing Holland Park irrigation system.

Irrigation Legend

MPR40‐04‐CV‐MP3000‐series HUNTER 4" POP‐UP SPRAY HEAD W/ MP ROTATOR

MPR40‐04‐CV‐MP1000‐series HUNTER 4" POP‐UP SPRAY HEAD W/ MP ROTATOR

MPR40‐12‐CV‐MP1000‐ series HUNTER 12" POP‐UP SPRAY HEAD W/ MP ROTATOR

RWS‐BCG‐1402 RAINBIRD ROOT WATERING SYSTEM ‐TREES

1401 RAINBIRD FLOOD BUBBLER ON RISER

OCT816 PEPCO OCTA BUBBLER‐SHRUBS

1633 PEPCO QUADRA BUBBLER‐SHRUBS

M64/AP100 SPEARS FLUSHING END PLUG

FCH‐H TORO FLUSH VALVE

CV‐1000‐FF KBI SPRING CHECK VALVE (LINE SIZE) IN A PLASTIC BOX

YD‐500‐34 TORO AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE

1‐1201‐1151‐8130

PMR‐MF‐30‐1"

AMIAD 1" FILTER WITH 130 MESH SCREEN

WITH SENNINGER 1" IN‐LINE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (1‐22 GPM)

P‐220‐27 TORO PRESSURE REGULATED REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

T‐113‐K NIBCO GATE VALVE (LINE SIZE) WITH CROSS HANDLE IN ROUND VALVE BOX




33 DLRC RAIN BIRD 3/4" QUICK COUPLING VALVE

MAINLINE: 1120‐SCHEDULE 40 PVC PLASTIC PIPE WITH SCHEDULE 40 PVC SOLVENT WELD FITTINGS. 18" COVER.

LATERAL LINE: 1120‐SCHEDULE 40 PVC PLASTIC PIPE WITH SCHEDULE 40

PVC SOLVENT WELD FITTINGS. 12" COVER.

SLEEVE: 1120‐SCHEDULE 40 PVC PLASTIC PIPE WITH SCHEDULE 40 PVC PLASTIC FITTINGS. 24" COVER UNDER ROADWAY PAVING, 18" UNDER CONCRETE PAVING.

TORO DL2000 SERIES DRIPLINE #RGP‐212‐10 (0.50 GPH FLOW AT 12"O.C SPACING) WITH TORO 1/2" COMPRESSION FITTINGS. 4" COVER.

2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Main Lines (constant pressure): Polyvinylchloride (PVC) 1120‐ with solvent weld socket connections as manufactured by PW Pipe, J‐M Pipe, or equal, schedule of class as noted on drawings.

B. Lateral Lines (non‐constant pressure): Polyvinylchloride (PVC) plastic with solvent‐weld socket connections as manufactured by PW Pipe, J‐M Pipe, or equal, schedule of class as noted on drawings.

C. Main Line Fittings: Schedule 40 or 80, Type I, Grade I PVC plastic solvent weld socket fittings as manufactured by Lasco, Spears, or equal. Connections between main lines and RCVs shall be of Schedule 80 PVC (threaded both ends) nipples and fittings including tee at main line.

D. Lateral Line Fittings: Schedule 40, Type I, Grade I, PVC plastic solvent weld socket fittings as manufactured by Lasco, Spears, or equal.

E. Brass pipe and fittings:

1. Pipe: FS WW‐P‐351A red brass threaded pipe, ASTM B43‐84A (85% brass, 15% zinc).

2. Fittings: FS WW‐P‐460, red brass (85% brass, 15% zinc).

F. Plastic Pipe: Extruded from an improved PVC virgin pipe compound featuring high tensile strength, high chemical resistance, and high impact strength meeting the requirements of cell classification 12454 A or B for pipe. This compound must have 15 MPa (2000 PSI) hydrostatic design stress rating. Do not re‐use existing PVC pipe.

G. Markings: All PVC plastic pipe must bear the following markings: Manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating in kPa (PSI) and NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) with the date of extrusion on the pipe marked on the pipe.

H. Joints: Solvent cement joints for plastic pipe and fittings shall be made as prescribed by manufacturer. Cement shall be IPS Weld‐On or equal.


I. Each pipe installer expected to make solvent joints to receive instruction in the proper assembly of such joints before starting a job.

J. All PVC plastic fittings to be injection molded of an improved PVC fitting compound featuring high tensile strength. In terms of the current ASTM Standard D 1784‐69, the compound must meet the requirements described in cell classification 12454B. Where threads are required in plastic fitting, these shall be injection molded also. All tees and ells shall be side gated.

K. All PVC fittings to bear the company's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule, and NSF seal of approval.

L. All threaded PVC nipples to be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads.

M. Connections between main lines and RCVs to be as shown in the Construction Details.

N. Risers to sprinklers and quick coupling valves shall be as shown in the Construction Details.

2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY: Provided under Holland Park improvements

2.03 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES (RCV)

A. Solenoid electric control valves shall be Toro P‐220 series.

2.04 BALL VALVE

A. Ball valves shall be as noted in the Drawings.

2.05 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves shall be by Nibco.

2.06 QUICK COUPLING VALVE AND KEY

A. Quick coupling valve (QCV) shall be by Rainbird. The valve body to be of two‐piece construction with a cover of bronze and thermoplastic rubber.

B. Quick coupling valve key to be of the same manufacturer as the QCV.

2.07 VALVE BOXES

A. Boxes manufactured by Carson or equal.

B. Ball/Gate Valve, Quick Coupling Valve: 250 mm 10” round deep green box. Lid shall be green, marked "IRRIGATION" and have a lock bolt. Carson 910, or approved equal.

C. Remote Control Valve Boxes and Splice Boxes: 11‐3/4" X 17" X 12" deep green box. Lid shall be green, marked "IRRIGATION" and have a lock bolt. Carson 1419 or approved equal.

2.08 SPRINKLER HEADS:

A. Sprinkler heads as listed in materials Part 2.1 above.




2.09 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER

A. Provided under Holland Park improvements.

2.10 WIRE

A. Low voltage wire to remote control valves shall be soft‐annealed, uncoated copper, single conductor, with PVC insulating jacket and UL approval for direct burial in soil, AWG‐UF (600 volt). The size and color of control wire as follows: pilot wire ‐ No. 14 red; common wire ‐ No. 12 white.

B. Install control wire without splices between controller and electric valve. Only where approved by the County Representative shall splices be made with Dri‐Splice 400, no equal. Make all wire splices in a splice box with locking top, Carson or approved equal.

C. Label all valve boxes as shown in irrigation details.

D. Provide and install spare continuous #14‐1 conductors from the low voltage electrical points of connection to each installed valve box as listed on drawings.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Solvent cement and primer for solvent and joints to be make and type approved by manufacturer(s) of pipe and fittings. Maintain cement at proper consistency throughout use. All primer and solvent cans to have labels intact and stamped with the date of manufacture. No cans dated over one (1) year old will be permitted. Do not thin solvent or primer in any manner.

B. Pipe joint compound to be non‐hardening, non‐toxic materials designed specifically for use on threaded connections in water carrying pipe. Rectorseal, Permatex or equal pipe thread sealant for PVC pipe threads. Do not use on sprinkler ports.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Provide all equipment called for by the Drawings.

B. Extra Stock: Provide the following:

1. Five (5) additional sprinkler heads of each size and type.

2. One (1) additional sprinkler circuit electrical valve of each size and type.

3. Three (3) sets of specialized tools and wrenches for adjusting, disassembling, removing, and installing each type of head, valve or other equipment supplied on this project.

4. One (1) quick coupler key and hose swivel.

5. Two (2) keys for each type of equipment enclosure

6. Two (2) keys for automatic controller.

7. All keys shall be keyed alike per County standards.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT

A. Layout and construct irrigation system to the general sizes, grades, and locations shown on the Drawings. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required, therefore sprinkler lines shown on the drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Carefully investigate the conditions affecting all of the work and plan accordingly. Establish locations of all irrigation heads, valves, pipe routing, etc. at the time of construction. Install system in such a manner to avoid conflicts with planting, utilities and architectural features. Typical spacing of the irrigation heads shown on the plans is to be exceeded only with the permission of the Architect. Adjust, add or remove heads, to achieve full coverage of all planting areas and notify Architect of the adjustments

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Schedule and coordinate placement of materials and equipment in manner to effect the earliest completion of work in conformance with construction and progress schedule. Verify location of all existing system equipment.

B. Sleeves and Conduits: Verify that all installed sleeving and conduits are undisturbed and are free of defects or errors introduced by the work of other sections.

C. Water Meter/Water Pressure: Test and verify that existing water pressure is the minimum pressure at maximum system gpm to operate the irrigation system as specified on the Drawings. Report discrepancies to Architect before beginning installation for a determination of course of action.

D. Stub‐outs: Verify that all stub‐outs to be provided under another contract are correctly sized, located and installed as noted on Drawings.

E. Notification: Submit written notification to COUNTY Representative within ten (10) working days of above inspections describing all acceptable and non‐acceptable site conditions.

3.03 LAYOUT

A. Lay out work as accurately as possible in accordance with diagrammatic Drawings where equipment is shown in paving adjacent the planting. Install equipment in planting areas unless otherwise noted on Drawing. Parallel lines shown on the Drawing may be placed in a common trench. Be responsible for complete and uniform irrigation of all landscape areas irrigated under this Contract.

B. Where site conditions do not permit location of piping, valves and heads where shown, notify the Architect immediately and determine relocation in joint conference.

C. Run pipelines and automatic control wiring in common trenches wherever practical.

D. Conduits and Sleeves:

1. Coordination

a. Sleeving will exist only when installed under another subcontract. Inspect as specified above.




b. For all other installations, provide conduit and sleeve materials and coordinate installation with other trades.

2. Extent: Install conduits and sleeves where control wires and pipes pass under paving or through walls as shown on Drawings. Extend twelve inches (12") beyond edges of paving and walls and cap ends until ready for use.

3.04 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

A. Excavation to be in all cases ample in size to permit the pipes to be laid at the elevations intended and to permit ample space for joining.

B. Make trenches for pipelines deep enough to provide minimum cover from finish grade as shown on drawings.

1. If rock does not permit trenching to a depth to allow pipe cover listed above, galvanized steel pipe will be permitted. 150 mm (6") cover and one (1) size larger than PVC size on drawings will be required.

2. Direct Burial PVC Piping Under Pavement: Provide a minimum of 4 inches of sand backfill on all sides and 24 inches cover to bottom of paving.

C. Use all means necessary to protect existing planting materials before, during, and after the irrigation installation and immediately make all repairs necessary to the approval of the County or designated representative at no additional cost to the County.

Take care to examine the existing trees that are to remain. Any roots cut that are larger than 3/4" in diameter shall be filled with a tar‐base sealant immediately. Install trenches for mains and laterals, straight and true with bottoms graded on uniform slopes to low points. Make trenches wide enough to allow a minimum of 4" between parallel pipelines. Do not install parallel lines directly over one another. Maintain 2" minimum vertical clearance between irrigation lines at a minimum transverse angle of 45 degrees.

D. PVC pipe is flexible and can be curved longitudinally without affecting performance. Therefore trenches may be curved to meet the following allowable longitudinal minimum pipe bending radius for 6 m (20'‐0") pipe lengths. Allowable minimum pipe bending radius:

Pipe Diameter Bend Radius

3/4" 15'‐0"

1" 19'‐0"

1‐1/4" 32'‐0"

1‐1/2" 32'‐0"

2” 40'‐0"

2‐1/2" 48'‐0"

E. Restore surfaces, existing underground installations, utilities, etc. damaged or cut as a result of excavation, to original conditions in manner approved by the County.


F. Where other utilities interfere with irrigation trenching and pipe work, adjust the trench depth as instructed by County or designated representative.

3.5 PIPE ASSEMBLY

A. Piping under existing concrete to be installed by jacking or boring. Where any cutting or breaking of paved asphalt surface is necessary, it is to be removed, the installation of pipe and/or conduit completed, backfilled ,and compacted to original specifications and A.C. paving replaced to match existing paving.

B. Install plastic pipe to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer. Cut plastic pipe with a pipe cutter or hack saw with the assistance of a squared‐in sawing vice, to insure a square cut. Remove burrs at cut ends prior to installation so that a smooth unobstructed flow will be obtained. Use PVC pipe primer on all solvent weld PVC pipe before PVC solvent is applied.

C. Install all PVC piping in trench with manufacturer's markings (manufacturer, pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating, etc.) facing up and readable to County during installation or later excavation.

D. Do not lay plastic pipe when there is water in the trench.

E. The County Representative will inspect all pipe before it is laid and reject any section that is damaged by handling or is found to be defective to a degree that will materially affect function and service of the pipe.

F. Remove all foreign matter and dirt from the inside of the pipe before it is lowered into position in the trench, and keep clean during and after laying the pipe.

G. Place pipe no closer than 4" to walkways and 8" from buildings.

H. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe

1. Prepare joint by first making sure the pipe end is square, then deburring the pipe end and cleaning pipe and fitting of dirt, dust, and moisture.

2. Dry‐insert pipe into fitting to check for mis‐sizing. Pipe should enter fitting 1/3 to 2/3 depth of socket.

3. Coat the inside socket surface of the fitting and the external surface of the male end of the pipe with P‐70 primer (manufactured by Weld‐On, or equal). Then without delay apply Weld‐On 711 (or equal) cement liberally to the male end of the pipe and also apply cement lightly to the inside of the socket.

4. Insert pipe immediately into fitting and turn 1/4 turn to distribute cement and remove air bubbles. The pipe must seat to the bottom of the socket and fitting. Check alignment of the fitting. Align pipe and fitting properly without strain to either.

5. Hold joint still for approximately thirty (30) seconds and then wipe the excess cement from the pipe and fitting.

6. Cure joint a minimum of thirty (30) minutes before handling and at least six (6) hours before allowing water in the pipe.




I. Threaded Joint

1. Field threading of plastic pipe or fittings is not permitted. Factory‐made threads only will be permitted.

2. Use factory‐made metallic nipples whenever possible. Field‐cut threads in metallic pipe will be permitted only where absolutely necessary. When threading, cut threads accurately on axis with sharp dies.

3. All threaded joints to be made up with specified pipe joint compound. Apply compound to male threads only.

4. Where assembling metallic pipe to metallic fitting or valve, no more than three (3) full threads shall show when joint is made up.

5. Where assembling threaded plastic fittings, take up joint no more than one (1) full turn beyond hand tight.

6. Where assembling soft metal (brass or copper) or plastic pipe, use strap type friction wrench only; do not use metal‐jawed wrench.

J. Cap open pipe ends as pipe line is assembled to prevent entrance of dirt or obstruction. Remove caps or plugs only when necessary to continue assembly. Where pipes or control wires pass through sleeves, provide removable non‐decaying plug at ends of sleeve to prevent entrance of earth.

3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

A. General: Unless otherwise specified, the installation of valves to include excavation and backfill, and furnishing, installing and testing of risers, fittings, and valves, and all other work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

B. Install where shown and on Drawings and group together where practical. Limit one (1) remote control valve per box. No exceptions.

C. Locate valve boxes 12" away from and perpendicular to walk edges, buildings and walls. Provide 12" between valve boxes where valves are grouped together. Align boxes in a row.

D. Thoroughly flush main line before installing valves.

E. Install in ground cover areas or and in lawn adjacent to walkways elsewhere where approved by the Architect. Set top of box parallel and flush with finish grade.

F. Label control line wire at each valve with a 2‐1/4" X 2‐3/4" polyurethane I.D. tag, indicating identification number of valve (controller and station number, available from T. Christy Enterprises). Attach label to control wire.

3.7 WIRE SPLICE ASSEMBLY

1. Assembly to splice and effectively moisture seal two (2) or more conductors. Install the device per manufacturer's instructions and all applicable electrical codes. Seal with specified splicing materials. In‐line splicing will be allowed only on runs exceeding 2,500 feet and only in junction boxes.


3.8 CONTROL WIRING

A. Provide a cover as shown on drawings.

B. Run lines along mains wherever practical. Tie wires in bundles with pipe wrapping tape at 3 m (10'‐0") intervals and allow slack for contraction between strappings. Do not tape wires together when contained within sleeving or conduit.

C. Loop a minimum of 1 m (3'‐0") of extra wire in each valve box; control wire, ground wire, and spare wires.

D. Make connections to control valve wiring by twisting bare wires and securing and sealing with weatherproof wire splice assembly.

E. Locate all splices within a separate 25 mm (10") diameter plastic valve box. Do not direct bury any wire splices.

F. Where control lines pass under paving, they are to pass through Schedule 40 electrical PVC conduit.

G. Refer to the materials section of these Specifications for color coding of wiring.

3.9 VALVE BOXES

A. Remote Control Valve Boxes, install per detail.

B. Ball/Gate Valve and Quick Coupling Valve Boxes, install per detail.

C. Splice Boxes

1. Install two (2) common bricks (one on each side) under base of box for support.

2. Install 3/4" diameter clean drain rock inside box.

3. No soil permitted inside box. Install .25 mm (10 mil) polyethylene tape to box side cutouts.

4. Spliced wire shall be coiled 1" diameter with 3'‐0" of extra wire and each wire end weatherproofed with a splice seal assembly.

5. Indicate all splice box locations on "as‐built" record drawings and "as‐builts" note where the wires originate.

3.10 SPRINKLERS AND QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Unless otherwise specified, include the installation of QCVs, and sprinkler heads, excavation and backfill, the furnishing, installing and testing of risers, fittings, QCVs, and sprinkler heads, and the removal and/or the restoration of existing improvements and all other work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

B. Set all irrigation heads and quick coupling valves perpendicular to the finish grade unless otherwise designated on the Plans.

C. Thoroughly flush lines before installing sprinklers or QCVs.




D. Locate and install sprinklers or QCVs as shown in the Drawings and Details.

E. Adjust sprinkler heads locations for proper, even distribution and arc of coverage. Select proper arc to fit irrigated areas.

F. Locate irrigation heads 2" inside fences, curbs, structures, and walks.

3.11 BACKFILLING

A. Do not allow nor cause any work to be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the County Contact or designated representative. Should any work be enclosed or covered before inspection and test, uncover the work, and after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, the work shall be recovered.

B. Backfill material to be the earth excavated from the trenches, free from rocks, concrete chunks, and other foreign or coarse materials. Carefully select backfill that is to be placed next to plastic pipe to avoid any sharp objects that may damage the pipe.

C. Backfill all pipe under asphalt paving with 6" of clean sand on all sides of pipe, unless it is contained within a sleeve.

D. Place backfill materials in 150 mm (6") layers and compact by jetting and/or tamping to a minimum compaction of 90% of original soil density.

E. Dress off areas to finish grades and remove excess soil, rocks, or debris remaining after backfill is completed.

F. If settlement occurs along trenches, and adjustments in pipes, drainage, utilities, valves, sprinkler heads, soil, sod, or paving are necessary to bring the system, drainage, utilities, soil, sod, or paving to the proper level or the permanent grade. As part of the work under this Contract, make all adjustments without extra cost to the County for one year following completion of work.

3.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER

A. General: Install per local code and manufacturer's current printed Specifications.

B. Connection to Valves: Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with station setting beginning with Stations 1, 2, 3, etc.

C. Labeling: Affix controller letter (i.e., "A") on inside of controller cabinet door with minimum of one‐inch (1") high permanent letter.

D. Irrigation Diagram: Affix one of the, waterproof irrigation diagrams to inside of cabinet door. Deliver second copy to the Architect at final walk‐through.

3.13 OPERATING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING SYSTEM

A. Operation

1. Routine: Inspect and adjust all spray heads and control valves including raising or lowering of spray head heights to accommodate plant growth and weather conditions.

2. Controller: Inspect regularly for power interruption and reset clock as required. Adjust station timing to accommodate changes in plant growth and weather conditions.


3. System Failure: Perform all repairs within one (1) operating period. Replacements to match removed products and materials in all respects. Report promptly all damage not resulting from Contractor's operations. Repair all damage caused by Contractor at no expense to County.

4. Climate Change: Set and program automatic controllers in response to seasonal requirements and requirements of newly‐planted materials.

B. Testing

1. Make hydrostatic tests when welded PVC joints have cured at least 24 hours. Center load piping with backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Keep all couplings, valves and fittings exposed. Test shall be made when all main line and associated equipment is installed including but not limited to quick coupling valves, control valves, gate valves, etc.

2. Install two (2) pressure gauges at opposite ends of main‐line system. Pump system up to a minimum of 125 psi the day preceding the scheduled test and verify that pressure is holding. Inspect system early following day and immediately notify County's Representative if the test confirmation must be postponed due to pressure not holding. If Architect is not notified, be responsible for reimbursing the Architect for the unnecessary trip at the rate of two and one half times the normal office hourly billing rate per hour portal to portal (plus transportation costs for the inconvenience. No further observation will be scheduled until this charge has been paid.

3. Apply continuous static water pressure of 125 psi in except after a drop in pressure (5 psi maximum), then the pressure must stabilize and remain stable for a two (2) hours minimum period before acceptance of the test.

4. Leaks resulting from tests shall be repaired and test repeated until system passes tests. Note: Use hydraulic pump or other safe method‐‐do not use air compressor.

C. Adjustment

1. Adjust valves; align and adjust head coverage. If it is determined that the adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide more uniform coverage, make all necessary changes or make arrangements with the manufacturer to have adjustments made, prior to any planting without additional cost to the County. The entire system to be operating properly before any planting operations commence.

2. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways and buildings.

3. Set all sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

4. When the landscape sprinkler system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of the Architect to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is adequate.

5. Test controllers individually in the presence of the County's Representative and the Architect. Demonstrate that all control valves operate electronically. Provide vehicles and radio equipment as necessary to expedite this process.




5. Demonstrate to Architect that irrigation scheduling programmed into controller is adequate for plant requirements without causing runoff, and that scheduling capacities of controller are utilized.

3.14 CLEAN‐UP

A. When work of this Section has been completed and at such other times as may be directed by the County or designated representative remove all trash, debris, surplus materials, and equipment from site.

SECTION 32 9300 – LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 GENERAL

The intent of this section is to provide County approved planting materials and strategies which comply with sustainable practices as established by the Bay Friendly Landscape for Public Agencies under Stopwaste.org. All required practices must be achieved.

A All non‐turf planted areas are to receive minimum 3” depth of recycled wood mulch.

B Amend the soil with organic recycled compost per the soils report. soil organic content shall be a minimum of 3.5% by dry weight

C Divert a minimum of 50% of landscape construction and demolition waste from landfill to reuse/recycle facility or use on site.

D Plants must be selected to grow to natural size and form within the planting space provided. No shearing is allowed.

E None of the species listed by Cal‐IPC as invasive in the San Francisco Bay Area are included in the project

F 75% of all non turf plants are California native or Mediterranean climate adapted. That require occasional, little or no summer water.

G A maximum of 25% of landscape can be turf with sports and multiple use fields exempt

H Weather based irrigation controller is required with moisture and/or rain sensor shutoff.

I No Spray irrigation in areas less than eight feet wide.

The materials listed on Sheet L3.1 of the Holland Park Construction Document Package (and noted in Part 2.1 below) are provided in order to establish continuity within the multiple projects that create the Ashland/Edendale campus. If specific species or varieties are not appropriate to actual conditions then similar materials may be used with Owner approval. Interior courtyard conditions do not exist on Holland Park so additional plant materials shall be submitted to County for approval.

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work herein specified.

B. Stopwaste.org website ‐ Bay Friendly Landscape‐


C. Bay Friendly Landscape Maintenance Specifications. See Section 32 93 10.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Work to be Included:

1. Furnish and place topsoil, fertilizer, organic materials, and all other materials incidental to planting work.

2. Furnish all plant materials (trees, shrubs, seed, ground covers, and plant labels).

3. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of plant materials according to these Specifications.

4. Conformance with Bay Friendly Scorecard and Grant Requirements: Please refer to the attached Bay Friendly Plan Review and Scorecards for this project. Bay Friendly grant funding is base on a project’s score in the Bay Friendly Plan Review and Scorecard. In order to maintain the awarded Bay Friendly grant funding, this project must successfully comply with all of the following specifications and requirements.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

1. Section 32 84 00 Irrigation System: Irrigation system shall be installed and operative before beginning planting operation.

2. Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities: Contractor shall fully acquaint himself with the existing conditions particularly in reference to underground piping. Any damage caused by the Contractor to work of other trades shall be repaired by him at no cost to the Owner.

3. Section 31 05 13 – Soils for Earthwork

Section 31 22 13 – Rough Grading

Section 31 23 00 – Excavation & Fill

Section 31 23 16.13 – Trenching

Section 31 23 23.13 – Backfill

Close coordination shall be maintained with those Contractors performing rough grading operations and installing utilities and pavement to insure proper timing of the work.

4. Section 32 93 10: Bay Friendly Landscape Maintenance Specifications.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by the County of Alameda and any other authorities having jurisdiction over such work. Provide for all inspections and permits required by Federal, State, and local authorities in furnishing, transporting, and installing materials.




B. Certificates of inspection required by law for transportation shall accompany invoice for each shipment of plants. File copies of certificates with Owner's Representative after acceptance of material. Inspection by Federal or State Governments at place of growth does not preclude rejection of plants at project site.


A. Personnel: All planting and lawn work shall be performed by personnel familiar with lawn and planting procedures under the supervision of a qualified foreman with 5 years of landscape installation experiences on projects of equal size and scope.

B. Codes and Standards: Nursery stock shall meet the standards of the current edition of the "Agricultural Code of California" and the "Regulations of the Director of Agriculture Pertaining to Nursery Stock" as to grading and quality. They shall be true to type and name in accordance with "Standardized Plant Names", Second Edition.

C. Substitutions: Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by Owner's Representative. If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract price. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing to Owner's Representative at least 30 days prior to start of work under this Section. These provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials.

The Landscape Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to replace at the Contractor's cost any plants which the Contractor has installed without the Landscape Architect's approval.

D. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval of the Landscape Architect at place of growth or upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Wherever the terms "approve", "approval" or "approved" are used herein they mean approval of the Landscape Architect in writing.

E. Plant Certification: All plants must meet specifications of Federal, State, and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect infestations. Inspection certifications required by law shall accompany each shipment, invoice and order for stock.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish 6 copies of manufacturers' literature for the following items:

1. Organic Fertilizer

2. Mulch

3. Certificates of Inspection

B. Provide analysis from an approved testing laboratory for:

1. Import Topsoil

2. Organic Compost – soil amendment


3. Provide agricultural analysis from an approved testing laboratory including pH, salinity, sodium hazard, boron hazard, lime content, organic matter, soil texture and available nutrient levels per Section 2.01‐A.

C. Submit one (1) quart sample each of mulch and organic compost.

D. Foreman’s Qualification Statement

E. All submittal data shall be forwarded in a single package to the Landscape Architect within 60 days of award of the contract.

F. Contractor shall provide delivery tickets with quantities listed for soil amendment.

1.06 SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at Contractor's expense. Cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by Contractor.

1.07 SELECTION AND TAGGING OF PLANT MATERIAL

A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by Landscape Architect at place of growth if the Landscape Architect so chooses, and upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Submit written request for inspection of plant material at place of growth to Landscape Architect. Written request shall state the place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. Landscape Architect reserves right to refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available for inspection.

1.08 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Delivery:

1. Deliver standard products to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade mark and conformance to state law.

2. Deliver plants with identification labels.

a. Labels should state correct name and size.

b. Use durable, water‐proof labels with water resistant ink that will remain legible for at least 60 days.

3. Protect plant materials during transport to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves.

4. Remove unacceptable plant materials immediately from job site.

B. Storage:

1. Contractor shall maintain the plant material properly between delivery and planting. This includes protection from animals and vandals, proper watering, and feeding if necessary.




2. Shade plants shall be stored in the shade, and sun plants shall be stored in the sun.

C. Timing: Under no circumstances shall any work be performed if the temperature exceeds 90 degrees or is below 40 degrees. No planting shall be done with the soil saturated with water.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT LIST

The following plant list represents approved materials consistent with the adjacent Edendale Field Project and Holland Park. Modifications to the plant list shall be made with owner’s approvals.

TREES

Symbol Botanical Name Common Name Size Water Use Rating Reference Spacing Native Height Width Caliper

AM Arbutus ‘Marina N.C.N. 24” Box Moderate Wucols As shown No 9’ 3’ 1 ½”

ML Melaleuca linariifolia Cajeput Tree 24” Box Low Wucols As shown No 9’ 3.5’’ 1 ¼”

PC Pistacia Chinesis Chinese Pistache 24” Box Low Wucols As shown No 8’ 3.5’’ 1 ½”

PA Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’ Flowering Chanticleer Pear

24” Box Low Wucols As shown No 8’ 3.5’ 1 ¼”

RA Robinia ambigua ‘Purple Robe’ Purple Robe 24” Box Low Wucols As shown No 10’ 4’ 1 ¼”

SHRUBS

Symbol Botanical Name Common Name Size Water Use Rating Reference Spacing Native

CF Calamagrostis foliosus Mendocino Reed Grass

1 Gallon Low CNP 2’‐0” o.c. Yes

CK Calamagrostis ‘Karl Foerster’ Feather Reed Grass 1 Gallon Moderate EBMUD 3’‐0” o.c. No

CO Calycanthus occidentalis Spice Bush 5 Gallon Low Wucols 4’‐0” o.c. Yes

CS Carex spissa San Diego Sedge 1 Gallon Low CNP 4’‐0” o.c. Yes

CT Chondropetalum tectorum Cape Rush 5 Gallon Occasional EBMUD 4’‐0” o.c. No

DV Dietes hybrid ‘Orange Drops’ Fortnight Lily 1 Gallon Low Wucols 3’‐0” o.c. No

DB Dudleya brittonii Silver Dollar Plant 1 Gallon Low Wucols 1’‐6” o.c. Yes

EX Echeveria x imbricata Hen and Chicks 4” Pots Low Wucols 1’‐0” o.c. No

EG Erigeron glaucus Seaside Daisy 1 Gallon Low Wucols 1’‐6” o.c. Yes

HP Hesperaloe parviflora Red Yucca 5 Gallon Low Sunset 4’‐0” o.c. No

JP Juncus patens California Rush 1 Gallon Occasional CNP 2’‐0” o.c. Yes

LT Lavatera thuringiaca ‘Red Rum’ Tree Mallow 5 Gallon Low Wucols 4’‐0” o.c. No

MR Muhlenbergia rigens Deer Grass 1 Gallon Low Sunset 4’‐0” o.c. Yes

PD Phormium ‘Dark Delight’ New Zealand Flax 1 Gallon Low Wucols 2’‐0” o.c. No

PN Penstemon heterophyllus Beard Tongue 5 Gallon Low Wucols 3’‐0” o.c. No

PH Phormium tenax ‘Duet’ New Zealand Flax 5 Gallon Low Wucols 8’‐0” o.c. Yes

PT Phormium tenax ‘Tricolor’ New Zealand Flax 5 Gallon Low Wucols 2’‐6” o.c. Yes


RC Rhamnus californica ‘Seaview’ Dwarf Coffee Berry 5 Gallon Low Wucols 2’‐6” o.c. No

SC Salvia chamaedryoides Germander Sage 1 Gallon Low Sunset 3’‐0” o.c. No

SG Stipa gigantea Giant feather Grass 1 Gallon Low Wucols 3’‐0” o.c. No

WF Westringia ‘Morning Light’ Westringia 5 Gallon Low Wucols 3’‐0” o.c. Yes

ZC Zauschneria californica ‘Uvas Canyon’

San Jose California Fuchsia

5 Gallon Low Sunset 3’‐0” o.c. Yes

GROUNDCOVERS


AE Arctostaphylos ‘Emerald Carpet’ Trailing Manzanita 1 Gallon Low Wucols 5’‐0’ o.c. Yes

CD Carex divulsa Berkeley Sedge Plugs Infrequent CNP 2’‐0” o.c. Yes

VINES


VT Vitas californica ‘Roger’s Red’ California Grape 5 Gallon Moderate Wucols As shown Yes

LAWN FROM SOD

MEDALLION PLUS

AVAILABLE FROM: PACIFIC SOD OR APPROVED EQUAL

PH. 1.800.942.5296

PLANT LIST – Interior Courtyard


PN Phyllostachys nigra Black bamboo 5 gallon

moderate No

CD Carex divulsa Berkeley Sedge Plugs Infrequent CNP 2’‐0” o.c. Yes

EH Equisetum hyemale “Scirpoides”

Miniature Horsetail 1 gallon

Yes

JP Juncus patens “Elk Blue”

California Rush 1 gallon

Yes

2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. The organic amendments, and fertilizer rates and quantities listed in Part Three are to be used for as bid basis only. Contractor shall arrange and pay for testing by an accredited soils laboratory approved by the Owner. Test the existing site soil after demolition and rough grading operations are completed. Take samples from three site locations to be selected by Owner. Mark location of each sample on field set plan for reference and label each sample. Adjust the materials and quantities of soil amendments and fertilizer per soil lab written report recommendation. Submit lab report and any proposed soil amendments and cost adjustments to Owner for written approval. After review and written approval by the Owner, amend the soils according to said




laboratory's recommendations. The approved soils laboratory recommendations shall be considered a part of this specification.

The base bid shall include cost of testing site soil and organic amendments noted in this spec section. Adjustments to project costs resulting from the soil report recommendation shall be submitted as a modification to the base bid.

B. Imported Recycled Organic Topsoil: Topsoil shall be tested by an approved soils laboratory for compatibility with existing on‐site soils and fertility. Contractor shall submit soil laboratory’s analysis and amendment recommendations. Imported topsoil shall be subject to inspection by Owner’s Representative at the project site. Remove rejected topsoil immediately at Contractor's expense.

C. Organic Compost and Non‐Synthetic Fertilizers: Feedstock shall be no longer recognizable. Compost shall contain fairly uniform particle size, no weed sprouts. Submit a nutrient analysis and testing data from a third party or soil lab, such as the STA Seal of Testing Assurance by the US Composting Council; or OMRI, Organic Materials Review Institute. Compost shall be Super Humus Compost, available from BFI Organics: 408‐945‐2836, or approved equal.

Organic Compost shall meet the following criteria:

1. Particle size: 100% passing a 1” screen or smaller

2. Salt Concentration: Must be reported; may vary but < 4.0 mmhos/cm preferred. Soil should be test. <2.5 mmhos/cm preferred for soil/compost blend.

3. Feedstock Materials shall be specified and include at one or more of the following: landscape/yard trimmings, grass clippings, food scraps, and agricultural crop residues.

4. Nutrient Content: provide analysis detailing nutrient content including N‐P‐K; Ca; Mg; S; and Bo. Nitrogen content 1% or above preferred.

5. Trace Contaminants Metals (Lead, Mercury, Etc.) Product must meet US EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations.

6. pH: pH shall be between 5.5 and 8.

7. Visible Contaminants: compost shall be relatively free of inert ingredients, including glass, plastic and paper, < 0.1 % by weight or volume.

8. Moisture Content shall be between 35% ‐ 55% of dry solids.

9. Organic Matter Content: 50% ‐ 60% by dry wt. preferred, 30‐70% acceptable.

10. Carbon and Nitrogen Ratio: C:N < 20:1

11. Stability/Maturity: shall have a dark brown color and a soil‐like odor. Compost exhibiting a sour or putrid smell, containing recognizable grass or leaves, or is hot (120F) upon delivery or rewetting is not acceptable.

12. Weed seed/pathogen destruction: provide proof of process to further reduce pathogens (PFRP). For example, turned windrows must reach min. 55C for 15 days with at least 5 turnings during that period.


D. Non‐Synthetic Fertilizer: Synthetic, quick‐release fertilizers shall not be permitted. Fertilizers prohibited by OMRI are prohibited in the project. Organic fertilizers as recommended by the soils report.

2.02 RECYCLED TOP MULCH

A. Pro‐Chip Mulch (2 inch grind – all product passes 2 inch screen) or approved equal. Available from: BFI Organics 408‐945‐2836.

2.03 GROUNDCOVERS, TREES, AND SHRUBS

A. All plant materials shall be nursery grown in accordance with the best known horticulture practices and under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. Container stock shall have grown in the containers in which delivered for at least six (6) months, but not over two years. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from container shall be planted except upon special approval by Landscape Architect.

B. Plants shall be vigorous and shall have a normal habit of growth. Plants shall be free of damage by insects, pests, diseases or wind; burns from insecticides or fertilizer; and stunted growth due to lack of water, lack of food, diseases, or other causes. Plants shall be in conformity with the sizes shown on the drawings.

C. Trees: Unless otherwise specified, tree trunks shall be straight with leader intact, undamaged, and uncut. All old abrasions and cuts are acceptable only if completely callused over.

D. Quantities: Quantities necessary to complete the work as shown on the drawings shall be furnished.

E. Root Systems: All shrubs and trees shall have a normal root system. No plants with roots that have encircled themselves will be accepted. In case of any unsatisfactory root system, a total group of plants may be rejected.

2.04 WATER SOURCE

A. Irrigation Water source shall be provided by the owner. Contractor shall provide transport of additional supply if required.

2.05 ROOT GUARDS

A. Deep Root Model UB 24‐2 or Century Products CP18‐2 shall be used on all trees 5’ or closer to pavement, utilities, curbs, etc.

2.04 SOD

A. Sod shall be one year old and dense with grass, having been mowed at 1 in. height before lifting from field. All grown on fumigated soil. Sod shall be in vigorous condition, dark green in color, free of disease and harmful insects. Sod shall be Medallion Dwarf with Bonsai by Pacific Sod 800‐942‐5296, or approved equal.




2.05 GRASS PLUGS

1. Plugs shall be in vigorous condition, free of disease and harmful insects. Plugs shall be Carex pansa available from Greenlee Nursery 909‐622‐1721, Contact: Lindsey, or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

1. Inspections by the Landscape Contractor:

A. Prior to all work in this section, verify grades and carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete to the point where the installation may properly commence.

B. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect. Do not proceed with this installation in areas of discrepancies until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

C. Inspect trees, shrubs and ground cover plants for injury, insect infestations, and proper pruning.

D. General contractor shall coordinate rough grading of site to ensure the Landscape Contractor receive all planting areas graded to +0.10 ft. of finish grades shown on the Drawings. Allow for depth of soil amendments and mulch in determining the difference between finished subgrade in groundcover and shrub beds. Verify that subgrades are not compacted. Do not proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected.

3.02 SOIL PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall prepare the site for landscaping. In the areas designated for landscaping on the plans, he shall, prior to placing imported material, replacing existing topsoil, or doing any planting, clear the areas of weeds, roots, debris, rocks, and underground obstructions, and construction debris to a depth acceptable for planting. Scarify the subgrade to a 6" minimum depth prior to spreading topsoil.

B. The Contractor shall alleviate compacted soils before planting, for all landscaped areas that cannot be protected during construction.

1. Scarification: Scarify all planting areas prior to fine grading in order to ensure relative compaction of 85% or less. Any planting areas which become compacted in excess of 85% due to construction activites shall be thoroughly cross‐ripped to the maximum depth feasible to alleviate that condition, taking care to avoid all existing drainage and subsurface utility lines.

C. Soil shall not be worked when wet, generally between October and April.

D. A minimum of 1” of quality organic compost is tilled into all planting areas. Quality to be per Soils Test Lab recommendations.

E. Contractor shall compact 12” of blended imported recycled organic top soil.

F. Cultivation and Placement of Amendment:


1. In areas to be planted with shrubs cultivate to a depth of 12".

2. In lawn and groundcover areas, cultivate soil to a depth of 8". Incorporate 6 cubic yards per 1000 square feet of organic compost. Prior to planting incorporate to a depth of 6" the following non‐synthetic fertilizers, per 1000 square feet:

Organic, non‐synthetic fertilizers as recommended by the soils report.

3. Areas within the drip lines of existing trees shall be hand cultivated.

4. In bioswale area: Top soil to be of the following consistency, 5” per hour percolation rate:

70% Sandy Loam

10% Clay

20% Composted Organic Matter

Terra Vida bioswale mix available from:

TMT Enterprises or approved equal

G. Soil Mix for Backfill of Shrubs and Trees: The following ingredients shall be tumbled to achieve a homogeneous mix:

Organic compost 1 cubic yard

Topsoil 3 cubic yards

Top dress each pot with organic compost, compost tea or other organic fertilizer.

H. Finish Grading:

1. Finely finish surfaces by raking smoothly and evenly. Remove all exposed, extraneous matter one inch or larger in size to facilitate natural runoff. Drag to smooth surface.

2. Finish grades will slope to drain, without water pockets or irregularities (humps or hollows). Finish grades will meet all existing controls and shall be 1 ½ inches below adjacent top of paving, curbs, sidewalks and planters, unless otherwise noted on plans. Grades will be of uniform slope between points of fixed elevation. Establish vertical curves or rounding at abrupt changes in slope.

3. All finish grades will be approved by the engineer prior to commencing the planning operations.

3.03 SHRUBS AND TREES

A. Preparation:

1. Stake out location for plants and outline of planting beds on ground and obtain the approval of Landscape Architect before digging.

2. The Contractor shall protect all utilities, vegetation, and structures during work.




3. Trees shall be located a minimum of 3' from walls, overheads, walks, headers, and other trees within the project. If conflicts arise between size of areas and plans, Contractor shall contact Landscape Architect for resolution. Failure to make such conflicts known to the Landscape Architect will result in Contractor's liability to relocate the materials.

B. Excavation:

1. All plant pits shall be dug with vertical walls. The sides and bottoms of all planting pits shall be thoroughly scarified.

2. Holes for one (1) gallon size plants: Twelve (12) inches wider than the can and six (6) inches minimum deeper.

3. Holes for (5) gallon size plants: Twice as wide as the can or root ball, and eight (8) inches deeper than can or root ball.

4. Holes for fifteen (15) gallon size plants or larger: Twice as wide as the can or root ball, and twelve (12) inches deeper than the can or root ball.

C. Planting:

1. Center plant in pit or trench over tamped mound.

2. Face for best effect.

3. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position.

4. All plants shall be set in the ground so that the root ball will be flush with the finish grade. All plants that settle below the finish grade within 30 days of acceptance of the work shall be replanted in the proper position. In case a total section of planting area settles, the Contractor shall lift the plants, import additional soil mix, regrade, and replant, at no additional cost to the Owner.

5. Use soil mix only for backfill. Backfill pit with soil mix in 9" layers and water each layer thoroughly to settle soil. The filled pit shall be flush with surrounding grade when complete.

6. When the plant pit has been approximately one half filled, place organic planting tablets according to the manufacturer's schedule.

7. Apply post‐planting organic fertilizer, per soils report.

8. In tree, and shrub areas, mulch area under and between plant pits with 3" layer of Pro‐Chip manufactured by BFI Organics or equivalent recycled wood chip mulch.

9. Planting operation for plants in raised concrete planters is same as above except that finish grade of soil mix shall be 1 1/2" below top of planter walls. Planters may be backfilled with excess topsoil up to the depth specified for plant pits above which backfill shall be soil mix.


3.04 GROUNDCOVER AREAS

A. Planting:

1. Space plants equally and uniformly at spacings indicated on the Drawings, which are the maximum and in a triangular pattern.

2. Plant pits shall be sufficiently large so that the root can be freely suspended in the pit. After backfilling the pit, firm the soil so that there will be no air space around the roots.

3. Apply post‐planting organic fertilizer, per soils report.

4. Mulch all ground cover areas with 3" layer of Pro‐Chip manufactured by BFI Organics or equivalent recycled wood chip mulch.

3.05 TREE STAKING

A. Stake 24” Box trees as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Tying: Find the proper support height by holding the trunk in one hand and pulling the top to one side and releasing it. The lowest height at which the trunk will return to the upright position when the top is released, is the height at which to attach tree ties.

3.06 PRUNING

A. Tree and Shrub: Pruning shall be performed as required to maintain a natural appearance, promote healthy and vigorous growth, and eliminate diseased or damaged growth.

B. Trees shall be pruned to thin crown and avoid wind damage, eliminate narrow V‐shaped branch forks that lack strength, eliminate sucker growth, and maintain a radial branching pattern to avoid crossing branches.

C. Under no circumstances will stripping of lower branches ("raising‐up") of young trees be permitted. Lower branches shall be retained in a "tipped back" or pinched condition with as much foliage as possible to promote caliper trunk growth (tapered trunk).

D. Major pruning of trees to compensate for root loss or for aesthetic reasons shall be done only with approval of the Landscape Architect.

E. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled or boxed forms, unless such is required by the design and directed by the Landscape Architect.

F. All pruning shall be made flush to lateral branches, buds, or trunk. "Stubbing" will not be permitted.

G. Damage: All cuts over 1" resulting from pruning or wind breakage shall be inspected periodically for insect infestation or disease.




3.07 SOD LAWN AND GRASS PLUGS

A. Inspection:

Upon the completion of the placing of the soil and prior to placing sod, the Contractor shall call for an inspection of the lawn irrigation system. The sod shall be placed after the Landscape Architect has satisfied himself that the irrigation system is operating satisfactorily and finish grade is in accord with the Drawings.

B. Laying Sod:

1. Remove all rubble, sticks, rocks and stones 1" or larger from top 2" amended soil.

2. Lay sod without stretching. Stagger end seams and butt edges as close as possible to each other. Roll with sod roller perpendicular to direction it was laid.

3. Apply post‐planting non‐synthetic fertilizer.

4. Irrigate to an 8" soil depth immediately after planting and then irrigate lightly every day to maintain adequate moisture level through establishment period.

5. Arrange for delivery of sod in the morning to insure same‐day installation.

C. Planting Plugs:

1. Remove all rubble, sticks, rocks and stones 1" or larger from top 2" amended soil.

2. Hand pull weeds prior to planting and during maintenance.

3. Ideal planting season in Fall – early Spring. If planting late Spring – Summer, use 4” containers, available from Greenlee Nursery (909) 821‐1719, or approved equal.

4. Apply post‐planting non‐synthetic fertilizer.

D. At the time of final inspection the lawns and meadow shall be dense, green, and weed free. It is the Contractor's responsibility eliminate any bare spots, dead areas and weeds.

3.08 CLEAN UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean and neat at all times. Upon completion of planting, all cans, boxes, and other debris that is a part of the planting operation shall be removed from the site.

B. All pavements shall be washed off, and site shall be left in an absolutely clean condition. All planting areas shall be cultivated and weed free before final inspection. Clean‐up operations shall take place throughout the course of work so that walks and drives are clean at all times.

3.09 INSPECTIONS

A. Notification: The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect a minimum of 72 hours before requiring a visit by the Landscape Architect or his duly appointed representative to the site.

B. Check Points: The following shall be considered check points and the Contractor shall only proceed with the work after the Landscape Architect has visited the site and determined that the work is proceeding satisfactorily.


1. Completion of placement of soil mix and fine grading.

2. When plant material is placed in the configuration shown on the Drawings before planting.

3. A check visit shall be made to begin the maintenance period. At this time the Contractor shall have completed all phases of the Plans and Specifications. Any discrepancies shall be noted at that time and the Contractor shall make appropriate corrections before the acceptance of the work.

4. A conference including the Owner shall be held at the completion of the work, provided that all deficiencies brought out in the check visit which began the maintenance period have been corrected by this time. The Contractor shall continue to maintain the project at his own expense until all deficiencies have been corrected, at which time the Contractor shall request the Landscape Architect to visit the site and approve the project as complete. The Landscape Architect will accept the landscape project in writing. The date of the acceptance letter shall be the first day of the guarantee period.

C. Should it be determined at the Final Inspection or Final Acceptance visit that any punchlist item is incomplete, any further review of the site will be terminated until all items are guaranteed, in writing, to be complete by the Contractor. The cost of additional site visits by the Landscape Architect to verify completion of work shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.10 MAINTENANCE

A. See Bay Friendly Landscape Maintenance Specification, Section 32 93 10, for additional information, Bay Friendly Specifications shall govern in case of conflict. In particular, Contractor shall utilize Integrated Pest Management (IPM) practices to manage planting.

B. Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required to maintain the landscape in a healthy and attractive condition for a period of 60 days.

C. Maintenance shall include fertilization, watering, insect and disease control (IPM), and weed control using IPM, weekly trash removal, mulching, restaking trees, tightening of guys, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, and restoration of watering basins. Refer to Bay Friendly Landscape Specifications, Section 32 93 10.

D. Maintenance period shall not start until all elements of construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are complete. Project will not be segmented into maintenance phases, unless specifically authorized in writing by the Owner's authorized representative.

E. The Contractor shall request an inspection to begin the plant maintenance period after all planting and related work has been completed in accordance with the Contract documents. A prime requirement is that all groundcover and lawn areas be planted. If such criteria is met to the satisfaction of the Architect, a field notification will be issued to the Contractor to establish the effective beginning date of the period.

F. The Contractor's maintenance period will be extended if the provisions required within the plans and specifications are not filled.

G. Watering:

1. All plants shall be kept watered as often as it is necessary to keep them in optimum, vigorous growth. Watering shall be done preferably during the early morning hours.




Check soil moisture levels with a soil probe before watering and adjust watering schedule to match weather conditions.

2. Water shall be controlled so that there will be no excessive run‐off, ponding, or overwatering. Check and adjust irrigation system on a weekly basis.

3. Root Growth: Periodically the Contractor shall check the progress of the root growth within the back fill area. As the root growth increases beyond the root ball, the frequency of watering shall be reduced so that the roots are encouraged to grow to a lower soil depth. Watering then shall be less frequent, but applications shall be very slow and the Contractor shall assure himself that water does penetrate to the depth of the former plant pit.

4. Replace broken equipment immediately with equal or superior materials.

H. Spraying:

1. Utilize IPM practices for plant care, as outlined in the Bay Friendly Landscape maintenance specifications. Spraying shall only be performed as a last resort.

2. All shrubs and trees shall be inspected at least twice a month during the growing period to determine the need for spraying to control insect damage, fungus development or any other disease that might be attacking the plants. Preventative spraying shall be done only with the approval of the Landscape Architect.

3. Operators of spray equipment shall take all reasonable precautions to protect themselves, other people and buildings from spray. The Contractor shall have all permits and licenses required for such an operation. Where applicable, dormant spray shall be applied to shrubs and trees during the winter period.

4. All equipment shall be properly washed before and after use.

5. No spraying shall take place during windy or gusty days.

I. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall be inspected a minimum of two times a month to assure that the wires and ties are tight and no damage has occurred to the tree trunk or branches.

J. Weed Control:

1. Weeds shall be kept under control, preferably either by hand or by IPM methods outlined in the Bay Friendly Landscape maintenance specifications. The application of herbicides shall be as last resort.

2. All equipment used for herbicides, if utilized, shall be properly cleaned before it is used on this project. Herbicides shall be applied at temperatures recommended by the manufacturers. Herbicides shall not be used during windy or gusty days. All possible precautions shall be taken to protect vegetation which is susceptible to damage from the particular herbicides to be used.

3. The bases of all plants shall be kept completely free of weeds. Periodically, the base of the trees and shrubs shall be cultivated in order to allow better penetration of water, but such cultivation shall be carefully done in order not to destroy surface roots.


K. Non‐Synthetic Fertilization: Top dress all areas at 45 day intervals from time of planting with organic fertilizer or compost tea as recommended by soils report.

L. Litter: The Contractor shall remove promptly after pruning, trimming, and weeding or other work required under the contract, all debris generated by his performance of the work. Immediately after working in the areas of public walks, driveways or paved areas, they shall be vacuumed clean with suitable equipment. All areas covered by this contract shall be kept free of the following items: bottles, cans, paper cardboard or metallic items. Common debris and litter shall be disposed of in an appropriate manner.

M. Pruning: Prune as necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, dead wood, and suckers.

N. All green waste shall be taken to a certified green waste facility for utilization in organic compost or mulch.

3.11 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Guarantee period shall be extended for a period of one year from the date of written acceptance.

B. All plants shall be guaranteed to be alive and healthy as determined by the Landscape Architect at the end of the guarantee period.

C. The Contractor shall replace, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications throughout the guarantee period, any plants that die, or in opinion of the Landscape Architect, are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, and or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, excessive pruning, inadequate or improper maintenance, or any other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. The Contractor shall not be held responsible for acts of vandalism occurring after the beginning of the guarantee period.

SECTION 32 93 10 ‐ BFL PLANTING MAINTENANCE

The intent of this section is to provide County approved maintenance materials and strategies which comply with sustainable practices as established by the Bay Friendly Landscape for Public Agencies under Stopwaste.org. Maintence period shall be provided by contractor for one year after acceptance of substantial completion of landscape installation. All required practices must be achieved during the contracted maintenance period.

SECTION 1: GENERAL INFORMATION

1.01 PROJECT GOALS

Bay‐Friendly Landscape Maintenance practices shall be employed to minimize waste, protect air and water quality, conserve energy and water, and protect natural ecosystems (refer to Bay‐Friendly Landscape Guidelines, www.BayFriendly.org).

1.02 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

This work shall include all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, tools, supplies and services to maintain in a superior condition all landscape areas, irrigation and drainage systems and other related work. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner, using quality equipment, Bay‐Friendly methods and materials.




1.03 SITE DESCRIPTION

A. Work to be done is located at the future Ashland Youth Center located on East 14th Street in and unincorporated area of Alameda County and identified on the enclosed maps and plans. This area is owned by the County.

1.04 LIMITS OF WORK: SPECIFIED WORK DOES NOT INCLUDE:

A. Installation or replacement of plants, except for those damaged or allowed to decline or die by the Contractor;

B. Repair and/or modification of the irrigation system, except for those specified in section 3.4 Water Management.

1.05 SUPPLEMENTAL DOCUMENTS

A. Site maps

1. A site map will be provided and shared between the Agency and the Contractor. The map shall identify general plant palette, landscape features, building and parking footprints, streets and addresses.

2. An irrigation plan identifying locations of meters, valves, controllers, and types of irrigation equipment specified for the site will be provided.

3. A planting plan or list of all existing plants will be provided for use by the Contractor in developing pest management programs and irrigation schedules.

B. Initial soil analysis: Results of soil analyses from samples collected at the project area shall be provided to Contractor, if available.

C. Water budget calculations (MAWA): Calculations of Maximum Allowable Water Allowances for the project area will be provided to the Contractor, if available.

1.06 SUPPLEMENTAL RESOURCES

A. StopWaste.Org; www.BayFriendly.org

1. Bay‐Friendly Landscape Guidelines

2. A Landscaper’s Guide to Grasscycling

3. A Landscaper’s Guide to Mulch

B. A Guide to Estimating Irrigation of Water Needs of Landscape Plantings, California Dept of Water Resources, http://cdec.water.ca.gov

C. Irrigation water audits, Irrigation Association, www.irrigation.org, and the Irrigation Technology Research Center, www.itrc.org.

D. California Irrigation Management Information System, www.cimis.water.ca.gov, Waste management and recycling, www.ciwmb.ca.gov.


E. The Weed Worker’s Handbook, A Guide to Techniques for Removing Bay Area Invasive Plants, The Watershed Council (510) 231‐5655 and the California, Invasive Plant Council (510) 843‐3902

F. Pests of Landscape Trees and Shrubs: An Integrated Pest Management Guide, 2nd ed., UC Publication 3359, http://www.ipm.ucdavis.edu

G. A Field Guide to Compost Use, The Composting Council, 114 South Pitt Street, Alexandria, Virginia 22314, (703) 739‐2401, http://www.compostingcouncil.org/index.cfm

SECTION 2: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.01 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Qualifications

1. Contractor must have a valid California C‐27 contractor’s license authorized by the State of California.

2. Contractor must have assigned to the project at least one employee possessing a California State Chemical Applicator’s License for the control of weeds, plant diseases and other pests.

3. Contractor must have assigned to the project at least one employee who has successfully completed the Pollution Prevention Training & Certification Program For Surface Cleaners issued by the Bay Area Storm Water Management Agencies Association (BASMAA).

4. It is preferred that the Contractor have assigned to the project at least one employee who is a Certified Irrigation Contractor (Irrigation Association).

5. It is preferred that the Contractor have assigned to the project at least one employee who is a Certified Arborist or Certified Tree Worker (International Society of Arboriculture).

6. It is preferred that the Contractor have assigned to the project at least one employee who has experience or training in Integrated Pest Management (IPM) techniques.

7. It is preferred that the Contractor have assigned to the project at least one employee who has experience or training in Bay‐Friendly Landscaping practices.

B. Insurance

Contractor shall maintain insurance required in the bid documents throughout the contract period.

2.02 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, ORDINANCES AND POLICIES

All services rendered shall be provided in accordance with all ordinances, resolutions, statutes, rules, laws and regulations of the Agency, and any Federal, State, or local governmental agency having jurisdiction in effect at the time service is provided Alameda County has provided a web site for sustainability that includes the County resolutions and policies. Alameda County sustainability web site can be found at http://www.acgov.org/sustain/documents/topic.htm




A. Contractor must adhere to the Alameda County Resolution No. 2008‐222, Resolution Establishing a Bay Friendly Landscaping Policy for the County of Alameda.

B. Contractor must adhere to the Alameda County Integrated Pest Management and Pesticide Use Policy.

C. Contractor must adhere to the Agency’s Tree Preservation and Protection Ordinance No 0‐2004‐23.

D. Contractor must adhere to the Project Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the site and the Alameda County‐wide Clean Water program for Storm Water Management and Erosion Control policy.

E. Contractor must adhere to the Alameda County Environmental Purchasing Policy.

2.03 WORK REQUIREMENTS

A. Work Schedule

1. Contractor is to provide Agency with a weekly work schedule describing the work to be performed in the Project Area.

2. The Contractor shall conduct all operations during the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, unless otherwise approved by the Agency. Contractor may not work on any Federal, State, or local holidays.

3. Any non‐emergency work that may be deemed hazardous or disruptive (i.e., chemical spraying, tree pruning, etc.) shall be scheduled at least two (2) weeks in advance with the Agency’s representative. For emergency work, Contractor must obtain written approval from Agency’s representative prior to commencing work.

4. Agency reserves the right to change schedules for special events, conflicts with adjacent property owners/tenants within five (5) working days advance notice.

B. Protection of existing property

1. Contractor must protect all existing plant materials, site improvements, structures, facilities, utilities, and natural areas from damage, both above and below ground. Any damages shall be reported immediately to the Agency’s representative. Any damages caused by Contractor shall be corrected and/or paid for by the Contractor at no cost to the Agency.

2. Contractor shall protect property from accidental chemical, fuel, oil or other contaminate spills.

3. Contractor shall not wash or blow soil, chemicals, litter, mulch, soil amendments or other materials into storm drains.

C. Safety

Contractor must at all times exercise necessary precautions to provide for the protection of the public and employees.


1. Traffic Lane Closure

Landscape maintenance services conducted in the roadway center medians must be performed in a safe manner. The contractor is required to perform traffic diverting lane closures prior to beginning any trimming operations in the center median. Litter pickup does not require a lane closure.

All lane closure activities must comply with [put in your preferred reference here such as the Federal Highway Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/traffops/signtech/mutcdsupp/supplement.htm], and follow notification requirements of the Police and Fire Departments.

2. Chemical Applications

Note: Bay‐Friendly Landscaping emphasizes Integrated Pest Management (IPM) practices to control pests and diseases in the landscape. IPM uses cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods before using pesticides. Chemical controls are applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will provide adequate pest control is applied.

Contractor shall apply all chemicals in a safe manner and according to label instructions and Agency, State and Federal requirements. A California Chemical Applicators license is required by the contractor for chemical applications. The Contractor shall mix and apply chemicals to protect against accidental spills and drift to non‐target areas, and to insure safety of the applicator. Any spilled chemicals, as well as contaminated soil, water, and/or landscape materials must be removed from the Project and disposed of in accordance with the Agency requirements. The Contractor shall maintain applicator’s licenses and records of applications as required by the State.

A Chemical Work Report shall be completed for each chemical application. The Contractor is responsible for submitting chemical usage reports to the County Agricultural Department. Copies are to be sent to the Agency’s representative as part of the Contractor’s monthly report.

D. Contractor’s Personnel and Supervision

1. Contractor shall provide a list including all Contractor’s and subcontractor’s employees assigned to work site and include work schedule and assignment. Contractor must update list within 3 business days of any change. All Contractor’s employees assigned to the Project must demonstrate they are United States citizens or have a legal right to work in the United States.

2. The Contractor shall assign a qualified trained supervisor to oversee work performed at the work site and to act as the Contractor’s liaison with the Agency representative. This supervisor must inspect the Project daily (Monday through Friday) except holidays and provide direction to the Contractor’s workers and/or subcontractors. This supervisor shall speak, write, read and understand English and be capable of writing schedules, monthly reports noting any deficiency that needs correcting and major projects for the coming month. This supervisor shall have at least three (3) years of landscape maintenance supervision experience.




3. All Contractor’s personnel shall adhere to basic public works standards for working attire including; uniform shirts with Contractor’s name or logo clearly visible at all times when working at all locations, proper shoes and other equipment required by State Safety Regulations. Shirts are to be maintained in a neat and presentable condition.

4. All Contractor vehicles are to have a readable sign with Contractor’s name or logo and telephone number. Trucks are to be kept in a clean and presentable condition.

E. Subcontracting

A portion of the work covered by these specifications may be subcontracted with prior approval of the Agency. Contractor shall supervise subcontractor and guarantee work quality. Subcontractors and their qualifications must be submitted to the Agency thirty (30) days before working at the site. All subcontractors assigned to the Project must demonstrate they are United States citizens or have a legal right to work in the United States. It is preferred that subcontractors have training in Bay‐Friendly Landscaping or other experience in sustainable landscape practices.

F. Supplies and Equipment

1. Fuel conservation and low emission equipment

The Contractor will implement strategies in work operations to reduce fossil fuel consumption and emissions, such as:

a. Use hand‐powered equipment when possible.

b. Minimize use of gas‐powered blowers, especially on planting beds.

c. Select smallest, most fuel efficient equipment to accomplish task.

d. Consider vehicles that operate on natural gas or biodiesel.

e. Maintain equipment properly and keep it well tuned.

f. Emphasize employee carpooling to Project.

2. Use local products and suppliers

The Contractor shall use local products and suppliers (produced within 150 miles from the project site) to the extent possible to minimize fuel consumption and emissions.

3. Use recycled and salvaged materials

The Contractor shall use salvaged and recycled‐content products where possible Materials for reuse may be found by contacting the CalMax website at www.ciwmb.ca.gov or at www.stopwaste.org .

4. Equipment refueling and repair

The Contractor shall refuel and repair equipment in a safe manner to protect against accidental spills. Limit refueling to specific areas on a site. Measures shall be taken to prevent, control, and clean‐up spills. Clean‐ups should be immediate, automatic and routine and performed by a trained staff member or a licensed cleaning company. Oil


leaks must be repaired immediately and off‐site. Contact the local emergency response team agencies to report all spills.

G. Reporting and Inspecting

1. The Contractor shall submit a written report each month stating all contract work completed. The report shall show the work completed during each week contract work was accomplished, and shall be submitted with and cover the same work as the Contractor's billing statement for the previous month's work. The report shall include documentation of stormwater and irrigation inspections, IPM monitoring, soil and pest management treatments and other chemical applications.

2. Unusual horticultural problems such as pests, disease and damages that are beyond the scope of the Contractor’s responsibility shall be brought to the attention of the Agency representative immediately.

3. The Agency, through a designated representative, shall make periodic inspections to insure that complete and continuous maintenance is fulfilled. In addition, the Agency may obtain the services of an approved horticultural specialist to inspect plantings and make recommendations for improvements in the maintenance program.

H. Work Performance

1. Contractor is responsible for (a) having thoroughly investigated and considered the scope of services to be performed, (b) carefully considering how the services should be performed, and (c) fully understanding the facilities, difficulties, and restrictions attending to the performance of the services required. Contractor is responsible to investigate the area and be fully acquainted with the conditions.

2. Should the Contractor discover any latent or unforeseeable conditions, which will materially affect the performance of services, Contractor shall immediately inform the Agency of such fact and shall not proceed except at Contractor’s risk until written instructions are received from the Agency.

3. Plants, irrigation systems, etc., damaged by traffic accidents or vandalism, shall be reported immediately to the Agency.

I. Extra Work

1. New and unforeseen work will be classed as extra work when determined by the Agency that such work is not covered by these specifications. Upon notification that extra work will be required, the Contractor shall submit an itemized, written cost proposal for such work to the Agency. The Agency shall retain the right to reject such cost proposal and perform the extra work with Agency forces or other contractors. Should the proposal be acceptable to the Agency, the Contractor shall be advised in writing, and upon receipt of such written notification, shall begin the work within five (5) working days or as agreed to between the Contractor and the Agency.

2. The Contractor shall do such extra work in accordance with the agreement for extra work and with the provisions of these specifications and shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment. Payment for extra work performed shall be as agreed to by the Contractor and the City and as bid. Compensation for material will not exceed Contractor cost plus 10%. Contractor must provide invoice copies to be compensated for material.




J. Emergency Work

1. Contractor shall supply office, pager and home phone numbers of employee responsible for emergencies. Said employee shall be fluent in English.

2. Agency will provide Contractor with emergency numbers for Agency’s representatives and emergency personnel. Said employee shall be fluent in English.

SECTION 3: LANDSCAPE STANDARDS AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3.01 OVERVIEW

A. Bay‐Friendly Landscape Principles and Objectives

Contractor shall maintain the specified landscape in an integrated approach, consistent with the principles set forth in the Bay‐Friendly Landscape Guidelines, www.BayFriendly.org. The seven Bay‐Friendly principles are:

1. Landscape locally – The Project landscape is part of a larger natural ecosystem of the San Francisco Bay Area. The materials and methods used to maintain the Project can support the health, diversity and sustainability of the Bay.

2. Landscape for less to the landfill – Reducing waste starts with not generating plant debris in the first place by fertilizing, irrigating and pruning judiciously, grasscycling, mulching and composting plant debris. Using recycled content, salvaged, durable or local materials conserves resources and reduces the amount of energy consumed by the landscape.

3. Nurture the soil – Create a healthy soil that supports a healthy landscape by protecting the soil from compaction and erosion, replenishing organic matter and mulching, using slow‐release and organic fertilizers and minimizing use of chemicals that harm beneficial soil organisms.

4. Conserve water – Use California’s water supply efficiently by reducing irrigation requirements, irrigating according to plant need, maximizing irrigation system performance, increasing the water holding capacity of the soil and using recycled water.

5. Conserve energy – Conventional landscapes are fossil fuel consumptive. Nationally it is estimated that lawn mowers consume 400 million gallons of gas. Look for opportunities to conserve fuel and energy by choosing and maintaining materials and equipment for fuel conservation.

6. Protect water and air quality –Reduce runoff, reduce contaminants in runoff through an integrated pest management (IPM) program, and increase the soil’s ability to remove pollutants from runoff through steps such as mulching bare soil. Reduce air pollution by reducing fossil fuel consumption, recycling plant debris on –site and planting trees to remove CO2 and absorb air pollutants.,

7. Protect and maintain wildlife habitat – The Project may provide food, water, shelter and nesting sites for birds, butterflies, beneficial insects and animals that contribute to the ecological diversity of the Bay. Methods to protect them include minimizing application of chemicals by implementing an integrated pest management (IPM) program, and conserving flowers, berries, fruits, seed heads, low branch cover, and natural vegetation in open space areas.


B. Applicable standards and Best Management Practices (BMP’s).

Contractor shall adhere to applicable professional standards as defined by a professional organization including:

1. American National Standard for Tree Care Operations ‐ ANSI A300, Parts 1 and 2

2. International Society of Arboriculture BMP for Tree and Shrub Fertilization, and BMP for Tree Pruning.

3. Irrigation Association BMPs

4. Bay‐Friendly Landscape Guidelines

3.02 SITE ANALYSIS

A. Contractor shall characterize the Project’s microclimate(s) and range in exposures as a precursor for developing the water management program.

B. Contractor shall identify plants species present in the Project landscape

1. Contractor will determine key plant species present

2. Contractor will determine plant water use classification for each plant species present as a precursor for developing the water management program. Plant water use classifications may be found in “A Guide to Estimating Irrigation Water Needs of Landscape Plantings in California” (Univ. of Calif. Cooperative Extension, 2000).

3. Contractor will identify any plants in the Project landscape that are protected from removal or damage by ordinance, and adhere to all protection requirements.

C. Soil tests

1. Contractor shall collect and submit soil samples to an accredited and approved testing laboratory, annually for 3 years and when planning a renovation and when experiencing ongoing problems. At a minimum one soil sample shall be collected from turf and one from shrub/ground cover areas that are representative of site conditions. Sample collection procedures shall adhere to recommendations of the soil testing laboratory. Contractor shall request that the laboratory make recommendations based on an ‘organic’ approach to soil and landscape management. Submit soil lab report and any proposed soil amendments and cost adjustments to Agency Representative for written approval. After review and written approval by the Owner, amend the soils according to said laboratory's recommendations. The approved soils laboratory recommendations shall be considered a part of this specification. Analyses to be performed include:

pH, electrical conductivity, nitrate, ammonium, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, saturation percent, sodium, chloride, sodium adsorption ratio, boron, % sand‐silt‐clay, lime, % organic

2. Contractor shall determine infiltration rate and drainage characteristics within the Project. This information shall be considered when scheduling irrigation.




D. Topography and potential for runoff

Contractor shall assess topography within the Project and evaluate potential for runoff. This information shall be considered when scheduling irrigation and determining need for erosion control measures.

3.03 Soil & Nutrition Management

A. Goals

A healthy, biologically diverse soil is required to sustain a healthy landscape. A basic concept of Bay‐Friendly Landscaping is to cultivate a functional, living soil foodweb which shall then provide nutrient elements as needed to sustain healthy and attractive plants while avoiding excessive growth that might attract pests and/ or need to be removed through pruning, edging or mowing. Landscape maintenance activities shall be implemented to nurture biological activity, provide organic material, and protect soil from damage. Bay and riparian water quality and soil and aquatic habitat shall be protected by controlling soil erosion.

B. Contractor shall protect soil from compaction by:

1. Cultivating soil when it is moderately moist; wet and dry soils shall not be cultivated.

2. Scheduling maintenance operations that require driving equipment over the soil (e.g. mowing turf) when the soil is dry.

3. Confining traffic to paved areas.

4. When temporary access is needed over non‐paved areas, distribute the load over the soil with 6” thick coarse organic mulch or reusable planks.

C. Contractor shall protect the soil from erosion by:

1. Maintaining vegetative cover over the soil to the extent possible.

2. Placing compost berms, blanket, socks or tubes along slopes to slow water.

3. Maintaining a minimum of 3” mulch cover over bare soil.

4. Minimizing use of blowers in planting beds and on turf.

5. Using coarse mulch on slopes to avoid washing of mulch into storms drains.

6. Create leaf repositories in planting beds as appropriate.

D. Soil and plant tissue analysis

1. Contractor shall submit soil samples for testing as described in Section 3.2 – Site Analysis. The types and quantities of fertilizer and/or soil amendments to be applied shall be determined from the results of the soil analysis and shall be based on an ‘organic’ approach to soil management.

2. Where plant micronutrient deficiencies are suspected, plant tissue analyses are recommended to determine need for fertilizer application.


E. Incorporate organic soil amendments

1. Contractor shall incorporate composted organic amendments into soil prior to replanting damaged turf or ground cover.

a. Planting beds for ground covers: Incorporate 2‐4” of compost into the top 6‐12” of soil

b. Turf: Incorporate 1‐2” (3 1/3 – 6 2/3 cubic yards) compost into the top 5‐7” of soil

2. Compost shall be a well decomposed, stable, weed free organic matter source. The product shall be certified through the US Composting Council’s (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance Program (STA) Program (a compost testing and information disclosure program). It shall be derived from agricultural and/or food waste and/or yard trimmings. The product shall contain no substances toxic to plants, will possess no objectionable odors and shall not resemble the feedstock (the original materials from which it was derived.

Before delivery of the compost, the supplier will submit proof of STA certification and a copy of lab analysis performed by a laboratory that is enrolled in the US Composting Council’s CAP and using the approved Test Methods for the Evaluation of Composting and Compost (TMECC). The lab report shall verify:

a. Feedstock Materials shall be specified and include one or more of the following: landscape/yard trimmings, grass clippings, food scraps, and agricultural crop residues.

b. Organic Matter Content: 50% ‐ 60% by dry wt. preferred, 35‐70% acceptable

c. Carbon and Nitrogen Ratio: C:N < 25:1 plus at least one measure of stability and at least one measure of toxicity.

d. Maturity/Stability: shall have a dark brown color and a soil‐like odor. In addition any one of the following is required to indicate stability

1) Oxygen Test < 1.3 O2 / unit TS / hr

2) Specific oxy. Test < 1.5 O2 / unit BVS / hr

3) Respiration test < 8 C / unit VS / day

4) Dewar test < 20 Temp. rise (oC)

5) Solvita® > 5 Index value

e. Toxicity: any one of the following measures is sufficient to indicate non‐toxicity.

1) NH4‐ : NO3‐N < 3

2) Ammonium < 500 ppm, dry basis

3) Seed Germination > 80 % of control




4) Plant Trials > 80% of control

5) Solvita® > 5 Index value

f. Nutrient Content: provide analysis detailing nutrient content including N‐P‐K, Ca, Na, Mg, S, and B.

1) Total Nitrogen content 0.9% or above preferred.

2) Boron: Total shall be <80 ppm; Soluble shall be <2.5 ppm

g. Salinity: Must be reported; may vary but < 4.0 mmhos/cm preferred. Soil should also be tested: <2.5 mmhos/cm is preferred for soil/compost blend but may vary with plant species.

h. pH: pH shall be between 6.5 and 8. May vary with plant species.

i. Particle size: 95% passing a 1/2” screen.

j. Bulk density: shall be between 500 and 1100 dry lbs/cubic yard

k. Moisture Content shall be between 35% ‐ 55% of dry solids.

l. Inerts: compost shall be relatively free of inert ingredients, including glass, plastic and paper, < 0.1 % by weight or volume.

m. Weed seed/pathogen destruction: provide proof of process to further reduce pathogens (PFRP). For example, turned windrows must reach min. 55C for 15 days with at least 5 turnings during that period.

n. Select Pathogens: Salmonella <3 MPN/4grams of TS, or Coliform Bacteria <10000 MPN/gram.

1) Trace Contaminants Metals (Lead, Mercury, Etc.) Product must meet US EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations.

3. The delivery tags indicating the quantity delivered to the job site shall be submitted by contractor. Compost exhibiting a sour or putrid smell, containing recognizable grass or leaves, or heat (120F) upon delivery or rewetting will not be accepted.

F. Maintain organic mulch

1. Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 3” of coarse organic mulch at all times over soil surface that is not covered by vegetation. Mulch shall be applied so that it is below grade (curb, edging, etc.) by half an inch Some additional grading preparation and grading of areas adjacent to sidewalks or edging, etc. may be required to keep the finish grade of the mulch at an appropriate level. Mulch materials shall be chipped or shredded green waste, wood chips from pruning operations, or chipped landscape prunings. When available, use materials generated on‐site. Shredded redwood bark mulch (“Gorilla hair”) shall be avoided. Non porous material (e.g. plastic weed barriers) shall not be placed under the mulch.

2. Sheet mulching shall be employed where possible.


G. Retain natural leaf litter and clippings

1. To conserve nutrients on‐site and protect the soil surface, Contractor shall retain natural leaf drop under trees or in shrub beds. Select only tree and shrub beds that will not allow leaf litter or mulch to wash out into storm drains. Where leaf litter detracts from landscape appearance due to large leaf size, it is preferable that leaves be chopped and returned to landscape beds. Remove diseased leaves that would provide inoculums for plant infection.

2. Contractor shall practice grasscycling (discussed further in Section 4.1 Turf Management)

H. Fertilizers and other soil amendments

1. Bay‐Friendly Landscaping relies on organic fertilizers and soil amendments from natural sources that release elements slowly, which shall be preferred.

2. Additional amendments and fertilizers that are approved for use by the Organics Materials Research Institute (OMRI) for use in crop production are approved for use in landscape. See www.omri.org. Contractor must supply fertilizer and soil amendment labels including the guaranteed analysis identifying components of the material and the percent nutrient content. Contractor is required to apply the appropriate amount of fertilizer to supply the specified quantity of nutrient as determined by soil analysis and/or plant tissue analysis.

3. Contractor shall apply and manage fertilizers and amendments to prevent pollution of surface and ground water and to avoid creating a nitrogen draft in the soil or toxicity to plants.

4. Application frequency

Fertilizers shall be applied on a prescription base only. Application frequency shall be determined by plant need and assessed through soil and/or tissue analyses. For biding purposes the following maximum annual number of applications are provided:

a. Trees, shrubs, woody ground covers: One time per year

b. Herbaceous ground covers, perennials Two times per year

c. Turf: Four times per year

5. Restricted materials. Fertilizers that are not approved or are restricted for use in crop production by OMRI shall be applied only after review and written approval by the Agency Representative.

3.04 Water Management

A. Water conservation goals

Landscapes shall be irrigated to maintain plant appearance and health, and managed to conserve water and avoid overspray and water damage to Agency’s hardscape and property.




B. Irrigation system assessment

1. Irrigation application rates and distribution uniformity are best assessed through an irrigation audit. Contractor is encouraged to perform an irrigation audit bi‐annually (refer to www.itrc.org) or to schedule an audit with the water district that is the service provider to that property.

2. If a water audit is not performed, the Contractor shall inventory of the irrigation system at the start of the job. For each hydrozone determine the irrigation type and nozzle size, spacing and gallonage (from manufacturer’s literature).

C. Irrigation scheduling – water budget method

The water budget approach to irrigation scheduling shall be used to match plant need with water application and avoid over‐irrigation and overspray.

1. Irrigation intervals and frequency shall be suitable for weather conditions, soil infiltration rates, and plant species’ rooting depth and water requirements within each hydrozone. Calculation methods are described in A Guide to Estimating Irrigation Water Needs of Landscape Plantings in California, available from the Dept. of Water Resources, Sacramento, CA.

2. Irrigation frequency shall be based on ET (evapotranspiration) data (available through CIMIS). Irrigation shall be applied at approximately 60% allowable depletion (AD) for turf and annuals, 70% for non‐drought tolerant and 90% for drought tolerant plantings.

3. Irrigation duration within each hydrozone shall be based on the soil infiltration rate, species water requirement and rooting depth within the hydrozone, and the application rate and distribution uniformity of the irrigation system within that zone. Enough water shall be applied at each irrigation cycle to wet through the depth of root zone. Where runoff occurs, the application time shall be divided into shorter time intervals and repeated as needed.

4. Irrigation frequency for each hydrozone shall be adjusted a minimum of every four weeks to reflect ET expected in the next month.

5. For sites with controllers that monitor ET and adjust schedules automatically, the Contractor shall program the controller according to manufacturer specifications, and monitor to ensure that frequency is appropriate.

6. Whenever possible, landscape irrigation shall be scheduled between 2:00 a.m. and 10:00 a.m. to avoid irrigating during times of high wind or high temperature.

D. Irrigation monitoring

1. Contractor shall monitor soil moisture within plant root zones using a soil probe and adjust irrigation schedules accordingly if a soil moisture sensor is not signaling the irrigation controller.

2. Contractor shall observe irrigation system in operation to identify and correct water runoff or standing water problems as noted in the Section below 3.4.F Maintenance and Repair.


3. Contractor shall determine irrigation run time demand monthly by recording water meter reading before and after irrigation (if site has a separate irrigation meter). This data should be reconciled with run times and flow rates to determine if there is unusual consumption which may indicate stuck valves or leaks.

E. Irrigation with recycled water

For landscapes irrigated with recycled water and containing salt‐sensitive plants, the Contractor should increase irrigation frequency and duration to allow for elevated salts in the water and reduce salt accumulation in the root zone.

1. As a general guideline it is recommended that irrigation frequency adjusted to 50% allowable depletion (AD) for turf and annuals, 60% for non‐drought tolerant plantings and 80% for drought tolerant plantings.

2. Once a month during the summer, irrigation duration should be increased by 20% to leach salts below plant root zones.

F. Irrigation system maintenance and repair

1. Contractor shall maintain the irrigation system for optimum performance, as per manufacturer’s specifications, by inspecting the entire system on an ongoing basis. This includes cleaning and adjusting all sprinkler and bubbler heads, drip emitters and valves for proper coverage.

2. Contractor shall inspect the irrigation system in operation to ensure proper function according to the following schedule:

April – October Weekly

November – March Monthly (when system operating)

3. All malfunctioning equipment shall be repaired prior to the next scheduled irrigation.

4. All irrigation replacement parts shall be of the same manufacturer, type, and application rates as existing, or approved equals or upgrades.

5. Irrigation system pressure shall be checked and adjusted at least monthly during season of operation.

6. Twice a year, at a minimum, the Contractor shall:

a. Ensure all flush valve/cap locations are visible.

b. Ensure valve boxes are visible and can be opened.

c. Inspect valves, filters, and pressure regulators for damage or leaks. Check wire splices.

d. Clean valve boxes of dirt and debris.

e. Flush filters. A hose can be attached to the flush cap to keep water out of the valve box.




f. Inspect and clean filters. Replace damaged or torn filters.

g. Flush laterals.

h. Make sure plants have adequate numbers of drip emitters for their size.

i. Test backflow preventers.

7. Sprinkler heads shall be modified as needed to avoid overspray.

8. Where possible and appropriate, recommend to Agency where sprinklers could be converted to drip or bubblers.

9. Contractor shall maintain and submit monthly documentation of irrigation checks and as built plans of any changes or adjustments to the system. See Section 2.3.G.1. Reporting and Inspecting.

3.05 INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT (IPM)

A. Goals

An integrated pest management program shall be implemented to:

1. maintain healthy, attractive plants, maximize resistance to pests and out‐compete weeds;

2. monitor for presence of pests and to evaluate pest impact to plant health and appearance, and nuisance to the public;

3. provide control treatments that have minimal negative effects on all but the pest and that protect air and water quality.

Contractor shall assume pesticides are potentially hazardous to human and environmental health. Preference shall be given to reasonably available non‐pesticide alternatives when considering the use of pesticides on Agency property.

B. Insects and diseases

1. Key plant/ Key pests

Contractor shall identify primary plant species and cultivars in the landscape (key plants) and the pests that commonly cause significant harm to plant health or appearance (key pests).

2. Monitoring

Contractor shall monitor landscape areas to identify presence of beneficial insects and pests, determine populations, life stage, and degree of damage to plants. Key plants/ key pests will be monitored closely during normal periods of pest activity. This information will be the basis on which pest control methods are initiated. Records of monitoring activity shall be kept.


3. Controls

Bay‐Friendly Landscaping seeks to control pests without harming non‐target organisms, or negatively affecting air and water quality and public health. It relies on IPM which uses a range of cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods before using pesticides. Chemical controls are applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will provide adequate pest control is applied. Pesticides are not applied on a prescheduled basis.

a. Cultural/Mechanical/physical methods. A number of maintenance practices or modifications of them can make the environment unfavorable for pest reproduction, movement, or survival. Often simply modifying an existing maintenance practice, such as timing of pruning or fertilization, can produce positive results. Other mechanical or physical practices may specifically combat plant pests or increase host resistance. Key treatments include:

1) Fostering a healthy soil, judicious fertilization only when needed, and managing irrigation appropriately.

2) Pruning to remove infected or infested branches and shoots. Time pruning to avoid periods of insect infestation. For example prune pines and eucalyptus in the winter (December‐February) when bark beetles and borers are inactive.

3) Removing fallen twigs, leaves, and fruit that contain disease inoculum.

4) Mulching soil surface to reduce weeds and to reduce splashing and the drops of mud that would protect spores deposited on plant surfaces.

5) Trapping insects using sticky surfaces (also used for monitoring). Mechanical traps can be used to control rodents.

6) Bringing to attention of Agency plants that are disease or insect prone and suggesting resistant plant replacements or those better suited to the site and microclimate

b. Biological methods

Biological controls are pesticides of natural origin that have limited or no adverse effects on the environment or beneficial organisms. Determining the effective biological control and proper timing of application are critical to success in pest control.

The Contractor shall consider the following biological control methods when cultural/mechanical/physical methods are not adequate to lower pest populations to the target level.

1) Bacillus thuringiensis (Bt)

2) Parasitic nematodes

3) Pheromone traps




4) Beneficial insect release and conservation

c. Pesticides

The term pesticide applies to insecticides, fungicides and other substances used to control pests. Antimicrobial agents are not included in this definition of pesticides.

1) Least toxic pesticides

When cultural, mechanical, physical and biological controls have provided inadequate pest control, the Contractor may select and apply an appropriate least‐toxic pesticide as a last resort. Least‐toxic pesticides have a high LD‐50, low residual, and narrow range of toxicity. Application must be timed to the appropriate life stage of the pest.

Examples are:

a. insecticidal soaps,

b. horticultural oils,

c. herbicidal soaps,

d. neem,

e. Pyriproxyfen insect growth regulator (e.g. Distance IGR)

2) Restricted chemicals

Organophosphate‐containing pesticides have been found to persist in the environment and cause water quality impairment of some creeks, streams, and arroyos in Alameda County. They are restricted from use. Examples include:

a. diazinon, trade names Spectracide®, Knox‐out® and

b. chlorpyrifos, trade names Dursban®, Pageant®)

c. malathion and carbaryl (trade name Sevin®)

Water quality agencies recommend against using pyrethroids and pyrethrins containing piperonyl butoxide (PBO). These chemicals are restricted from use.

Pyrethrins are toxic to birds, fish, and beneficial insects, should be used only as a last resort, and carefully applied to avoid runoff and contact with non‐target plants.

Contractor shall not apply any Toxicity Category I or II Pesticide Product, any pesticide containing a chemical identified by the State of California as a chemical known to the State to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity pursuant to


the California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986, and any pesticide classified as a human carcinogen, probable human carcinogen or possible human carcinogen by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Prevention, Pesticides and Toxic Substances.

3) All chemical applications shall be performed by a licensed, trained technician. Contractor must be a licensed Pest Control Operator as required by the State of California, registered in Alameda Co., and strictly adhere to all laws.

4. Notice of pesticide use

a. Signs shall be posted at least three days before application of the pesticide product and remain posted at least four days after application of the pesticide.

1) Signs shall be posted (i) at every entry point where the pesticide is applied if the pesticide is applied in an enclosed area, and (ii) in highly visible locations around the perimeter of the area where the pesticide is applied if the pesticide is applied in an open area.

2) Signs shall be of a standardized design that are easily recognizable to the public and workers.

3) Signs shall contain the name and active ingredient of the pesticide product, the target pest, the date of pesticide use, the signal word indicating the toxicity category of the pesticide product, the date for re‐entry to the area treated, and the name and contact number for the City department responsible for the application.

b. Contractor shall not be required to post signs in right‐of‐way locations that the general public does not use for recreational purposes. However, Contractor shall notify Agency in writing three days prior to pesticide applications in the right‐of‐way areas.

c. Contractor may obtain authorization from the Agency to apply a pesticide without providing a three‐day advance notification in the event of a public health emergency or to comply with worker safety requirements. Signs shall be posted for at least four days after application of the pesticide, as described in the Section above, 3.5.B.4.a., Notice of Pesticide Use

5. Recordkeeping and reporting

a. Contractor shall maintain records of all pest management activities. Each record shall include the following information:

1) target pest;

2) type and quantity of pesticide used;

3) site of the pesticide application;

4) date the pesticide was used;




5) name of the pesticide applicator;

6) application equipment used;

7) prevention and other non‐chemical methods of control used.

b. Contractor shall submit the pest management record to Agency on a monthly basis.

C. Weed management

1. Landscapes shall be maintained in a healthy and attractive manner using Bay‐Friendly methods.

2. Identify key weeds

Contractor will identify key weeds present and design weed manage program to target those species.

3. Invasive plants

Invasive plant species may have been included in the plantings inadvertently. Seedlings and/or suckers from those plants shall be removed by the Contractor. Refer to www.bayfriendly.org or www.cal‐ipc.org for a list of invasive species. Remove all invasive plants not planted intentionally as noted in the Section below, 3.5.C.4, Controls. When invasive plants are an intended part of the landscape please notify Agency and propose a replacement option.

4. Controls

a. Cultural/Mechanical/physical methods will be used as the first choice in weed management.

1) Monitor planting areas frequently to identify and eradicate weeds early in the growth stage prior to their setting seed.

2) Cut or pull weeds using hand operated equipment where possible.

3) Mow large areas to reduce weed growth, and eliminate species that are not tolerant of mowing. Mowing is especially effective when done prior to seed set. Mowing also reduces fire hazard in open spaces.

4) Goats may be used to manage weed growth, where appropriate. Goats must be well managed and plants fenced to avoid damage to non‐target plants.

5) Mulches shall be maintained at all times over soil surface that is not covered by vegetation. (see also Section 3.3 E, Incorporate Organic Soil Amedments)

6) Sheet mulching, a layered system of non‐plastic weed barrier overlain by mulch, shall be employed where possible.


7) Propane‐fueled flamers may be used in winter and spring with required permits and approval by the Fire Marshall to kill early‐season, non‐grass weeds by heating the cells until they burst. The weed quickly wilts and dies.

b. Least toxic herbicides may be employed by Contractor as a last resort. Examples are:

1) Fatty acid potassium salts (herbicidal soaps e.g. Safer's Superfast Weed and Grass Killer® Dr. Bronner’s Peppermint Anti‐Bacterial Soap)

2) Acetic and citric acids (e.g. Nature’s Glory Weed and Grass Killer RTU®)

3) Clove, citrus, mint and thyme oil (e.g. Matran II®, Xpress®)

4) Corn gluten

5) Low‐toxic, low‐residual herbicide [e.g. glyphosate (Round‐up®), glufosinate‐ammonium (Finale®), pelargoic acid (Scythe®)

c. Restricted herbicides that may not be used because they have been identified as ground water contaminants are (trade names in parentheses):

1) Atrazine (Aatrex)

2) Simazine (Princep)

3) Bromacil (Hyvar, Krovar)

4) Prometon (Pramitol)

5) Bentazon (Basagran)

6) Norflurazon (Solicam, Predict, Zorial)

d. Restricted herbicides that may not be used because they have been identified as a compost contaminant are:

1) Picloram

2) Clopyralid

D. Vertebrate pests

1. Identify key pests that significantly affect plant health and appearance. Accurate identification is critical to appropriate control. Common vertebrate pests are:

a. Rodents including rats, mice, voles, moles, gophers

b. Deer

c. Rabbits




2. Controls

a. Mechanical/physical/cultural methods shall be implemented as a first course of action. Preferred treatments include:

1) Exclusion – Protect plants from damage by grazing animals with fences or cages.

2) Habitat modification – Reduce cover at the periphery of the project as needed to solve problem.

3) Application of repellents that are suitable for use in public areas.

4) Traps may be used where mechanical/physical/cultural methods have been insufficient to control moles, voles, gophers, rats and mice.

5) Encouragement of predators – owl boxes

b. Least toxic rodentcides

3.06 PLANT GROWTH CONTROL

A. Goals

The goals of plant growth control are to maintain healthy, attractive plants within the planting space allotted with minimal removal and disposal of vegetative growth.

B. Pruning

1. Selective pruning

Plants shall be pruned selectively to remove individual stems or branches that extend beyond the natural conformation of the plant to a lateral branch or at the point of attachment.

Woody groundcovers shall be selectively pruned to control growth towards pavements rather than edged.

2. Hedging and shearing

a. Existing hedges that have been maintained by shearing in the past and that do not have adequate space to grow to mature plant size can continue to be maintained by shearing. Suggest to Agency alternative plantings to these existing hedges that can be maintained in their natural shape for future renovations

b. For hedges that have not yet been maintained by shearing: shearing of plants into formal shapes shall be avoided as this destroys the natural form of the plant and generates excessive waste.

1) Plants having adequate space for development shall instead be selectively pruned on an as needed basis.


2) Where plant size must be controlled because of inadequate space for the plant, prune to reduce size by cutting individual branches or stems to interior lateral branches at appropriate locations. Contractor will notify Agency where hedges could be replaced with size‐appropriate plants to eliminate requirement for shearing.

3. Tree Pruning

Tree pruning shall be performed only by trained, experienced personnel. An I.S.A. Certified Arborist or Tree Worker is to be present at all times during pruning. See Section 3.5.C.,Pruning, for additional requirements.

C. Fire management/defensible space

For projects that adjoin open space areas, manage growth of grasses shrubs and trees to minimize fire risk. Contractor shall maintain vegetation clearances as required by the Alameda County Fire Marshall. Where recommended clearances would negatively affect plant health or environmental quality, Contractor will contact the Fire Marshall for a field inspection and recommendation. See also Section 4.5.B. Fire Management.

D. Irrigation and fertilization programs shall be designed to avoid excessive plant growth that would require additional pruning or mowing to manage.

3.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Goals

Bay Friendly landscapes are maintained to minimize producing waste and to use as much of the plant debris generated on‐site as is possible and to recycle plant debris and discarded materials to the maximum extent feasible at appropriate recycling centers to avoid adding it to landfill.

B. Retain natural leaf litter

To conserve nutrients on‐site and protect the soil surface, Contractor shall retain natural leaf drop and other organic materials in shrub beds. Select sites where leaves will not enter the storm drain. Where leaf litter detracts from landscape appearance due to large leaf size, it is preferable that leaves be chopped and returned to landscape beds. Remove diseased leaves that would provide inoculum for plant infection.

C. Grasscycle

Contractor will leave grass clippings on the lawns after mowing, from at least April through October. Sports turf may be excluded ‘in season’ when clippings will interfere with play.

D. Debris removal and clean‐up

Contractor shall keep all landscaped areas, walkways, building entries and exits free from trash and debris. Debris clean up with brooms and rakes is preferred to blowers.

E. Producing mulch from site generated untreated and unpainted wood and plant debris

Contractor is encouraged to chip all vegetative materials and wood and use on site as mulch.




F. Producing compost from site generated plant debris

Where appropriate space is available, Contractor is encouraged to compost site‐generated green waste and reuse on site. Site must be approved by agency, have a water hook‐up nearby, be in an area that discourages interaction with public and be regularly monitored. Contractor should have knowledge of compost basics such as: C:N ratio, proper moisture content, and proper aeration.

G. Recycle waste

Contractor shall separate all plant debris that cannot be reused on site and other discarded materials that are readily recyclable and transport to appropriate recycling facilities.

If lawn clippings, shrub and tree trimmings, or prunings must be removed from site, they must be kept free of other types of debris and transported to a local composting facility or transfer station that offers a separate processing (and often discounts) of plant debris for composting.

3.08. LANDSCAPE REPAIR/REFURBISHMENT

When landscapes are repaired and/or refurbished, the Contractor will employ Bay‐Friendly landscape guidelines to enhance the sustainability of the landscape, reduce waste and protect watersheds. Refer to the Bay‐Friendly landscape guidelines at www.BayFriendly.org.

A. Replace high input plants with species better suited to location and use. Species should be selected that are:

1. appropriate size at maturity for planting site

2. native to region and/or drought tolerant

3. resistant to significant pests

4. non‐invasive

5. increase diversity of the plant palette.

B. Reduce amount of area occupied by high water use plantings where possible (e.g. replace turf with drought‐tolerant ground cover). Suggest alternative plantings to Agency for decorative turf especially turf areas less than 8 feet wide.

C. Reuse materials removed from the landscape that are in good condition.

D. When buying new materials, select recycled content materials where possible.

E. When irrigation systems are replaced or upgraded, install high efficiency systems.

SECTION 4: LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT TYPES AND LANDSCAPE ZONES

4.01 TURF

A. Standards for Health and Appearance

Turf shall be maintained to sustain an attractive appearance, and good health with deep roots uniform green color, and uniform density with no bare spots,


B. Protect Environmental Resources

Turf shall be maintained using materials and methods that protect environmental quality and human health, conserve water and energy, minimize waste, and reuse and recycle materials to the extent possible.

C. Mowing and Edging

1. Turf shall be mowed and edged at regular intervals to maintain a neat appearance and healthy growth.

2. Grasscycling shall be employed for all turf areas (see A Bay‐Friendly Landscaping Guide to Grasscycling, available at www.BayFriendly.org.). Grasscycling requires an integrated management system of irrigation, mowing height, and mowing frequency. Key components are:

a. Mow often, at least once a week during the growing season.

b. Mow when the turf is dry; at least on the day following irrigation.

c. Maintain equipment to keep blades sharp and balanced; usually sharpen once a week. Keep area under the mower deck clean. Mulching mowers are more effective, but not required for grasscycling.

d. Leave clippings on the turf. A second pass over clumps or windrows may be necessary if clippings are long. Clipping may not be left on turf in clumps or windrows.

e. Seasonal rains may require temporarily halting of grasscycling because of excessive moisture. The clippings must be picked up and used as a mulch or transported to a plant debris recycling facility. Do not use grass clippings as a mulch if an herbicide has been applied to the turf.

2. Turf will be mowed at a height appropriate for the species of turf:

a. Tall fescue 2‐3”

b. Native Bent Grass 3‐5””

3. Turf will be cut with appropriately sized equipment which will give a neat appearance without rutting, sliding over or scalping the turf.

4. Mowing patterns will be changed weekly or however often necessary to avoid rutting.

5. Turf areas adjacent to pavements shall be edged on a vertical plane every other mowing.

6. A stringtrimmer or shears shall be used to trim around valve boxes, headerboards, etc. in the turf, on a regular basis to maintain a neat appearance.

7. Turf shall be maintained away from the base of features in the turf at the following distances:




a. Trees 24”

b. Signs and similar features 4”

c. Buildings and other structures 4”

8. Clippings will be removed from paved surfaces the day of the mowing and edging.

9. Contractor shall take care to avoid damaging plants, equipment, signs, buildings, vehicles, etc. during turf maintenance operations. Any trees which have more than 50% of the circumference of the trunk tissue removed or damaged by string trimmers or mowers shall be considered destroyed and shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense with like species and size.

D. Leaf Litter

1. Mulch leaf litter with mowers as needed throughout the fall and winter months. Large concentrations of leaves may require pickup. Rakes are preferred for leaf litter removal over blowers.

2. Leaf litter will not be allowed to accumulate to the point that it will damage or kill turf.

3. Leaf litter that is removed from turf will be either chopped and used on‐site, or transported to a plant debris recycling facility.

E. Aerating and De‐thatching

1. Aerate turf in traffic areas once a year. Aerate turf in low use areas every two years. Use equipment with hollow tines that removes a soil core. Topdress with ¼ inch fine compost. Overseed to fill in thin spots and to crowd out weeds.

2. Dethatch turf when thatch accumulates to a one‐half inch thickness by cutting with a vertical mower. Thatch shall be raked and either composted for use elsewhere, or transported to a greenwaste recycling facility.

3. Aeration and dethatching activities should be scheduled to coincide with active growth period of the turf species, avoid hot weather conditions, and avoid peak time of crabgrass and other weed seed germination.

F. Water Management

1. Turf shall be irrigated to provide adequate water to maintain an attractive, green, healthy turf, and moderate growth rate during its growing season, without stimulating excessive growth rates.

2. The water budget approach to irrigation scheduling shall be used to match turf need with water application and avoid over‐irrigation (see Section 3.4, Water Management)

3. Irrigation frequency under normal conditions should not exceed three times per week.


G. Soil and Nutrition Management

1. Contractor shall incorporate composted organic amendments into soil prior to planting annuals or replanting damaged turf or ground cover as per Sections 3.3.D, Soil and Plant Tissue Analysis and 3.3.E., Incorporate Organic Soil Amendments.

2. Fertilization shall be managed to provide moderate, not excessive, turf growth, and to avoid polluting surface and ground waters. Grasscycling reduces the fertilization requirement of turfgrass by 15‐20%.

3. Fertilizer applications are to be made on a prescription basis only when soil and/or plant tissue analyses identify specific deficiencies. For bidding purposes plan to apply approximately 3.5‐4.5 lbs. of actual nitrogen to cool season grasses per year in four applications. Include the available nitrogen from grasscycling and applying compost as a topdressing in the calculations of actual nitrogen.

4. Contractor shall select fertilizers that are released over a period of time, are predominantly organic and derived from natural sources, are produced locally, and will not pollute surface and ground water when properly used to provide primary nutrient needs of turf (see also Section 3.3 Soil and Nutrition Management ).

H. Pest Management (see also Section 3.4, Integrated Pest Management)

1. Contractor is responsible for monitoring turf to identify and assess pest problems, and for taking action to control pests that affect turf health and appearance when pest populations or damage exceed established thresholds.

2. Contractor shall employ integrated pest management procedures (see also Section 3.5, Integrated Pest Management).

3. Contractor shall select pest controls to provide adequate pest control without harming non‐target organisms, or negatively affect air and water quality and public health. Pest management shall rely first on cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods. Chemical controls may be applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will provide adequate pest control will be applied. Pesticides may not be applied on a prescheduled basis.

4. Contractor may not apply restricted chemicals that may harm water resources.

4.02 GROUND COVER


Ground covers shall be maintained to sustain an attractive, healthy, normal color for the species, and uniform density with no bare spots. Ground covers shall be kept free of trash and debris.





Ground cover shall be maintained using materials and methods that protect environmental quality and human health, conserve water and energy, minimize waste, and reuse and recycle materials to the extent possible.

C. Edging and Mowing

1. Ground covers shall be trimmed on a regular basis to maintain pavements and other features clear of vegetation.

2. The edge of woody ground covers (e.g. rosemary, cotoneaster) shall be maintained by pruning individual branches or stems to interior lateral branches a minimum of 6” and maximum of 12” from the edge of pavement.

3. The edge of herbaceous ground covers (e.g. hypericum) may be maintained using turf edging equipment.

4. When ground covers become excessively woody or develop thatch in excess of 4”, the Contractor shall prune the planting severely to rejuvenate it. For most woody ground covers, prune to approximately 6‐8” height. Herbaceous ground covers may be mowed at an appropriate height, generally 4‐6”. This treatment shall only be applied in the late winter/early spring when ET is low and regrowth will occur quickly.

5. Handling of plant debris

Contractor is encouraged to chip all vegetative materials use on site as mulch and/or compost and use as soil amendment.

If ground cover prunings must be removed from site, they must be kept free of other types of inorganic debris and transported to a local composting facility or transfer station that offers a separate processing (and often discounts) of plant debris for composting.

D. Mulching

1. Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 3” of coarse organic mulch at all times over bare soil areas that is not covered by ground cover. Mulch shall be applied so that it is below grade (curb, edging, etc.) by half an inch Some additional grading preparation and grading of areas adjacent to sidewalks or edging, etc. may be required to keep the finish grade of the mulch at an appropriate level. Mulch materials shall be chipped or shredded plant debris wood chips from pruning operations. When available, utilize chipped plant prunings generated on‐site.

E. Water Management

1. Ground cover shall be irrigated to provide adequate water to maintain an attractive, green, healthy plants, and moderate growth rate during its growing season.

2. The water budget approach to irrigation scheduling shall be used to match ground cover need with water application and avoid over‐irrigation (see Section 3.4, Water Management)


F. Soil and Nutrition management (see also Section 3.3, Soil & Nutrition Management)

1. Contractor shall incorporate composted organic amendments into soil prior to planting annuals or replanting damaged turf or ground cover as per Sections 3.3.D, Soil and Plant Tissue Analysis and 3.3.E., Incorporate Organic Soil Amendments.

2. Fertilization shall be managed to provide moderate, not excessive, growth, and avoid polluting surface and ground waters.

3. Fertilizer applications are to be made on a prescription basis only when soil and/or plant tissue analyses identify specific deficiencies. For bidding purposes plan to apply 1‐2 lbs. of actual nitrogen to ground cover areas in two applications annually.

4. Contractor shall select fertilizers that are released over a period of time, predominately are organic and derived from natural sources, are produced locally, and will not pollute surface and ground water when properly used to provide primary nutrient needs of the ground cover.

G. Pest management

1. Contractor is responsible for monitoring ground cover to identify, assess pest problems and taking action to control pests that affect ground cover health and appearance when pest populations or damage exceed established thresholds.


3. Contractor shall select pest controls to provide adequate pest control without harming non‐target organisms, or negatively affect air and water quality and public health. Pest management shall rely first on cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods. Chemical controls may be applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will provide adequate pest control will be applied. Pesticides may not applied on a prescheduled basis.

4. Contractor shall not apply restricted chemicals that may harm water resources.

4.03 SHRUBS


Shrubs shall be maintained to sustain an attractive and healthy plant that is characteristic for the species.


Shrubs shall be maintained using materials and methods that protect environmental quality and human health, conserve water and energy, minimize waste, and reuse and recycle materials to the extent possible.




C. Pruning

1. Selective pruning

a. Shrubs shall be pruned selectively only as necessary to enhance their natural shape.

b. Where plant size must be controlled because of inadequate space for the plant, prune to reduce size by cutting individual branches or stems to interior lateral branches at appropriate locations

2. Hedging and shearing

a. Existing hedges that have been maintained by shearing in the past and that do not have adequate space to grow to mature plant size can continue to be maintained by shearing. Suggest to Agency alternative plantings to these existing hedges that can be maintained in their natural shape for future renovations

b. For hedges that have not yet been maintained by shearing: shearing of plants into formal shapes shall be avoided as this destroys the natural form of the plant and generates excessive waste.

3) Plants having adequate space for development shall instead be selectively pruned on an as needed basis.

4) Where plant size must be controlled because of inadequate space for the plant, prune to reduce size by cutting individual branches or stems to interior lateral branches at appropriate locations. Contractor will notify Agency where hedges could be replaced with size‐appropriate plants to eliminate requirement for shearing.

3. Trimmings generated by pruning shall either be chipped and used as mulch on the site, or transported to a plant debris recycling facility.

D. Mulching

1. Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 3” of coarse organic mulch at all times over bare soil areas surrounding shrubs. Mulch shall be applied so that it is below grade (curb, edging, etc.) by half an inch Some additional grading preparation and grading of areas adjacent to sidewalks or edging, etc. may be required to keep the finish grade of the mulch at an appropriate level. Mulch materials shall be chipped or shredded composed green waste, wood chips from pruning operations, or chipped landscape prunings generated on‐site.

2. Sheet mulching shall be employed at installation, where possible.

E. Water Management

1. Shrubs shall be irrigated to provide adequate water to maintain an attractive, healthy plants, and moderate growth rate during their growing season.

2. The water budget approach to irrigation scheduling shall be used to match shrub need with water application and avoid over‐irrigation (see Section 3.4 Water Management)


F. Soil and Nutrition Management (see also Section 3.3, Soil & Nutrition Management)

1. Fertilization shall be managed to provide moderate, not excessive, growth, to and avoid polluting surface and ground waters.

2. Fertilizer applications are to be made on a prescription basis only when soil and/or plant tissue analyses identify specific deficiencies. Additional fertilization of mature shrubs maintained with mulch may not be necessary.

3. Contractor shall select fertilizers that are released over a period of time, predominantly are organic and derived from natural sources, are produced locally, and will not pollute surface and ground water when properly used to provide primary nutrient needs of the ground cover.

G. Pest Management

1. Contractor is responsible for monitoring shrubs to identify, assess pest problems and taking action to control pests that affect shrub health and appearance when pest populations or damage exceed established thresholds.


3. Contractor shall select pest controls to provide adequate pest control without harming non‐target organisms, or negatively affect air and water quality and public health. Pest management shall rely first on cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods. Chemical controls may be applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will provide adequate pest control will be applied. Pesticides may not be applied on a prescheduled basis.

4. Contractor shall not apply restricted chemicals that may harm water resources.

4.04 TREES


Trees shall be maintained to sustain an attractive, healthy and structurally stable plant that is characteristic for the species.


Trees shall be maintained using materials and methods that protect environmental quality and human health, conserve water and energy, minimize waste, and reuse and recycle materials to the extent possible.

C. Pruning

1. All tree pruning shall be performed only by trained, experienced personnel. An I.S.A. Certified Arborist or Tree Worker is to be present at all times during pruning. Arborist must have a State of Calif. Contractors License for Tree Service (C61‐D49).




2. All pruning shall be in accordance with the Best Management Practices for Pruning (International Society of Arboriculture, 2002) and adhere to the most recent editions of the American National Standard for Tree Care Operations (Z133.1) and Pruning (A300).

3. Young trees shall receive annual pruning for up to five years after planting by personnel trained in pruning to develop tree structure. The purpose of the pruning is to direct the tree into the appropriate form for the species and the site and to develop a strong branch structure. Trees with codominant trunks and multiple branch attachments shall be pruned to correct those defects over a period of several years.

4. Trees shall be pruned in the following manner:

a. Clear the crown of diseased, crossing, weak and dead branches. Trees shall not be routinely thinned.

b. Provide 14’ vertical clearance over roads, 8’ over walkways;

c. Reduce end weight on heavy, horizontal branches

d. Create a strong central trunk with lateral branches spaced vertically and horizontally.

e. Interior branches shall not be stripped out.

f. No more than 20% of live foliage shall be removed within the trees.

g. Trees shall not be climbed with spurs.

h. Branch removal or reduction cuts (thinning cuts) are to be employed rather than heading cuts. Trees shall not be topped or headed back.

i. No green palm fronds shall be removed above a horizontal line drawn across the base of the crown.

5. Schedule pruning to avoid time of bud break, flowering and leaf drop on live branches, and to avoid peak periods of insect and disease activity for pests to which the tree species is susceptible.

6. Pruning operations shall be conducted in a manner that does not damage surrounding and understory plants and structures.

D. Staking

1. Tree stakes, ties and guys shall be checked regularly to ensure trees are not being damaged. Adjust ties and stake as necessary to prevent girdling and wounding.

2. Tree stakes shall be removed within two years of planting. For trees unable to stand alone after two years, Contractor will shorten the stakes and lower the ties to 3‐4’ height. If after the third year the tree will not stand without a stake, Contractor will inspect to determine cause of instability, and make recommendations to Agency for corrective action.

3. If new ties are needed to secure tree to stake, use ties composed of recycled materials. The tie must be broad, have a smooth surface where it contacts the trunk, and provide


some elasticity. Wire covered with hose, tubing or other materials, and covered electrical wire are not acceptable materials.

E. Mulching

1. Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 3” of coarse organic mulch at all times over bare soil areas surrounding trees taking care not to place mulch against trunks. Mulch shall be applied so that it is below grade (curb, edging, etc.) by half an inch Some additional grading preparation and grading of areas adjacent to sidewalks or edging, etc. may be required to keep the finish grade of the mulch at an appropriate level. Mulch materials shall be chipped or shredded plant debris and/or wood chips from pruning operations. When available, utilize chipped landscape prunings generated on‐site.

2. Sheet mulching shall be employed at installation, where possible.

F. Water Management

1. Trees shall be irrigated to encourage deep root growth and to provide adequate water to maintain an attractive, healthy plants, and a moderate growth rate during their growing season.

2. The water budget approach to irrigation scheduling shall be used to match shrub need with water application and avoid over‐irrigation (see Section 3.4, Water Management)

G. Soil and Nutrition Management (see also Section 3.3, Soil & Nutrition Management)

1. Fertilization shall be managed to provide moderate, not excessive, growth, and to avoid polluting surface and ground waters.

2. Fertilizer applications are to be made on a prescription basis only when soil and/or plant tissue analyses identify specific deficiencies. Additional fertilization of mature trees may not be necessary.

3. Contractor shall select fertilizers that are released over a period of time, are predominantly organic and derived from natural sources, are produced locally, and will not pollute surface and ground water when properly used to provide the primary nutrient needs of the tree.

H. Pest management

1. Contractor is responsible for monitoring trees to identify, assess pest problems and taking action to control pests that affect tree health and appearance when pest populations or damage exceed established thresholds.


3. Contractor shall select pest controls to provide adequate pest control without harming non‐target organisms, or negatively affect air and water quality and public health. Pest management shall rely first on cultural, mechanical, physical, and biological control methods. Chemical controls may be applied only when monitoring indicates that preventative and non‐chemical methods are not keeping pests below acceptable levels. When pesticides are required, the least toxic and the least persistent pesticide that will




provide adequate pest control will be applied. Pesticides may not applied on a prescheduled basis.

4. Contractor may not apply restricted chemicals that may harm water resources.

4.05 BIOSWALES AND BIORENTION AREAS

A. Standards for Health and Appearance and Function

Bioswales and biorention areas remove pollutants from the stormwater by filtering runoff slowly through an active layer of soil. They shall be maintained to ensure that flow is not obstructed, erosion is prevented and they continue to be effective without causing flooding or harboring vectors and in accordance with the site’s Stormwater Control Plan’s Operation and Maintenance Plan, if available.


Bioswales depend on soils that are biologically active and held together by plant roots. They shall be maintained using materials and methods that support this biological activity, protect environmental quality and human health, conserve water and energy, minimize waste, and reuse and recycle materials to the extent possible.

C. Monitoring and inspection

1. Inspect inlets for channels and exposure of soils and report to the Agency if evidence of erosion is found. Examine rock or other material and report to the Agency if it requires replacement.

2. Inspect inlets and slopes for instability, erosion or obstructions. Report indications of problems to Agency.

3. Observe soil at the bottom of the swale for uniform infiltration. Confirm that irrigation is adequate but not excessive. Report water that does not drain within 48 hours of a storm.

4. Confirm that check dams and flow spreaders are in place and level. Report problems to Agency.

D. Sediment control

1. Clear minor obstructions and inspect for accumulation of sediment. Contractor shall remove accumulated sediment in bioswales by hand and around catch basins and culverts as necessary to maintain adequate flow.

E. Vegetation management

Examine vegetation to ensure that it is healthy, adequately but not overwatered, and dense enough to provide filtering. Remove debris. Prune large trees and shrubs as per previous Sections 4.4, Shrubs and 4.5 Trees. Weeds and invasive plant species shall be controlled as described in 3.5.C. Weed Management. Refer to www.cal‐ipc.org for list of invasive species


F. Mowing

Grassy swales shall be mowed as needed to maintain adequate water flow. For bidding purposes assume 4 mowings per year. Remove no more than 1/3 of the length of the leaf blade. Clippings should be collected and either used elsewhere on‐site or transported to a plant debris reycling facility.

G. Mosquito Abatement

Areas of seasonal water collection that do not drain within 48 hours shall either be filled with gravel/cobble or treated monthly with Bt (See Section 3.5.B.3, Controls)

4.6 HARDSCAPE

A. Debris removal and clean‐up

Contractor shall keep all hardscape areas, walkways, building entries and exits free from trash and debris.

B. Surface cleaning

Contractor will clean hard surfaces as needed to remove accumulation of sediment, dirt, or other materials that distracts from the visual impact of the area or creates a safety hazard. Cleaning methods must be consistent with the Bay Area Stormwater Management Agencies Association. (BASMAA) criteria (listed below in Section 4.9.E., BASMAA Certification).

C. Root interference

Potential root damage to hardscapes shall be reported to Agency. Corrective action will be determined and directed as an extra service.

D. Pervious paving

Contractor shall clean the surface of pervious paving to remove fine debris and dirt as needed to maintain permeability (approximately four times per year). Pavement may be cleaned with street sweepers equipped with vacuums, water, and brushes, followed by high‐pressure hosing of surface. If necessary, replace displaced aggregate fill with clean gravel. Cleaning methods must be consistent with the Bay Area Stormwater Management Agencies Association. (BASMAA) criteria (listed below in section 4.9.E., BASMAA Certification).

E. BASMAA Certification

Pollution Prevention Training & Certification Program For Surface Cleaners issued by the Bay Area StormWater Management Agencies Association (BASMAA) is required to perform surface cleaning work. BASMAA certification number: _________________. http://www.basmaa.org/recognition/ All work should conform to BASMAA standards. BASMAA standards encourage the use of dry cleaning methods over wet such as the use of absorbing materials for oils and sweeping. It discourages the use of any soaps or solvents. It encourages directing wash water into the landscape or collection of waste water for disposal into a sanitary sewer instead of a storm drain. See their website for a thorough list of criteria.




SECTION 5: DEFINITIONS

Antimicrobial agent – Any substance or mixture of substances intended for inhibiting the growth of or destroying any bacteria, fungi pathogenic to human and other animals, or viruses declared to be pests under Section 12754.5 of the California Food and Agricultural Code, except slime control agents. Antimicrobial agents include, but are not limited to, disinfectants, sanitizers, bacteriostats, sterilizers, fungicides and fungistats.

Biodiesel – A fuel produced through a process in which organically‐derived oils such as soybean or vegetable oil are combined with alcohol.

Bioswale ‐ Channel constructed to improve the water quality of runoff, usually while also conveying it, through filtering by vegetation and other mechanisms that capture and hold water pollutants.

Blanket – Mat of organic, biodegradable materials such as coir fibers, straw or curled wood fiber, on or between photodegradable polypropylene or degradable natural fiber netting. The blanket is placed on the soil surface to protect from surface erosion.

Compost Berm – An erosion control device composed of linear mounds of compost placed along a slope to slow water movement and retain sediment.

Evaportranspiration (ET) – The combined loss of water from a given area, and during a specified period of time, by evaporation from the soil surface and by transpiration from plants.

Grasscycling – A turf management technique in which turf is mown frequently and clippings are left on the turf to return nutrients to the soil, thereby reducing fertilizer requirements by as much as 50%.

Hardscape – The hard‐surface components of the landscape such as sidewalks, pavements, non‐living features.

Hydrozone – A portion of a landscaped area having plants with similar water needs that are served by one irrigation valve or set of valves with the same schedule.

I.S.A. – International Society of Arboriculture, www.isa‐arbor.com

Integrated Pest Management – A holistic approach to managing insects, plant disease, weeds and other pests so that their populations do not exceed a tolerable level by fostering an environment favorable for plants and other beneficial organisms and unfavorable for pests. If pest problems arise a variety of control techniques are considered, with least toxic pesticides being applied as a last resort.

Pesticide – As defined in Section 12753 of the California food and Agricultural Code, a pesticide includes any of the following: (a) Any spray adjuvant. (b) Any substance, or mixture of substances which is intended to be used for defoliating plants, regulating plant growth, or for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, which may infest or be detrimental to vegetation, man, animals, or households, or be present in any agricultural or nonagricultural environment whatsoever. Antimicrobial agents are excluded from the definition of pesticide.

“Toxicity Category I Pesticide Product” means any pesticide product that meets United States Environmental Protection Agency criteria for Toxicity Category I under Section 156.10 of Part 156 of Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations.

“Toxicity Category II Pesticide Product” means any pesticide product that meets United States Environmental Protection Agency criteria for Toxicity Category II under Section 156.10 of Part 156 of Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations.


Sheet Mulching ‐ A layered system of non‐plastic weed barrier (e.g. recycled cardboard, newspaper) overlain by mulch that is used for soil improvement and weed control

Sock – Sleeve filled with mulch, straw, or other organic, biodegradable material to create long tube placed along a slope to slow water movement and retain sediment.

Tube – See sock.

Wattle – See sock.

End of Division


January 17, 2011 Volume 2: Division 33, Utilities, Page: 1

DIVISION 33 ‐‐ UTILITIES

SECTION 33 1116 ‐ SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes pipe and fittings for site water line including domestic water line, fire water line, and valves and fire hydrants.




1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASME B16.18 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) ‐ Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

2. ASME B16.22 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) ‐ Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

3. ASTM B88 ‐ Seamless Copper Water Tube.

4. ASTM D1785 ‐ Poly (VinylChloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.

5. ASTM D2241 ‐ Poly (VinylChloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe(SDR‐PR).

6. ASTM D2466 ‐ Poly (VinylChloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

7. ASTM D2855 ‐ Making Solvent‐Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

8. ASTM D3139 ‐ Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

9. ASTM D3035 ‐ Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR‐PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.

10. AWS A5.8 (American Welding Society) ‐ Brazing Filler Metal.

11. AWWA C104 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Cement‐Mortar Lining for Ductile‐Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.

12. AWWA C105(American Water Works Association) ‐ Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other liquids.

13. AWWA C111 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Rubber‐ Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Grey‐Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

14. AWWA C151 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Ductile‐Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand‐Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.

Volume 2: Division 33, Utilities, Page: 2 January 17, 2011

15. AWWA C500 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Gate Valves, 3 through 48 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems.

16. AWWA C502 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants.

17. AWWA C504 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves.

18. AWWA C508 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Swing‐Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in through 24 in NPS.

19. AWWA C509 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Resilient Seated Gate Valves 3 in through 12 in NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems.

20. AWWA C600 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Installation of Ductile‐Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances.

21. AWWA C606 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints.

22. AWWA C900 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 12 inch, for Water.

23. AWWA C901 (American Water Works Association) ‐ Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings, 1/2 inch through 3 inch, for Water

24. UL 246 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) ‐ Hydrants for Fire ‐ Protection Service.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures.

2. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.

3. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.



2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations.

3. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.


1. Perform Work in accordance with the local water supply utility and local fire department.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.




1. Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

2. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPE

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151:

1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.

2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.

2. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed:

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper.

2. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.

3. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, ASTM D2241, SDR‐26 for 160 psig pressure rating, SDR‐41 for 100 psig rating, SDR‐21 for 200 psig rating:

1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.

3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Service" in large letters.

4. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 Class 150:

1. Fittings: AWWA C111, cast iron.

2. Joints: ASTM D3139 compression gasket ring.


5. Polyethylene Pipe: AWWA C901, ASTM D3035, for 160 psig pressure rating:

1. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded or fabricated.

2. Joints: Compression.


2.2 GATE VALVES ‐ UP TO 3 INCHES

1. Brass or Bronze body, non‐rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, IPS ends, with control rod, extension box, and valve key.


2.3 GATE VALVES ‐ 3 INCHES AND OVER

1. AWWA C500, Iron body, bronze trim, non‐rising stem with square nut, single wedge, flanged or mechanical joint ends, control rod, extension box, and valve key.

2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES ‐ FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES

1. AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES ‐ FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES

1. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, infinite position lever handle.

2.6 HYDRANT

1. Hydrant: Type as required by utility company and local fire department.

2.7 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

1. Bedding: Shall be sand or gravel.

2. Cover: Shall be sand or gravel.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

1. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 32 13 13.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements: Coordination.

2. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

2. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

3. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 BEDDING

1. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 for Work of this Section.

2. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at any change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide square footage of thrust restraining bearing on subsoil, as required by AWWA Standards.



3. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent relative compaction.

4. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact to 95 percent relative compaction.

5. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density.

3.4 INSTALLATION ‐ PIPE

1. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with the provisions of the Uniform Plumbing Code and local health codes.

2. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 2 inches.

3. Route pipe in straight line.

4. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

5. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 31 00.

6. Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe main.

7. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover.

8. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. Buried 6 inches above pipe line.

9. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13.

3.5 INSTALLATION ‐ VALVES AND HYDRANTS

1. Set valves on solid bearing.

2. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

3. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway.

4. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground.

3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

1. Flush and disinfect system in accordance with Section 33 31 00.

3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

1. Provide water service to utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by‐pass valves as required by local utility company.



Section 23 05 93 ‐ Starting of Systems: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.


2. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest.

SECTION 33 3000 ‐ SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding; connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers, or on‐site point of connection.

2. Related Sections

1. Section 31 23 00 ‐ Excavation.



4. Section 33 40 00 ‐ Storm Drainage Utilities.



1.2 REFERENCES

1. ANSI/ASTM A74 ‐ Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

2. ANSI/ASTM C443 ‐ Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

3. ANSI/ASTM D2321 ‐ Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe.

4. ANSI/ASTM D2729 ‐ Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

5. ANSI/ASTM D2751 ‐ Acrylonitrile‐Butadiene‐Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

6. ANSI/ASTM D3033 ‐ Type PSP Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

7. ANSI/ASTM D3034 ‐ Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

8. ASTM A746 ‐ Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe.

9. ASTM C564 ‐ Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

10. ASTM D1785 ‐ Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.



2. Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and fittings.

3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.




2. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations.


1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

1. Verify that field measurements and elevations are as indicated.

1.7 COORDINATION


2. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility services, or on‐site connection point, and trenching.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS

1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A74, Service type, inside nominal diameter of 4 to 8 inches, bell and spigot end.

2. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices.

3. Ductile Iron Pipe: ASTM A746, Service type, inside nominal diameter of 4 to 8 inches, bell and spigot end.

4. Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Device: ANSI A21.11, rubber gasket joint devices.

5. Plastic Pipe: ANSI/ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) SDR‐26 material; inside nominal diameter of 4 to 8 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.

6. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 4 to 8 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES

1. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.


2.3 CLEANOUTS

1. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction:

1. Lid Design: Open checkerboard grill, labeled "Sewer."

2. Base Pad: Cast‐In‐Place concrete of type specified in Section 03 30 00, leveled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections.

2.4 BEDDING MATERIALS

1. Bedding: Fill Type as specified in Section 31 23 23.13.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


2. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Correct over excavation with compacted bedding material.

2. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 BEDDING

1. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 for Work of this section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

2. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches, compacted depth, compact to 95 percent relative compaction.

3. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.


1. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321. Seal joints watertight.

2. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3. Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches; compacted to 95 percent relative compaction.

4. Refer to Section 31 23 16.13 for trenching requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

5. Refer to Section 33 49 13 for manhole requirements.



3.5 INSTALLATION ‐ CLEANOUTS

1. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

2. Form and place Cast‐In‐place Concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections.

3. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.

4. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.



2. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding.

3. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557.

4. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED INSTALLATION

1. Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished installation.

2. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

SECTION 33 3100 ‐ DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes disinfection of potable water distribution system; and testing and reporting results.

2. Related Sections: a. Section 33 11 16 – Site Water Utility Distribution Piping.

1.2 REFERENCES

1. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) B300 ‐ Standard for Hypochlorites.

2. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) B301 ‐ Standard for Liquid Chlorine.

3. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) B302 ‐ Standard for Ammonium Sulfate.

4. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) B303 ‐ Standard for Sodium Chlorite.

5. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) C600 ‐ Installation of Ductile‐Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.


6. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) C651 ‐ Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Section 01 33 00 ‐ Submittal Procedures.

2. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.

3. Procedures, Chemicals, and Treatment Levels: Submit procedures, proposed chemicals, and treatment levels for review.

4. Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements.


1. Section 01 70 00 ‐ Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

2. Project Record Documents:

3. Disinfection Report: a. Type and form of disinfectant used. b. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. c. Test locations. d. Name of person collecting samples. e. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each

outlet tested. f. Date and time of flushing start and completion. g. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.

4. Bacteriological Report: a. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone

number. b. Time and date of water sample collection. c. Name of person collecting samples. d. Test locations. e. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. f. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. g. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of local

municipality.


1. Perform Work in accordance with AWWA C651.


3. Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

4. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing and examining potable water systems, certified and approved by the State of California.

5. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS

1. Chemicals: As directed by local municipality.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements: Coordination.

2. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested.

3. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with start‐up, water pressure testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems.

3.2 EXECUTION

1. Provide and attach required equipment to perform the Work of this section.

2. Introduce treatment into piping system.

3. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

4. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal or domestic water.

5. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection.

6. Pressure test system to 200 psi. Repair leaks and re‐test. a. After completion of the pipeline installation, including backfill, but prior to final

connection to the existing system, conduct, in the presence of the Architect/Engineer, concurrent hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests in accordance with AWWA C600.

b. Provide all equipment required to perform the leakage and hydrostatic pressure tests. c. The test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum static

pressure, whichever is greater. d. The hydrostatic test shall be at least a two‐hour duration. e. No pipeline installation will be approved if the pressure varies by more than 5 psi during

the duration of the hydrostatic pressure test. f. Before applying the test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the section of

piping under test. Corporation cocks shall be installed so that the air can be expelled as the pipeline is being filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the tests, the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged.

g. Slowly bring the piping to the test pressure and allow the system to stabilize prior to conducting the leakage test. Valves shall not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above the rated pressure.

h. All exposed piping, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be examined carefully during the hydrostatic pressure test. Any damage or defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, or joints that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material at no cost to the Owner, and test shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

i. No pipeline installation will be approved if the leakage is greater than that determined


by the following formula:

L = SD\/ˉˉP

133,200

L = the allowable, in gallons per hour

S = the length of pipe tested, in inches

D = the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches

p = the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch (gauge)

j. If leakage exceeds the rate as determined in Paragraph 9 above, locate the source and make repairs as necessary to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.


1. Section 01 45 00 ‐ Quality Control.

2. Disinfection, Flushing, and Sampling: a. Disinfect the pipeline installation in accordance with AWWA C651, except that liquid

chlorine shall not be used. b. Upon completion of the retention period required for disinfection, flush the pipeline

until the chlorine concentration of water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the existing system or is acceptable for domestic use.

c. Dispose of the chlorinated water in conformance with all Federal, State and Municipal laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations. If there is any possibility that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment, then a neutralizing chemical shall be applied to the chlorinated water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining in the water.

d. After final flushing and before the pipeline is connected to the existing system, or placed in service, the Contractor shall employ an approved independent testing laboratory to sample, test and certify the water for conformance with the purity standards of the local municipality, the United States Environmental Protection Agency, and the Federal Clean Water Act Health Standards. The Architect/Engineer shall be furnished with a copy of such certification by the testing laboratory, and no installation will be approved without such certification.

SECTION 33 4000 ‐ STORM DRAINAGE UTILTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes gravity site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and accessories, and bedding; connection of drainage system to municipal sewers and on‐site points of connection; and catch basins, area drains, and cleanouts.




1. Section 31 23 00 ‐ Excavation.



4. Section 33 30 00 ‐ Sanitary Sewerage Utilities.



1.2 REFERENCES

1. AASHTO M36 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials) ‐ Metallic (Zinc or Aluminum) Coated Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains.

2. ASTM A74 ‐ Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

3. ASTM C14 ‐ Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.

4. ASTM C76 ‐ Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.

5. ASTM C425 ‐ Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings.

6. ASTM C443 ‐ Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

7. ASTM C564 ‐ Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

8. ASTM D2729 ‐ Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

9. ASTM D2751 ‐ Acrylonitrile‐Butadiene‐Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

10. ASTM D3033 ‐ Type PSP Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

11. ASTM D3034 ‐ Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


2. Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe, pipe accessories, and fittings.

3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures required to install Products specified.





2. Project Record Documents:

1. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations.


3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.

1.5 COORDINATION

1. Section 01 50 00 ‐ Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching, connection to foundation drainage system, municipal sewer utility service, and on‐site points of connection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

1. Sewer Pipe Materials:

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, Service type, inside nominal diameter of 4 to 12 inches, bell and spigot end.

2. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices.

3. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14, Class 3; unreinforced; inside nominal diameter of 10 inches, bell and spigot end joints.

4. Concrete Pipe Joint Devices: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint.

5. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, Class III or IV; inside nominal diameter of 12 to 60 inches, bell and spigot end joints.

6. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint.

7. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2751, SDR 26, Acrylonitrile‐Butadiene‐Styrene (ABS) material; inside nominal diameter of 4 to 24 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.

8. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) SDR‐26 material; inside nominal diameter of 4 to 24 inches, bell and spigot style rubber ring sealed gasket joint.

9. Corrugated Steel Pipe: AASHTO M36; nominal diameter of 12 to 60 inches, end joints; helical lock seam; coated inside and out with 0.050 inch thick bituminous coating.

10. Corrugated Steel Pipe Coupling Bands: Galvanized steel, 0.052 inches thick x 10 inches wide; connected with two neoprene "O" ring gaskets and two galvanized steel bolts.



2.2 ACCESSORIES

1. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

2. Grout: Specified in Section 03 30 00.

2.3 CATCH BASINS AND PLANT AREA DRAINS

1. As specified on the drawings.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

1. As specified on the drawings.

2.5 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS

1. Bedding: Fill as specified in the project Soils Report.

2. Cover: Fill as specified in the project Soils Report.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


2. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with bedding material.

2. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 BEDDING

1. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 for work of this Section. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.

2. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth.

3. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.


1. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D2321. Seal joints watertight.

2. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.


3. Install trench fill at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches, compact to 95 percent.

4. Refer to Section 31 23 23.13 for backfilling and compacting requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

5. Refer to Section 33 49 13 for manhole requirements.

3.5 INSTALLATION ‐ CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS

1. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

2. Form and place Cast‐In‐Place Concrete base pad, with provision for storm sewer pipe end sections.

3. Level top surface of base pad; sleeve concrete shaft sections to receive storm sewer pipe sections.

4. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.

5. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.


1. Section 01 45 23 ‐ Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

2. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe.

3. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.

4. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to owner.


1. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

1. Take care not to damage or displace installed pipe and joints during construction of pipe supports, backfilling, testing, and other operations.

2. Where pipe is damaged or displaced, take remedial measures as directed by the Architect/Engineer including, but not limited to, retesting of joints, relaying pipe or replacing pipe. Provide remedial measures at no additional cost to the Owner.

SECTION 33 4913 ‐ STORM DRAINAGE MANHOLE FRAMES & COVERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section Includes:

1. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue‐and‐groove joints, covers, anchorage, and accessories.






3. Section 03 30 00 ‐ Cast‐In‐Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

1. ACI (American Concrete Institute) 318 ‐ Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

2. ASTM A48 ‐ Gray Iron Castings.

3. ASTM A536 ‐ Ductile Iron Castings.

4. ASTM C39 ‐ Test Method for Compressive Strength of cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

5. ASTM C478 ‐ Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

6. ASTM C923 ‐ Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.


1. Equivalent strength shall be based on structural design of reinforced concrete as outlined in ACI 318.

2. Design of lifting devices for precast structures shall conform to ASTM C 913.

3. Design of joints for precast structures shall conform to ASTM C 913.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


2. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, piping, and sizes and elevations of penetrations.

3. Product Data: Submit manhole covers, component construction, features, configuration, and dimensions.


1. Perform Work in accordance with local municipality Public Work's standard.


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

2. Comply with precast concrete manufacturer’s instructions for unloading, storing and moving precast manholes and drainage structures.


3. Store precast concrete manholes and drainage structures to prevent damage to the Owner’s property or other public or private property, and any property so damaged shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

4. Clearly mark each precast structure by indentation or waterproof paint to indicate the date of manufacture, manufacturer and identifying symbols and/or numbers shown on the Contract Drawings to indicate its intended use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANHOLES, FRAMES, AND COVERS

1. As specified by the local municipality.

2.2 COMPONENTS


2.3 CONFIGURATION


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Section 01 30 00 ‐ Administrative Requirements: Coordination and Project Conditions.

2. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.

3. Verify that built‐in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.

4. Verify excavation for manholes is correct.

3.2 PREPARATION

1. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections.

2. Do not install structures under site conditions known to result in loads heavier than that for which the structure was designed.

3. Inspect precast concrete structures immediately prior to placement in the excavation to verify that they are internally clean and free from damage. Remove damaged units from the construction site and replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 INSTALLATION

1. Excavation and Backfill:

1. Excavate for manholes and drainage structures in accordance with Section 31 23 00 in the location and to depth shown. Provide clearance around the sidewalls of the structure as required for construction.

2. If groundwater is encountered, prevent accumulation of water in excavations. Place



manholes or drainage structures in a dry trench.

3. Where the possibility exists of a watertight structure becoming buoyant in a flooded excavation, take necessary steps to avoid flotation of the structure.

2. Place base pad, trowel top surface level.

3. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad.

4. Backfill excavations for manholes and drainage structures in accordance with Section 31 23 00.

5. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations.

6. Cut and fit for pipe.

7. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required.

8. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.

9. Coordinate with other sections of Work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

3.4 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURE INSTALLATION

1. To ensure safety, lift precast structures at the lifting points designated by the manufacturer.

2. When lowering manholes and drainage structures into the excavations and joining pipe to the units, take precautions to ensure that the interior of the pipeline and structure remains clean.

3. Set precast structures so that they firmly and fully bear on crushed stone bedding, compacted in accordance with the provisions of Sections 31 23 00 and 31 23 23.13, or on other support system shown on the Contract Drawings.

4. Assemble multi‐section structures by lowering each section into the excavation. Lower, set level, and firmly position the base section before placing additional sections.

5. Ensure joint integrity by removing all foreign materials from joint surfaces and verifying that sealing materials are placed properly. Avoid misalignment by using guide devices affixed to the lower section.

6. Joint sealing materials may be installed at the site or at the manufacturer’s plant.

7. Verify that manholes and drainage structures installed satisfy required alignment and grade.

8. Remove knockouts or cut structure to receive piping so as not to create openings more than that required to receive pipe. Fill annular space with mortar.

9. Cut pipe to finish flush with interior of structure.

10. Shape inverts through manhole as shown on the Contract Drawings.


1. Section 01 45 00 ‐ Quality Control: Testing and inspection services.


2. Field tests will be used to evaluate and approve cast‐in‐place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

3. Vertical Adjustment of Existing Manhole and Drainage Structures:

1. Where required, adjust the top elevation of existing manholes and drainage structures to suit finished grades shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Reset existing frames, grates and covers, carefully removed, cleaned of all mortar fragments, to the required elevation in accordance with the requirements specified for installation of castings.

3. Remove the concrete so as not to damage the existing vertical reinforcing bars when removal of an existing concrete wall is required. The vertical bars shall be cleaned of all concrete and bent into the new concrete top slab or spliced to required vertical reinforcement, as shown on the Contract Drawings.

4. Clean and apply sand‐cement bonding compound on all existing concrete surfaces to receive cast‐in‐place concrete. Sand‐cement bonding compound and its application shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

END OF VOLUME 2 ‐SPECIFICATIONS